Bdcmanual

1086 384/384 / 2351
PC-BDC User's Manual

1-July-14
Copyright 2014 Computational Dynamics Ltd., CD-adapco
1
An "F1 help entry" is a section or paragraph that is displayed using Acrobat Reader when the [F1] key is pressed while that parameter is
selected in the PC-BDC editors or design sheet. A small number of parameters (e.g., DegCW) may have two entries, because they appear both
in the input section and the output section. Only one of these will be coloured; the other will appear simply in boldface.
Typefaces and conventions used in SPEED manuals
Item Format Example or explanation
Main text Nimrod 10 pt Brushless PM motor
Special terms Bold Static design, outline editor,
GoFER
Parameters Bold Slots, Poles, Tshaft
Parameters Bold At the start of each "F1 help entry",
the parameter name is coloured.
1
Menu items Arial 10pt bold Menu items, functions, or items in
dialog boxes. For example, Analysis |
Static design.
Parameter values Nimrod 10 pt BLV, ToothFlux
Emphasis Italic or underline
Short-cut keys [Bold] [Ctrl+S]
Design sheet extracts
Courier New Design sheet extracts
Equations; parameters where
the theory is being emphasized
Nimrod 10pt; Synchronous inductances L
d
, L
q
;
torque T, current i. See [1].
Abbreviations
E degrees
AWG Brown & Sharpe wire gage (U.S. spelling)
MWG, SWG Metric wire gauge; standard wire gauge
d,q Direct and quadrature axes
e.g. exempli gratia, "for example"
EMDS Electric Machine Design using SPEED and Motor-CAD (book), Ref. [30]
EMF Electro-motive force (volts)
GB The Green Book; see the References section, p. 272.
GDF Geometry Description Format. A general-purpose text file used for
transferring geometric and other data between SPEED programs and PC-
FEA and other finite-element programs.
GoFER lit. "Go to Finite-Elements and Return". The finite-element link. This acronym
emphasizes the particular feature of SPEEDs finite-element links, in that they
automate the entire process of a range of specific finite-element calculations
and return data to the motor design program.
GoTAR lit. "Go to Thermal Analysis and Return". The link to Motor-CAD thermal
analysis software.
MMF Magneto-motive force (amperes)
i.e. id est, "that is"
IPM Interior permanent-magnet motor
lit. "literally"
2Q Two transistors conducting
3Q Three transistors conducting
p.u. Per-unit
PWM Pulse-width modulation
q.v. quod vide, lit. "which see": in other words, "go and look that up too"
RMS Root-mean-square
NSP Nonsalient-pole
SEM Speeds Electric Machines, Ref [1]
SP Salient-pole
SSP Sinewave salient-pole
Ted Template editor
Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Machineandcontrollertypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Parametersandperformancecalculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Drivetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Generatingandrectifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.6 Organization,programcontrolsandadjustmentfactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2. PC-BDCsFunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.1 Data|Outlineeditor[Ctrl+1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.2 Data|Templateeditor,Ted[Ctrl+3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3 Data|Windingeditor[Ctrl+W] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.4 Data|Externaldatafiles[Ctrl+E] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.5 Analysis|Staticdesign[Ctrl+2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.6 Analysis|Dynamicdesign[Ctrl+D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.7 Autosearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.8 Analysis|Torque/Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.9 Analysis|Line-start(DOLstarting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.10 Analysis|Line-start(loadstep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.11 Analysis|Short-circuit(analytical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.12 Analysis|Ranging[Ctrl+B] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.13 Results|Designsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.14 Results|Customdesignsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.15 Results|Simulationgraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.16 Results|Harmonicanalysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.17 Results|Phasordiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.18 Results|Bsquared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.19 Results|Dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.20 Tools|GoFER(Finite-elementlink) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.21 Tools|FEResults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.22 Tools|ExportData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.23 Tools|Motor-CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.24 Tools|Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.25 Tools|kTCalculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.26 Tools|Machinecharacteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.27 D
2
Lcalculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.28 CalculatePCSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3. Referencesection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.1 Inputparameters(outlineeditor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2 Inputparameters(templateeditor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.3 Outputparameters(designsheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
3.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
3.5 Referencediagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
3.6 Recommendedsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4. Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
PC-BDC 9.04 1. Introduction Page 1
Fig. 1 Design loop process
1 Introduction
1.1 General
Function
PC-BDC is intended for designing and calculating brushless permanent-magnet motors, drives, and
generators and line-start PM motors. It is based on the theory of the brushless permanent-magnet
machine and the classical synchronous machine, with several extensions developed by the SPEED
Laboratory and our associates. The theory behind PC-BDC can be found in SPEEDs Electric Machines
[1] and other publications of the SPEED Laboratory.
Intended use of PC-BDC
The best use of PC-BDC is in:
1. studying synchronous and brushless PM machines and their control;
2. "sizing" or preliminary design; and
3. performing design calculations.
Design with PC-BDC is interactive and fast. However, PC-BDC does not produce optimized designs by
itself. The user produces them, using PC-BDC as a calculating tool rather like a specialised spreadsheet
program. PC-BDC improves the productivity of the design engineer, but it does not do his/her job. Like
all SPEED software, PC-BDC is intended for experienced engineers with appropriate qualifications in
electrical engineering and electric machine design. It requires vigilant use and constant checking
against test data, and will not give reliable results if used on a button-pressing basis.
How do I use PC-BDC ?
Starting from a specification, the machine is designed by repeating a cut-and-try process of assigning
parameters to a theoretical model and calculating the performance; see Fig. 1.
The process is repeated until the objectives are achieved. To make it fast and efficient, PC-BDC has an
outline editor for modifying the cross-section and other machine dimensions. There is a template
editor for electrical parameters, drive parameters, and several other inputs. A winding editor is
included for displaying the winding layout. PC-BDC also includes material databases for steels and
magnets. The performance calculation or analysis is either at a single operating point, or over a range.
It includes a time-stepping model of the drive, so that current and torque waveforms can be obtained.
There is a design sheet containing a wide range of performance parameters including the dimensions,
and details of the winding and the drive. All this data is presented in the successful format used for
many years in the SPEED Laboratory.
Page 2 1. Introduction PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 2 Design loop process with finite-elements, scripting, and database
What the performance calculation includes
The performance calculation includes a wide range of electrical and electromagnetic aspects: for
example, torque, efficiency, currents, and waveforms of current, EMF, and torque. Electrical parameters
such as winding parameters with resistances and inductances are presented in detail. Dimensional and
mechanical parameters include weights and inertias, and a comprehensive set of thermal calculations
is included. Magnetic flux-densities are given in various parts of the machine, together with a detailed
breakdown of losses. The drive (electronic control) is modelled in some detail, and peak, mean and RMS
currents are calculated in the main power transistors and diodes for a range of different drive circuits
and control strategies.
Scripting
The scripting language can be used to automate many processes, or to create new algorithms or
processes not already embedded in the program. It can also be used to interface PC-BDC to other
software. Fig. 2 shows how scripting can be used to automate the variation of design parameters and the
successive execution of PC-BDC. (For studying the effect of simple parameter variations over a specified
range of values, the simpler internal ranging function can be used within PC-BDC).
Finite-element analysis
PC-BDC has an efficient link to the finite-element program PC-FEA. The link is made via the GoFER,
(go to finite-elements and return) which uses SPEED's GDF editor and can link other finite-element
programs such as Vector Fields and J-MAG. The PC-FEA link is exceptionally fast and convenient. It
also has many ways to return data to PC-BDC for comparison and calibration. Fig. 2 shows the finite-
element calculation supporting the performance calculation. As well as the external finite-element link,
PC-BDC has an embedded finite-element solver using PC-FEA for certain calculations.
Accuracy
The strongest point of PC-BDC is its speed and convenience in helping the engineer determine the size,
control requirements, and performance over a wide range of parameters. But it takes several years to
build up a reliable understanding of the overall accuracy of a program such as PC-BDC, so please check
your results and regard them with a healthy scepticism. The main weaknesses are probably in the
traditional areas of difficulty in machine analysiscalculation of the effects of saturation and effects
associated with complex flux-paths; high-frequency effects; and core losses (especially with PWM drives).
1.2 Machine and controller types
PC-BDC can model machines with the following different rotor types:
1. Radially magnetized surface-magnet
2. Parallel magnetized surface-magnet
3. Breadloaf
4. Spoke type
5. Exterior-rotor radially magnetized, including tapered-gap motors
6. Exterior-rotor parallel magnetized
7. Interior permanent magnet (IPM) including synchronous reluctance machines
8. Inset magnet/consequent-pole
9. Inset magnet/hybrid reluctance
10. Full ring magnets
11. Line-start rotors with cage windings (polyphase and single-phase)
A wide variety of designs can be produced with these basic types, by adjusting the dimensions. In
addition, the Embed parameter extends the number of different rotor types by defining different shapes
of punched lamination.
On the stator, ten different types of stator slot are supported, each capable of a wide range of variation
in size and shape.
Examples of all the different types of rotors and stator slots are shown in the reference figures.
The drive (i.e., the power electronic controller) can be either squarewave or sinewave; or the motor can
be operated from a fixed-frequency/fixed-voltage AC source. Generator calculations are supported with
AC or rectifier load; or with a current-regulated 4-quadrant transistor inverter.
Split-phase motors
Definition. A "split-phase" motor is fed from a single-phase AC supply. Internally the windings are split
into two phases, a main winding and an auxiliary winding. The auxiliary winding is connected in series
with a capacitor (C_run/C_start). In earlier versions of PC-BDC, only line-start motors could have the
split-phase connection. Now, however, any motor in PC-BDC can have the split-phase connection. If
there is no rotor cage, the motor will not have any asynchronous torque and will not be self-starting, but
it can still operate at synchronous speed as a motor or generator. Pure single-phase motors (with only
a main winding) are defined as split-phase motors with AuxSpec = SinglePh. The method of calculation
is determined by SymmCpts, and the only available Drive is AC Volt. See also p. 12.
2
"GoFER" is an acronym for "go to finite-elements and return". The emphasis in SPEED software is to automate routine finite-element
calculations as far as possible, and to return useful data to the design program.
1.3 Parameters and performance calculations
Performance calculations in PC-BDC are based on the appropriate equivalent circuit model, using
parameters that are automatically calculated from the geometry, winding data, and material data.
However, there are several ways to force or modify values of the equivalent-circuit parameters.
The main performance calculations are selected from the Analysis menu and include steady-state
analysis, the torque/speed curve, thermal analysis, and ranging.
This section is written mainly for permanent-magnet machines (including synchronous reluctance
machines).
Magnetic field calculations
The most basic magnetic field calculation is the open-circuit field produced by the magnet or field
winding. PC-BDC has several methods for this calculation. The method is selected by the parameter
EMFCalc. The simplest methods (BLV and ToothFlux) employ a non-linear lumped-parameter magnetic
equivalent-circuit model together with a semi-empirical function describing the profile or distribution
of flux in the airgap. Magnetic leakage flux is represented by a leakage factor defined in two different
ways: f_Lkg for surface-magnet motors, and prl for interior-magnet motors (together with bridge
leakage flux defined by bBsat). (See page 126). Saturation of the teeth and yoke sections is included in
the open-circuit calculation if EMFCalc = BLV or ToothFlux.
The KFR and HBmethod methods rely on analytical solutions of Laplaces equations. The KFR method
can treat more complex magnetization patterns in simpler magnet shapes, while HBMethod can treat
more complex magnet shapes, usually (but not necessarily) with parallel magnetization. Both treat the
stator and rotor iron as smooth cylinders of infinite permeability, and are therefore restricted to surface-
magnet rotors in general, although they can be used (with some loss of rigour) with BreadLoaf, Spoke,
and IPM rotors. The leakage factors used with the lumped-parameter model do not apply to these
methods, because magnet leakage flux is included in the solution of the field equations.
All the different methods of magnetic field calculation produce a distribution of airgap flux-density on
open-circuit, together with a number of key parameters such as the open-circuit flux per pole, the peak
and fundamental values of airgap flux-density, the flux-density in the magnet, and others.
All the analytical methods can be checked quickly by finite-element calculation using the PC-
FEA GoFER,
2
and the internal results can be adjusted to match or approach the finite-element results
A special graphics facility (Tools | FE Results, MatchFE) is provided for the purpose of making the
comparison and any required adjustments. For the open-circuit condition, the PC-FEA GoFER can
produce either
1. the static distribution of airgap flux around the airgap, (relevant to the BLV method) or
2. the variation in the flux in a single tooth as the rotor rotates through one electrical
revolution, (relevant to the Toothflux method).
Either of these can be used to calculate the EMF waveform, but for accurate work the second method is
recommended, because it includes the modulation of the overall magnetic circuit permeance as a
function of rotor position. It is also possible to import measured distributions of airgap flux-density,
tooth flux, or EMF, if these are available from physical tests.
Use of the finite-element GoFER is even more important when the geometry at the airgap is too complex
to permit accurate results from the simpler methods. For example, all interior-magnet machines and
all cases with profiled or chamfered magnets should be carefully checked and adjusted using the
MatchFE facility.
3
"Armature reaction" is the generic term for the magnetic effect of the stator current.
Armature reaction
3
In terms of the equivalent circuit, armature reaction is embodied in the inductance, which has many
components. In machines with sinewave drive, the synchronous reactances Xd and Xq are the main
embodiments of armature reaction. PC-BDC computes a detailed breakdown of inductance components,
but always on the assumption that the iron is infinitely permeable. Therefore, if saturation of
inductance is present, adjustments should be made using finite-element analysis. This is particularly
important in interior-magnet machines, whose synchronous reactances may vary over a wide range.
The PC-BDC GoFER is provided with a variety of procedures for calculating the torque directly using
finite-elements. The GoFER produces several other parameters of interest including the variation of
Xd and Xq with current. As would be expected, the finite-element computation is slower than PC-BDC,
and for this reason it is sometimes advantageous to use PC-FEA to calibrate the PC-BDC model of a
machine, so that rapid calculations can be repeated with different operating points or control variables,
without repeating finite-element calculations more often than is necessary.
In terms of the magnetic field distribution within the machine, PC-BDC computes the effect of armature
reaction by using the stepped MMF distribution of the stator winding to modulate the open-circuit flux-
density distribution. The modulated distribution can be plotted, and the peak values of tooth and yoke
flux-density (Btpk_LdS and Bypk_LdS) are provided in the design sheet. PC-BDCs algorithm is
approximate, and is valid only for surface-magnet rotors. Of course, a detailed map of the flux-densities
and the saturation level throughout the machine can be obtained using the PC-FEA GoFER, with any
distribution of stator currents.
Saliency
In a "salient-pole" machine such as the IPM in Fig. 223, the winding inductances vary with rotor position.
In surface-magnet machines such as those in Figs. 199 or 213, this "saliency" is weak or absent, and they
are classified as "nonsalient-pole" machines. When the inductances are independent of rotor position,
the mathematical model of the machine can be solved directly in terms of the actual phase currents and
voltages. But for salient-pole motors this is generally impracticable, partly because of the complexity,
and partly because the actual variation of inductances with rotor position cannot be calculated
accurately by analytical methods in most of these cases. The best that can then be done for salient-pole
machines is to apply Park's transformation [1,9], which re-casts the model in two axes (the d- and q-axes)
with constant "synchronous" inductances Ld and Lq. PC-BDC uses Park's transformation if dq0 = true.
(See p. 152). However, Park's dq0 model is strictly valid only for "sinewound" machines as defined below.
For all other machines the model is non-rigorous and approximate, and must be used with care and good
judgement.
For accurate calculation of salient-pole motors PC-BDC is designed to be used efficiently with finite-
element calculations via the embedded solver or i-psi GoFER, (pp. 7, 54, 62-67, and 139ff). The i-psi
GoFER overcomes many of the limitations of the classical analytical model and it also deals rigorously
with the effects of saturation, whether or not the machine is sinewound.
Sinewound
A winding that is "sinewound" is one that is approximately sine-distributed. A true sine-distribution of
ampere-conductors is not physically possible, but it can be approximated by lap or concentric windings
with sufficient numbers of slots/pole. When the number of slots/pole is small, fractional-slot windings
may be used to achieve the same effect. In a true sinewound machine, the EMF waveform is perfectly
sinusoidal. Moreover, if there is any saliency, the inductances should ideally vary sinusoidally with
rotor position so that the dq equations (Park's transformation) can be used. If either of these conditions
is not met, the calculation in PC-BDC will be approximate.
Saturation
Magnetic saturation is common in electrical machines and it can have a strong effect on many aspects
of performance and design. The following table describes some of the causes and effects, together with
the method for dealing with them. Note that even where PC-BDC allows for saturation, PC-FEA can and
should be used to confirm or adjust the results.
Cause Effect Method
Bulk saturation of major
components of the magnetic
circuit.
More magnet material is
needed.
Torque/ampere kT is reduced.
Reduction of inductance.
PC-BDC allows for saturation
in its magnetic circuit solver,
for all values of EMFCalc
except KFR and HBMethod,
but only for open-circuit cases.
Increased bulk saturation of
the magnetic circuit caused by
high stator current.
Torque/ampere kT is reduced;
("kT roll-off").
Further reduction of
inductance.
CalcSatn makes an
approximate estimate for
stator saturation for surface-
magnet motors only, but the
GoFER is preferred.
Saturation of tooth overhangs. Has the effect of widening the
sl ot openi ngs, wi t h a
consequent change in the
cogging torque.
PC-BDC can be adjusted using
SlotMod or XSlotMod, but
accurate work requires the
finite-element method.
Saturation of rotor pole-caps,
webs and bridges (mainly in
interior-magnet rotor types.
Reduction of inductance and
kT.
PC-BDC can be adjusted using
XL, XCd, or XCq, but accurate
work requires the finite-element
method.
Phasor diagrams
Phasor diagrams are valid only for sinewound machines: that is, machines with sinusoidal EMF and
sinusoidal variation of the winding inductances with rotor position. Phasor analysis has no meaning
with squarewave drive, although it can be used for approximate analysis of rectifier operation.
Artificially forcing the EMF to be sinusoidal
In practice the nearest approach to a perfectly sinusoidal EMF waveform is obtained by means of a
sinusoidal open-circuit B
gap
distribution, with a winding that has very low harmonic winding factors
(k
wn
) for all harmonics except the fundamental, k
w1
. Generally this requires several slots/pole and a
distributed winding, or a fractional-slot winding. In both cases skew may be necessary to eliminate slot-
order harmonics.
If the EMF waveform is rendered purely sinusoidal by having k
wn
= 0 for all n except 1, the variation of
inductance with rotor position in a salient-pole motor will be sinusoidal as described in [1], Chapter 2,
apart from the effects of saturation.
The EMF can be artificially forced to be sinusoidal by setting eCalc = PhiM1. This extracts only the
fundamental component and excludes the harmonics from the calculation.
For nonsalient-pole motors the EMF waveform can be artificially forced to be a pure sinewave by setting
EMFCalc = KFR or HBMethod, and NHx = 1. Note that the selection of KFR or HBMethod also affects
the method of calculation of the airgap component of inductance. If CalcLdLq = Lumped, this
inductance component will be calculated by the same method as for the other settings of EMFCalc. (See
also NHxL).
Embedded finite-element solver
A very important functionality in PC-BDC is the use of an embedded finite-element solver (PC-FEA) in
both Static design and Dynamic design. Instead of using the GoFER (p. 62), the finite-element solver
is effectively used internally, in place of the simpler magnetic equivalent-circuit methods and/or the
analytical solution of the Laplace/Poisson equations. See p. 142.
The embedded finite-element solver uses PC-FEA. It works with three-phase machines with ipsiCalc
= PCFEA when Drive ' Sine and Sw_Ctl ' ISP_HB or SixStep and dq0 ' true.
The embedded PC-FEA solver has several important advantages:
(1) It bypasses the need for the GoFER.
(2) When MatchFES = AdjMEC, L
d
, L
q
, and E
q1
are automatically adjusted for saturation.
The adjustment is unique, according to the setting of DDFE. (See p. 139ff).
(3) It is much faster than using the GoFER.
(4) With DiffSat ' Auto_dq, the differential leakage is adjusted for saturation separately in
the d- and q-axes.
(5) When PC-BDC is running under the control of a script or another program (for example,
MATLAB), the embedded solver operates automatically with no user-intervention. The
main parameters controlling the finite-element process are in the template editor of PC-
BDC itself : see ipsiCalc and DDFE, p. 139.
In the simplest case, the embedded solver is used for a single computation with PC-FEA to determine the
saturated values of L
d
and L
q
at one operating point. But equally it can be set up to compute the magnetic
circuit as many as 720 times per cycle. The effect is like having a super-accurate version of PC-BDC with
all the saturation effects calculated automatically and internally.
Inevitably the embedded finite-element solver is slower than the normal calculation in PC-BDC,
especially when a large number of finite-element computations are used. However, it will become
steadily faster as improvements are made in the coding and in the performance of computers. When the
speed of calculation is compared with the previous method (fixed-parameter calculation with parameters
adjusted via the GoFER and MatchFE), there is no question that much time will be saved. In addition,
there is no need for the user to intervene to set the values of X-factors: this process can be quite tedious
and arbitrary, and the need for it is eliminated by the embedded solver. There is no question but that
the future of electric machine design software will rely on embedded finite-element solvers.
The embedded solver is not intended to replace the i-psi GoFER, but merely to automate or "embed" its
most routine processes. It should also be noted that the embedded solver (like the GoFER) returns only
certain bulk parameters like torque, synchronous inductance, and so on; in its current embodiment,
it does not return updated values of flux-densities or core losses to PC-BDC.
The options represented by the important parameter DDFE rely on the theory of the i-R diagram or
"energy-conversion loop", which is described in detail in [23] and [24], and in SEM-2, and in GB. Also
see Fig. 151 on p. 142.
Rotor Losses and Can Losses
PC-BDC has a set of algorithms for calculating rotor losses due to the combination of winding space-
harmonics and stator current time-harmonics; due to permeance harmonics; and due to slot-ripple in
the airgap flux at the surface of the rotor. These complex calculations are described in SEM-2 and GB.
Allowance is made for circumferential and axial segmentation of the magnets and the rotor can, if fitted.
Shaft losses are also included for surface-magnet machines. PC-BDC can calculate the losses in a
stationary can fixed to the stator bore, or a rotating can fixed to the rotor surface, or both. See CanStyle
and other related parameters in the template editor.
Core loss
Core loss is calculated from the peak values of flux-density in the teeth and yokes, using the modified
Steinmetz equation (see the WinSPEED manual). The controlling parameter for internal core-loss
calculations is WFeCalc. The i-psi GoFER (p. 67) also includes an element-by-element calculation of
the iron loss based on the finite-element solution of the magnetic field throughout a complete electrical
cycle. The core loss can be taken as a mechanical or an electrical loss (see LossFe).
Core losses and other parasitic losses in PC-BDC are very approximate and should not be used as a
secure basis for thermal calculations without physical testing.
Thermal calculations
The Static design calculation (p. 40) uses fixed temperatures specified as input data, and performs no
temperature-rise calculation.
The Dynamic design calculation (p. 41) incorporates a number of thermal calculations of different levels
of complexity. The calculation is recursive so that the winding resistance and magnet properties are
automatically adjusted for temperature.
The thermal model is selected with TempCalc, p. 191. The simplest (TempCalc = Fixed) keeps a fixed
temperature in all parts of the machine. Then there are two simple thermal models (TempCalc = DegCW
and ThRcct) defined in Figs. 296 and 297. These models require only a small number of thermal
resistances and/or capacitances. The input parameters required by these models are included in Ted/1.
The most complex thermal model (TempCalc = Hot10) is a 10-node transient thermal simulation defined
in Fig. 298. It requires two pages of input data in Ted.
The Hot10 thermal model has 10 variable-temperature nodes and 3 fixed ambient- temperature nodes.
It works by computing a thermal transient, using the thermal equivalent circuit model shown in Fig. 298.
The main elements in the model are the thermal capacitances, thermal resistances, and the losses.
All the main thermal capacitances are computed by PC-BDC from material property data together with
the dimensional parameters of the machine. The relevant material properties are density and specific
heat. Adjustments can be made by means of additional thermal capacities located at the main nodes.
Most of the thermal resistances are estimated by PC-BDC from material property data together with the
dimensional parameters of the machine. There is always less certainty about thermal resistances
because many of them depend on factors that are hard to characterize, such as the contact pressure
between the laminations and the frame. Therefore it must be expected that good results may require the
calibration of the model against test data.
At the machine surface, heat removal by convection, conduction, and radiation can be characterized in
different ways, providing flexibility to model different kinds of cooling arrangement.
All of the variable-temperature nodes can be designated as "fixed" or "floating". By fixing the
temperature at a particular node, it is possible to determine how much heat must be removed at adjacent
nodes in order to maintain that fixed temperature.
A short thermal simulation time (hTime) serves to predict the rates of change of temperature under
nearly adiabatic conditions, as, for example when the machine is first switched on. A longer run can be
used to determine the steady-state conditions. The time taken to stabilize the temperature distribution
throughout the machine is generally of interest, and this can be readily determined using the model.
Fault calculations
The symmetrical three-phase fault can be calculated in the Analysis menu. All the necessary
subtransient parameters (reactances and time-constants) are calculated automatically for most machine
types during the rotor loss calculations, which are closely related via the frequency-dependent
synchronous reactances. (SEM-2)
1.4 Drive types
Overall summary
The main parameters of the drive are Drive and Sw_Ctl (= "switch control"), together with Connex
which identifies the number of phases and the winding connection.
The main options and combinations are summarized in Fig. 3 on p. 11.
The main winding connections and power electronic circuit configurations are given in Figs. 268!281,
together with the ideal current waveforms for each case.
The following table summarizes the available Drive, Connex and Sw_Ctl options. "dq0" means "Yes if
dq0 = true"; "dq0/Wye" means "Yes if dq0 = true and Connex = Wye".
Connex Wye/Delta Multiplex
6,9,4-ph
1-/2-/3-Phase 3-Ph
Uni
n-Ph
Uni
5-Phase
Saliency NSP SSP NSP/SSP NSP SSP
4
NSP NSP
S
w
_
C
t
l
AC Motor
A
C

V
o
l
t
Yes dq0 Yes
AC Gen Yes dq0 Yes
ISP_HB
S
i
n
e
Yes dq0 Yes dq0
1
dq_VV_CR dq0 dq0
SixStep Yes dq0
RampComp Yes dq0
VPWM-ST Yes dq0
SynchReg Yes dq0
SVModX Yes dq0
DTC Yes dq0
C120_Q1
S
q
u
a
r
e

/

R
e
c
t
i
f
i
e
r

Yes dq0/Wye Yes
5
Yes
C60_Q1 Yes dq0/Wye
V120_Q1 Yes dq0/Wye Yes
5
Yes
C120_Q6 Yes dq0/Wye
C60_Q6 Yes dq0/Wye
V60_Q6 Yes dq0/Wye
C180_Q1 Yes Yes
2,3
C90_Q1 Yes
V180_Q1 Yes Yes
2,3
V90_Q1 Yes
NSP = Nonsalient-pole
SSP = Sinewound salient-pole
Multiplex windings include 6-phase (= duplex wye), 9-phase (= triplex wye), and 4-phase (= duplex 2-
phase).
1
2-Phase only
2
Related options : Bifilar with Connex = n-Ph Uni
3
Rectifier option is not available with Connex = 3-Ph Uni or n-Ph Uni
4
Not 3-Phase (use Wye)
5
3-Phase only, with Drive = Square; no rectifier option
Another way of summarizing the permitted combinations of Drive, Sw_Ctl and Connex is shown in the
following table.
Drive Sw_Ctl Connex
AC Volt Generator 1-Phase,2-Phase,3-Phase,Wye,Delta,
6-phase, 9-phase, 4-phase
Motor SplitPh (=1-Phase renamed), 2-Phase,
3-Phase, Wye, Delta,
6-phase, 9-phase, 4-phase
Sine ISP_HB 1-Phase, 2-Phase, 3-Phase, Wye, Delta
(dq0 optional); 6-phase, 9-phase; 4-phase
SixStep Wye, Delta (dq0 optional)
VPWM_ST
SynchReg Wye, Delta, (dq0 = true)
SVModX
DTC
dq_VV_CR Wye, Delta (dq0 = true)
Square C120_Q1, V120_Q1
C60_Q1, C120_Q6,
C60_Q6, V60_Q6
Wye (dq0 optional), Delta (NSP only)
C90_Q1, V90_Q1,
C180_Q1, V180_Q1,
C120_Q1, V120_Q1
1-Phase, 2-Phase, 3-Phase
C120_Q1, V120_Q1 3-Ph Uni
C180_Q1, V180_Q1 n-Ph Uni
Rectifier C120_Q1, C60_Q1,
V120_Q1, C120_Q6,
C60_Q6, V60_Q6
Wye, Delta (dq0 = false)
C180_Q1, V180_Q1,
C90_Q1, V90_Q1
1-Phase, 2-Phase, 3-Phase
Not used Wye, Delta (dq0 = true)
If RotType = Spoke, IPM, InsCP or InsRel, dq0 is forced to be true, and then only the modes with dq0
= true are available.
5-Mar-08
Fig. 3 Calculation options controlled by Drive, Connex and Sw_Ctl together with dq0
The individual Drive modes are described in detail on the following pages.
4
Zero-sequence currents in the delta are generally caused by triplen harmonics in the phase EMFs, which can be detected in PC-BDC either
by harmonic analysis of the phase EMF or by running a simulation with Drive = Square: the total EMF around the delta is then plotted
together with the phase EMF waveforms.
Fig. 4 Drive * Connex * Sw_Ctl options when Drive = AC Volt.
Drive = AC Volt
The simplest case is Drive = AC Volt, which means that the machine is running from a pure sinewave
AC voltage source with no electronics, like a classical synchronous AC machine. In this case the phasor
diagram is used for the circuit calculation, and Sw_Ctl merely selects the sign conventions in the phasor
diagram, either for motoring or for generating. See Figs. 4 and 292294. This drive/control mode is not
available if Connex = 3-Ph Uni or n-Ph Uni because the single-ended drive circuits cannot produce a
sinusoidal AC voltage or current. The calculation is at fundamental frequency with positive phase
sequence. Because it works with the phasor diagram, this calculation is valid for sinewound salient-pole
machines. If Connex = Delta the effects of third-harmonics circulating in the delta are not calculated.
4
Single-phase motors fed from AC voltage source
Calculations are possible with Drive = AC Volt for single-phase machines with or without auxiliary
windings, with or without a rotor cage. Such machines are obtained with Connex = SplitPh, which
means that in general there is a main and an auxiliary winding, as in Fig. 281 on p. 338. The auxiliary
winding is specified using AuxSpec, and a pure single-phase machine is obtained when AuxSpec =
SinglePh. If the auxiliary winding is present, it is connected in series with a capacitor (C_run, C_start)
across the main supply voltage (Vs). A cage will be present if RotType = LSIPM or Trapeze, and
RBarType = rbNone.
Calculations on single-phase machines use the same theory that was already implemented in PC-BDC
for line-start motors. If there is no rotor cage, there is no asynchronous torque: therefore the machine
can produce torque only at synchronous speed, and self-starting is not possible. Transient calculations
are then limited to load-perturbations at synchronous speed, with RPMstart = RPM. Such calculations
are more stable if ConstRPM = true, which forces the speed to remain constant. In that case only the
electrical transients are observed, after switching on. For generators, of course, (Sw_Ctl = Generator)
this type of starting calculation is not required.
In general, steady-state calculations at synchronous speed require the use of symmetrical components,
because the single-phase motor is usually unbalanced. An exception is the surface-magnet nonsalient-
pole machine with no rotor cage. PC-BDC provides three options for symmetrical-component analysis,
selected with SymmCpts (q.v.). (See also SEM-2).
When Drive = AC Volt, Dynamic design calculations [Ctrl+D] will be valid only if there is no rotor
cage. For split-phase motors the Dynamic design calculation is valid only if there is no auxiliary
winding (i.e., AuxSpec = SinglePh). The dynamic, transient, and asynchronous operating conditions
of line-start cage-rotor motors and split-phase capacitor motors are simulated instead using Analysis |
Dynamic simulation.
Line-start motors
Line-start motors have a starting cage, usually in the form of cast aluminium bars in slots around the
periphery of the rotor; see Fig. 253, and page 91. They may be connected for three-phase or two-phase
operation as balanced polyphase motors. Alternatively they may be connected for single-phase operation,
with a main and an auxiliary winding: see Fig. 281. The capacitor in series with the auxiliary winding
has a start value C_start and a run value C_run, and the changeover is determined by the Cutout speed.
Calculations for this motor include
steady-state operation at synchronous speed;
transients (starting, with RPMstart = 0 and ConstRPM = false)
load perturbation at synchronous speed (with RPMstart = RPM) and LoadStep
the asynchronous torque/speed curve.
A line-start motor must have RotType = LSIPM or Trapeze; different rotor configurations are selected
using Embed. Only for LSIPM or Trapeze-type motors with RBarType rbNone can all four types of
calculation be provided.
Line-start motors should be calculated with Drive = AC Volt and Sw_Ctl = Motor.
Permanent-magnet generators
PC-BDC can simulate the operation of a PM generator connected to an AC load with 1, 2 or 3 phases: see
Figs. 278, 279 and 280 and p. 21. Multiplex windings are also available with 6, 9 or 4 phases; see Plex.
Drive should be set to AC Volt and Sw_Ctl to Generator. The connection is determined by Connex. If
Connex = Wye or Delta, the load is always connected in wye (star); but if Connex = 3-Phase (three
independent phases), the load is also connected as three independent phases.
Dynamic design is also available for these conditions; (see p. 41). This provides a means for assessing
the current waveform when the EMF of the PM generator is not sinusoidal.
Generating into a rectifier can be simulated with Drive = Rectifier and the circuits shown in Figs. 271
and 272. It can also be simulated as an over-running condition with Drive = Square.
Fig. 5 Drive* Connex* Sw_Ctl options when Drive = Square. The dotted line is for dq0 = true,
permitting simulation of sinewound salient-pole machines.
Drive = Square
In the squarewave system, the ampere-conductor distribution remains constant and fixed in space for
a predetermined interval while the magnet rotates past it, ideally producing a linear variation in phase
flux-linkage, a flat-topped EMF, and (with constant current) a constant torque. At the end of this
interval, the ampere-conductors are switched (commutated) to the next position, and the process repeats.
Saliency is generally undesirable, because it produces a reluctance torque that varies as the rotor
rotates. Motors intended for squarewave drive should ideally have a flat-topped (trapezoidal) EMF
waveform.
In practice, the distinctions between sinewave and squarewave motors and drives are not rigid. For
example, salient-pole IPM motors are sometimes run from squarewave drives, while in other cases the
EMF waveform may be a "compromise" between a good trapezoid and a good sinewave.
Although this mode is often thought to be "simple", it is actually quite complex, and PC-BDC employs a
specially-developed mathematical analysis to cover as many of the common practical cases as possible.
Some of the complexity arises from the variety in the drive circuits, and from differences in the location
of current sensors and the control (switching) strategy or PWM algorithm. (See [0], ch. 6).
The basic options are summarized in Fig. 5.
Sw_Ctl can take several different values, which are denoted by a 3-component name such as "C 120 Q1".
The first component is C or V, denoting the choice between "current regulation" and "voltage PWM".
These are described below. The numbers 90/180 (for 1-phase and 2-phase drives) and 60/120 (for 3-phase
drives) refer to the default value of the conduction angle of the main commutating transistors. The start
of conduction can be adjusted using Th0 and its duration can be adjusted using Dwell. The last
component in the Sw_Ctl label is either Q1 or Q6, and this identifies which transistor is tied to the
current sensor for current-regulation; (see Fig. 268 on p. 330).
The simulation with Drive = Square employs fixed inductances Lph, Mph and is designed for
nonsalient-pole motors, for which dq0 would normally be false as there is no need to use dq equations
in this case. But if dq0 = true, the equations are solved partly in dq-axes instead of actual phase
variables, enabling the simulation of sinewound salient-pole motors with squarewave drive; (see Fig. 8).
This case is valid only for wye-connected three-phase motors, not delta. Moreover, in this calculation
the loop torque Tloop will not generally agree with Tgap, unless the EMF waveform is a perfect
sinewave. (See p. 237). This is because Tloop with dq0 = true is obtained from the fundamental current
and flux-linkage, whereas the torque component Tei can contain harmonic components if the current
and EMF are both nonsinusoidal. One should avoid the temptation to use dq0 = false with salient-pole
motors, even when it gives better apparent agreement between Tloop and Tgap. The i-psi GoFER should
be used to check the results of these calculations, as the accuracy will depend on the particular
circumstances.
The 3-phase motor with squarewave drive
If current is being regulated, it is the line current. If voltage is being regulated, it is the line-line voltage.
In most respects the control strategy is identical for both wye and delta connections, with the same line
current waveforms.
The commutation sequence is described in SEM-2. For 3-phase drives the calculation in Dynamic design
spans a single 60E or 120E interval, called the base segment, Fig. 35. Subsequent 60E or 120E intervals are
constructed from this segment by mapping the base-segment waveforms to the other segments. PC-
BDC displays 6 60E or 3 120E segments, covering a total of 360 Eelec. The origin of the base segment
is always the turn-off of Q5, which coincides with the turn-on of Q1. (Fig. 268).
The base segment begins at 30E in the reference waveforms and is divided into two periods A and B.
During period A, D2 freewheels the current that was previously flowing in Q5, and there is current in
all three phases ("3Q"). The freewheeling current i
C
flows backwards through phase 2 and returns via Q6.
When this current decays to zero, period B begins and only two phases are conducting ("2Q").
PC-BDC has six different schemes for current regulation in 3-phase squarewave motors, selected with
Sw_Ctl; (see Fig. 5). The ideal waveforms are shown in Fig. 290. Normally only two transistors are
conducting (one upper and one lower). Each transistor normally conducts for 120E, i.e., two intervals of
60E, unless this is modified using Dwell. During the first interval the transistor is called the "incoming"
transistor; during the second it is called the "outgoing" transistor. Transistors are assumed to regulate
the line current in the line to which they are attached. This means that incoming transistors regulate
only the "build" current in the main conduction loop, but outgoing transistors regulate the sum of the
"build" and "freewheel" currents. To maintain symmetry between positive and negative half-cycles and
to avoid commutation spikes in the line current waveforms, control must be transferred to the outgoing
transistor every 60E, and three line current sensors are needed. This is achieved with the "60E" controls
C_60_Q6 and V_60_Q6.
# Sw_Ctl Description Current sensor
1 C 120 Q1 Upper transistors chop current for 120E Line A
2 C 60 Q1 "Incoming" transistors chop current for 60E Line A
3 V 120 Q1 Upper transistors PWM voltage for 120E
4 C 120 Q6 Lower transistors chop current for 120E. This scheme complements the
C120 Q1 scheme, in that the lower transistors chop instead of the upper
transistors
Line B
5 C 60 Q6 "Outgoing" transistors chop current for 60E Line B
6 V 60 Q6 "Outgoing" transistors PWM voltage for 60E
C-type switch control Current regulation. When the line current reaches the set-point value ISP,
one of the controlling transistors (Q1 or Q6 in Fig. 268) is switched off until the current falls to (1!h)
ISP, where h = 1/HBA. It is then switched on again and chopping continues to maintain the current
between (1!h) ISP and ISP. Because the integration algorithm uses a fixed step-length, switching may
not occur exactly at threshold values, and the current may "leak" outside the hysteresis band, especially
at low speed. However, leakage is also possible following a commutation if the current-sensor that is
controlling Q1 is located in line A when Q1 is chopping. In this case the active current-sensor in line A
does not "see" the freewheeling current from the previous 60E interval, which is flowing in lines B and
C. C 60 Q6 solves this problem because Q6 and line B "see" the sum of the growing line A current and the
freewheeling line C current.
V-type switch control Voltage PWM. Voltage PWM means that the controlling transistors are
switched at the fixed frequency f0 (determined by FixfChop and related parameters) with a variable
duty-cycle (DuCy). Only the upper transistors Q1, Q3, Q5 are used for PWM. The current setpoint ISP
is used as a backup current-limit with V-type Sw_Ctl options. Set ISP to a sufficiently high value to be
sure that it will not interfere with the switching; (but avoid absurdly high values : see Tol).
Selecting an appropriate switch control strategy for 3-phase squarewave drives
If you are using a current-regulator, select a C strategy. If you are using voltage-PWM, select a V
strategy.
If all transistors do identical duty, use a 60E strategy. If only the uppers (or only the lowers) are used for
chopping, use a 120E strategy.
If there is a current sensor in each individual line, use the C 60E Q6 strategy.
If there is a current sensor only in the DC supply line, hysteresis-band current-regulation is not possible
and one of the V strategies should be used, possibly using ISP combined with DuCy and fChop (and
ISLA) to approximate the controller. PC-BDC does not simulate fixed-off-time regulators.
Hard Chopping
Normally in motoring modes, only one transistor need be chopped to regulate the current. This is called
"soft chopping" because the voltage applied to the motor is essentially zero during the off-intervals, and
this lowers the chopping frequency and reduces acoustic noise. However, in certain cases it may be
required to use hard chopping, where both transistors are switched off/on by the current regulator. This
facility is provided via ChopType, provided that Sw_Ctl = C60_Q6. Hard chopping may help with
convergence of the iterative Dynamic design calculation in difficult cases, especially when the machine
is overrunning or generating: i.e., when it is going so fast that its EMF exceeds the supply voltage.
Unipolar, Bipolar, and other drives with 1 or 2 phases
The theory of these drives is described in [1], and the appropriate connections and control strategies are
selected using Connex, Drive, Sw_Ctl, and Bifilar. Circuit diagrams and ideal waveforms are shown
in the reference figures.
Low-speed regenerating using step-up chopper technique
A special low-speed regenerating mode is obtained with Drive = Square, ChopType = UPG, Connex =
Wye, Sw_Ctl = C120_Q1, Dwell = 120E, and Th0 = 210E or thereabouts. Current is built up in a short-
circuited loop by the back-EMF. This loop is intermittently open-circuited by switching off the
controlling transistor, whereupon the current freewheels back into the supply. The operation is similar
to that of a step-up chopper or "up converter". Basically only the upper transistors (or only the lower
transistors) are needed, although it is possible to alternate the chopping duty between the upper and
lower devices.
Fig. 6 Drive* Connex* Sw_Ctl options when Drive = Sine. The dotted lines indicate that some of these
options may require dq0 = true, permitting the simulation of sinewound salient-pole machines.
Drive = Sine
In the sinewave system, the motor has a rotating ampere-conductor distribution, as in a conventional AC
synchronous machine. Saliency is acceptable, since it can produce a constant reluctance torque that
may assist the magnet torque, and it can be used to extend the constant-power operating characteristic
to higher speeds. Motors designed for sinewave drive should ideally be sinewound as defined on p. 5.
When Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB (lit. "set-point current with hysteresis band"), the line currents are
independently regulated to follow the sinewave reference without regard to the motor connection. Since
the simulation does not enforce the constraint i
A
+ i
B
+ i
C
= 0 that defines the 3-wire connection, there
is no estimate of any zero-sequence current in the delta. Therefore with delta connection, it is advisable
to check that there is no zero-sequence EMF in the phases. The simulation is in actual phase variables
if dq0 = false, and in that case it cannot be used with salient-pole machines. But if dq0 = true, it can be
used for sinewound salient-pole 2-phase machines or wye-connected 3-phase machines.
For three-phase wye-connected machines Sw_Ctl can be set to dq_VV_CR, which means "dq equations
with voltage-vector current regulation": in other words, the current regulator attempts to follow a
sinewave reference by switching the voltage space-vectors (see details below). Because the equations
are solved in dq-axes, the solution is valid for sinewound salient-pole machines. In dq_VV_CR mode,
three transistors are conducting at any time ("3Q"). This mode is important for simulating interior
permanent-magnet motors.
Again the 3-Ph Uni and n-Ph Uni connections are not valid with Drive = Sine.
SixStep
For three-phase motors the switch control parameter Sw_Ctl can also be set to SixStep. A full description
of this mode, with examples, is given in Tutorial B09. When dq0 = false, the equations are solved in direct
phase variables and are valid only for nonsalient pole motors. When dq0 = true, the equations are solved
in dq-axes and therefore the solution is valid for sinewound salient-pole machines.
In SixStep mode every transistor is switched on for 180E, and there is no chopping. Therefore the current
waveform is the natural result of the applied voltage waveform together with the impedance and EMF
of the motor. The phase of the switching is controlled by the angle alpha6, and this is the only means
of controlling the current. The fundamental line-line voltage available with SixStep control is calculated
as Vs1 on p. 241.
Fig. 7 Voltage vectors with Sw_Ctl = dq_VV_CR
The 3-phase motor with sinewave drive
With Drive = Sine there are several alternative current regulators, selected with Sw_Ctl. They are
described in detail in Tutorial B09. In all cases the reference current waveform has the peak value ISP
and its phase angle is gamma (measured relative to the EMF phasor).
With Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB, the switching control is by hysteresis band with a sinusoidal reference whose
peak value is ISP. The current regulation is performed independently on all three lines without
imposing the condition i
A
+ i
B
+ i
C
= 0. HBType controls the type of hysteresis band. If dq0 = true, the
equations are solved in dq-axes so that sinewound salient-pole motors can be calculated. The phase of
the current reference waveform is controlled by the angle gamma.
With Sw_Ctl = dq_VV_CR, the equations are solved in dq-axes and current regulation is achieved by
switching the voltage space-vector according to the state of the line currents. Fig. 7 shows the definition
of the six available voltage space-vectors in the dq_VV_CR algorithm, and the space vector u
1
is further
illustrated by the circuit diagram in the centre, showing the states of the switches, and the equivalent
connection diagram on the right.
The ISP_HB and dq_VV_CR control strategies are the simplest ones, but they suffer from poor control
of the switching frequency and unpredictable behaviour in the overmodulation range. They are
supplemented by a number of more sophisticated controllers including
Ramp-comparison : set Sw_Ctl = RampComp.
Synchronous regulator : set Sw_Ctl = SynchReg.
Space-vector modulator : set Sw_Ctl = SVModX.
Sine/Triangle voltage PWM : set Sw_Ctl = VPWM_ST.
Direct Torque Control : Set Sw_Ctl = DTC.
Tutorial B09 gives examples of all these, and explains the theory behind them, and their chief limitations.
The first three require gain settings, which makes them more complicated to use than ISP_HB or
dq_VV_CR; but on the other hand they give much better control of the switching frequency and a more
orderly transition from linear control through to six-step in the overmodulation range.
Simulating delta-connected motors equivalent wye
PC-BDC does not calculate zero-sequence current in salient-pole motors. It uses the dq transformation
with v
0
= 0, for both wye and delta connections.
A delta-connected machine can have a circulating (zero-sequence) current in the delta. This can result
from triplen harmonics or unbalanced operation, neither of which is accounted for in the dq model. The
dq model is based on the positive-sequence fundamental components of the currents, the flux-linkages,
and the voltages.
PC-BDC calculates both wye and delta connections for both salient-pole and nonsalient pole machines,
except when Drive = Square and dq0 = true. This case is of interest when a squarewave drive is used
with a salient-pole motor. The following procedure may be used in such cases. It can also be used in
other cases where PC-BDC does calculate the delta connection, as a check.
Equivalent wye
1. Check that there is no 3rd harmonic in the EMF waveform, and/or that the third-harmonic
winding factor is zero.
2. Design the machine to meet the specification, using a wye connection, including any analysis
with PC-FEA. Bear in mind that although the delta connection will require /3 times as many
turns per phase as the wye connection, with a smaller wire size, the wye-connected design should
still aim to achieve the same slot-fill factors that will be used in the delta-connected design.
3. Using the results in the design sheet, deduce the correct parameters for the delta connection as
follows:
(a) Multiply the turns (TC, Tph etc.) by /3.
(b) Multiply the wire cross-section area by the factor 1//3, to maintain the same slot-fill
factor. For example if the bare wire diameter is being used, multiply it by 3
1/4
= 0@7598.
(c) Multiply the phase currents (IWpk, IWrms, IWmean) by 1//3 but leave the line currents
(ILpk, ILrms, ILmean) unchanged.
(d) Multiply the phase EMF (Eq1) by /3 but leave the line EMF (eLLpk) unchanged.
(e) Multiply all the per-phase values of resistance, inductance and reactance by 3; (this
includes Rph, Lph, Ld, Lq Xd, Xq etc.).
(f) Leave the power, torque, power factor, efficiency, losses and copper weight unchanged.
This is a standard process in electric motor design calculations and it could easily be scripted or it could
be done with user-defined output variables in the design sheet.
Fig. 8 Usage of dq equations and direct phase variables
Analytical note (3-phase motors)
All the preceding switch controls can be applied to 3-phase sinewound salient-pole motors. By default,
PC-BDC sets dq0 = true for salient-pole types, but it is also available as an option for sinewound
nonsalient pole wye-connected motors. For the delta connection, there is no attempt to calculate any zero-
sequence current in the delta, so the EMF balance should be checked separately.
Time-stepping simulation in dq-axes requires that the d,q terminal voltages v
d
and v
q
be determinate. In
a squarewave "2Q" drive, normally two transistors are conducting (period B) and two terminal voltages
and one current are determinate, instead of the three terminal voltages. Therefore v
d
and v
q
are not
determinate and the d,q equations cannot be used. During commutation or freewheeling (period A),
however, a diode connects the freewheeling line terminal to the positive or negative rail and all three
terminal voltages are known. Therefore if Drive = Square and dq0 = true, PC-BDC switches from dq-axes
in period A to direct phase variables in period B. With two phases conducting, the inductance is the line-
line inductance of two phases in series. It varies sinusoidally with rotor position (assuming that the
machine is sinewound), and it and its derivative with respect to position are derived from Ld and Lq.
(See [1], ch. 2).
The sinewave drive option in Fig. 6 is a "3Q" drive (three transistors conducting at all times): therefore
the terminal voltages and hence v
d
and v
q
are determinate at all times, permitting the dq equations to
be used throughout. Note that the actual phase self- and mutual inductances Lph and Mph are used
when the dynamic simulation is working in actual phase variables, while the synchronous inductances
Ld and Lq are used when the dynamic simulation is in dq axes.
Fig. 8 summarizes these considerations. During the simulation the reference-frame transformations to
v
d
, v
q
from v
a
,v
b
,v
c
and to i
d
,i
q
from i
a
,i
b
,i
c
(and their inverses) must be performed every time-step.
The table on p. 9 summarizes the drive and switching control options in PC-BDC.
Fig. 9 gamma
1.5 Generating and rectifying
The brushless PM machine is a synchronous machine with no excitation control. At a given speed, its
output can be controlled only by varying the load impedance, while the prime mover must respond with
exactly the required torque to maintain constant speed. Control of the generating condition depends on
the Drive parameter.
Generating with Drive = AC Volt and Sw_Ctl = Generator
If Drive = AC Volt, generating into a sinusoidal AC voltage source can be modelled in Static design by
selecting Sw_Ctl = Generator, LoadSpec = V-delta, and varying delta, the phase angle between the
supply voltage V and the generated EMF E. In using delta (*) as the independent control variable, PC-
BDC follows the power-systems convention, where the output power of AC generators is represented as
(EV/X
d
) sin *; (see [20]).
We calculate the phasor diagram in Static design, and the sign convention for the current is "positive
for generating". The output variable ( or gammaACV defines the phase angle between the current and
the EMF E. This angle is important because it determines the torque, as well as the direction of the
"armature reaction" flux. So this discussion proceeds in terms of ( even though the independent control
variable is delta. [Later, when we consider a generator with a current-controlled PWM inverter as its
load (Drive = Sine), we will use the input parameter gamma as the independently controlled phase
angle]. Also note that all quantities in the phasor diagram are referred to one phase (line-to-neutral);
when Connex = Delta, these quantities refer to the equivalent wye; (see SEM-2).

Fig. 9 shows an example, where E is the EMF, I
G
is the current, and (
G
is the angle gammaACV; all
these values are positive, and delta is positive when E leads V.
When we look at the corresponding waveforms in Results | Simulation graphs we must be careful to note
that they are calculated and displayed using the convention that current is positive for motoring. In other
words, the waveforms display the current I
G[M]
in Fig. 9, where I
G[M]
' I
G
. The waveforms also show
negative torque, even though the average torque is converted to a positive value in the design sheet.
For example, we might see a generator phasor diagram with (
G
' 30E. When we look at the waveforms
we will see the current leading the EMF by 180 30 ' 150E, and negative torque. For dynamic simulation,
a generating current in the 1st quadrant thus becomes an equivalent motoring current in the 3rd
quadrant. As a reminder of this, the phasor diagram displays both currents, as Iph1[M] and Iph1[G].
Fig. 9 also shows the motoring condition that would be achieved with Sw_Ctl = Motor. We could make
this into a generator if we adjusted delta until ( was inverted.
Generating with Drive = Sine
We have to distinguish between controlled generating and uncontrolled generating, also known as over-
running.
Drive ' Sine implies that the machine is connected to a current-controlled PWM inverter as in Fig. 268.
The basic control variables are ISP and gamma. Remembering that this system is modelled using the
convention that current is positive for motoring, we can model generating operation by setting gamma
to a value in the generating range, such as (
G[M]
in Fig. 9, which gives the current I
G[M]
. gamma is
measured anti-clockwise from the q-axis, so a typical value might be 140E. This represents a motor with
a negative I
d
and a negative I
q
. The negative I
q
produces the negative torque required for generating. The
negative I
d
represents a demagnetizing or flux-weakening component, implying that the machine is
"overexcited" in power-systems parlance. (In other words, its armature-reaction is opposing the
excitation, and the excitation E must be increased to maintain the correct terminal voltage).
[It might appear from Fig. 9 that normal generating operation is underexcited, since the phasor I
G
has
a positive d-axis component. But I
G
is the negative of I
G[M]
, and so the "real" d-axis current is in fact
negative or demagnetizing. The utmost care is necessary in interpreting these signs and angles, more
particularly because PC-BDC has to deal with both motoring and generating conditions while retaining
a consistent frame of reference.]
The waveforms are calculated in Dynamic design using the convention that motoring current is
positive. Therefore, in the generating condition, the torque waveform will be negative and the currents
will be out of phase with their counterparts in the motoring range.
In generating with Drive ' Sine, the current regulator can maintain the correct current and phase angle
only if it has sufficient voltage. This implies that the available voltage from the inverter must exceed
the machine EMF plus the voltage drop in the machine impedance. In fact there must be a sufficient
voltage margin otherwise the current regulator will become saturated and control will be lost. In
practical terms, it may be possible to control a machine that has an excessive EMF by forcing a sufficient
demagnetizing current I
d
, but if the regulator loses control there is a danger of uncontrolled rectification
through the diodes in Fig. 268. This condition is known as "over-running". If it is not detected, the
current can quickly become excessive. See p. 241.
Generating with Drive = Square
If Drive = Square, in simple terms, generating operation requires the line-line EMF to exceed the supply
voltage Vs for a substantial fraction of a cycle, and for this the speed must be higher than a certain "base"
value. With the controller circuits assumed by PC-BDC, as for example in Fig. 268, generation occurs
by uncontrolled rectification through the freewheel diodes (over-running). This can be observed in
Dynamic design if the speed is increased to a high enough value. However, this condition is not
modelled or even contemplated as a Static design mode, since Static design is defined for the ideal
motoring current waveforms when Drive = Square.
In the over-running condition the torque waveform will be negative, while the current will be
substantially out of phase with the EMF. This is consistent with the sign convention that current is
positive for motoring when Drive ' Square. If the EMF is significantly higher than the supply voltage,
PC-BDC may have difficulty converging.
If DCSource = DCFilter, it is better to use Drive = Rectifier, which is explicitly programmed for the over-
running condition.
5
The value of Sw_Ctl is theoretically irrelevant when the machine is in overrunning (rectifying) mode, because there are no
transistors to switch. However, for diagnostic reasons Sw_Ctl and other parameters remain editable when Drive = Rectifier.
Generating with Drive = Rectifier
This mode is the same as the "uncontrolled rectification" or "over-running" mode which we have
discussed above. It has long been possible to obtain "rectifier mode" in PC-BDC by raising the speed to
a level at which the EMF exceeds the DC supply voltage sufficiently to cause "overrunning" or
rectification through the diodes in parallel with the transistors, for example, in Fig. 268. However, this
mode is restricted by the modelling of the DC load as a fixed voltage source Vs. In practice, especially
with PM generators supplying local loads, a more detailed model of the DC load circuit is helpful.
PC-BDC can model the rectifier load as a fixed DC source (DCSource = Fixed DC), or with filter
components (DCSource = DCFilter); see Fig. 272, p. 333. The generator is assumed to be wye connected
with no neutral connection brought out, and the rectifiers are plain diodes with fixed voltage-drop Vd.
The basic simulation algorithms are the same as for Drive = Square, but the transistors are never
switched on and there are additional differential equations for the energy-storage elements such as Cdc
and Ldc.
5

Unlike the AC Volt and Sine cases, torque and current waveforms are displayed with the convention that
current is positive for generating. Consequently the torque waveform is positive, which is natural and
intuitive. Moreover, there is an ideal Static design calculation which assumes a 120E rectangular
current waveform (or the equivalent for non-3-phase systems), as though the rectifier was inductively
loaded.
For three-phase drives, dq0 is an option. This permits the Dynamic design calculation with salient-pole
machines.
Special care is required with the Dynamic design calculation with Drive = Rectifier, because of the
relatively long settling-time of the DC circuit following the initial turn-on transient. It helps to use a non-
zero value of Cycles (such as 50), and to ensure that the circuit has adequate damping resistance,
especially when DCSource = Fixed DC. A smaller value of ISLA can be used to speed up the calculation
(e.g., ISLA = 16), because there is no high-frequency chopping.
Detailed descriptions of generating and rectifying can be found in tutorials B15 and B16.
Saliency
Lext
Rext
X_R
WFeCalc LossFe
Losses
Geometry
Material databases
Steel
Wire
Magnets
Drive/control
Configuration
Control settings
More geometry
Windings
More winding data
Terminal performance
Power
Torque
Efficiency
Currents
Current densities
Losses
Temperature rise
Flux densities
Special calculations
Torque/speed
Ranging
Starting
Phasor diagram
Slot-fill factors
Winding harmonics
Calculating engine Input Output
Weights & inertias
Areas & volumes
Resistances
Inductances
EMFCalc
XBrT XLM, Xrm
Xkm_HB
Fringing
XFringe, XBetaM
u_LKG, bBsat, Xrl
aPend
XL
XCd, XCq
XLdiff
PSSlot, muPlug, SpreadSO
X_EMF
XBGap
ETCalc, XLendt
CalcLdLq
XBtpk, XTTarc
uKCL
XTw, Xks
XSYoke, XRYoke
ufz
Inductance
Options
Configuration
Dimensions
Layout
Turns
Wire size
RotType
Embed
Config
S-Slot
Polarity
WdgType
WireSpec
Connex
Drive
Sw_Ctl
dq0
FixfChop
ChopType
ISLA
Tol
Tol_ISLA
Cycles
dqRevert
CalcVwfm
Bifilar
RCore
BgProfil
CalcSatn
XSatn
SatnTol
CalcVer
XFe
SlotMod
XSlotMod
Program controls
CalcCogg
TempCalc
Finite-elements
Scripting
Special
Adjustment factors
Magnetic calculations
Circuit calculations
Fudge factors
Fig. 10 Organization of PC-BDC and its controls and adjustment factors
1.6 Organization, program controls and adjustment factors
The general organization of PC-BDC is shown in Fig. 10 together with the main program controls and
adjustment factors. The main types of input data are shown in the left-hand box, and the main types of
output data in the right-hand box. The "calculating engine" in the middle is the means by which the
input data is mapped into the output data. Learning to "drive" the calculating engine is largely a matter
of understanding the options and adjustment factors.
"Options" are usually definite unambiguous decisions. For example, RotType identifies a certain rotor
type which can be modified using dimensions in the outline editor. Drive identifes the means of
supplying electrical power to the machine, for example, by a squarewave or sinewave inverter. Connex
identifies the winding connection: wye, delta, etc.
"Adjustment factors", on the other hand, are less definite. A perfect calculating program would not need
them, but PC-BDC is far from perfect. The main imperfections can perhaps be classified as follows:
(1) Idealizations in the mathematical model which are necessary to make the calculations feasible,
but which fail to represent the "real world" exactly. To some extent this type of imperfection can
be corrected by comparing or calibrating PC-BDC against finite-element calculations, and the
GoFERs described in 2.14 are designed to do this efficiently. For example, adjustment factors
such as XBrT, XBetaM, XFringe, bBsat are used to adjust the open-circuit flux-distribution,
while XL, XCd, XCq are used to adjust the inductance or synchronous reactances. Measured
data can and should be used for the same purpose.
(2) The retention of old calculation methods even when newer, more accurate methods are added to
the program. This permits users to upgrade to newer versions of the program without
necessarily disrupting existing calculations that may have been carefully calibrated against test
data. But it makes it necessary to have "switches" or options that select one of a number of
different calculation methods. For example, ETCalc selects from several different methods of
calculating end-turn length and inductance.
(3) Bugs, errors, and other uncertainties and weaknesses in the mathematical model, including one
or two historical inconsistencies. Bugs and errors are usually eliminated by a re-release, but
some of the "uncertainties and inconsistencies" are allowed to persist for the same reason already
mentioned, namely, to minimize the disruption to users who have calibrated their designs with
test data. An example is XBgap, which compensates for a historical inconsistency in which the
airgap flux-density is calculated in some parts of the program at the stator surface, and in other
parts at the centre of the airgap. Another example is dqRevert, which reinstates certain details
of an older circuit simulation algorithm that are now considered incorrect.
The adjustment factors in the right-hand column of the central box in Fig. 10 are used less frequently
than those in the left-hand column. It is tempting to consider "streamlining" PC-BDC by removing
several of the adjustment factors, to make the program simpler to use. The ones that are liable to
disappear are those that are used to enable or adjust obsolete methods of calculation. However, changes
of this type can disrupt loyal users who are skilled in achieving good and productive results, so the
authors are reluctant to make such changes lightly.
Many of the adjustment factors are concerned with the adjustment of PC-BDC to force it to match a finite-
element calculation. But since the finite-element results are always open for inspection, this adjustment
is in many cases not necessary. Users differ in the balance of emphasis between analytical and finite-
element methods, and the trend is inexorably towards greater reliance on the finite-element methods.
As computing speeds increase, this becomes more and more practical, although 3D finite-element
methods are still several orders of magnitude too slow to be of much help to the SPEED user, and even
with 2D finite elements, it requires the GoFER or the embedded solver to realise the benefits of the finite-
element method without incurring the high costs of setting up problems, waiting for solutions, and
postprocessing the raw results that most numerical analysis programs produce into useful engineering
parameters and data.
"Fudge factors" can be defined as adjustment factors for which there is often no good basis to decide the
appropriate value. The most important example is XFe which simply multiplies the calculated iron loss.
Because of the great difficulty of calculating iron loss accurately, it is almost always desirable to have
a value for XFe probably somewhere between 1 and 3, depending on the frequency and the flux-density
waveform and the type of steel. But iron loss is even difficult to measure precisely, and its distribution
throughout the machine cannot be measured at all.
One can say that adjustment factors and even fudge factors are an integral part of the art of engineering.
While continual progress is made in calculation algorithms to minimize the need for them, it is unwise
to ignore them and nave to expect any computer program to give exact results for every parameter. It
is emphasized that SPEED does not do the engineer's job, part of which is to evaluate and calibrate the
calculations against test data on prototype machines.
"Program controls" such as ISLA, Tol, Cycles are important to get accurate results in the shortest
possible time, and to avoid convergence failures. EMFCalc selects the method of calculating the open-
circuit magnetic field, and is one of the most important program controls.
Page 26 PC-BDCs functions PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 11 PC-BDCs main menu bar (no file yet open)
2. PC-BDCs Functions
The common functions of all SPEED Windows programs are described in the WinSPEED manual.
These include File, Options, Window, Help, Outline, Editor, Graph, Template, Design Sheet, Information,
Scripting, Steel database, Magnet database, Calculator, Unit Converter, Custom editor, Custom output,
Tagged parameters, Locked parameters, Export data, Dials.
This section provides further information specific to PC-BDC.
Function Hotkey Purpose
Data
Outline editor Ctrl+1 Display and edit the cross-section geometry.
Template editor, Ted Ctrl+3 Edit non-geometric parameters.
Winding editor Ctrl+W Display and edit the stator winding.
Materials Ctrl+M Select materials (steel, magnet).
I/O Units Ctrl+U Select units.
Titles Create or edit title, subtitle, and comment to go with
each datafile.
External datafiles Ctrl+E Specify the pathname of external datafiles.
User Wire Tables Specify files containing user-defined wire tables.
Custom editors Ctrl+Shift+3 Custom (floating) editors; see WinSPEED manual.
Administration
Tagged parameters Colour settings for selected parameters; see
WinSPEED manual.
Analysis
Static design Ctrl+2 Calculate operating point with forced setpoint
current.
Dynamic design Ctrl+D Calculate operating point by simulation of drive and
motor (or generator) at constant speed.
Autosearch Vary control parameters to find a target power or
torque.
Torque/Speed Ctrl+T Calculate a complete torque/speed curve.
Line-start (DOL starting) Starting calculation for line-start motors.
Line-start (Load step) Ctrl+Y Step-load transient for line-start motors.
Short-circuit (analytical) Ctrl+X 3-phase short-circuit calculated by analytical formula.
Ranging (Batch design) Ctrl+B Calculate a batch of designs to analyse the
performance as selected parameters are varied.
PC-BDC 9.04 PC-BDCs functions Page 27
Results
Design sheet Ctrl+4 Complete listing of input and output parameters.
Custom design sheet Custom listing of parameters. See page 49.
Tabbed design sheet Ctrl+Shift+4 Design sheet formatted in tabbed pages.
Simulation Graphs Ctrl+G Graphical output: waveforms of current, EMF, torque,
flux-density etc. and distributions of components of
airgap flux-density.
Torque/Speed Graphs Graphs of torque and other parameters vs. speed.
Thermal Graphs Graphs of thermal transient calculated using the
Hot10 method.
Dynamic simulation
graphs
Graphs of line-starting, load perturbation, faults and
other transients.
Short-circuit graphs Graphs of current and torque waveforms for sudden
short-circuit calculated by analytical formula.
Harmonic Analysis Ctrl+H Harmonic analysis of PC-BDCs waveforms.
Phasor Diagram Ctrl+A Display and analyse the phasor diagram and voltage
locus.
B squared Graphical display of flux-density squared to illustrate
radial forces on teeth.
Loss data Table of harmonic components of rotor loss.
Page 28 PC-BDCs functions PC-BDC 9.04
Tools (See WinSPEED manual).
Calculator F4 Simple arithmetic operations on PC-BDCs
parameters.
Convert units Utility for converting units.
Scripting F7 Open a script file for editing.
Steel database Ctrl+5 Open the Steel Database Manager for editing or
creating records of steel data.
Magnet database Ctrl+6 Openthe Magnet Database Manager for editing or
creating records of magnet data.
GoFER (FE Link) F11 Open the finite-element link via the GDF.
FE Results Comparison of FE and PC-BDC calculations using
MatchFE (q.v.) and other tools.
Export data Data transfer to other programs.
Motor-CAD Link to Motor-CAD (requires separate installation of
Motor-CAD).
Imbalance Graphical display of unbalanced 3-phase system.
kT,kE Calculator for EMF constant and torque constant.
D
2
L calculator Sizing utility for estimating the required rotor D
2
L for
a given torque.
Calculate PCslot Special GoFER for calculating slot-permeance
coefficient for stator or rotor slots.
PC-BDC 9.04 Data * Outline editor Page 29
Fig. 12 The outline editor in PC-BDC. The red line is the reference axis of the rotor, and is at the centre of a
South magnet pole. RotorAng sets the rotor axis at a definite position in mechanical degrees measured
CCW from the x-axis, which is the centre-line of slot 0. (See Ax1).
2.1 Data | Outline editor [Ctrl+1]
The outline editor is for editing the machine geometry, particularly the cross-section and the
dimensions of the stator and rotor laminations and any magnets. Dimensions are defined in 3 and in
the reference diagrams.
When a parameter is changed, PC-BDC checks the validity of the new value. If the data is invalid, an
error message appears. The drawing may disappear if the geometry is not feasible, so it is advisable to
proceed cautiously and make careful changes, starting with a valid design.
The cross-section can be copied to the Windows clipboard using [Ctrl+C]. The metafile is also copied,
and Edit|Paste Special can be used to select the preferred format when pasting the image into another
program.
To print the outline, use File*Print or [Ctrl+P]. To create a .dxf file, use the GDF editor [F11], or
Tools|Export Data|Lamination as DXF.
The zoom function is described in the WinSPEED manual. [F6] switches the colours between four
colour schemes, including black/white. Use [F8] to change the appearance of the display and to
customize the colour schemes, fills, etc.
The cursor coordinates are displayed at top left of the drawing window. Right-click to switch between
polar and cartesian coordinates.
Outline | DXF Overlay can be used to superimpose a .dxf drawing of the geometry a useful feature for
checking that the dimensions in the PC-BDC model are close to those of the actual machine.
Use File*Information [Ctrl+I] to display "spreadsheet parameters" such as slot area, coil area, etc. These
may need to be calculated by a Static design or Dynamic design.
When the number of parameters is large, the outline editor may display more than one tabbed page.
Page 30 Data * Template editor PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 13 The template editor, Ted.
2.2 Data | Template editor, Ted [Ctrl+3]
Ted contains all the input parameters of the machine and control, except the dimensional parameters
that appear in the outline editor. For parameter definitions, see 3. Use [F8] to change the appearance
of the display.
Ted does no error-checking, so any errors or inconsistencies will not show up until a calculation is
attempted using the Analysis menu.
Different tabbed pages may appear for different types of machine.
[Ctrl+F] or Template | Find can be used to search for a parameter by name. The scope of search is the
entire template editor.
Note Ted was rearranged at Version 9, after many years of "accretion". The new format reflects the way PC-BDC
is intended to be used. The old format can be recovered by means of the Template | Pre v9 Ted menu item : this is
provided to avoid the sudden shock of a large change, and in case "old users" need to find something in a hurry
before they have had chance to familiarize themselves with the new format. However, the new format is
recommended and the old one will not be supported forever.
Data | Materials [Ctrl+M]
The materials associated with the current design datafile can be selected using Data*Materials [Ctrl+M].
They are not displayed in Ted.
Data | I/OUnits [Ctrl+U]
Units for input/output can be selected using Data*I/O Units [Ctrl+U]. Default units for new designs can
be selected by Options | Default Units.
The template editor can be copied to the Windows clipboard using [Ctrl+C]. To print the template
editor, use File*Print or [Ctrl+P].
PC-BDC 9.04 Data * Winding editor Page 31
Fig. 14 Winding editor, [Ctrl+W], showing elements of a standard concentric
winding. Use [F6] to switch between colour and black-and-white display.
2.3 Data | Winding editor [Ctrl+W]
The winding editor displays the winding layout. Many of the winding parameters appearing in Ted
are also available here for editing.
The winding editor can be used for visualizing the effect of changes in the Throw, CPP (coils/pole) and
other parameters. It can also be used for creating new, custom winding distributions from scratch.
When the winding is modified, PC-BDC keeps account of the coilside locations and the numbers of turns
in each coil, and displays this data in the coil list table at top left. The coil list is used to calculate the
resistance, inductances, winding factors, etc.
Keep in mind that the winding editor has very little error-checking, so any errors or inconsistencies
will not show up until a calculation is attempted using the Analysis menu. One useful check included
in the Winding menu is to check for duplicate coils or coils of zero span.
Coil list
For each coil, the coil list displays the coil number, the "go" and "return" slot numbers, the span, and the
number of turns. The span is equal to the difference between the "go" and "return" slot numbers, and is
also known as the Throw or pitch of the coil.
Modifying the winding
Coils can be inserted or deleted either by means of the Winding menu, or by using [Insert] or [Delete].
The highlight in the coil list determines which coil will be deleted. Individual coilsides can be moved by
over-writing the "go" and/or "return" slot number in the coil list table. Alternatively you can edit these
numbers by pressing [F2]. Several other features and short-cuts are available on the Winding menu.
Page 32 Data * Winding editor PC-BDC 9.04
Display options
Several display options are available, via the tabbed pages or Winding| View:
One phase Displays the coils of the phase selected using the Phase parameter.
All phases Displays the coils of all phases. The coil-list table is replaced by a table showing, for
each slot, the number of conductors from each phase, together with the total number
of conductors, and the slot-fill parameters SFg (gross) and SFn (net). This table is
the conductor location vector. It is useful for checking that all slots contain the
same number of conductors. It is also used in the finite-element link for transferring
ampere-conductors to the correct slots.
MMF Displays the idealised MMF distribution around the airgap, together with the
selected mechanical harmonic. The number of poles covered by the display can be
varied using the Poles option.
Harmonic Similar to the MMF display, but the harmonics are tabulated.
Winding
Factors
Displays the harmonic winding factors for each individual phase.
Grges Displays a vector diagram of individual coil EMFs with analysis including
symmetrical components.
Parameters
These can be entered (use spacebar) or edited (use [F2]). For more detail, see the reference section, 3.
WdgType Winding type. See page 100.
TC Turns/coil TC. For custom windings, TC sets the turns of all coils, over-writing
the values of individual coils.
Throw Coil throw (or span) For custom windings, the coil spans must be entered
individually in the coil table.
BalWdg Balanced or unbalanced winding. For unbalanced windings, the phases must be
"wound" individually, and only custom winding types are permissible. PC-
BDC calculates with the average parameters taken over the three phases, and
therefore only a small degree of unbalance is permissible with BalWdg false.
The option BalWdg = false should be used only in extreme cases where balance
is impossible to achieve with normal winding patterns. It should not be used as
an easy option, for example, with fractional-slot windings that are not
automatically built by PC-BDC.
BalWdg = false should not be used with salient-pole machines.
Offset Offset in slot-pitches between phase-winding starts (only for FracSlot and Custom
winding types). Offset should be positive. It can be increase or decreased from
the Winding menu, or by [Ctrl+R] or [Ctrl+Y].
CPP Coils per pole-group (standard windings only)
Phase Selects the phase to display and edit
Harmonic Selects the harmonic to display.
Custom windings
Custom windings can be specified only via the winding editor. The term "custom winding" embraces
all possible distributions of coils. If you start to modify a standard winding (by adding, removing or
editing coils), PC-BDC immediately sets WdgType = Custom. When entering new custom windings, it
is advisable to proceed in a counter-clockwise direction and generally follow PC-BDC's slot numbering.
The winding editor permits complete freedom in winding the machine and it assumes that the user
knows where the windings go. It is advisable to work from a winding diagram if one is available, and
proceed with careful attention to coil polarity and location. Winding errors usually show up as
peculiarities in the EMF waveform or phase sequence, but occasionally they can be difficult to detect.
For custom windings it is necessary to enter the entire winding of one phase. There are no short-cuts and
there is no automatic way to replicate the coil-groups for successive poles. Normally, the coils of
successive North and South poles are entered with opposite polarity. The user must find the correct slot
numbers to make this the case.
Other utilities in the Winding menu for custom windings include Flip Coil, Flip all coils in phase, and
Rotate coils.
Page 34 Data * Winding editor PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 15 An example of a 48-slot stator with a 4-pole Concentric winding with Throw = 11 and CPP = 4,
and a 48-slot stator with a 4-pole Lap winding also with Throw = 11 and CPP = 4. Only one
phase is shown. The polarities of adjacent coil-groups are, of course, opposite.
Offset in Custom windings
Offset is the number of slot-pitches between the start of phase 1 and the start of phase 2. After modifying
or creating a winding with the winding editor, it is essential to check the Offset parameter. Offset
should be positive. The main methods for checking are as follows:
1. Check that all slots have the same number of conductors (use All phases view);
2. Check that the EMF waveforms calculated in Static design are balanced.
3. Use the Grges diagram. Increase Offset in steps until the fundamental EMF phasors are
spaced at 120E (or 90E in a 2-phase machine), with the correct phase sequence. The
negative- and zero-sequence EMFs should also be zero.
Ref. [0] gives the theory for the automatic calculation of Offset, but not all slot/pole combinations
necessarily have a valid value. PC-BDC checks Offset during Static design or Dynamic design and
recommends a value if the current value appears to be incorrect. However, PC-BDCs checks are not
exhaustive and occasionally there may be valid windings for which PC-BDC does not derive the correct
Offset, and may display a warning even when Offset is correct. A truly incorrect value will cause
discontinuities in the EMF waveforms (every 60E in a three-phase machine). Sometimes these
discontinuities are subtle and may not be easy to detect, so care should be taken in determining the value
of Offset.
Fig. 16 An example of a fractional-slot 4-pole winding with Slots = 15 and Throw = 2. Only Phase 1 is shown.
The other two phases have identical windings. Phase 2 should be displaced by 120Eelec or 2/3 15/4
= 2@5 slot-pitches, but since this is not an integer the nearest Offset that will produce a balanced
winding is 5 slot-pitches or 240Eelec. +5 gives the wrong phase sequence, so the correct value is !5
slot-pitches. This can be expressed as a positive number by adding Slots, giving Offset = 10.
Fig. 17 All three phases of the fractional-slot winding shown in Fig. 16. Note the individual slot-fill factors for
each slot in the coil-list table. SFg means "Slot-fill, gross", calculated from the ratio of total copper area
to Aslot. SFn means "Slot-fill, net", calculated from the product nd
2
divided by the depleted slot area,
which is equal to Aslot after all liners, wedges and top-sticks have been removed. n is the number of
strands in the slot, and d is the diameter measured over the insulation.
Fractional-slot windings
An example of a fractional-slot winding "built" by PC-BDC is shown in Fig. 16. Like custom windings,
fractional-slot windings also require the correct Offset. Note that the individual coils or coil groups are
not displaced by exactly one pole-pitch, and the phase windings cannot be described as having any
meaningful symmetry. Even so, the resulting three-phase winding is perfectly balanced; see Fig. 17.
Page 36 Unbalanced custom windings PC-BDC 9.04
Unbalanced custom windings
Three-phase windings are usually specified in terms of one phase, the second and third phases being
assumed identical but with axes displaced by 120E. If PC-BDC cannot construct a balanced winding in
this way, it displays the message: "There is no valid offset for this motor. Use EMFCalc = BLV/UnBal".
(For example, a 16-slot lamination cannot accommodate a balanced three-phase winding). If the machine
is nonsalient pole, there are then two choices for calculating the performance:
1. Set EMFCalc = BLV/Unbal
This method can be used if the unbalance is slight. To obtain valid results in calculations, Offset must
be chosen such that an accurate value of mutual inductance (Mph) is calculated. Generally this requires
Offset to correspond to an angle as close as possible to 120 Eelec.
2. Set BalWdg = false in the winding editor and enter all three phases independently as custom
windings.
This option requires more effort than just using EMFCalc = BLV/Unbal, but has three main advantages.
First, it is more accurate. Secondly, as all three phases are fully defined, Offset is not required. Thirdly,
new numerical values and graphs are output such that the user can make a judgement as to whether the
winding is adequately balanced. Static design and Dynamic design can be run with EMFCalc =
BLV/UnBal. The EMF waveforms are calculated for each phase, and are used to calculate an average
EMF waveform, which is then displaced by 120E and 240E to form the 3-phase EMF waveforms used in
the performance calculation.
The design sheet includes the individual phase resistances, self- and mutual inductances, and the
winding design for each phase. The average resistance and inductance are used in the performance
calculation. It is possible to make the mistake of putting phases 2 and 3 in the wrong sequence, or of
winding them with the wrong polarity). The electrical angles of the phase winding axes (Ax1ED, Ax2ED,
and Ax3ED in the design sheet) should be separated by 120E and in the order 1,2,3.
In the graphical output, the phase-EMF has a green waveform superimposed on it, representing the sum
of the three phase EMF waveforms. With a truly balanced winding this waveform is zero. There is an
additional graph called "Unbalanced EMF waveforms (FS)", which shows the three actual phase-EMF
waveforms and the average EMF waveform (displaced by 0E, 120E and 240E). The average EMF-waveforms
are used in the performance calculation. The sum of the three instantaneous actual phase-EMF
waveforms is also shown in green.
MMF, Harmonics, Winding Factors, and Grges diagram
Figs. 18-21 show the winding analysis tabs of the winding editor.
Note that for the MMF and Harmonics, there is a display option for Electrical or Mechanical harmonics.
Thus for example the electrical fundamental of a 4-pole winding will appear as a 2
nd
harmonic if
displayed as a mechanical harmonic.
If Closed slots is checked, the individual harmonic components are multiplied by a sin (nF)/(nF) function
to account for the modulating effect of the slot-openings, where F is the slot-opening angle in electrical
radians. Also for the Harmonics, the magnitude-squared can be displayed; this may be of interest in
relation to acoustic noise.
PC-BDC 9.04 Unbalanced custom windings Page 37
Fig. 19 Harmonic display in the winding editor
Fig. 18 Winding editor : MMF
The winding editor also displays the distribution of airgap MMF around the rotor, constructed under
the assumptions that the steel is infinitely permeable and the stator windings are represented by current
filaments on a smooth-bore cylinder at angles corresponding to the centre-lines of their respective slots.
An example is shown in Fig. 18. The entries in the table are ampere-conductors assuming that 1A is
flowing in phase 1 and 0@5A in phases 2 and 3. The slider advances the rotor position. Use the Winding
menu to select display options.
Fig. 19 shows the Harmonics tab for a 4-pole winding. This is a Fourier analysis of the MMF distribution
with 1@0 A in phase 1 and 0@5 A in phases 2 and 3.
Page 38 Unbalanced custom windings PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 20 Winding factors displayed in the winding editor
Fig. 21 Grges page in the winding editor
Fig. 20 shows the harmonic winding factors in the form of a bar-chart with a table of numerical values
on the left. The winding factors are calculated directly from the Fourier analysis of the winding
distribution, normalized to the Fourier components of a full-pitch winding. For this reason the separate
pitch, spread, and skew factors are not itemized.
Fig. 21 shows the Grges page of the winding editor. When EMF is selected, it displays the EMF phasors
of all the individual coils in the machine. The phase sequence is correct when these phasors are viewed
as rotating anti-clockwise in the order is RED-YELLOW-BLUE, as in Fig. 21. Also, when the phase
sequence is correct, the negative sequence and zero sequence voltages (V2 and V0) should be zero. When
MMF is selected, the vectors represent the physical orientation of the axes of the coils; be careful because
the phase order appears to be reversed in this case.
PC-BDC 9.04 Data | External data files Page 39
Fig. 22 External data files
2.4 Data | External data files [Ctrl+E]
This dialog box [Ctrl+E] is for specifying external datafiles that may be needed by PC-BDC for running
Static design or Dynamic design and other Analysis options.
For example when EMFCalc = ExtTFW, an external *.tfw file must be provided. To generate an example
of such a file, set WriteLoop = TFlux in Ted, then use Tools | ExportData | Tooth + YokeFlux and EMF to
write the file. Alternatively, use the *.tfw file written by PC-FEA under the B
tooth
GoFER.
The files needed depend on EMFCalc:
ExtTFW *.tfw file of tooth flux vs. rotor position. (*.savp and *.scvp files have
a similar, closely-related function, as described in the PC-BDC
GoFER manual.
ExtEMF *.emf file of tooth EMF vs. rotor position
ExtBgap *.bgp file of Bgap vs. angle around the rotor
HarmBgap *.mhx file of Bgap harmonic coefficients
KFR with
MagType = User
*.mhx file with harmonic coefficients of magnetization
For file formats, see the File Formats manual. (The Manuals button in SPUD can be used for this).
Page 40 Analysis * Static design PC-BDC 9.04
2.5 Analysis | Static design [Ctrl+2]
Static design is a design calculation under static conditions : that is, one operating point at constant
speed with fixed temperatures. If Drive = Square or Sine, the line currents are forced to have the ideal
waveshape with peak value ISP; if Drive = AC Volt, the calculation is based on the phasor diagram.
Drive = Rectifier is treated as Drive = Square. In effect, this assumes that the machine is generating and
2the DC load is a large inductance.
PC-BDC calculates the magnetic and electrical parameters from the input data (geometry, magnet,
windings, and steel properties). The outputs include the magnetic flux and its distribution, the winding
inductances and resistances, the generated EMF waveforms, and the torque and EMF constants. The
generated EMF (back-EMF) can be calculated by several alternative methods: see EMFCalc in 3.
Static design is also the basis for most calculations with the GoFER. It should be regarded as the main
means of determining saturated parameters. When Drive = Sine, the embedded PC-FEA solver selected
with ipsiCalc automatically determines the saturation factors if MatchFES = AdjMEC. When Drive =
AC Volt, the embedded PC-FEA solver selected with VDFEA performs the same function. In both cases
the phasor diagram is drawn with fully saturated parameters, particularly X
d
and X
q
.
When Drive = Sine, Static design can be used in conjunction with the voltage locus in the phasor
diagram to determine the required drive voltage and several other characteristics important in
developing the operation and control over a wide speed range, without having to worry about the
complexities of the drive control. It is recommended to explore all the features and possibilities of Static
design before embarking on Dynamic design calculations.
If Drive = Square or Rectifier, PC-BDC assumes squarewave line currents of peak value ISP. The turn-on
and turn-off angles are controlled by the parameters Sw_Ctl, Th0 and Dwell. For 1-phase or 2-phase
squarewave motors (see Connex), PC-BDC defaults to 90 conduction. For 3-phase squarewave motors,
PC-BDC defaults to 120E conduction in the line current waveforms. (See Sw_Ctl and Dwell). Phase
advance can be applied to the current waveform: Th0 if Drive = Square, or gamma if Drive = Sine.
If Drive = Sine, odd-order non-triplen harmonics up to the 37th can be injected using the coefficients
Harm3..Harm37 and their associated phase angles.
If Drive = Sine or Square or Rectifier, Static design calculates with the ideal current waveforms
assuming that the supply voltage is adequate to drive these waveforms. This assumption is generally
valid at low speed, when the EMF is much less than the supply voltage. In general the supply voltage Vs
must exceed the sum of the EMF and the resistance volt-drop of the motor, together with any additional
volt-drops in the power transistors, and there must be sufficient margin to allow for the Ldi/dt voltage
drop in the inductance. If Vs is too small, the set-point current ISP cannot be attained. The current
regulator is then said to be saturated, because it is calling for a chopping duty-cycle greater than 1 in the
controlling transistors. Static design estimates whether there is enough drive voltage, and it may
display a warning message,
Not enough drive voltage to reach the set-point current ISP
To avoid this condition, increase the supply voltage Vs; or reduce ISP, or the turns, or the speed.
It is recommended to use the GoFER or the embedded finite-element solver as thoroughly as possible to
ensure that the parameters are correctly adjusted for saturation and any other geometric details that may
be only approximately calculated in PC-BDC itself. This is also important before running a Dynamic
design calculation (2.6).
If Drive = AC Volt, PC-BDC assumes a constant AC voltage supply and the load is defined by LoadSpec
and associated parameters. In this case the question of current-regulator saturation does not arise.
PC-BDC 9.04 Analysis * Dynamic design Page 41
2.6 Analysis | Dynamic design [Ctrl+D]
Dynamic design is the calculation of a single operating point by a time-stepping simulation in which
PC-BDC integrates the voltage equations of the system and calculates the current and torque waveforms
over one electrical cycle, taking into account the dynamic effects of the inductance and the EMF
waveshape. The circuit configuration is assumed to be one of those in 3.5.5. Results include the current,
EMF, and torque waveforms together with performance data such as power, efficiency, and many other
parameters, all of which are given in the design sheet.
The operating point is determined by the control parameters in Ted/Control. 3.2. These include the
speed, voltage, current set-point, firing angles, switch control, etc.
Whereas Static design forces ideal current waveforms, Dynamic design attempts to calculate the actual
ones. The theory is described in Refs. [0] and [1]. Note that Dynamic design automatically runs a Static
design first. An important function of Dynamic design is to check that the required current waveforms
of normal operation are indeed attainable. If they are not attainable, it should be immediately apparent
in Results | Simulation Graphs.
A limitation of Dynamic design is that PC-BDC uses fixed inductances with squarewave drive or fixed
synchronous inductances with sinewave drive (when dq0 = true). With saturated machines it is
advisable to pre-calculate saturated inductances using Static design with the i-psi GoFER or the
embedded finite-element solver before running a Dynamic design calculation.
Convergence
Every dynamic simulation has to run long enough for the initial DC offset transient to decay to a
negligible level, bringing the system to a steady state. PC-BDC detects the steady-state condition by
comparing the end-points of successive waveform intervals. When they are within a tolerance-band
determined by Tol, the simulation stops. The waveform interval is usually 60E or 120E for 3-phase drives.
PC-BDC uses an algebraic estimate or a previous Static design to start the simulation.
Sometimes Dynamic design is slow to converge. It can be interrupted by pressing the [Esc] key.
Alternatively the number of waveform intervals can be preset to Cycles. Cycles is particularly useful
when calculating rectifier circuits which have long time-constants associated with filter components.
The convergence tolerance can be relaxed by decreasing Tol, but this should not be necessary when the
calculation is properly set up, and a value of 32 or 64 is recommended. When the current ripple is large,
it will obviously be more difficult to detect a steady state by comparing successive waveform intervals,
and Tol can be relaxed in these cases.
Convergence problems usually occur at high speeds when the EMF is close to the supply voltage; or at
very low speeds when the chopping is at too high a frequency for the integration algorithms to follow.
At low speeds ISLA should be increased, but it is generally best to avoid extremely low speeds and to keep
ISLA = 64. This value covers most practical cases. At high speeds ISLA can be decreased to make the
calculation faster, although with modern computers there is not much need to do this.
The ease of detection of the steady state is obviously dependent on the waveform quality, which in turn
depends on the control settings. Often, a change in Sw_Ctl, ChopType, fChop or ISP may help to
converge a difficult case.
Check your waveforms !
It is best to check the EMF and current waveforms every time you run Static design or Dynamic design.
Problems often show up first in waveforms. If the waveforms aren't right, the output data certainly wont
be right. It is often easier to see imperfections in the waveforms than in the numbers in the design sheet.
Page 42 Analysis * Dynamic design PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 23 Analysis | Autosearch
2.7 Autosearch
Analysis | Autosearch is a simple means of searching for a performance target (expressed as torque,
power, or voltage) by varying one of the control parameters DuCy, ISP, Vs, or delta. Fig. 23 shows the
Autosearch dialog with an example in which the target torque is 12 Nm with a tolerance of 1%, and the
variable to be varied is the set-point current ISP.
Obviously the search is restricted to a limited set of cases. More sophisticated searches should be
implemented using Excel or MATLAB via VBA scripting, or using the internal scripting facility [F7]. A
simple example is given in Tutorial B11. Also see the Automation manual.
PC-BDC 9.04 Analysis | Torque/Speed Page 43
Fig. 24 Torque/speed curve
2.8 Analysis | Torque/Speed
The torque/speed curve can be plotted using Analysis*Torque/Speed. The result is available using
Results*Torque/Speed Graphs. Maximum and minimum speed can be adjusted using TSmax and TSmin.
The torque/speed characteristic is calculated by repeating the Dynamic design calculation from a low
speed up to the no-load speed, with fixed temperatures. [Note that in a single-point Dynamic design the
temperatures may vary, depending on the value of TempCalc; as a result, the torque computed at a single
point may not lie on the torque/speed curve.]
The values of ISLA and Tol may need to be adjusted to achieve satisfactory accuracy and convergence
in this calculation. This can be checked by increasing these parameters until there is no change in the
graph.
The X-axis, Y1-axis, and Y2-axis drop-down boxes at the bottom of the torque/speed graph can be used to
plot other parameters such as current or efficiency, or to exchange the x- and y-axes.
Control parameters such as ISP and gamma remain fixed throughout the torque/speed calculation,
whereas in practice they would usually be adjusted by the controller. To calculate the torque/speed curve
with variable control parameters, use scripting.
Page 44 Analysis | Torque/Speed PC-BDC 9.04
SHORT-CIRCUIT MAGNET BRAKING TORQUE
TOTAL
CAGE
TOTAL
Cutout
TmbscMax occurs at slip = s_mbMax
Tmbsc0
Fig. 25 Torque/speed curve of line-start motor.
Torque/speed curves of Line-start motor
The torque/speed curve of a line-start motor is made up of two components, the asynchronous cage
torque and the short-circuit magnet braking torque, [19, 20]. For split-phase motors there will generally
be a discontinuity at the Cutout speed, where the capacitor in the auxiliary circuit is switched from
C_start to C_run.
For polyphase motors the short-circuit magnet braking torque at synchronous speed is available in the
Calculator [F4] as Tmbsc0. Similarly TmbscMax is the maximum magnet braking torque and
s_mbMax is the slip at which it occurs.
PC-BDC 9.04 Analysis | Line-start (DOL starting) Page 45
Fig. 26 Line-start motor: speed vs. time Fig. 27 Line-start motor: torque vs. time
Fig. 28 Line-start motor: current vs. time
2.9 Analysis | Line-start (DOL starting)
Analysis | Line-start performs the starting calculation of the line-start motor, that is, motors with
RotType = LSIPM or Trapeze.
The results appear in Results | Dynamic simulation graphs, as shown in the examples in Figs. 26-29 for
a split-phase line-start motor. The graphs include speed, torque, current and (for split-phase motors)
capacitor voltage vs. time.
The duration of the simulation is St.Time. Other parameters relevant for this calculation are on p. 206.
The load torque is incorporated via TL0, TL1, NLT, and TLph.
2.10 Analysis | Line-start (load step)
This calculation is used only with line-start motors. A torque step defined in terms of a change of load
angle LoadStep is applied at time t_TS and removed at time t_TC. The dynamic response is calculated
and displayed in graphs similar to Figs. 26-29.
Fig. 29 Line start motor : capacitor voltage
Page 46 Analysis | Generator characteristics PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 30 Short-circuit currents and torque. The arrow shows the switch to the
steady-state at t_SS.
2.11 Analysis | Short-circuit (analytical)
This is a calculation of a three-phase sudden short-circuit, using a formula method similar to the one
described by Adkins, [30]. (Similar treatments are given by Concordia [34] and Ku [35]). The formula-
based short-circuit calculation is also available for permanent-magnet machines. It can be executed by
means of the short-cut [Ctrl+X].
The short-circuit calculation requires the subtransient reactance and subtransient time-constants. For
permanent-magnet machines the calculation of these parameters is closely related to the calculation of
rotor losses, and they are given in the loss data section of the design sheet. The rotor must have some
conducting components so that PC-BDC can calculate the subtransient reactances and time-constants,
so FreqResp must be equal to SubTrans or ScreenFn.
The theory of the loss calculations and the subtransient parameters is given in SEM-2. There is no
transient reactance in a permanent-magnet machine, and the question of transients in the field circuit
does not arise.
After running a short-circuit calculation, the graphs are available in Results | Short-circuit graphs. The
phase currents are plotted first. Press [Enter] to display the d- and q-axis currents, and the torque.
At time t_FC the solution switches abruptly to the steady-state, as shown in Fig. 30.
The maximum current in any phase is displayed in the design sheet as MaxISC, and the maximum
torque as MaxTSC.
PC-BDC 9.04 Analysis * Ranging Page 47
Fig. 31 Setting up a range on one parameter Fig. 32 Analysis | Ranging
Fig. 33 Ranging design sheet
Fig. 34 Graphs plotted with the Ranging design sheet
2.12 Analysis | Ranging [Ctrl+B]
Ranging is a batch calculation, in which parameters are stepped through a series of values. The design
sheets are available for all steps, and graphs can be plotted showing the variation of any parameter
against any other parameter. Ranging is intended to assist in the selection of an optimum value for one
or more parameters. A range of variation can be assigned to an individual parameter using [Ctrl+R] in
Ted : see Fig. 31. (More than one variable can be varied at the same time, but it is recommended to limit
the range to one independent variable). Then Analysis| Ranging [Ctrl+B] runs either Static design or
Dynamic design with a specified number of steps, Fig. 32.
After a successful ranging calculation, the design sheet contains one complete page for each step. It is
set up to make it easy to progress from one page to the next, by selecting the Step, Fig. 33.
Parameters can be selected (using Right-click or the parameter drop-down lists) for plotting on the X, Y1
and Y2 axes, Fig. 34. Use [G] to toggle between the numerical output and the graph. When the design
sheet window is active, other options appear on the design sheet menu. More details are given in the
WinSPEED manual.
Ranging has no intelligence: it merely repeats a series of calculations quickly and presents the results
efficiently.
Page 48 Results * Design Sheet PC-BDC 9.04
6
For the help line to display, the mouse cursor must be used to select the parameter.
2.13 Results | Design sheet
7 Dynamic design (time-stepping simulation):-----------------------------------
OpMode Motoring
Torque 0.924 Nm Pshaft 96.813 W Eff 81.720 %
WCu 20.181 W WFe 1.475 W WWF 0.000 W
WTot 21.656 W TempRise 0.000 EC Jrms 3.630 A/mm
2
IWpk 15.721 A IWav 9.376 A IWrms 11.404 A
ILpk 15.721 A ILav 9.376 A ILrms 11.404 A
IQchpk 15.721 A IQchav 3.214 A IQchrms 6.718 A
IQcmpk 15.721 A IQcmav 3.214 A IQcmrms 6.718 A
IDchpk 15.694 A IDchav 1.474 A IDchrms 4.460 A
IDcmpk 13.705 A IDcmav 1.474 A IDcmrms 4.460 A
IDC_D 5.225 A WConv 5.307 W EffDCSh 78.216 %
Typical section of design sheet
The design sheet shows all the input and output design parameters of the motor and drive, and their
relevant units. Use the [8],[9] keys or the mouse to scroll through the data. The help line displays
information about the highlighted parameter.
6
The output parameters are described in 3. On the screen,
input and output parameters have different colours, which can be changed using the Design
sheet|Options menu [F8].
Results | Tabbed design sheet displays the design sheet in tabbed pages, [Ctrl+Shift+F4].
The [1], [2], ... keys automatically scroll the design sheet so that the numbered sections appear on the
screen with their title lines at the top. Other useful short-cut keys are
[L] Inductance section
[H] Harmonic losses section
[6] Performance section (Static design)
[7] Performance section (Dynamic design)
These keys work with the tabbed design sheet as well.
Hard copy of the design sheet can be obtained using File*Print [Ctrl+P] from within the design sheet.
Alternatively, [Ctrl+C] can be used to copy the window to the clipboard. The design sheet can also be
saved to a text (.txt) or Rich Text Format (.rtf) file using Design sheet*Save design sheet.
The calculator [F4] accepts arithmetic expressions such as Pshaft/746. For parameters with names
containing punctuation marks, use double quotes. Some parameters have different internal and external
names, but they can still be displayed in the calculator by means of their internal names prefixed with
the # sign: for example, #piXd1 displays Xd'. A complete list of internal and external parameter names
is available in Help | Parameter list.
Use [Ctrl+F] to search for a parameter if you know its name but have forgotten its location.
PC-BDC 9.04 Results | Custom design sheet Page 49
2.14 Results | Custom design sheet
A custom design sheet can be set up by first creating a template file containing the names of variables
that are normally available in the standard design sheet, together with user-defined expressions as in
the calculator [F4]. The filename extension of the template file should be *.dss, and the file must be
identified to PC-BDC in Options|General. The format of this file is defined in the WinSPEED manual.
The custom design sheet can include complete pre-defined sections from the standard design sheet; the
names of these are listed below.
The custom design sheet can be displayed whenever the main design sheet is available. It has all the
same features as the main design sheet including the calculator [F4] and printing facilities.
The custom design sheet template file can be created or edited using a text editor. It can contain 4 main
types of formatting information: plain text, predefined sections, standard variables and user-defined
expressions, as described in the WinSPEED manual. Any number of template files may be created.
The SPEED installation generally includes at least one *.dss file as an example.
Identifiers for predefined design sheet sections in PC-BDC
@DIMENSIONS
@MAGNET DATA
@CONTROLDATA
@WINDINGDATA
@MAGNETICCIRCUITDESIGN
@STATICPERFORMANCE
@DYNAMICDESIGN
@MISCELLANEOUS
@CORELOSSANALYSIS
@STEADYSTATETHERMALMODEL
@USERDEFINEDFORMULA
@COILLOCATIONS
@CONDUCTORLOCATIONS
Page 50 Results * Simulation graphs PC-BDC 9.04
Base segment
Fig. 35 Waveforms of current, EMF and torque computed by Dynamic design. Note the "base segment"
mentioned on p. 15. These waveforms should be regularly checked during calculations with PC-BDC.
2.15 Results | Simulation graphs
After a Static design or Dynamic design, graphical results are available via Results | Simulation
graphs. A list of these graphs can be displayed by using [F2] or Graph | Display when the graph window
is active. Most of the graphs in this series are available following other Analysis functions which
automatically run Static design as a preparatory phase of the calculation. Several other graphs are
available on the Results menu following some of the specialised Analysis functions.
A combined graph of EMF, current, and torque can be displayed with [Ctrl+G]; see Fig. 35.
When the graph window is active, the Graph menu appears, with options [Z] (show zero), [G] (show grid),
[L] (show legend), [P] (show points) and [F8] (display options). [Ctrl+C] copies the window to the
clipboard in a form suitable for pasting into a spreadhseet. [Ctrl+P] prints the graph. Edit Graph
provides further facilities for changing the appearance. [F7] toggles through the CProbe options (see
below).
Current, EMF and Torque waveforms
Waveform Origin Waveforms are displayed with rotor position 2 (in E elec) on the x-axis, covering
one electrical revolution. When Drive = Square, the fundamental of the first line current waveform goes
with sin 2, but when Drive ' Sine, the fundamental of the first phase current goes with sin 2.
The rotor position 2 is the angle between a south-pole magnet axis and the axis of Phase 1 (Ax1),
calculated without skew. When Th0 (or gamma) is zero, the fundamental phase EMF will be in phase with
the fundamental phase current. Positive Th0 or gamma means phase advance of the current waveform;
but since the current waveform remains fixed in the display, the EMF waveform is retarded (as though
the PM rotor was physically retarded relative to the rotor of a shaft position sensor).
The phase sequence of the currents and EMFs in three-phase motors should always be red, yellow, blue,
except that green may replace yellow on white backgrounds. If this is not the case, check the Offset
parameter used with custom or fractional-slot windings. See the Grges diagram in the winding editor.
PC-BDC 9.04 Results * Simulation graphs Page 51
Current Probe selection CProbe in Ted/2 selects line or phase current waveforms. If CProbe = Line,
the EMF waveforms are line-line waveforms. If CProbe = Phase, they are phase waveforms (i.e., line-
neutral if connection is wye). If EMFCalc = BplotTF, the EMF used in calculations is the one calculated
by the BLV method, but the EMF calculated by the tooth-flux method is also displayed for comparison.
Zero-sequence EMF If Connex = Delta, PC-BDC plots (in white) the sum of the three phase EMF's:
i.e., the zero-sequence or loop EMF around the delta. This EMF can drive a large current around the delta.
Coils with 2/3-pitch will suppress it, as their 3rd-harmonic winding factor is zero.
EMF detection sense voltage If eDet is set in Ted, and Connex = Wye, the EMF detection waveform
is plotted over the phase-EMF waveforms.
Airgap flux distribution
The airgap flux distribution is the variation of radial flux-density around the airgap over 360 elecE. For
surface-magnet motors the following three-part graphs are displayed (see Fig. 37):
Blue Open-circuit airgap flux-density, unskewed;
Green Open-circuit airgap flux-density with skew if Skew is nonzero
Red Airgap flux-density produced by stator MMF (no saturation; no fringing)
Dotted Red Airgap flux-density produced by stator MMF (with saturation; no fringing)
Light red Open-circuit airgap flux-density, unskewed;
Dark red On-load airgap flux-density, unskewed; (no saturation)
Dotted red On-load airgap flux-density, unskewed; (with saturation)
The appearance of the graphs in the top and bottom sections depends on the value of RotorAng.
RotorAng = 0 means that a South d-axis is aligned with the x-axis. The peak negative flux-density is then
at an azimuth (angle) of zero, as in Fig. 37.
The middle graph is always plotted vs. the azimuthal angle measured from Ax1, the axis of phase 1, with
peak current in phase 1. It shows the armature-reaction flux-density produced by the stator MMF, which
is zero at Ax1 and has a peak value 90Eelec either side of it. The bottom graph is also plotted vs. the
azimuthal angle from Ax1. It shows the open-circuit flux-density distribution due to the magnet and the
total airgap flux-density, with and without saturation applied to the stator current component. In Fig.
37, Ax1 = 60Emech = 120Eelec. Therefore with RotorAng = 0, its reference axis (the South d-axis) is
rotated 120Eelec backwards (CW) relative to the axis of phase 1. The peak negative flux-density
corresponding to the South d-axis can be seen in Fig. 37. at !120Eelec or 240E.
The same conditions are reproduced in Fig. 36 with RotorAng = Ax1. The South d-axis (rotor reference
axis) is now located at +120Eelec in the top graph, but at the origin (i.e. Ax1) in the bottom one. There is
no change in the middle graph.
For surface-magnet motors all graphs include the effect of slotting if SlotMod is selected. When EMFCalc
= BLV, the unmodulated distribution is used; this waveform can be seen if SlotMod is deselected. If
Fringing is deselected and EMFCalc = BLV, the slotting effect can be seen on the unsmoothed airgap
flux-density distribution.
Many of these plots can be obtained with magnetostatic finite-element calculations and compared with
PC-BDC's calculation using the Match FE option.
A more detailed graph is shown in Fig. 38, emphasizing the fact that PC-BDC computes the effect of
armature-reaction on a slot-by-slot basis (for the MMF) and tooth-by-tooth (for the resulting flux-density).
The individual tooth flux-densities are also available for plotting, as are the yoke section flux-densities
(see below). The armature-reaction effect is shown with and without modulation of the saturation level
of the stator: see CalcSatn.
Fig. 38 Airgap flux distribution. The smooth distributions are on open-circuit. The stepped distributions show
the estimated effect of armature reaction, in which the MMF of the stator current is applied at the slot
centre-lines without any fringing effects.
Fig. 37 Airgap flux-density distributions with RotorAng = 0
Fig. 36 Airgap flux-density distributions with RotorAng = Ax1.
Fig. 39 Tiled waveforms of tooth and yoke flux-densities and EMF/turn waveforms
Fig. 40 Distribution of tooth and yoke flux-densities, with and without load
Tooth and yoke flux-density and EMF/turn waveforms
The top two graphs in Fig. 39 represent the variation of the flux-density in a single tooth or yoke section
as the rotor rotates from the reference position through 360 Eelec. The reference position is such that the
rotor reference axis is aligned with the centre-line of the tooth. If the tooth is skewed, the alignment is
taken to be at the central plane of the motor. The lower graphs represent the EMF generated in a single-
turn search coil wound around the reference tooth or yoke section. See EMFCalc, 3, and Ref. [0]. The
tooth/yoke flux-density and EMF waveforms are not displayed if Config = AirGapWdg.
When EMFCalc = BLV or ToothFlux, the graphs include bar-chart distributions of the tooth and yoke
flux-densities, with and without load, as shown in Fig. 40.
Fig. 41 i-psi diagram (energy-conversion loop)
i-psi diagram
The i-psi disgram is the locus of the point (i,R) where i is the phase current and R is the phase flux-
linkage, through one electrical cycle. The energy enclosed in the i-psi loop is proportional to the average
electromagnetic torque and is displayed in the design sheet as Tloop. (See p. 67).
Voltage and flux-linkage waveforms
PC-BDC can plot the voltage waveform of phase 1, derived either from the supply voltage and the states
of the power transistors, or by calculating the expression Ri + dR/dt. PC-BDC can also display the flux-
linkage waveforms directly. See CalcVwfm.
The flux-linkage R is the sum of the open-circuit flux-linkage (due to the magnet) and the armature
reaction component (due to the current in the stator inductance). If dq0 = false, the actual value is
obtained for each component, subject to the restriction that for salient-pole motors, the inductances are
assumed to vary sinusoidally with rotor position. If dq0 = true, only the fundamental value is obtained
for each component, (from the dq-axis model).
PC-BDC calculates and displays terminal voltage waveforms:
line-line voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca
phase voltages V10, V20, V30
Reconstructed phase voltage VFwfm
When Drive = Rectifier, or when DCSource = DCFilter, we have some additional DC voltage waveforms
Vt, VCdc, and Erec. Vt and VCdc are identified in Fig. 268 on p. 330, while Erec is the waveform of the
rectified open-circuit line-line EMF.
Fourier analysis of the reconstructed phase voltage waveform VFwfm is used to calculate a second
version of the phase-voltage phasor, V1d + j V1q, or V1rms with phase angle phiV1. This is distinct
from the Static design value of this phasor, which is calculated in the phasor-diagram calculation and
is displayed as Vd1 + j Vq1. Likewise, Fourier analysis of the phase current waveform is used to
calculate a second version of the phase-current phasor, I1d + j I1q, or I1rms with phase angle phI1.
Again this is distinct from the Static design value Id1 + j Iq1. The phase angle phi_1 ' phV1 phI1 is
the power-factor angle derived from the fundamental reconstructed voltage and current waveforms.
Fig. 42 Radial force waveforms and distribution.
Unbalanced pull, Radial forces
Fig. 42 shows three graphs describing radial forces. To display them together, use [Results | Simulation
Graphs | Radial forces]. They can also be displayed separately: see the Graph | Display list.
The top graph shows the total unbalanced magnetic pull on the rotor resulting from eccentricity or run-
out (Ecc). The force is plotted as a function of rotor position. As the rotor rotates, the force varies as a
result of the interaction between the magnets and the teeth. Unbalanced magnetic pull is normally zero
unless Ecc (eccentricity) is non-zero.
The middle graph shows the variation of radial force on a single tooth as the rotor rotates. The force is
computed from the airgap flux-density. A second calculation from the tooth flux-density is also shown
dotted in Fig. 42. This second method shows zeros and is generally more heavily modulated; it is less
reliable than the first graph but the peak values should be roughly comparable and therefore the second
method can be taken as an approximate check on the first one.
The bottom graph shows the azimuthal distribution of radial force around the periphery of the airgap,
computed from the distribution of B
2
around the airgap.
Fig. 43 Thermal graphs produced with TempCalc = Hot10.
Thermal graphs
When TempCalc = Hot10, PC-BDC calculates a thermal transient which can be used not only to assess
the final steady-state operating temperatures in the machine, but also the rates of rise of temperature.
A simple duty-cycle feature is included as shown in Fig. 43, with ThDuCy = 0@4 and ThOnTime = 10 min.
(See ThDuCy and ThOnTime).
These graphs are available via Results | Thermal graphs.
Torque/speed graphs are available after Analysis | Torque/Speed has been run.
Short-circuit graphs are available after Analysis | Short-circuit (analytical) has been run.

PC-BDC 9.04 Results * Harmonic analysis Page 57
Fig. 44 Harmonic coefficients displayed in graphical form
2.16 Results | Harmonic analysis
PC-BDC can calculate the harmonic Fourier coefficients of most of the internally-computed periodic
waveforms available for plotting. The waveform must first have been calculated by running a Static
design or Dynamic design with appropriate setup options.
Use the tabbed pages to select a graph or a table of numerical values.
PC-BDC assumes that the waveforms contain only sine coefficients. Both odd and even terms are
included. Normally the even terms are zero, except in the torque waveform, where the odd terms are
zero. When the DC term is displayed for a symmetrical waveform, it is generally the half-cycle mean
value. (For the torque waveform, it is the mean torque).
Except in the torque waveform, the harmonic coefficients are normalized to the fundamental, which
shows as 1@0000. The zero'th harmonic is the half-wave mean value. For the torque waveform, the
coefficients are normalized to the mean value, which shows as 1@0000. The only non-zero torque
harmonics in a three-phase motor are those of order 6k, where k is an integer. In a 2-phase motor the only
non-zero torque harmonics are of order 4k.
PC-BDC also displays a table showing the fundamental, the half-wave mean, the RMS, and the max. and
min. values of the waveform. These are in ordinary units (Volts, Amps, N-m, etc.). The total harmonic
distortion (THD) is also displayed.
The harmonic analysis is automatically updated when the waveform selection is changed (WfmId). The
number of harmonics is defined by NHx, which is the same as the input parameter NHx in Ted.
Page 58 Results * Phasor diagram PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 45 Phasor diagram
Fig. 46 Phasor diagram of split-phase line-start capacitor motor, [20].
2.17 Results | Phasor diagram
The phasor diagram displays phase currents and voltages in per-unit or in ordinary units, with polar or
cartesian components. Individual phasors or groups of phasors can be switched on or off by means of the
check-boxes in the tree. Any phasor can be "selected" and its name is displayed on the diagram. When
Connex = Delta, the phasor diagram displays "equivalent wye" parameters. Flux-linkage phasors are
related to the corresponding voltage phasors by the jT operator.
Origin of coordinates For symmetrical polyphase machines the phasor diagram is displayed with
Eq1, the fundamental EMF in phase 1, along the q-axis. The q-axis leads the d-axis, and therefore the
phasor Eq1 has a phase angle of 90E. All phase angles are measured from the d-axis. The magnet flux-
linkage Psi1Md lies on the d-axis. Examples of common phasor diagrams used in PC-BDC are shown in
Figs. 292-294.
Fig. 45 shows an example for a split-phase PM capacitor motor. If SymmCpts = Original, the diagram is
drawn with the main winding voltage Vm on the d-axis; otherwise it is drawn with Eq1 on the q-axis.
The phasor diagram for single-phase machines is more complicated because it includes the negative-
sequence components as well as the positive-sequence as well as the actual voltages and currents. It is
described in detail in SEM-2.
PC-BDC 9.04 Results * Phasor diagram Page 59
Fig. 47 Voltage locus
Fig. 48 Voltage locus data
Voltage Locus

Figs. 47 and 48 show the voltage locus which is available on the
Argand menu when the phasor diagram window is active.
Vph1 and Iph1 are the phasors resulting from a Static design
calculation with ISP and gamma ((). The current locus is a
circular arc, whose radius is determined by Current for locus.
Upper and lower limits can be added to this locus by means of the
/ box.
Current for locus also determines an elliptical voltage locus determined from the phasor diagram as
gamma varies between gamma limits. This shows how much phase voltage is required from the inverter
drive, as gamma varies.
Voltage for limit circle determines a circular arc that can be used to represent the maximum available
voltage from the inverter drive. In Figs. 47 and 48 this voltage is user-defined, but there is also a choice
of several standard voltage levels used to characterize the inverter capability, such as Six-step 180E, Circle
tracking, etc. (See p. 241 and Tutorial B09). Upper and lower limits can be added to this locus by means
of the / box.
Torque for locus defines a constant-torque locus, which is a rectangular hyperbola (offset from the q-axis
in the case of salient-pole machines). Upper and lower limits can be added to this locus by means of the
/ box. The torque locus is omitted from Fig. 47 to keep it uncluttered.
The theory of the voltage locus is provided in SEM-2 [1], It is also used in EMDS to study the
torque/speed characteristics of an IPM.
Page 60 Results | B squared PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 49 Results | B squared
2.18 Results | B squared
Fig. 49 shows the B squared window. This is a teaching facility intended to show the development of
the radial forces on the teeth as the rotor rotates; (move the slider).
The net force on the rotor is also shown by a red arrow from the origin. The table shows the (x,y)
components of the tooth forces.
ecc is the eccentricity (q.v. in 3).
The force is not calculated in force units, but is indicated indirectly by the value of B
2
taken from the
airgap flux-density distribution (which itself is approximate).
PC-BDC 9.04 Results | Dials Page 61
Fig. 50 Dials showing Tshaft, Eff, and Jrms
Fig. 51 Instrument panel setup for dials
2.19 Results | Dials
A useful feature in the Results menu is the instrument panel, or dials, Fig. 50. Dials provide a visually
effective presentation of gauge data, such as speed or torque, when changes are being made in the data,
especially when seeking improvements by manual changes.
The setup panel for instrument panels is shown in Fig. 51. An instrument panel can include more than
one dial. Once an instrument panel has been created, it can be displayed by selecting it from the Results
| Dials menu. When an instrument panel has the focus, there will be a Dials menu on the main Menu bar,
which can be used to make adjustments. [F8] also opens the instrument panel setup, when the
instrument panel has the focus.
Page 62 Tools | GoFER (FE Link) PC-BDC 9.04
7
Other finite-element programs can be used if they are programmed to read GDF files and write output data files in the correct format for reading
back into PC-BDC.
Fig. 52 The GoFER used with MatchFE to obtain finite-element data for comparing with PC-BDCs internal
magnetic calculations
Fig. 53 The GoFER
2.20 Tools | GoFER (Finite-element link)
GoFER means "go to finite-elements and return". The GoFER sets up a number of standard finite-
element computations generally with PC-FEA
7
and returns data to PC-BDC for calibration or
comparison with PC-BDCs internal computations.
Fig. 52 shows the process for comparing PC-BDCs internal magnetic calculation with finite-element
results from PC-FEA (for example, the open-circuit airgap flux-density distribution). Tools | FE Results
| MatchFE is the main method for comparing finite-element results (both graphical and numerical) with
PC-BDC's internal calculations.
Pressing [F11] activates the GoFER, Fig. 53. The GoFER can initiate several different standard finite-
element computations, and for each one there is a range of setup options. In simple terms, the GoFER
creates a *.gdf file of geometric and material property data, together with region definitions, boundary-
conditions, and instructions for the finite-element program. ("GDF" = "geometry definition file").
The GoFER options are described in detail in the PC-BDC GoFER manual.
The data in the *.gdf file can be edited with the GDF editor, which displays the geometry of the solution
domain (usually one or more pole-pitches), with boundary nodes and details of materials and excitation
levels, Fig. 54. The GDF editor is useful for checking the distribution of boundary nodes, which
determine the mesh density in PC-FEA. If necessary they can be modified within the GDF editor, before
passing control to PC-FEA. The GDF editor is described in the WinSPEED manual.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | GoFER (FE Link) Page 63
Fig. 54 The GDF editor
Fig. 55 PC-FEAs script window, immediately after being activated by the GDF editor
To activate PC-FEA from the GDF editor, press [F11]. PC-FEA opens in the script editor, Fig. 55.
To proceed with mesh generation, press [Enter] or click [Run], Fig. 56.
Page 64 Tools | GoFER (FE Link) PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 56 PC-FEA mesh
Fig. 57 PC-FEA flux-plot
To proceed with the solution, press [Enter] or click [Continue]. PC-FEAs flux-plot is shown in Fig. 57.
PC-FEA also displays charts such as the graph of the radial and tangential flux-density components
around the airgap (at the mid-gap radius), Fig. 58.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | FE Results Page 65
Fig. 58 Graph of radial and tangential flux-densities around the airgap,
plotted in PC-FEA
Fig. 59 Text files produced by PC-FEA
2.21 Tools | FE Results
Tools | FE results is the means by which the results of the finite-element computation are examined in
PC-BDC and compared with PC-BDC's own calculations.
PC-FEA writes several text files of numerical data for each GoFER operation. The particular set of
results to be imported can be selected according to the GoFER that is being used. For example, Fig. 58
shows the distribution of radial and tangential flux-densities around the airgap computed by the Bgap
GoFER, and imported into PC-BDC by Tools | FE Results, MatchFE : Bgap. A typical text file is shown
in Fig. 59.
Page 66 Tools | FE Results | MatchFE PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 60 Match FE : BGap, Btooth
Match FE : Bgap, Btooth
Match FE: Bgap, Btooth is a convenient graphical means for comparing PC-BDCs magnetic circuit
calculations with finite-element data. It plots the airgap flux-density distribution or the tooth-flux
waveform calculated by PC-BDC, together with data written by PC-FEA or an equivalent finite-element
program. The Bgap or Btooth GoFER must be executed first, to produce the necessary FE results.
PC-BDC's internal calculation can be adjusted without leaving the Match FE window, by entering new
values of adjustment factors such as XBrT, XFringe, etc. and pressing [Ctrl+2] (or Analysis|Static
design). The process can be repeated until good visual agreement is attained, and these values can be
used subsequently with the current design file to improve the accuracy of PC-BDCs performance
calculations. The adjustment factors are described in 3. Of course, parameters not shown in the MatchFE
window can be edited in Ted or in a custom editor.
Basic procedure (for use with PC-FEA) (See Fig. 52).
1. Run Static design on the design to be analyzed.
2. Tools*FE Link [F11] starts the GoFER, Fig.53. Select Bgap distribution or Btooth waveform.
3. Press [F11] or click [OK] to start the GDF Editor. In the GDF Editor, make any necessary
changes to the subdomains and press [F11] to start PC-FEA.
4. In PC-FEA, press [F9] or click [Run] to create and optimize the mesh; [F8] or [Continue] to solve
the field equations; [Exit] to return to the script window; and [Exit] again to return to PC-BDC.
5. In PC-BDC, select Tools * FE Results | MatchFE and choose Bgap or Btooth as required. PC-
BDC will open a File*Open dialog: select the appropriate file, (*.bgp, *.tfw etc). The main part of
the filename will be the same as in the PC-BDC datafile.
6. Adjust PC-BDCs parameters, if necessary, to achieve a closer match.
Detailed examples are given in Tutorials such as B08 and B16.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | FE Results | MatchFE Page 67
Fig. 61 Match FE : i-psi loop.
T
loop
'
W
mp
2B
Match FE: i-psi
Match FE : i-psi loop is a convenient means for comparing the energy-conversion loop ("i-psi loop")
computed by PC-BDC with the equivalent loop computed by finite-elements. The energy-conversion loop
is the locus of the point (i,R) where i is the instantaneous phase current and R is the instantaneous phase
flux-linkage through a complete electrical cycle. If W is the area enclosed within the i-psi loop, the average
electromagnetic torque is given by
where m is the number of phases and p is the number of pole-pairs. T
loop
is available in PC-BDC as Tloop,
and generally agrees with Tgap (See p. 237).
Finite-element computation of the i-psi loop requires the rotor to be stepped round through a complete
electrical cycle, or a suitable fraction thereof, with the stator currents adjusted at every step to maintain
synchronism with the rotor position. The GoFER sets up this calculation automatically in PC-FEA.
The i-psi loop is a powerful and efficient means for calibrating PC-BDC to give a more accurate value for
the average torque even when the machine is highly saturated. PC-BDC uses a circuit analysis with fixed
values for the open-circuit EMF and the winding inductances in its Dynamic design calculation. In a
highly saturated machine the inductances saturate and there is even uncertainty as to what happens to
the EMF under these conditions, because superposition does not apply and therefore the direct-axis flux
cannot be uniquely partitioned into separate components attributed to the magnet and the d-axis
armature current.
A graphic image of the entire i-psi loop computed by PC-BDC's fixed-parameter model is presented
alongside the finite-element version. All the effects of saturation on the inductances and the EMF are
somehow combined into the shape of the i-psi loop. By adjusting the factors XBrT (which controls the
open-circuit EMF), XCd and XCq, PC-BDC's version of the loop can be made to match the finite-element
one. Then the level of confidence in PC-BDC's torque calculation will be significantly improved.
Because the i-psi loop represents the average electromagnetic torque, good agreement between PC-BDC
and PC-FEA can be achieved even when there are discrepancies in the detail of the flux-linkage and
current waveforms: see Fig. 62.
Page 68 Tools | FE Results | MatchFE PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 62 MatchFe : i-psi loop comparison of flux-linkage waveforms between PC-BDC and PC-FEA
The psi wfm view in MatchFE : i-psi Loop is the most useful for adjusting PC-BDCs reactances and EMF
for saturation, especially when Show Fundamental is checked in the MatchFE menu. Also when dq0
= true, suggested values for E
q1
, X
d
and X
q
are displayed in this window.
The phasor diagram at top right is a further aid to making adjustments. The voltages in this diagram are
generated by flux-linkages whose waveforms appear in the psi wfm view. When there is a mismatch
between the PC-BDC waveform and the PC-FEA waveform, the phasor diagram suggests the necessary
modifications to Xd, Xq or Eq1.
For example, by reducing Xq with XCq < 1, we can see that the fundamental of the PC-BDC psi-waveform
will be retarded in phase. Again, by increasing XBrT, we can see that Eq1 will be increased.
For sinewound machines the embedded solver can be used as an alternative to the i-psi GoFER.
Although it does not provide as much information as the i-psi GoFER, it is automatic and does not
require any matching adjustments in PC-BDC. The embedded solver is described in detail around p. 142,
and an introduction to it is given on p. 7. Also see Tutorial B19.
MatchFE | Inductance returns phase self- and mutual inductances computed with frozen permeabilities.
They are therefore incremental inductances, not total inductances, and they should not be used for
estimating torque or generated voltage.
MatchFE | Elements Table returns the details of flux-density waveforms on an element-by-element basis
for processing to estimate iron losses.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | FE Results | MatchFE Page 69
Fig. 63 MatchFE: Skew Cogging
Fig. 64 Definition of skew angle with slices
MatchFE : Skew Cogging
After a cogging torque calculation has been computed by the finite-element GoFER, the cogging torque
waveform can be imported into PC-BDC using Tools | MatchFE: Skew cogging, as in Fig. 63. PC-BDC can
process this waveform by reproducing it in a number of slices and applying a skew, to show the effect
of skew on the cogging torque.
The definition of skew is illustrated in Fig. 64. F is the true skew angle corresponding to Skew which is
measured in stator slot-pitches. It represents the azimuthal displacement BC. > is the skew step
between two adjacent slices. In Fig. 64 the number of slices is N = 3, and F = 3>. In general F = N>.
The angle " measured on a developed (flat) surface is ArcTan (BC/AB). If the stack length is L and the
rotor surface radius is R, " = RF/L [rad].
Page 70 Tools | Export Data PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 65 Export data: options
2.22 Tools | Export Data
This menu is for transferring internal data (including parameters and waveforms) to external files for
processing by other programs: for example, spreadsheets, graphing programs, system simulation
software, CAD etc.
Lamination as DXF is useful for exporting the lamination cross-section to another analysis program (such
as mechanical or electromagnetic finite-element analysis) or to graphics/word-processing program or
a CAD program. The .dxf file format is a vector representation (not a bitmap), so it has greater
precision and permits the geometry to be edited as well as the appearance. .dxf files can be displayed
in the outline editor using Outline | DXF Overlay.
Bg for MatchFE writes a *.dat file that can later be imported into the MatchFE window in PC-BDC, for
comparing different versions of the airgap flux-density distribution. Bg for EMFCalc=ExtBgap writes a
similar file that can be imported during Static design or Dynamic design as an external B
gap
distribution. Bt for MatchFE and Bt for EMFcalc=ExtTFW are similar options for the tooth flux waveform.
The tooth and yoke flux and EMF files are for the appropriate EMFCalc options and have no MatchFE
version.
Torque/speed data is a record of the Torqe/speed calculation.
WriteLoop (in Ted) is used to select waveforms for writing to external datafiles every time a Static
design or Dynamic design is run. (See 3).
Use [Ctrl+E] to specify external file names for importing into PC-BDC when a Static design or Dynamic
design is run.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | Motor-CAD Page 71
Fig. 66 Tools |Motor-CAD
Fig. 67 Opening menu in Motor-CAD
2.23 Tools | Motor-CAD
Motor-CAD is a specialised thermal-analysis software for electric machines, developed and supplied by
Motor Design Ltd. (www.motor-design.com). Data can be transferred from PC-BDC to Motor-CAD and
the two programs can be used interactively; see Figs. 66 and 67. A detailed introduction is given in EMDS
(Electric Machine Design Using SPEED and Motor-CAD) available from Motor-Design Ltd.
Page 72 Imbalance PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 68 Imbalance calculator
2.24 Tools | Imbalance

Fig. 68 shows the Imbalance window. This is a teaching facility intended to visualize the phasors of a
3-phase system under unbalanced conditions.
The wye vectors AN, BN, and CN form a star, while the delta vectors AB, BC and CA form a closed
triangle. The centroid lines of the closed triangle are also shown.
The vertices A, B, C and the neutral point N can be moved at will with the mouse. Alternatively the wye
vectors can be entered numerically in the edit box.
Whatever is done with the wye vectors, PC-BDC updates not only the diagram but also the delta vectors
and the positive, negative, and zero-sequence components.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | kT,kE Page 73
Fig. 69 SPEED kT/kE calculator
2.25 Tools | kT Calculator
The kT Calculator (Tools | kT,kE) calculates the torque constant k
T
from the EMF constant k
E
. It is
provided as a utility particularly for the servo-motor industry. In this field of application it is common
for manufacturers to measure k
E
, but much less common to measure k
T
. The reason for this is that k
T
is considerably more difficult and more expensive to measure, and it also depends on the drive current
waveform so it is not truly a constant of the motor by itself. The drive current waveform is often not even
under the control of the motor manufacturer. For example, it is common for motors with sinewave EMF
to be used with squarewave current drives.
The measured k
E
is can be used to predict k
T
, and this predicted value is often included in manufacturers'
datasheets. One must pay attention to the drive current waveform, and to other important details: for
example, whether k
T
is quoted as the torque per unit of peak current or RMS current.
It is often assumed that k
T
= k
E
, but in practice the relationship between k
T
and k
E
depends on
(i) the way in which k
T
and k
E
are defined;
(ii) the motor EMF waveform;
(iii) the drive current waveform; and
(iv) the units of measurement.
There are consequently many possibilities for an incorrect prediction of k
T
from k
E
. A detailed analysis
of k
T
and k
E
is given in GB: that is, Reference [0], Chapter 8.
Page 74 Tools | kT, kE PC-BDC 9.04
Background ideal DC motor
In general terms, the torque constant k
T
is the ratio of the electromagnetic torque to the current. The
EMF constant k
E
is the ratio of the EMF to the speed. In the ideal DC motor, with no losses, no saturation,
and no temperature-variation, k
T
and k
E
are constant. Moreover, in SI units they are also numerically
equal. Again, in ideal PM DC motors there are only two lead wires, so there can be no confusion as to
where the current or the EMF is measured. Finally, since the EMF, the current, and the voltage are all DC,
the peak, mean and RMS values of these quantities are all the same.
3-phase brushless DC motors
Brushless DC motors have much in common with the DC commutator motor, especially the idea that there
is one DC current that is commutated to the three phases in turn. The three phases have flat-topped EMF
waveforms and this makes it possible to use k
T
and k
E
in the same way as they are used with commutator
motors. At the same time we have to remember that brushless motors have alternating current and
alternating EMF waveforms. To ensure the equivalence or continuity of usage with the DC commutator
motor, k
E
should be defined as the peak line-line EMF divided by the speed, and k
T
as the torque divided
by the peak line current. Then k
T
= k
E
in SI units.
If the EMF waveform is flat-topped or trapezoidal, its peak value is the same as its mean rectified value,
so the mean rectified value could equally well be used to measure k
E
. Any departure from these careful
definitions will destroy the equivalence with the ideal DC commutator motor, causing k
T
and k
E
to be
unequal, even in SI units. Instead, they will be related by a numeric constant. So, for example, if we
define k
T
as the ratio of torque to RMS line current, we will come off the standard and lose the
equivalence with the ideal DC commutator motor. The SPEED calculator displays the values of k
E
and
k
T
in these non-equivalent definitions. You can specify k
E
according to one definition, and you can
instruct the program to calculate k
T
according to another definition, and the SPEED calculator will
determine the correct numeric relationship between them.
3-phase brushless AC motors
Brushless AC motors ideally have sinusoidal EMF and sinusoidal current waveforms. The mean rectified
line-line EMF waveform is no longer equal to the peak value, but is smaller by a factor 3/B. The peak,
mean, and RMS line currents are all different from one another (as was also the case for the brushless DC
motor), and the relationships between them are also different from those that apply to the brushless DC
motor. With pure sinewave motors there is no way to define k
T
and k
E
that will make them equal, even
in SI units. This may come as a surprise; it is certainly a nuisance.
3-phase sinewave motor with squarewave drive
A motor with sinusoidal EMF is sometimes used with a squarewave drive. It turns out that for this
combination, k
T
and k
E
will be equal (in SI units) provided that k
E
is defined as the mean rectified EMF
divided by the speed, while k
T
is defined as the torque divided by the peak line current. k
T
can still be
defined as the torque divided by the RMS line current, but then it will not be equal to k
E
.
3-phase squarewave motor with sinewave drive
This combination is uncommon. It makes no difference whether k
E
is defined as the peak line EMF or the
mean rectified line-line EMF divided by the speed, since these are the same. But k
E
will not be equal to
k
T
, no matter how k
T
is definedwhether using the peak or RMS line current.
Delta
Delta-connected motors are treated as a black box with three terminals. From these three terminals
it is impossible to distinguish the delta connection from the wye connection, and the SPEED calculator
treats them as equivalent, except that for the delta connection it displays the line-neutral EMF with respect
to a false neutral point.
DC motors
The relationships for DC motors can be obtained by setting EMF = DC and Current waveform = DC. If only
one of these is set to DC, the results will generally be zero.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | kT,kE Page 75
Using the SPEED kT calculator
With several different combinations of motor EMF waveform and drive current waveform, and with
several different ways to define k
T
and k
E
, the SPEED calculator provides an organized procedure for
ensuring the correct relationship between k
T
and k
E
. It also calculates the EMF for a given speed, and the
current for a given torque. These quantities are given in peak, mean and RMS form as appropriate,
together with the EMF and current of the equivalent DC motor. The power is also displayed.
The SPEED kT calculator step-by-step
(The steps also refer to the numbered labels in Fig. 69).
1. Select the motor connection: wye, delta, or 2-phase.
2. Select the EMF waveform: Trapezoidal, Sinewave, or DC. (DC should be used only with DC current
waveform).
3. Select the method of specifying k
E
: e
LLpk
/T
m
, (mean rectified e
LL
) /T
m
, or (equivalent DC EMF)/T
m
.
For 2-phase motors, the peak phase EMF e
pk
or its mean rectified value can be used.
4. Input k
E
. The units can be Vs/rad or V/krpm, as selected under kEunits.
5. The calculator converts k
E
to show the value in Vs/rad and V/krpm.
6. Input the speed in RPM.
7. The calculator displays the EMF in different forms, including the EMF of the equivalent DC motor.
8. Select the method of specifying k
T
: torque divided by i
Lpk
or I
L rms
or I
d
, the current of the
equivalent DC motor.
9. The calculator displays the correct value of k
T
. This value will be correct in two particularly
important respects. First, it is theoretically consistent with the relationships in the equivalent
DC motor. Secondly, when we enter the torque, we will get the correct current, according to the
type of drive current waveform.
10. Select the type of drive current waveform. (DC should be used only when EMF = DC).
11. Enter the torque. The units can be selected under Torque units.
12. The calculator displays the current in different forms, including the current of the equivalent DC
motor. The power is also displayed alongside k
E
and k
T
.
13. Enter the line-line resistance in ohms.
14. The calculator displays the motor constant, equal to the locked-rotor torque divided by the copper
loss in watts at locked-rotor. For three-phase motors K
m
= k
T[rms]
//(1@5 R
m
), where R
m
is the line-
line resistance, that is, the resistance between two line terminals with the third terminal open-
circuited. For two-phase motors K
m
= k
T[rms]
//(R
m
), where R
m
is the combined resistance of the
two phases in series. For DC motors K
m
= k
T
//(R
m
), where R
m
is the armature resistance.
Page 76 Tools | Machine characteristics PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 70 Machine characteristics
2.26 Tools | Machine characteristics
This feature is under development and is available only with the short-cut key [Ctrl+Shift+M] . It is
intended to show the circle and ellipse diagrams together with the torque/speed characteristics.
PC-BDC 9.04 Tools | D
2
L calculator Page 77
Fig. 71 Tools | D
2
L calculator
2.27 D
2
L calculator
Tools | D
2
L calculator (Fig. 71) is a convenience for estimating the required rotor diameter and length for
a given torque or power, when the airgap shear stress F or the torque per rotor volume TRV is specified.
The length/diameter ratio must also be specified. See SEM-1.
Page 78 Tools | Calculate PCslot PC-BDC 9.04
Fig. 72 Tools | Calculate PCSlot
2.28 Calculate PCSlot
Tools | Calculate PCSlot (Fig. 72) is a specialized GoFER similar to the slot permeance GoFER, intended
to give a quick calculation of the stator slot permeance coefficient.
The settings are similar to those used in the slot-permeance GoFER, which is described in the PC-BDC
GoFER manual.
PC-BDC 9.04 3.1 Input parameters * Outline editor Page 79
3. Reference section
Parameter definitions are grouped by the operations where they are first seen:
3.1 Input parameters first seen in the outline editor;
3.2 Input parameters first seen in Ted;
3.3 Output parameters first seen in the design sheet.
Parameters are described roughly in order of appearance in each section. Units are default units. Default
values are enclosed in braces {} or are underlined. For alphabetic listing, see the main index. Use
[spacebar] or [F2] to edit non-numeric parameters.
Page 80 3.1 Input parameters * Outline editor PC-BDC 9.04
3.1 Input parameters (outline editor)
Dimensions are defined in the reference diagrams, but some common ones are detailed here also.
RadSH Shaft radius.
Rad1 Rotor surface radius.
Gap Airgap length, measured at the d-axis. (See dGap if RotType = ExtRad or Spoke and
Embed = Not; or Rmo if RotType = BreadLoaf and Embed = Type2).
LM Length of magnet in the direction of magnetization. If RotType = Spoke, this is an output
parameter determined by BetaM and Rad1.
BetaM Magnet pole arc. See reference figures. [Emech or Eelec according to Units | PhysAng].
For multi-layer (synchronous reluctance) machines (Fig. 129), set BetaM = 180Eelec.
Poles Number of poles (2!480).
Nmbp Number of magnet blocks per pole. This must be 1 if RotType = Spoke, InsCP or InsRel.
If Nmbp > 1, EMFCalc must be BLV, BPlotTF or ToothFlux. For IPM rotors the magnet
width is set by MagWid, but for surface-magnet types it is set by BetaM according to Fig.
197. {1}
Edges Shape of the edges of the magnet slots when RotType = IPM and Embed = Type1, Type
2 or Type 6 . See Figs. 224, 231 and 240.
Rad3 For interior-rotor motors, Rad3 is the largest radius in the motor cross-section. For
exterior-rotor motors it is the smallest.
Slots Number of stator slots (2!480). For standard winding types (ConcEqual, ConcSine and
Lap), Slots/Poles/NPhases must be an integer. For fractional-slot windings,
Slots/NPhases must be an integer. Note that NPhases (the number of phases) is not
directly an input parameter, but is selected via Connex.
SD Slot depth, measured from stator bore, Fig. 179.
SO Slot opening.
SV Vertex angle, Fig. 184 (S_Slot = PllTooth only). If SV = 0, the slot bottom is flat.
SWid Slot width
TWS Tooth width.
TGD Tang depth
SOang Slot opening angle, Fig. 179.
Lstk Stator stack length. For the rotor length
dGap Airgap taper, i.e. the difference between the maximum and minimum airgap. (RotType
= ExtRad or Spoke, Embed = Not); Fig. 214).
filSB Slot-bottom fillet radius (S_Slot = Flared or VarDpth only).
filSO Slot-opening fillet radius (S_slot = Flared or VarDpth only).
Polarity is either Normal or Conseqnt. Certain rotor types (e.g. InsCP with Embed = Type3; or
IPM with Embed = Type2) can be constructed as consequent-pole types with every other
magnet removed.
DimGroup is a switch to select different sets of dimensions to define the geometry or parts thereof.
For example, see Fig. 228.
Default The default group of dimensions, used in the majority of cases
Alter 1,2,.. Alternative 1,2,3... groups of dimensions.
Currently, DimGroup is used only with RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2, Type6, and
Type 7 to dimension certain variants shown in Figs. 228, 231, 241, and 246.
LamShape Shape of outer surface of stator lamination. See Figs. 173, 174, and 196.
Circle Plain circle
Circ. Chf. Circle with chamfers or flats
Rect. Rectangular with chamfered corners
Rect. Rnd. Rectangular with rounded corners
Annulus Detailed geometry with holes, chamfers, notches, etc. : see Fig.
174 on p. 276.
CoolRing The circular lamination is augmented with two cooling rings
outside Rad3. These are still part of the lamination. NHCR1
must be > 0. See Fig. 175, p. 277.

HX1 x-coordinate of hole 1 when LamShape = Annulus; see Fig. 174. If LamShape = CoolRing,
HX1 is the pitch-circle radius of hole 1; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
HX2 The pitch-circle radius of hole 2 when LamShape = CoolRing; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
HR1 Radius of hole 1.
HY2 y-coordinate of hole 2.
HX3 x-coordinate of hole 3.
HX4 x-coordinate of hole 4.
WX Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Figs. 173 and 174.
WY Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Figs. 173 and 174.
DX1 Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
DY1 Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
DX2 Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
DY2 Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
DWX Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
DWY Dimension of non-circular lamination; see Fig. 174.
PCDH1 Pitch circle diameter of first ring of holes; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
PCDH2 Pitch circle diameter of second ring of holes; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
HoleSym1 Placement of holes in first ring: aligned with tooth or slot; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
HoleSym2 Placement of holes in second ring: aligned with tooth or slot; see Fig. 175, p. 277.
SlotBot Slot-bottom shape. See Reference diagrams in 3.5.1.
8
The tooth shape is not apparent in the diagram because of clipping.
Fig. 73
Fig. 74
Fig. 75
Fig. 76
Fig. 77
Fig. 78
S_Slot Stator slot shape (see Reference Diagrams)
Round Round-bottomed semi-closed slot with
parallel-sided teeth of width TWS.
8
Use filSO to apply a fillet radius inside
the tooth-overhangs.
Square Semi-closed slot with parallel-sided
teeth of width TWS. The slot bottom is
an arc centred on the axis of rotation.
filSO applies a fillet radius inside the
tooth-overhangs; and filSB at the
bottom corners.
VarDpth As Square, but with variable depth where slots of up to four different
sizes are used. The order of these slot sizes is defined by SlotOrder.
Their depths are defined respectively by SD, SDS_B, SDS_C and
SDS_D. The fillet radius at the bottom of each slot is defined
respectively by filSB, filSB_B, filSB_C and filSB_D.
PllSlot Open slot. The teeth are tapered. The
wound part of the slot starts at a depth
TGD from the bore.
PllRound Semi-closed parallel-sided slot of width
SWid with semi-circular bottom. The
teeth are tapered.
PllSquare Semi-closed parallel-sided slot of width
SWid with flat bottom. The teeth are
tapered.
PllTooth Flat-bottomed open slot defined by
parallel-sided teeth of width TWS.
The wound part of the slot starts at a
depth TGD from the bore.
Fig. 79
Fig. 80
Fig. 81
Fig. 82
Fig. 83
Fig. 84
Fig. 85
HW Semi-closed slot with semi-circular
bottom. Neither the slots nor the teeth
are constrained to be parallel-sided.
Use filSO and filSB for fillet radii.
Flared Semi-closed slot with basically
parallel-sided teeth having a flare
defined by the angle SOang. Use filSO
and filSB for fillet radii.
GolfTee Tooth geometry designed for use with
very wide slot-openings. See Fig. 191.
This slot also has a "coil-side model"
for finite-element analysis: in other
words, the coilside dimensions can be
adjusted independently and the
coilsides do not necessarily fill the
entire slot. (See Xspan). Use filSO and
filSB for fillet radii.
GH Semi-closed slot with parallel-sided
teeth, variable vertex angle SV. This
slot type has a fillet radius on the
inside of the tooth tang, and a hole can
be located on the tooth centreline. See
Fig. 190.
MISlot "Magnetically isolated" slot, in which
the two coil-sides are separated by an
unwound central tooth. See Fig. 193.
OneOHang Asymmetric slot; see Fig. 194, p 287.
OffsetSO Asymmetric slot; see Fig. ?, p. ?
Fig. 86 Config selects airgap (slotless) winding, normal, or bifurcated teeth.
Config Stator configuration options
Normal Normal slotted stator.
AirgapWdg Airgap windings, i.e. "slotless". The machine is modelled with the
stator teeth removed. The airgap winding is treated as a cylindrical
current sheet at the radius (Rad1 + Gap + SD/2): that is, half-way
down the "slot". The concept of "slots" is retained in order to maintain
the same winding configuration as in the slotted stator.
The inductances of airgap windings have two components. One is the
"airgap" or bulk-field component, which is based on the cylindrical-
sheet model, and is calculated using Fourier series of space harmonics
using Hagues method; [1]. The second component takes account of the
thickness of the winding.
When Config = AirgapWdg, EMFCalc is forced to HBMethod. See also
NHx and NHxL.
BifTeeth Stator has bifurcated teeth, i.e., dummy slots in tooth faces. Use
EMFCalc = ToothFlux.
Fig. 87
Fig. 90
Fig. 88
Fig. 89
Fig. 91
Fig. 92
RotType Rotor type. (See reference diagrams). Those marked SP are considered to be "salient-pole"
machines; PC-BDC expects these to be sinewound. (Also see Saliency, pp. 5 and 169).
SurfRad Radially magnetized surface magnets. Two Embed types are
provided in addition to the non-embedded example shown here. An
air-cored rotor can be modelled with RCore = Air, if EMFCalc =
KFR. With very large airgaps, use EMFCalc = KFR or HBMethod.
Not embedded Embed Type 1 Embed Type 2
SurfPll Parallel-magnetized surface magnets. The magnet arc BetaM can
extend up to 180E, causing the magnet edges to abut along the q-
axis. Two Embed types are provided. With large airgaps, use
EMFCalc = HBMethod.
Fig. 93
Fig. 98
Fig. 94 Fig. 95
Fig. 96 Fig. 97
Fig. 99 Fig. 100
BreadLoaf BreadLoaf type magnets. With Embed = Type2, the outer and inner
faces of the magnet can be profiled with different circular arc radii
Rmo and Rmi. Although the rotor body is not cylindrical, PC-
BDC treats this rotor (by default) as nonsalient-pole, and allows
EMFCalc = HBMethod, since this type of rotor may be used at high
speed with a retaining ring that leads to a large airgap length. (The
same is true of SurfRad and SurfPll).
Embed Type 3 Embed Type 4
Spoke Spoke type magnets, magnetized in the circumferential direction.
Two embedded types are supported. The rotor hub is assumed to be
non-magnetic. PC-BDC allows EMFCalc = HBMethod with this
type of rotor, provided it is non-embedded. The magnetized rotor
is represented by current-sheets spanning the rotor apertures.
This type of rotor is highly salient and is susceptible to strong
saturation of Xq and (to a lesser extent) Xd. Finite-element
analysis is virtually essential for this type of machine. SP
Fig. 101
Fig. 102
Fig. 103
Fig. 104
Fig. 105
ExtRad External radially magnetized surface
magnets. EMFCalc = KFR is well adapted for
this rotor type, especially with low saturation
levels. Tapered-gap single-phase motors can
be modelled with this rotor type. See Fig. 214.
ExtPll External parallel-magnetized surface magnets. EMFCalc =
HBMethod can be used with this rotor type when the radii are
centred on the axis; otherwise use BLV or ToothFlux.
Not embedded Embed = Type 1 Embed = Type 2
Embed = Type 3
Fig. 106
Fig. 107 Fig. 108 Fig. 109
Fig. 110 Fig. 111
Fig. 112
Fig. 113
IPM Interior permanent magnets, magnetized in
the radial direction. Six different Embed
types are provided in addition to the non-
embedded type. This type of rotor is highly
salient and is susceptible to strong saturation
of Xq and (to a lesser extent) Xd. Finite-
element analysis is virtually essential for this
type of machine. SP
Not embedded
Embed Type 1 Embed Type 2 Embed Type 3
Embed Type 7
Fig. 114
Fig. 115
Fig. 116
Fig. 117
Fig. 118
InsCP Inset magnets/consequent-pole type. EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR
is not possible with this rotor type. SP
Embed Type 3
Polarity=Conseqnt
Embed Type 3
Polarity = Normal
Fig. 119
Fig. 120
InsRel Inset magnets/hybrid reluctance type.
EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR is not possible
with this rotor type. Two embedded variants
are available, similar to SurfRad with Embed
= Type1 or Type2.
FullRing Full ring magnets (2-pole only). The magnets
are parallel-magnetized, and only the
fundamental component of the magnetic field
is computed. For chamfered or multi-pole-
pair versions, use SurfPll. This rotor type has
its own magnetic field calculation and
EMFCalc has no effect.
Fig. 121 Fig. 122 Fig. 123
Fig. 124 Fig. 125
Fig. 126
LSIPM Line-start interior PM motor. This rotor has a cage winding whose
dimensions are given in Fig. 253. The end-ring dimensions are
given in Fig. ?, and the conductivity and density of the conductors
are given on page ?. PC-BDC calculates this motor as a 3-phase
motor or as a split-phase capacitor motor. Starting calculations can
also be performed by PC-BDC. SP
Trapeze Line-start interior PM motor. This rotor has a cage winding whose
dimensions are given in Fig. 256. The end-ring dimensions are
given in Fig. ?, and the conductivity and density of the conductors
are given on page ?. PC-BDC calculates this motor as a 3-phase
motor or as a split-phase capacitor motor. Starting calculations can
also be performed by PC-BDC. SP

Embed Defines various configurations of "embedded" magnets. In most cases Embed effectively
determines the shape of a punched lamination into which the magnets are inserted.
With embedded magnets it is possible to introduce sufficient iron into the rotor to change
the saliency from nonsalient-pole to salient-pole: for example, with RotType = SurfRad
and BetaM = 120Eelec there is clearly a significant degree of saliency, whereas Embed =
Not gives a nonsalient-pole machine.
Rib For embedded magnets Rib is assumed to be a thin section of lamination as shown in the
reference diagrams, which has no significant magnetic effect. Since PC-BDC does not
calculate any magnetic effect of the rib except magnet leakage flux at the ends of the rib,
Rib should not be used to model a deeply embedded magnet with RotType = SurfRad,
SurfPll, BLoaf, InsCP or InsRel.
RotorAng Rotor offset angle, used to position the rotor at different angles. RotorAng also
determines the phase of the airgap flux-density distribution, which is plotted with two
distinct frames of reference in Results | Simulation Graphs | Airgap flux density
distribution. In the uppermost graph, the abscissa is the azimuthal angle measured from
the x-axis. In the others, it is the azimuthal angle measured from the angle Ax1, i.e. the
MMF axis of phase 1. If RotorAng = 0, the rotor will be aligned with a S pole on the x-
axis; Fig. 37. But RotorAng must be set equal to the unskewed value of Ax1, if the open-
circuit airgap flux-density distribution is to be correctly aligned with the armature
reaction MMF to display the resultant flux-density distribution; Fig. 36. This alignment
can be achieved by pressing [A] in the outline editor or in the winding editor.
PC-BDC 9.04 3.2 Input parameters * Template editor Page 93
3.2 Input parameters (template editor)
The template editor (Ted) is arranged in tabbed pages:
1. Electrical Winding parameters. The winding editor should be used as far as
possible to edit winding layouts, but parameters such as the wire size, the
number of parallel paths, and other details not visible in the winding
editor can be edited here.
Slot insulation parameters define details of liners, wedges, etc.
Multi-phase. This section is specifically for multiplex windings and
appears only when Connex = 6-phase, 9-phase, or 4-phase. These cases are
not available (and the Multi-phase section is hidden) if Drive = Square.
Inductance. This section contains calculation options and adjustment
factors for inductance calculations.
EMF. This section contains calculation options and adjustment factors for
EMF calculations.
2. Magnetic Magnets and related parameters this section contains calculation
options and adjustment factors for magnets including such factors as
bracing bridges and assembly clearances or glue layers. .
Fringing parameters concern the shape of the airgap flux distribution on
open-circuit.
Leakage parameters concern the pole-to-pole leakage on open-circuit.
Other magnetic parameters include a variety of relatively rarely used
parameters, although some of them (such as XTTarc, XBtpk, ShAxFlux
and WstCalc) can be important in certain cases.
Mechanical parameters are mainly geometric features that affect the
magnetic field calculation. They should not be confused with mechanical
losses see below).
Embedded FEA parameters control the embedded finite-element solver
for sinewave machines when ipsiCalc = PCFEA or VDFEA = true.
continued/...
Page 94 3.2 Input parameters * Template editor PC-BDC 9.04
3. Control Control parameters are the ones for setting up the type of drive and its
operation, including the speed and current-regulator settings.
Drive control parameters are for defining the operating point, mainly in
terms of current-regulator parameters such as ISP, gamma, etc. Several
of these are used only with the more complex current-regulators, and are
otherwise greyed-out.
Drive circuit parameters are mostly impedances of secondary elements
in the drive circuit.
Load specification for AC Volt operation these parameters apply
when Drive = AC Volt.
Settings are for controlling the operation of PC-BDC itself, and some of its
calculation functions.
4. Losses Iron Loss parameters select the method of calculating iron loss and
provide adjustments.
Windage, Friction and Bearing Loss should be self-explanatory.
Rotor eddy-current losses These parameters control a complex set of
calculations not only for rotor eddy-current loss but also for subtransient
parameters (of permanent-magnet machines) and screening.
Stator Can, Rotor Can. Parameters for a sealing can on the stator or a
retaining can on the rotor, sometimes called a "sleeve".
Slotting, Cogging These parameters are for the slot-modulation of the
airgap flux, and are important for some of the rotor loss calculations.
5. Thermal The basic thermal page contains thermal parameters for the simpler methods
of heat-transfer calculation (see TempCalc). For Hot10 thermal calculations,
two additional pages appear in Ted.
Additional pages Additional pages may appear in Ted for special machines such as line-
start machines.
Order of parameters : Input parameters appear in the manual roughly in order of appearance in Ted and
not in alphabetical order. For output parameters, see 4.
Ted/1 Electrical
The Electrical page is concerned with the physical parameters of the windings, with the slot insulation,
and with resistance, inductance, and EMF.
The layout of the windings is covered in the winding editor.
Windings
Winding definitions (See Fig. 264, p. 327)
Winding General term for the totality of coils in the machine. The winding is generally divided
into m phases, most usually 3 or 2. The phase windings are almost always displaced by
2/m (elec rad) from each other around the stator periphery.
Coil A coil is a loop of wire, usually with many turns. Every coil has two coilsides, a "go"
coilside and a "return" coilside. The two coilsides are generally in different slots displaced
from one another by Throw, which is an integral number of slot-pitches. In PC-BDC all
coils have TC turns and equal Throw, unless specified otherwise as a custom winding in
the winding editor. In many machines the number of coils per phase is equal to the
number of poles, and Throw is generally somewhat less than Slots/Poles. Throw is also
known as "pitch" or "span". When Throw < Slots/Poles, the coils are said to be "short-
pitched" or "chorded".
Turn A turn has two conductors, a "go" conductor and a "return" conductor. One turn
constitutes a complete circuit in returning to its starting-point, while a coil has an integer
number of turns, usually specified as TC. Non-integer numbers of turns, which are
sometimes found in factory specifications, can be accommodated by altering the numbers
of turns of individual coils in a custom winding in the winding editor; but TC is
invariably an integer. For a discussion of fractional and half-turns, see SEM-1.
Coilside A coil-side is half a coil and usually contains TC conductors.
Paths If all coils in a phase are in series, each conductor carries the phase current: I
cond
= I
ph
.
But the coils of a phase may be connected in any series/parallel combination, with
PPATHS parallel paths. In that case the conductor current is I
cond
= I
ph
/PPATHS. PC-
BDC does not provide the user complete flexibility to interconnect the coils of a phase
winding in an arbitrary manner. It has only the PPATHS parameter, and it assumes the
user will ensure that the parallel paths are electrically balanced.
Strand A conductor may be wound as a single wire or it may be divided into NSH "strands in
hand". For the same conductor cross-section area, the wire (strand) diameter is smaller
by the factor 1/%NSH. Coils may be easier to insert with multiple strands-in-hand,
especially in low-voltage machines where thick conductors would be too stiff. In PC-BDC,
"strand" is synonymous with "wire", and WireSpec refers to one strand. The current in
one strand is I
strand
= I
cond
/NSH.
Layer If the number of coilsides in the entire winding exceeds the number of slots, then at least
one slot will have more than one coilside. If, for instance, every slot contains 2 coilsides,
the winding is said to have two layers. With lap windings, one coilside will be in the
bottom layer and one in the top layer, giving a uniform winding layout. For good
utilization it is desirable to have equal numbers of coilsides in every slot, although PC-
BDC does not require this (and it is sometimes not the case in practice).
Balance A balanced three-phase winding is one with identical phase windings displaced by
120Eelec. The resistances and inductances in all three phases are equal, and the EMF
waveforms are balanced in the sense that they have the same waveshape and are
displaced in time phase by 120E at the fundamental frequency. Ideally such windings
should be supplied by balanced currents. A balanced two-phase winding has identical
phase windings displaced by 90Eelec. A split-phase winding also has two phases but in
general they are not balanced, even though they are often displaced by 90Eelec.
Connex specifies the winding connection and the number of phases.
1-Phase "1-phase" motors have a default conduction angle of 180Eelec. and are
assumed to be supplied by an H-bridge: see Fig. 270. If Drive = Square,
the default conduction angle is 180Eelec, but it can be adjusted using
Dwell; the phase advance is controlled by Th0. If Drive = Sine, the
conduction angle is effectively fixed at 180E and the phase advance is
controlled by gamma.
Symmetrical single-phase motors cannot produce unidirectional
torque over the entire 360E of rotation and therefore require some
auxiliary means of self-starting. For exterior-rotor motors with Poles
= Slots, PC-BDC can model the effect of pole taper (see dGap) on the
EMF and running torque waveforms if EMFCalc = ToothFlux.
However, it does not compute the reluctance torque (i.e. the "parking"
or "detent" torque) for this type of motor. For the so-called "1-phase
bifilar" motor, use Connex = n-Ph Uni.
If Drive = AC Volt, the single-phase option is called SplitPh because
the motor will be running as a split-phase synchronous motor with a
run capacitor.
2-Phase "2-phase" motors are assumed to be supplied by separate independent
H-bridges in the two phases: see Fig. 270. If Drive = Square, the default
conduction angle is 90Eelec, but it can be adjusted using Dwell; the
phase advance is controlled by Th0. If Drive = Sine, the conduction
angle is effectively fixed at 180E and the phase advance is controlled by
gamma.
3-phase "3-phase" motors are assumed to be supplied by separate independent
H-bridges in the three phases: see Fig. 270. If Drive = Square, the
default conduction angle is 120Eelec, obtained with Sw_Ctl = C120_Q1
or V120_Q1; but other Sw_Ctl modes are possible and can be adjusted
using Dwell; the phase advance is controlled by Th0. If Drive = Sine,
the conduction angle is effectively fixed at 180E and the phase advance
is controlled by gamma. Note that mutual inductance between phases
is not included in this model, as it is when Connex = Wye or Delta.
Wye "Wye" motors are assumed to be supplied by the 6-transistor bridge
shown in Fig. 268. If Drive = Square, the ideal line current waveforms
are rectangular with 120Eelec conduction angle adjustable by Dwell;
the phase advance is controlled by Th0. If Drive = Sine, the
conduction angle is effectively fixed at 180E and the phase advance is
controlled by gamma. The circuit equations are solved in direct phase
variables if dq0 = false, or in d,q variables if dq0 = true (permitting the
simulation of sinewound salient pole motors).
Delta "Delta" motors are assumed to be supplied by the 6-transistor bridge
shown in Fig. 269. The Drive options and associated parameters
Sw_Ctl, Th0, gamma, dq0 are used in the same way as when Connex
= Wye, because the drive controls the line currents, not the phase
currents.
Connex (continued) : Unipolar and Bifilar connections
3-Ph Uni In this connection each of the three phases is supplied by a single-
ended circuit of the form of Fig. 275, and Drive must be Square. The
Zener diode prevents spurious conduction during negative half-cycles
of the generated EMF (requiring Vz > e
pk
, where e
pk
is the peak
generated EMF). It also accelerates the decay of current at the end of
the conduction period. PC-BDC assumes that the Zener voltage is high
enough to prevent spurious conduction during the negative half-cycles
of EMF, and therefore it does not attempt to calculate these half-cycles.
n-Ph Uni This connection is for unipolar drive circuits (sometimes called
"single-ended"). The phases can be connected "monofilar" or "bifilar"
see Figs. 277 and 276. All these motors generally require a tapered or
stepped airgap, or some other starting-assist feature. PC-
BDC currently does not model auxiliary starting devices.
Fig. 277/276(a) is a pure single-phase configuration. Torque pulses are
produced only on positive half-cycles.
Fig. 277/276(b) is a 2-phase configuration. Torque pulses can be
produced only on positive half-cycles in each phase. There should be no
mutual coupling between phases 1 and 2, which are normally
orthogonal.
Fig. 277/276(c) is similar to Fig. 277/276(a), except that torque pulses
can be produced on both positive and negative half-cycles. This
arrangement is sometimes called "1-phase bifilar". PC-BDC treats it as
a 2phase motor with tightly coupled phases: see Fig. 274 on p.334.
Fig. 277/276(d) is similar to Fig. 277/276(b), with a second pair of
windings, wound "bifilar" with respect to the first pair. Thus, phases
1&3 are bifilar, and 2&4 are bifilar. But there should be no mutual
coupling between phases 1 and 2; or between 1 and 4; or between 2 and
2; or between 3 & 4.
Drive must be Square in all cases. Note that Figs. 277 do not show the
suppression circuits which are generally necessary to protect the
transistors from overvoltage at turn-off. The circuits used in PC-
BDC are shown in Fig. 273 for Bifilar ' false, and in Fig. 274 for
Bifilar = true.
Connex (continued) : Multi-phase connections (See p. 339)
6-phase Fig. 282 shows the 6-phase connection, which is a pair of 3-phase
wye-connected windings (a1,b1,c1) and (a2,b2,c2). The physical
offset between the axis of phase a1 and the axis of phase a2 is " Eelec,
where " ' PolyOffs 360E/Slots Poles/2. Both sets of 3-phase
windings are balanced, and the two sets are identical except for the
difference in physical orientation. If the rotor rotates counter-
clockwise, the EMF in the second set will lead the EMF in the first
set by the angle ". If PolyOffs = 0, the two sets of windings are
essentially in parallel, though connected to different sources.
When Connex = 6-phase, Plex must be 2.
When Drive = AC Volt, the first set is supplied by an AC voltage Vs
(V rms line-line), and the phase angle of this voltage is zero because
the first set is taken as the "master". The second set is supplied by
an AC voltage Vs2 which leads Vs by the angle " phVs2. Thus
phVs2 is the deviation from the expected phase angle of Vs2.
All parameters not specifically identified as "multi-phase"
parameters in the design sheet are the same as they would be with
Connex = Wye.
9-phase Just as the 6-phase arrangement can be described as a "duplex" 3-
phase winding, the 9-phase can be described as a "triplex" 3-phase
winding. Fig. 282 does not show it explicitly, but the winding offset
of (a3,b3,c3) from (a2,b2,c2) is the same angle ", so that the three sets
are equally spaced. When Connex = 9-phase, Plex must be 3. When
Drive = AC Volt, the second set of windings is supplied by Vs2,
leading Vs by " phVs2, and the third set by Vs3, leading Vs by 2"
phVs3.
4-phase The 4-phase arrangement can be described as a "duplex" 2-phase
winding, Fig. 283. Again the winding offset is " ' PolyOffs
360E/Slots Poles/2, and the second phase is supplied by a source
voltage Vs2 (RMS), which leads Vs by the angle " phVs2.
5-phase The 5-phase arrangement is a true polyphase machine with five
phases spaced as shown in Fig. 284 at 72E elec from one another.
Whereas 6-phase and 9-phase machines can be fed from Plex
separate 3-phase inverters, the 5-phase machine requires a 5-phase
inverter or 5 separate single-phase inverters. In principle a 10-
phase machine could also be implemented with 2 separate 5-phase
inverters, but neither is available in PC-BDC.
WdgType selects one of five winding types:
ConcEqual Concentric winding; equal turns/coil TC.
ConcSine Concentric winding, with sinusoidally distributed turns/coil, based
on TC.
Lap Integral-slot/pole lap winding; equal turns/coil TC.
FracSlot Fractional-slot winding; equal turns/coil TC.
Custom Full custom winding
The first four are standard winding types: i.e., they can be constructed automatically by
PC-BDC from the parameters TC, Throw and CPP in Ted. Custom windings must be
constructed coil-by-coil using the winding editor.
Throw Also known as pitch or span. A coil in slots 1 and 6 has Throw = 5 slot-pitches.
CPP Coils per pole. Standard windings have one group of CPP coils per pole. For custom and
fractional-slot windings, CPP is not defined. See Fig. 264. Normal windings have 2 CPP
coilsides under each magnet pole: e.g., a 4-pole motor with CPP = 1 has 4 coils per phase.
Under each magnet pole there are two coil-sides, one from each of two adjacent coils.
Consequent-pole windings have CPP coil-sides under each magnet pole.
Offset [Custom and fractional-slot windings]. Offset is the number of slot-pitches between the
start of Phase 1 and the start of Phase 2. For 3-phase machines the obvious choice is 2/3
Slots/Poles, but if this is not an integer, alternatives can be tried, for example by
repeatedly adding Slots/Poles to this value. For example if Slots = 15 and Poles = 4, 2/3
15/4 = 10/4, not an integer. But 10/4 + 2 15/4 is an integer 10, so 10 works.
Do not use fractional values. If PC-BDC detects a value that is not consistent with the
internal algorithm, it displays a warning message with a recommended value. If Offset
is incorrect, the phase sequence and the distribution of conductors will be incorrect. Also,
since PC-BDC constructs its waveforms from replicas of a base interval (60Eelec in 3-
phase motors), an incorrect Offset can cause discontinuities in these waveforms.
TC Turns per coil.
NSH No. of strands-in-hand in one conductor. See Fig. 263 {1}
PPATHS No. of parallel paths (or circuits) in a phase winding. PPATHS must not exceed the
number of POLES. {1}
Conductivity of wire in stator (armature) winding
PCWire Percentage conductivity of wire used in stator coils (as a percentage of the conductivity
of OFHC Copper at 20EC, i.e. 1@724 10
8
ohm-m). If PCWire = 0, copper is assumed. [%]
{0}
TCCWire Temperature coefficient of resistivity of wire used in stator coils; used only when PCWire
> 0. [%/EC] {0@393, with base temperature 20 EC}
WireDens Density of wire used in stator coils; used only when PCWire > 0. [kg/m
3
] {8800}
Adjustment of length of wire used in stator (armature)
Ext Winding extension. The coils may protrude a distance Ext beyond the lamination stack
at each end, before bending into the end-turn. This is sometimes necessary to make
insertion easier, or if the stack is to be skewed after winding. The mean turn length (MLT)
is increased by 4 Ext and the "length over end-turns" (LgthOEnd) is increased by 2
Ext. If CalcVer cv12, Ext affects the end-turn component of the self-inductance. See
XET and Fig. 176. {0}.
XET The end-turn length is subject to uncertainty arising from differences in manufacturing
practice. XET directly adjusts (multiplies) the internally calculated end-turn length. It
therefore affects the stator resistance and the copper weight. If CalcVer cv12, XET
affects the end-turn component of the self-inductance. See XLendt.
Adjustment of overall length over end-turns
EndFill End-winding fill factor (compaction factor) for calculating LaxPack, the total length of
the motor with compacted end-windings. When EndFill = 1, the end-windings are
compacted into a solid "doughnut-shaped" mass of copper of the same volume as the
original end-windings. This represents the smallest possible end-winding volume and
length. When EndFill = 0@5, there is virtually no effect. EndFill should lie between 0@5
and 1@0. See Fig. 176. {0.5}
Packing density of coils in end-turns
CoilFill Packing density of end-turn wires, used with ETCalc = BDC 8.0. This is intended to make
fine adjustments to the end-turn length according to the packing density of the end-turn
wires. It therefore affects MLT, Lendt and the phase resistance Rph. Low values should
be avoided, and adjustments should be kept near 1@0. {1}
Adjustment of phase resistance
X_R Adjustment factor for phase resistance. X_R should be used only for speculative
investigation of the effect of the phase resistance per se. It should never be used to adjust
the phase resistance of the PC-BDC model of a real machine; Ext and XET should be used
instead, so that the MLT and copper weight will be kept consistent with the resistance.
For split-phase line-start motors, see also XRAux. {1}
Rext Extra resistance added in series with the phase resistance Rph. Unlike Rph, Rext does
not vary with temperature. Rext is intended to represent leads and connectors inside the
machine. It is not affected by X_R. [ohm] {0}
9
In America, this is spelt gage.
Wire specification
WireSpec determines the method for specifying the wire size. i.e. the size of one strand. (See NSH;
also see WireSpec2, WireSpecA). The wire is assumed to be copper with a resistivity of
1@724 10
!8
ohm-m at 20EC, or 0@6787 microhm-inch, and a temperature coefficient of
0@00393 EC
!1
relative to a base temperature of 20EC.
BareDia The bare wire diameter of one strand is specified as Wire.
AWGFrac The strand diameter is calculated from American Wire Gauge (B&S)
using Gauge, which can be fractional.
AWGTable American Wire Gauge table. Uses Gauge as input.
SWGTable Standard Wire Gauge table. Uses Gauge as input.
MWGTable Metric Wire Gauge table. Uses Gauge as input.
SFill The gross slot fill factor is specified as an input parameter SFg and PC-
BDC calculates the wire size from the number of turns and the slot
area Aslot.
SFillHBL The net slot-fill factor SFn is specified.
Rect The wire is rectangular with dimensions wa and wb. PC-BDC is not
specific as to which of wa and wb is "width" and which is "height", or
how these dimensions are oriented within the slot.
User The wire size is selected from a custom wire table by Gauge. For
custom wire tables, see the File Formats manual.
Wire Bare wire diameter of one strand. (See NSH).
Gauge Wire gauge.
9
The help line shows the wire size (diameter). Use [F2] to display table
values.
SFg Input value of the gross slot fill factor, i.e. the copper area per slot divided by Aslot. (See
Fig. 260). See also p. 217.
SFn Input value of the net slot-fill factor; see Fig. 260.
wa,wb Dimensions of one strand of bare rectangular wire.
WireCR Corner radius of rectangular wire. {0}
WireCR2 Corner radius of rectangular wire, when WireSpec2 = Rect. {0}
WireCRA Corner radius of rectangular wire, when WireSpec2 = Rect. {0}
InsThick Insulation thickness on one strand. For round wire, the insulated wire diameter is
calculated as the bare copper diameter plus 2 InsThick. For rectangular wire,
InsThick is applied to each side. For custom wire, if the insulation thickness retrieved
from the custom wire table is zero, PC-BDC uses the Ted value of InsThick. If WireSpec
= AWGFrac or AWGTable, the insulation thickness on each strand is calculated from an
internal formula for "heavy-build" insulation corresponding to AWG tables, and InsThick
is ignored.
Wire specification composite conductors
WireSpec2 The stator conductors can be wound with two or even three wire sizes, adding NSH2
strands of the second wire and NSHA strands of the third wire to NSH strands of the first
wire. The number of turns per coil TC remains unaltered. WireSpec2 is the method of
specifying the second wire. {none}
WireSpecA WireSpec parameter for third wire. For split-phase motors with AuxSpec = FullSpec,
WireSpecA is used for the auxiliary winding and the main winding is restricted to 2 wire
sizes. {none}
Wire2 Wire gauge parameter for second wire.
WireA Wire gauge parameter for third wire when three wire sizes are used, or in the auxiliary
winding of a split-phase motor.
NSH2 Number of strands in second wire.
NSHA Number of strands in third/auxiliary wire.
InsThk2 Insulation thickness on one strand of second wire. See InsThick.
InsThkA Insulation thickness of third wire (or auxiliary wire if Connex = SplitPh).
Slot insulation parameters
Liner Thickness of slot liner. The liner is assumed to follow the periphery of the shaded area in
the slot drawing in the Reference section. The wrapped length of the liner can be seen in
Fig. 260 on p. 325.
TopStick If true, the "topstick" area ATstick is subtracted from Aslot in calculating AslotLL, Fig.
260. If filSO = 0, or in slots which do not have the fillet-radius filSO, ATstick can be
calculated from the slot dimensions as in Fig. 262, if wTstick and hTstick are both zero.
(For S_Slot = GH, filSB_B must also be zero). Otherwise ATstick is calculated as
wTstick hTstick. {false}
wTstick Width of topstick; Fig. 262. {0}
hTstick Height of topstick; Fig. 262. {0}
TwjWid Width of top wedge, Fig. 261.
TwjLeg Leg length of top wedge, Fig. 261.
TwjThk Top wedge thickness, Fig. 261. Set TwjThk = 0 if no wedge is used.
PhsWid Width of phase separator, Fig. 261. A phase separator is assumed to be present between
every pair of coilsides in any slot that holds more than one coilside. The total area of all
the phase separators in a slot is taken into account in the calculation of the individual
SFn values displayed in the winding editor, and in MaxSFn, but the phase separators
are ignored in the calculation of SFn.
PhsLeg Leg length of phase separator, Fig. 261.
PhsThk Thickness of phase separator, Fig. 261.
Multi-phase
Plex The multiplicity or "plex" of a multiplex winding. True multiplex windings must have
Connex = 6-phase, 9-phase, or 4-phase. A 6-phase or 4-phase winding must have Plex = 2,
and a 9-phase winding must have Plex = 3. See SEM-2. {1}
NumPoly If Connex is not 6-phase, 9-phase or 4-phase, Plex reverts to the old NumPoly name and
usage, in which the torque and DC current of NumPoly separate windings are simply
added, without considering mutual coupling between phases. {1}
PolyOffs Phase displacement between adjacent sets of 3-phase windings, or between adjacent sets
of 2-phase windings, measured in slot-pitches. PolyOffs is used only with multiplex
windings; see Connex and Plex. For a given total number of phases mx, PolyOffs should
be set so that alphax or ", the displacement angle between winding sets, is equal to
180k/mx, where x is the multiplicity (Plex), and k is a positive integer (usually 1). This
condition is required to ensure balanced operation among the x sets of windings.
uM12d User-defined mutual inductance between d
1
and d
2
coils in the dq-axis model of a
multiplex winding, expressed as a fraction of Lmd and added to Lmd. If uM12d ' 0, PC-
BDC calculates the additional mutual inductances from the slot-mutual inductances and
the differential inductances. See SEM-2. [p.u.] {0}
uM12q User-defined mutual inductance between q
1
and q
2
coils in the dq-axis model of a multiplex
winding, expressed as a fraction of Lmq; see uM12d and SEM-2. [p.u.] {0}
2
and d
3
coils, expressed as a fraction of Lmd;
see uM12d and SEM-2. [p.u.] {0}
2
and q
3
coils, expressed as a fraction of Lmq;
3
and d
1
coils, expressed as a fraction of Lmd;
3
and q
1
coils, expressed as a fraction of Lmq;
Vs2 RMS supply voltage for the second set of multiplex windings. If Connex = 6-phase or 9-
phase, Vs2 is a line-line voltage, each 3-phase set being wye-connected. If Connex = 4-
phase, it is simply the line voltage (which is indisinguishable from the phase voltage).
{Vs}
phVs2 Phase shift of Vs2 relative to pVs ", where " ' PolyOffs 360E/Slots Poles/2 and pVs
' 0. Normally phVs2 = 0, so that the supply to the second set of 3-phase windings leads the
voltage applied to the first set by ". [0] {Eelec}
Vs3 RMS supply voltage for the third set of windings when Connex = 9-phase and Plex = 3.
Vs3 is a line-line voltage. [V rms] {Vs}
phVs3 Phase shift of Vs3 relative to pVs 2", where " ' PolyOffs 360E/Slots Poles/2 and
pVs ' 0. Normally phVs3 = 0, so that the supply to the third set of 3-phase windings leads
the voltage applied to the first set by 2". [0] {Eelec}
Fig. 127 Structure of inductance calculation in PC-BDC. The red dots indicate parameters calculated from
geometry and winding data; all other parameters are derived from these according to the circuit theory
in SEM-2.
Inductance
Fig. 127 shows the structure of the inductance calculation, including the application of adjustment factors
which may be needed to account for saturation. This diagram is only an indication of some of the
dependencies; for a complete account, see SEM-2.
PC-BDC calculates all the essential primary inductance components: Lm0, Gd, Gq (from which Ld and
Lq are derived); and Lg, Mg, Lslot, Mslot, and Lendt (from which Lph and Mph are derived). Ld and
Lq are mainly of interest for sinewave drives, especially with salient-pole machines. Lph and Mph are
mainly of interest for squarewave drives and nonsalient-pole machines.
If CalcLdiff = SPEED, the differential leakage inductance components LDiff and MDiff are derived from
the other components. The essential method is to separate the fundamental space-harmonic of the
"airgap" inductance from all the other harmonics. The fundamental is represented by Lg_0, while the
total airgap inductance is represented by Lg and Mg; the separation equations are given in SEM-2. If
CalcLdiff = Classical, the differential leakage inductance is calculated from the winding factors. This
method is thought to be more appropriate for wound-field machines which typically have a relatively
small airgap and a large number of slots/pole, when compared with permanent-magnet machines.
However, in these machines the differential leakage is often small and can be explicitly excluded from
the calculation by setting XLdiff = 0 with Diffsat = XLdiff. Differential leakage is also known as
"harmonic" leakage.
Saturation of the differential leakage is sometimes important and it can lead to different values in the d-
and q-axes. This can be accounted for by means of the modification introduced via Diffsat (p. 108), in
conjunction with the embedded finite-element solver and MatchFES. Fig. 127 shows this modification
more or less as an afterthought, but again, refer to SEM-2 for details.
XL Adjustment factor for inductance. XL multiplies all components of the inductances and
reactances, including Lext. See Fig. 127 on p. 105. {1}.
Lext Extra stator inductance per phase. Lext is intended to represent the inductance of leads
and connectors inside the machine. It is added to the other components Lslot, Lgap,
Lendt before XL is applied. The other inductance parameters should be considered
carefully before using Lext. See p. 105. [mH] {0}
XCd adjusts that component of d-axis synchronous reactance that is attributed to the
fundamental flux-linkage of armature reaction per phase when the machine is operating
in the balanced state. This component is often called the magnetizing reactance in the d-
axis, X
md
(see SEM-2), and sometimes it is called the airgap component; but the most
important thing about it is that it is attributed to the fundamental space-harmonic of the
stator ampere-conductor distribution. XCd is the primary means of adjusting Xd;
separate adjustments are available for the slot-leakage, the end-turn leakage, and the
differential leakage. When MatchFES = AdjMEC, the embedded solver (ipsiCalc =
PCFEA or VDFEA = true) adjusts XCd and not the leakage components. XCd adjusts the
synchronous inductance coefficient Gd; (see SEM-2 or Ref. [0]). {1}.
XCq adjusts the fundamental magnetizing component of the q-axis synchronous reactance Xq
via Gq, just as XCd adjusts the fundamental magnetizing component of Xd. {1}.
uGd User-supplied value of the synchronous inductance coefficient Gd for the d-axis. This can
be used in place of XCd: instead of multiplying the internally-calculated value of Gd, uGd
simply replaces it. Since the value of X
m0
is very definite, this approach may be a simpler
and more direct way to assess the accuracy of the simple theoretical formulas for X
d
. It
can also be used in cases where PC-BDC completely fails to give a satisfactory result, for
example, when the geometry is too far from one of PC-BDCs standards. In such cases the
value of uGd can be obtained from the ratio of X
m0
with a measured value of X
md
, that is,
with X
d
X
F
, where X
F
is the total leakage reactance per phase. (See SEM-2 or Ref. [0]).
uGd is not activated unless it has a positive value, in which case it takes precedence over
XCd and the internally calculated value of Gd. Then X
md
will have the value uGd X
m0
.
{0; i.e., inactive}
Note that uGd and uGq must be used in cases where the analytical calculation of Xd and
Xq fails or is unsupported. For example in Fig. 247, p. 317, different settings of IPM7dg1
can remove whole sections of the rotor, and in some of these cases the only way to
compute the EMF and inductances is by means of the GoFER or the embedded solver.
uGq User-supplied value of the synchronous inductance coefficient Gq for the q-axis. This is
similar to uGd for the d-axis. {0; i.e., inactive}
XphiBrFG Flux-spreading factor used with multi-layer IPM (or synchronous reluctance) machines.
The magnetic bridge at the outer surface of the rotor spreads the armature-reaction flux
into the flux-guides, and this has the effect of making the flux-barriers seem narrower
than they actually are. This tends to increase Xq. The effect is evident in Fig. 128, which
has I
q
but I
d
= 0. XphiBrFG is applied as a reduction in the effective width of each flux-
barrier. If XphiBrFG = 0, it has no effect. The recommended value of XphiBrFG is
between 0@5 and 0@8, but it should be obtained by comparison with finite-element results
using the i-psi GoFER or the embedded solver. {0@5}
It is noted in passing that in the synchronous reluctance machine Xd is naturally low; but
the bridge increases the d-axis armature-reaction flux (though not in proportion to the
current). An example is shown in Fig. 129. It is recommended with such multi-layer
rotors to set BetaM = 180E.
Fig. 128 q-axis armature reaction flux is spread into the flux-guides by the bridge
Fig. 129 The bridge increases the d-axis flux of armature reaction, but not in
proportion to the current
CalcLdiff Method of calculating differential leakage inductance.
SPEED Differential leakage is calculated from the difference between the
total airgap inductance and that component thereof that is due to
the fundamental space-harmonic of the winding distribution.
This method is preferred with permanent-magnet machines.
Classical Differential leakage is calculated from the winding factors
according to the classical formula (Ref [0]). See NHDiff.
NHDiff The number of harmonic winding factors used in calculating differential leakage
inductance when CalcLdiff = Classical. NHDiff must not exceed NHx. {100}
DiffSat Selects the method by which the differential leakage reactance is incorporated in the
synchronous reactances Xd and Xq. It also determines whether the differential leakage
reactance is adjusted automatically by the embedded finite-element solver.
The original differential leakage inductances in PC-BDC are the unsaturated values LDiff
and MDiff. These are adjusted using XLdiff, and they give rise to the reactance XDiff
' T (LDiff MDiff). These values are not affected by DiffSat.
However, if DiffSat ' Auto_dq, separate values of differential leakage reactance for the
d- and q-axes can be obtained as
XDiff_d ' T (LDiff MDiff)/XLdiff XCd and
XDiff_q ' T (LDiff MDiff)/XLdiff XCq.
These values are incorporated in Xd and Xq. When using the embedded finite-element
solver with MatchFES, this permits the d-axis differential leakage reactance to be
adjusted by the same saturation factor (XCd) as the d-axis magnetizing component of Xd;
similarly it permits the q-axis value to be adjusted by XCq along with the magnetizing
component of Xq.
XLdiff Xd and Xq include the same differential leakage reactance XDiff.
When using the embedded finite-element solver, there is no
automatic adjustment of XDiff. Consequently, if XLdiff is not
adjusted for saturation, XCd and XCq may need pathological
values to compensate a high (unsaturated) differential leakage
component, (even though the total Xd and Xq values are correct).
Auto_dq Xd incorporates XDiff_d, while Xq incorporates XDiff_q. The
embedded FE solver automatically adjusts both differential leakage
reactances for saturation via XCd and XCq. When using the
embedded finite-element solver, Auto_dq is recommended. XLdiff
does not affect XDiff_d or XDiff_q. LDiff, MDiff and XDiff retain
their original unsaturated values.
XLdiff Adjustment factor for the differential leakage inductances LDiff, MDiff and the reactance
XDiff. Early versions of PC-BDC excluded LDiff from the synchronous inductances Ld
and Lq, on the grounds that machines intended for sinewave drive would always be
sinewound; but in practice they may not be: for example, fractional-slot motors can have
sinusoidal EMF waveforms yet still have significant harmonic leakage. Differential
leakage is always included in Ld and Lq; to exclude it, set XLdiff = 0.
PSSlot defines the calculation of the slot-leakage permeance coefficient PCSlot and hence the
slot-leakage component of the phase inductance.
Open The slot permeance coefficient is calculated for the main (wound) part
of the slot, omitting the terms for the slot-opening region. Thus PCSlot
= P
MainSlot
, where P
MainSlot
= 1/3 d
2
/Aslot and d is the nominal slot
depth (for example, SD ! TGD). This formulation follows the method
of H.C. Roters and is similar to the formula 1/3 h/d where h is the
nominal width of the slot. It is appropriate for a rectangular open slot,
but such slots are rare in brushless PM motors: semi-closed slots are
more common.
S-closed This is for a semi-closed slot. PCSlot is computed from P
MainSlot
+ P
SO
+ P
Top
, where P
SO
= TGD/SO is the permeance coefficient of the slot
opening and P
Top
is an allowance for fringing from tooth-top to
adjacent tooth-top, taken as the fixed value 0@5.
Closed This means that the slot opening area (for example, SO TGD) is filled
with steel. In the finite-element GoFER this is the same steel as the rest
of the stator lamination. But in internal calculations PC-BDC does not
model a saturable stator slot-leakage reactance and it therefore uses a
fixed relative permeability, muPlug (q.v.): thus P
SO
= TGD/SO
muPlug. P
Top
is omitted and PCSlot = P
MainSlot
+ P
SO
.
Plug The slot opening is filled with steel having a fixed relative permeability
of muPlug (q.v.). This is used in the finite-element GoFER. The
internal calculation is the same as with PSSlot = Closed.
PC-IMD The slot permeance coefficient is calculated using PC-IMDs analytical
method, [1]. This method is recommended especially for deep slots.
XPCslot The slot permeance coefficient is set equal to 1 XPCslot.
AirgapWdg The slot permeance inductance is estimated by scaling the end-turn
inductance according to the ratio of the lengths of conductor in the
active length and the end-windings.
muPlug Relative permeability of a plug in the slot opening, used when PSSlot = Closed or PSSlot
= Plug. For example, when S_slot = Square, as in , the plug has dimensions SO TGD.
{1}
XPCslot Adjustment factor for the slot-permeance coefficient PCslot. {1}
XPCslotM Adjustment factor for the slot-permeance coefficient for mutual inductance. This
multiplies the slot-permeance coefficient PCslot (after any adjustment by XPCslot)
wherever it is applied to the calculation of mutual inductance between coil-sides sharing
the same slot. Depending on the positions of the coil-sides, XPCslotM may vary between
0@5 and 1. A value such as 0@75 or 1@0 is recommended. (See SEM-3 or [0]). {1}
Note : calculation of synchronous inductances
In Fig. 127 the synchronous inductances L
d
and L
q
are calculated independently of the phase self- and
mutual inductances. (See SEM-2 and [0]). This approach is rooted in the classical design theory of
synchronous machines. It has been used by the author for 30 years and it has the advantage of not
needing to calculate the positional variation of the phase self-and mutual inductances. For nonsalient-
pole machines the two approaches (one from Lm0 and the other from Lph and Mph) produce the same
result, which provides a valuable check on the calculation.
Fig. 130 End-turn mutual inductance
Fig. 131 Coilside positions assumed with different values of ETCalc
ETCalc Method of calculating end-turn length and inductance. All methods use the Maxwell
formula for equivalent semicircular end-turns described in SEM or [0] or [1]. The main
differences between the ETCalc options concern the allowance for mutual coupling
between end-turns (Fig. 130) and the positions of the coil-sides in the slot (Fig. 131), which
affects the estimated lengths of the end-turns.
ETCalc Coilside position Mutual coupling
between coils
Mutual coupling
between phases
Effect of iron
BDC 4.0 Slot centre-line None
BDC 4.7 Snug to slot wall Multiplied by No. of
coils per pole
BDC 6.0 Multiplied by No. of
coils per phase
BDC 6.5 None
BDC 8.0 Displaced from slot
wall depending on
coilside area
None
The option names reflect changes introduced in different versions of PC-BDC. However, it cannot
be said that a later version always improves the calculation of Lendt when compared with an
earlier version. Users may have calibrated their data for use with a certain value of ETCalc, and
this is the main reason for retaining the earlier methods.
Accurate values for end-turn inductance are elusive, whether calculated or measured. In
many cases Lendt is small, but this may not be true with airgap windings or in machines
with thick magnets or short axial length. Lendt may be a significant part of the short-
circuit inductance. Many factors affect its value, including the shape and packing density
of the coils, the presence of image currents in the stator core, and the disposition of the
end-turns. The analysis in SEM-2 should help the user to decide a suitable method and
to choose adjustment factors with reasonable confidence. It is recommended to compare
with measurements if they are available. See also XET, XLendt, and LBore.
XLendt Adjustment factor for end-turn inductance Lendt. (Beware that Lendt is adjusted again
by the "global" adjustment parameter XL, which indiscriminately multiplies all the self-
and mutual inductance components; see Fig. 127). {1.0}
XRe Adjustment factor for the effective radius of the semicircular filament defining the
equivalent end-turn in the Maxwell inductance formula (SEM-2); used with all values of
ETCalc. {1} []
CalcLdLq determines the method of calculating the airgap components L
md
and L
mq
of the
synchronous inductances Ld and Lq; and also Lg and Mg.
Auto If EMFCalc = KFR or HBMethod, the Laplace method is used; otherwise
the Lumped method is used.
Lumped The lumped-parameter magnetic circuit model is used. The "narrow-gap"
formula for L
m0
is multiplied by Gd and Gq respectively. (See [1], Chapter
2.)
Laplace L
md
and L
mq
are calculated directly from the solution of Laplace's
equation implicit in the KFR or HBMethod methods. This method is not
applicable to salient-pole machines.
SpreadSO enables or disables the calculation of the harmonic spread factor associated with the slot
openings in the calculation of Lg. With EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR, or CalcLdLq =
Laplace, PC-BDC uses the HB method (based on the solution of Laplace's equation) to
calculate Lg, the airgap component of inductance. The original calculation assumes that
the coil-sides are concentrated in filaments at the centrelines of the slot openings, at the
stator bore radius. This approximation is strictly valid only for very narrow slot
openings. The effect of the slot opening can be modelled by "spreading" or distributing the
filaments into a strip that spans the slot opening. It introduces a harmonic spread factor
into each term of the inductance calculation, reducing Lg. (A 2-pole example with slot
openings of 44 Eelec, had a reduction of 40%, but this is somewhat extreme). {true}
Fig. 132 Estimating Xspan
Fig. 133 Effective slot-pitch (; S_Slot = MISlot
CalcLg Method of calculating Lg. Three alternative methods are available (LgMeth1, LgMeth2
and LgMeth3). They should all give the same result, and it is strongly recommended to
check them against one another. See [1]. {LgMeth1}
Xspan Adjusts the coil span used in the calculation of the airgap inductance components Lg and
Mg. The basic method assumes that the coil-sides are represented by filaments at the
centre-lines of the slots, at the bore radius, as shown by the filled dots in Fig. 132. But in
some cases when the slot-opening is very large and the coils are wound around a single
tooth, the flux produced by current in the stator coil emanates only from the tooth-head
over an arc J, and when J is significantly less than the slot-pitch ( the span should be
corrected. Xspan can be set to a value approximately equal to J/(, which is easily
calculated. In Fig. 132 the value of J/( is approximately 0@4. The effect will be a reduction
in Lg and Mg. It can be checked by means of finite-element analysis : see the GoFER
manual. If Xspan = 0, the span adjustment will not be made. Likewise Xspan = 1 has no
effect. Values greater than 1 are not permitted.
When S_Slot = MISlot, the filaments representing the coil-sides are placed at the centre-
lines of the slot-openings on either side of the wound tooth, so that (, the effective span of
one coil is as shown in Fig. 133.
EMF
EMFCalc Selects the method of calculating the open-circuit electromagnetic field, and from it the
EMF waveform. Four alternatives are identified in the following:
NMC Nonlinear lumped-parameter magnetic equivalent circuit [1]
MEQ Direct solution of Maxwells equations
EXT Solution provided via external datafiles
FEA Finite-element solution
The possible values of EMFCalc itself are listed below.
BLV NMC BLV method; see Ref. [0] Simply stated, this is the method of the EMF
induced in a conductor in a moving magnetic field. PC-BDC assembles the
phase EMF from the individual conductor EMFs. The conductor EMF
waveforms are determined by the open-circuit distribution of airgap flux-
density. With a full-pitch concentrated winding the phase EMF waveform
is a scaled replica of this distribution, except for the slot-ripple component.
The BLV method is recommended when Slots/Poles > 3.
BplotTF NMC EMF is calculated by the BLV method, but the EMF waveform calculated
by the ToothFlux method is also plotted (white). The slot-ripple component
is not included in the internal (PC-BDC) calculation.
ToothFlux NMC Toothflux waveform method, [0]. The phase EMF is assembled from the
EMF in a single-tooth coil, using a distribution of such coils connected
appropriately to represent the complete winding. The coil EMF is derived
from the flux-linkage as the rotor is rotated. This is the most rigorous
method, in principle, especially when the permeance of the magnetic
circuit may be modulated by slotting and/or saturation as the rotor
rotates. PC-BDC itself does not model these variations, but the Btooth
finite-element computation executed via the GoFER does so, and can be
used to calibrate PC-BDCs result. The ToothFlux method is recommended
when Slots/Poles is less than about 3.
ExtTFW Ext External tooth flux waveform method. The tooth flux waveform is read
from a text file, *.tfw. Slot-ripple may be included in the external data.
ExtEMF Ext External tooth EMF/turn waveform. The EMF waveform of a single-turn
search coil wound around one tooth is read from an external text file. See
external files, p. 70. Slot-ripple may be included in the external data.
ExtBgap Ext The EMF is calculated from an external distribution of airgap flux-density
in a text file. Slot-ripple in the EMF is not discernible in this method.
HarmBgap Ext The EMF is calculated from a series of harmonic coefficients of the airgap
flux-density distribution, in an text file. Slot-ripple in the EMF is not
discernible in this method.
HBMethod MEQ Hague-Boules method, (see 2 and Refs. [1,2,5,6 and 11]). This is valid
strictly only for nonsalient pole motors, but PC-BDC can use it with
RotType = BreadLoaf and Spoke, if Embed = Not. If Config = AirgapWdg,
HBmethod is automatically used. NHx is the number of harmonics used in
calculating the field. Unlike KFR method, HBMethod is not restricted to
arc-shaped magnets. Slot-ripple in the EMF is not available in this method.
KFR MEQ Direct solution of Laplaces equation (see Refs. [11,14]); valid only for
nonsalient pole motors with magnetization patterns defined by MagType.
NHx is the number of harmonics used in calculating the field. Slot-ripple
in the EMF is not discernible in this method.
continued overleaf/...
E
q1
'
2Bf
2
Q
1Md
1Md
' k
w1
T
ph

m1
and
m1
'
B
g1
DL
stk
p
.
EMFCalc (continued)...
BLV/Unbal NMC The BLV method used with custom 3-phase windings that have been
constructed with a small degree of unbalance in the winding editor.
FETFW FEA Similar to the ToothFlux method but the tooth-flux waveform is
computed by PC-FEA as an embedded solver. This is equivalent
to running the B
tooth
GoFER and then importing the *.tfw
waveform using EMFCalc = ExtTFW. It takes longer than the
internal methods and of course it will fail if there are meshing
problems in PC-FEA. In principle it should give a more accurate
open-circuit EMF waveform, but it should be remembered that it is
an open-circuit calculation. See also ipsiCalc and DDFE, p. 139.
The method can be checked by means of the B
tooth
GoFER.
eCalc Method of calculating EMF. Normally this is set to Auto, but in certain cases it may be
useful to change the default behaviour. For example, with eCalc = PhiM1, the EMF is
represented by its fundamental harmonic component alone. (See Tutorial B08).
Auto The EMF is calculated according to EMFCalc
BLV The EMF is calculated by the "BLV" method (flux-density B times
length L times velocity V), for the EMF in a conductor moving in a
magnetic field. This is the method used when EMFCalc = BLV.
ToothFlux The EMF is calculated from the rate of change of the flux in one
tooth. This is the method used when EMFCalc = ToothFlux.
PhiM1 The EMF is calculated as a sinewave of RMS value Eq1:
where Q
1Md
(Psi1Md) is the fundamental flux-linkage per phase.
When this is calculated from the fundamental airgap flux M
m1
,

D is the stator bore diameter. Other parameters can be recognized
by their names kw1, Tph, Bg1, and Lstk. f is the frequency and p
is the number of pole-pairs.

X_EMF scales Eq1, eLLpk, and the EMF waveform. The use of X_EMF is discouraged because it
adjusts the EMF without changing any flux-densities. It should never be used without
reference to the finite-element GoFER to check the flux and flux-density levels. The
intended use of X_EMF is to provide a means to investigate the effect of changes in the
EMF without disturbing the actual design data, and its use should be temporary. {1}
Skew Skew, measured in stator slot-pitches. PC-BDC modulates the EMF waveform (and the
implied airgap flux-density distribution) according to the skew, but does not alter the
winding resistance or the magnet weight. The winding axes (see Ax1) are also affected by
Skew. The fundamental skew factor ks1 is also calculated. Skew can be between 0 and
1. It is silent as to whether the physical skew is on the rotor or the stator. {0}
XdGap Adjusts the effective tapered airgap introduced by dGap. {1}
Additional parameters For EMFCalc = FETFW only:
RotSteps The number of rotor steps in the calculation of the tooth-flux waveform, which is
calculated over 180 Eelec. Obviously a larger number of steps will give a smoother
waveform, and a better representation of slot-ripple, but at the expense of a longer
computation time. {30}
MidTooth Selects the automatic calculation of RadBTooth, the radius at which the tooth flux is
evaluated. {true}
RadBtooth The radius at which the tooth flux and flux-density is evaluated in the finite-element
calculation. The default value is at the radius PC-BDC considers to be the "middle" of the
tooth. [mm]
Ted/2 Magnetic
Magnets
XBrT XBrT is a utilization factor representing the fraction of BrT that appears to be effective
in establishing the airgap flux and the EMF. Its job is to account for unidentified
weaknesses in the magnetic circuit calculation. By scaling the effective value of the
magnet remanent flux-density BrT, it adjusts all open-circuit flux-density values (such
as BgOC, Bg1OC, Bst etc.) as well as the airgap flux-density waveform, the fluxes PhiG
and PhimM1, and the EMF and its waveform). When EMFCalc = HBMethod, XBrT
adjusts the apparent coercivity used to calculate the equivalent current filaments, since
this is proportional to the remanence. XBrT can be used in MatchFE to adjust PC-BDCs
internally calculated magnetic field to match the one computed by PC-FEA. {1}
XLM adjusts the apparent or effective length of the magnet in lumped-parameter magnetic
circuit calculations, (EMFCalc = BLV or ToothFlux). It has no effect with EMFCalc =
HBMethod or KFR, because these methods use radii such as Rad1 and Rad2, and do not
use the magnet length explicitly. {1}
CalcLme Selects the definition of the effective magnet length Lme when RotType ' BLoaf.
Max Lme ' LM.
Avg Lme ' LM 0@5 Rad1 (1 cos $/2), where $ is the magnet arc BetaM
in mechanical radians. This is a crude estimate of the effective
length of the magnet for use in the magnetic circuit. See Fig. 204.

Fig. 134 Definitions of LM and Shim
Bk Knee-point flux-density. This is notionally the knee-point value of flux-density on the
demagnetization characteristic of the magnet in the second quadrant. PC-BDC calculates
the value of magnetic field strength Hk in the magnet at this flux-density, and also the
current IBk that is required to depress the magnet operating point down to Bk. Bk can
be set to any value, but of course it should be above the knee in the demagnetization
curve. The "knee point" is not precisely defined in magnetization curves, and it depends
on the temperature. Therefore PC-BDC does not regard Bk as a material property, but
uses it as a means of setting a warning level for the current. {0}
Shim A reduction in the length of the permanent magnet to allow for clearance and/or a "glue
line", Fig. 134. When Shim > 0, LM is the length of the slot in the lamination, measured
in the direction of magnetization. To emphasize this, PC-BDC also displays the slot
dimension LMslot and the actual (nett) magnet length LMnet = LM Shim.
Shim substitutes the actual magnet plus the "glue line" with an equivalent magnet whose
physical length is LM, but with modified parameters BrTEff and MuRecEff derived in
SEM-2. Accurate results are obtained even when Shim is as much as 20% of LM.

Although Shim is mainly intended for use with interior-magnet rotors, it is used to
calculate BrTEff and MuRecEff in all cases including surface-magnet rotors. For
surface-magnet rotors there is no slot, so LMslot is called LM+Shim, as in Fig. 134.
When Shim is being used, the finite-element GoFER option for Br should normally be set
to "BrTEff/XBrT". This "undoes" the XBrT modification to BrTEff, so that BrTEff is
passed to PC-FEA, and not BrTEff XBrT.
Shim is depicted by a dotted line in the outline editor. It does not normally create a
separate region in the finite-element mesh; but see PhysShim. {0}
Fig. 135 Bracing bridges
Bracing An interior magnet may be divided into smaller segments by internal bracing bridges to
increase the mechanical strength of the rotor lamination, as shown in Fig. 135. Bracing
is the fraction of magnet width that is replaced by bracing bridges. Thus if b is the width
of a bridge and m the width of a magnet block, the value to use for Bracing can be taken
as b/(b m). In Fig. 135 there are four bridges and five magnet blocks, so it would be
reasonable to specify Bracing as 4b/(4b + 5m). Note that Bracing is dimensionless. A
value of 0@1 will cause a significant reduction in EMF even with high-energy magnets.
In most cases Bracing is only a rough order-of-magnitude parameter for assessing the
effect of bracing bridges, but the calculation with CalcBB = EffMag is surprisingly
accurate in IPM rotors like Fig. 221.
(Rotors with multiple layers of magnets: NLayers > 1). When RotorType = IPM and
Embed = Type6 and, or RotorType = InsCP and Embed = Type3, the same value of
Bracing is used for all layers. {0}
See also p. 128.
CalcBB Selects the method of representing bracing bridges in the magnetic circuit analysis.
Geometric PC-BDC depletes the magnet width by the factor (1 Bracing),
adding the "lost" width to the width of an imaginary bridge that is
magnetically in parallel with the magnets. The bridge is assumed to
be saturated, with flux-density bBsat. This method can be used with
all PM rotor types even when there are no physical bracing bridges.
The imaginary bridge is added to CWeb or Bridge, if these are
present. In this case Bracing has no effect on BrTEff or MuRecEff.
EffMag An equivalent magnet is defined, using Bracing to modify BrTEff
and muRecEff. The theory is in SEM-2.
If RotType = IPM and Embed = Not or Type5, then if Bracing = 0
BrTEff and muRecEff are calculated from the actual bridge width
wBB and the number of bridges NBB as indicated above. If Embed
= Type5, CWeb and Bridge are not included in this calculation, but
are treated separately using phi_y; (see p. 128).
NBB The number of bracing bridges per pole, used only when RotType = IPM and Embed =
Not; see Fig. 221, p. 303. (In outline editor only). {0}
wBB The width of one bracing bridge, used only when RotType = IPM and Embed = Not or
Type5; see Fig. 221, p. 303 and Fig. 235, p. 310. (In outline editor only). {1}
Xkm_HB adjusts the apparent coercivity and therefore the current in the equivalent current-
filaments used when EMFCalc = HBMethod. If Xkm_HB = 0, PC-BDC applies Boules
formula [SEM-2], which is a function of the recoil permeability. Any other value is used
to modify the strength of the current-filaments directly. On open-circuit, a value near 1
may be appropriate if the magnet is operating close to its remanent flux-density. {0}
Magnets If RotType = IPM, the magnets can be unmagnetized to simulate the machine as a pure
synchronous reluctance machine.
All All magnets are present and fully magnetized.
None All magnets are physically present, but unmagnetized.
Some restrictions apply. For example, EMFCalc must be BLV or one of the external
options. Drive should be Sine, and gamma should be nonzero, otherwise the torque will
be zero. There are no changes in the operation of PC-BDC or the GoFER. The i-psi
GoFER should be used to check the on-load operation. There is no EMF, so there is no
point in running the B
gap
or B
tooth
GoFER. Similarly, no iron losses are calculated during
static design or when WfeCalc = OC. Iron losses can be estimated using the i-psi GoFER
and the Elements Table.
Ly1Mag If RotType = IPM and Embed = Type 6 (that is, the multi-layer IPM in Fig. 236), the
magnets in each layer can be unmagnetized independently. Ly1Mag refers to Layer 1,
which is the innermost layer closest to the q-axis and the shaft.
All All the magnets in Layer 1 are magnetized.
Inner Only the inner magnets in Layer 1 are magnetized.
Outer Only the outer magnets in Layer 1 are magnetized.
None All the magnets in Layer 1 are unmagnetized.
The unmagnetized magnets are physically present, but not magnetized. The effect of
switching them off is similar to the case Magnets = None, except that some of the
magnets can be magnetized and others unmagnetized. Similar restrictions apply (see
Magnets, above). On a semantic note, unmagnetized means simply that the magnets
have not been magnetized; this is not quite the same concept as demagnetized, which
describes a magnet that was magnetized but has lost some or all of its magnetization.
Ly2Mag Similar to Ly1Mag, but refers to Layer 2, and is active only if NLayers > 1. {All}
Magnet overhang
MOH Magnet overhang. This is an old parameter with an oversimplified method that has been
superceded by MOH1 and MOH2; see Fig. 136 on p. 120. MOH should be used only to
recover calculations obtained with previous versions. When MOH <> 0, MOH1 and
MOH2 must both be zero.
At each end of the rotor the magnets may overhang the stack by MOH. In the magnetic circuit
calculation, the magnet pole area is calculated using Lrotor = (Lstk + 2 MOH) instead of Lstk.
MOH can be positive or negative. LRotor is the length used in the computation of rotor weight and
inertia. {0}
Fig. 136 Magnet overhangs, MOH1 and MOH2
MOH1 Magnet overhang at left-hand end of rotor (viewed in longitudinal section or side
elevation; see Fig. 136. If MOH1 > 0, the rotor core is extended axially to the same extent
as the magnet, but if MOH1 < 0, the left-hand end of the rotor core is flush with the left-
hand end of the stator stack.
MOH2 Magnet overhang at right-hand end of rotor; see Fig. 136. If MOH2 > 0, the rotor core
is extended axially to the same extent as the magnet, but if MOH2 < 0, the right-hand
end of the rotor core is flush with the right-hand end of the stator stack.
MOH1 and MOH2 can be used separately or together, but only with EMFCalc = BLV, BplotTF, or
ToothFlux, and with RotType = SurfRad, SurfPll, BLoaf, ExtRad or ExtPll. PC-BDC creates an equivalent
magnet whose axial length is Lstk, but whose remanent flux-density BrTEff is augmented by the factor
XBrTMOH. At the same time, the rotor leakage permeance prl is modified to the value prlMOH. Both
XBrTMOH and prlMOH are applied automatically to the calculation of EMF. MOH1 and MOH2 have
no effect on the inductance, but they do affect the magnet weight, wt_Mag.
The sign of MOH1 or MOH2 is used to specify whether the rotor core is extended with the magnet (+),
or whether it remains flush with the stator core ().
When MOH1 <> 0, or MOH2 <> 0, it is advisable to set ufz = 1. Otherwise PC-BDC will calculate an axial
fringing factor fz by a separate (and much simpler) calculation that is not coordinated with the
calculation of the fringing associated with MOH1 and MOH2.
Also note that MOH should be zero when MOH1 <> 0 or MOH2 <> 0.
Fringing (shape of Bgap)
Fringing selects the fringing function for magnet flux: it is either ON or OFF. If Fringing = OFF,
the magnet flux is assumed to cross the airgap radially, and to have a rectangular
distribution. If Fringing = ON, the airgap flux distribution is calculated. [1,2]. Fringing
has no effect if EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR, or if external data is used to determine the
EMF waveform. {On}
XFringe Adjustment factor for the exponential fringing function used to characterize the shape of
the airgap flux-density distribution produced by the magnet on open-circuit, at and near
the edges of the rotor poles. XFringe directly multiplies Rabinovici's parameter a: see Ref.
[2], pp. 8-6 & 8-15). It can be used with Tools | MatchFE to adjust PC-BDC's open-circuit B
gap
distribution to match finite-element data or measured data. Setting XFringe = 0 is
equivalent to turning the fringing off. XFringe has no effect if EMFCalc = HBMethod or
KFR, or if external data is used to determine the EMF waveform. {1}
XBetaM Adjustment factor for the magnetically effective value of rotor pole-arc used in the
calculation of the airgap flux-density distribution. XBetaM has no effect on any other
calculations that depend on BetaM (e.g., the magnet weight). XBetaM is intended to be
used in MatchFE to help adjust the airgap flux-density and EMF waveforms.
BgProfil selects the method of profiling the airgap flux-density distribution. Additional
adjustments can be made with Fringing, XFringe and XBetaM.
None or Expo No additional profiling is applied beyond the basic "exponential"
method described in [1] or [22].
Full A simple profiling function is used to account for the variation in
the airgap length. In a permanent-magnet machine it may arise, for
example, with RotType = BreadLoaf and Embed = Type2 from the
values of Rmi and Rmo: see Fig. 206 on p. 294.
BTscale When EMFCalc = BLV or BLV/Unbal, PC-BDC first calculates the open-circuit airgap
flux using the internal magnetic equivalent circuit solver with an assumed azimuthal
distribution function. The peak flux-density in a stator tooth is estimated at the same
time as Bst_MGC. Subsequently the time waveform of flux-density in a stator tooth is
calculated by the running integral described in Fig. 144. If BTscale = true, this integral
is rescaled so that the peak value of the B
tooth
waveform Bst becomes equal to Bst_MGC,
as would be expected. If BTscale = false, the rescaling is switched off, as shown in Fig. 147
on p. 132. The sole function of BTscale is to assess the degree of rescaling, and it should
normally be true. {true}
BYscale is analogous to BTscale, except that it refers to the rescaling of the time-waveform of the
flux-density in the stator yoke B
yoke
so that its peak value Bsypk becomes equal to the
peak value Bsy_MGC from the internal magnetic equivalent circuit solver. {true}
M
n
'
4 B
r
nB
sin
n"B
2
, n ' ( 2j 1), j ' 1,2,. . . , NHx
N
n
' 0
Header
73 {marker to identify the file type to PC-BDC}
XS YS
1 M
1
N
1
2 M
2
N
2
. . . . . . . . .
P M
P
N
P
(last of P entries)
M
1
' B
r
; N
1
' B
r
0 T
1 Gauss (G)
2 kG
3 kl/in
2
M
1
' B
r
; N
1
' 0
M
n
'
4 B
r
nB
sin
n"B
2
, n ' ( 2j 1), j ' 1,2,. . . , NHx
N
n
'
4 B
r
nB
cos
n"B
2
.
MagType Selects the magnetization pattern of the magnet that is used with EMFCalc = KFR.
(RotType should be SurfRad or ExtRad). M-coefficients define the radial component, N-
coefficients the tangential one; [1].
Radial
Radial magnetization with rectangular distribution; no tangential
component, computed for NHx harmonics. " ' BetaM/180.
Sine
Pure sinusoidal magnetization (ideal Halbach pattern). BetaM should be
180E. If Nmbp > 1, an array of block magnets is obtained with
magnetization orientation as shown in Fig. 138. PC-BDC always
calculates as though Nmbp ' 1, but it passes the correctly oriented block
array to PC-FEA for finite-element analysis, so that adjustments can
easily be made using MatchFE.
RadSine
Radial magnetization with a sinusoidal distribution of the radial
component and no tangential component
Halbach
array
The magnet has segments alternately magnetized in the radial and
tangential directions as shown in Fig. 137.
User A user-defined magnetization pattern is imported from a text file having
the following format:
M and N define harmonic sine coefficients: PC-BDC shifts them to get the
required cosine coefficients. If M and N are both zero in any line, that line
can be omitted. If XS = 0, the values of M and N are multiplied by the
product YS BrT. If XS =1, they are multiplied by YS only. If XS = 2,
they are multiplied by PC-BDCs internal unit-conversion factor so that
the program will receive the values in tesla: in this case the units used in
the text file are specified by the value of YS:

Fig. 137 EMFCalc ' KFR with MagType ' Halbach, shown here with BetaM ' 120E and Poles ' 4; interior
rotor (RotType ' SurfRad); and Rcore = Air. The finite-element flux-plot shows the contribution of the
tangentially magnetized magnets.
Fig. 138 (a) EMFCalc ' KFR with MagType ' Sine and BetaM ' 180E; Nmbp ' 12, Poles = 4; interior rotor
(RotType ' SurfRad). ) is the difference in the orientation of adjacent blocks.
. When Nmbp ' 1, the magnet is a continuous ring with perfect sine 2
m
' (1 p)2
i
180E
distribution of M
r
and M
2
.
(b) EMFCalc ' KFR with MagType ' Sine and BetaM ' 180E; Nmbp ' 12, Poles = 4; exterior rotor
(RotType ' SurfRad). . When Nmbp ' 1, the magnet is a continuous ring 2
m
' (1 p)2
i
180E
with perfect sine distribution of M
r
and M
2
.
10
The airgap is modelled with 4 concentric layers, which make the diagram rather crowded in this region.
Fig. 139 FullRing 2-pole motors with iron-cored and air-cored rotors.
RCore Selects whether the rotor body is Iron or Air. If Iron, it is assumed to be infinitely
permeable.
RCore can be used with RotType = FullRing and Poles = 2. This configuration uses a
specially adapted version of HBMethod to calculate the open-circuit magnetic field, and
so EMFCalc is forced to be equal to HBMethod. RCore can also be used with RotType
= SurfRad provided that EMFCalc = KFR.
Fig. 139 shows open-circuit flux-plots with RCore = Iron and RCore = Air.
10
The magnet
is modelled by two current-sheets, one on the outer cylindrical surface at Rad1, and the
other on the inner cylindrical surface at Rad1 ! LM. Inside the innermost cylindrical
surface, the field is uniform. With RCore = Iron, if the airgap is short the magnet is
nearly magnetically short-circuited and so the magnet flux-density is close to Br at all
points throughout its cross-section. With RCore = Air, in the neighbourhood of point q
the magnet is nearly magnetically short-circuited, but in the neighbourhood of points d1,
d2 it is nearly open-circuited. Consequently near q the magnet flux density remains close
to Br, and it is in the tangential direction. But near d1, d2 the magnet flux-density is much
lower, as it is also inside the rotor body.
When RotType = FullRing, PC-BDC calculates three special values of flux-density: the
radial flux-density Bmd at point d1 in Fig. 139, i.e. at Rad1 on the d-axis; the tangential
flux-density Bmq at point q in Fig. 139, i.e. at Rad1 ! LM/2 on the q-axis; and the flux-
density at point d2, where the the magnet flux-density is equal to the (uniform) flux-
density BRB inside the rotor body.
Note that PC-BDC does not model the shaft, even though it is drawn in the outline editor
with radius RadSh. However, it can be modelled using the finite-element GoFER.
NHx The number of space harmonics used to calculated the open-circuit airgap flux
distribution with EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR. It is also the default number of
harmonics calculated in harmonic analysis of the waveforms; however, there is no
connection between the two calculations. [Max 100]. {21}
NHxL The highest-order space harmonic used in calculating Lg when EMFCalc = HBMethod
or KFR or CalcLdLq = Laplace. Both odd and even-order harmonics are included. If
NHxL = 0, the highest order is (2 NHx - 1) Poles/2, the same as for the B
gap
distribution. To "force" the sinewound condition, set EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR with
NHx = 1, and CalcLdLq = Laplace with NHxL = 1. {1}
BTSR Lit. "B
t
evaluated by Simpsons Rule". If EMFcalc = ToothFlux or B/PlotTF, PC-BDC uses
the magnetic equivalent circuit method to compute the open-circuit airgap flux-density
distribution B
gap
, and then integrates B
gap
over an arc " to get the tooth-flux waveform
B
tooth
as the rotor rotates; see Figs. 143147. BTSR determines several options relating to
the integration. The best choice is the one that gives the best MatchFE with the B
tooth
GoFER. See Tutorial B08 for more guidance.
False Obsolete "toothline" method described in [2]. The B
tooth
waveform is not re-
scaled to Bst.
Linear B
gap
is integrated over an arc " ' F XBtpk using Simpson's rule with
linear interpolation. F is the tooth pitch, Fig. 144. The B
tooth
waveform is
re-scaled to Bst.
CSpline As linear, but with cubic spline interpolation.
NoScale As linear, but the B
tooth
waveform is not scaled to Bst.
NBTSR No. of integration intervals used to calculate B
tooth
from B
gap
by Simpson's rule . NBTSR
must be an integral multiple of 4, and at least 32. When the number of slots/pole is small,
if NBTSR is too small the EMF waveform can acquire a spurious ripple. Theoretically the
best results should be obtained with BTSR ' CSpline or Linear, and NBTSR = 128 or
higher. The GoFER can help resolve differences between methods. {128}
HBGeom adjusts certain details of the geometry used when EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR.
Exact (i) The stator bore radius is taken as the actual radius Rad1 + Gap.
(ii) PhiM1 is calculated using Bg1OC and the actual stack length Lstk.
EffMag (i) The stator bore radius is taken as the magnetically effective radius
Rad1 + Lge, where Lge is the effective magnetic airgap obtained using
Carter's coefficient (Carter).
(ii) PhiM1 is calculated using Bg1OC and Lstator, where Lstator is the
effective stator length allowing for fringing at the ends, i.e., Lstk fz.
For exterior-rotor motors, the stator radius is always taken as the magnetically effective
radius regardless of the value of HBGeom.
Versions of PC-BDC compiled between 3-Nov-02 and 6-Feb-04 automatically used 'Exact'.
Older datafiles will be updated to use 'Exact'.
'Exact' ensures that Eq1 = eLLpk//6 when the EMF waveform is a pure sinewave
(obtained with NHx = 1, EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR). 'EffMag' does not produce this
result exactly, because of historical differences in the way Eq1 and eLLpk are calculated.
If HBGeom = EffMag, the condition Eq1 = eLLpk//6 is not perfectly satisfied even for
pure sinewave EMF, but it can be obtained by setting EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR,
NHx = 1, uKCL = 1, ufz = 1.
RSWdg The radius at which the airgap flux-density is calculated when EMFCalc = HBMethod or
KFR. When using the B
gap
GoFER, RSWdg should be set to the same value as RadBgap
in the GoFER options, in order to be consistent with the GoFER. However, for
calculating EMF, RSWdg should be set equal to the radius of the stator surface, R1g. The
difference arises because the finite-element method cannot calculate a B
gap
waveform at
the stator surface that is useable for EMF calculation. If RSWdg = 0, it will normally be
taken at the stator surface, but if Config = AirgapWdg it is taken at the mid-radius of the
winding, that is, at Rad1 + Gap + SD/2. {0}
11
Since the circuit is for only one half-pole, the flux returns to "ground", which is a line of symmetry usually along the q-axis.
Fig. 140 Nonlinear magnetic circuit, showing the main leakage paths and adjustment factors.
f
LKG
'
M
m
M
L
M
m
,
Leakage
If EMFCalc = BLV, ToothFlux, or B/PlotTF, PC-BDC uses a lumped-parameter magnetic circuit to
determine the open-circuit flux and its distribution; see Fig. 140.
Some of the magnet flux M
m
fails to cross the airgap to link the stator winding and generate EMF. Instead,
it "leaks" from pole to pole through so-called "leakage paths".
11
PC-BDC divides the leakage flux into "air
leakage" M
L
, which is present in all types of motor, and "bridge leakage" M
y
, which is present only in
interior-magnet or embedded-magnet types that have saturable bridges joining the poles.
Various leakage adjustment factors are available to cope with the wide range of different rotor types.
These notes indicate which ones are appropriate for the given rotor type. The GoFER and MatchFE can
usually be used to help determine suitable values.
(a) Air leakage M
L
Air leakage M
L
has two components: the 2-D component arising entirely in the transverse cross-section,
and the end-component which arises at the ends of the rotor. PC-BDC defines a leakage factor as
For the 2-D component, the leakage path depends on the rotor type: see Fig. 141. The leakage cannot be
calculated exactly by analytical methods, so PC-BDC uses one of two alternative means to allow for it.
One of these works directly with the leakage factor f_LKG; the other works with the leakage permeance.
(1) The leakage factor f_LKG, used mainly with surface-magnet motors, can be specified directly as
u_LKG (p. 128). Alternatively, if u_LKG = 0, f_LKG is given a default value according to
RotType (see table below), and multiplied by the adjustment factor Xrl. (To increase the leakage,
decrease Xrl). This method assumes that the end-component is already included in f_LKG or
u_LKG, so there is no separate term for it. (See apEnd, p. 129).
Rotor type f_LKG
SurfRad, SurfPll 0@95
Breadloaf 0@9
ExtRad, ExtPll 0@95
InsCP, InsRel 0@8
prl '
1/f_LKG 1
Pm0 Rg
,
f_LKG '
1
1 prl Pm0 Rg
.
(2) The leakage permeance method is mainly used with interior-magnet motors. PC-BDC calculates
a linear leakage permeance P
L
= Pm0 prl in parallel with the magnet, where Pm0 is the
internal permeance of the magnet and prl is the "per-unit" leakage permeance, normalized to
Pm0. The two-dimensional value of prl is determined internally from the rotor geometry
according to the following table, and it can be adjusted by means of Xrl. In contrast with the
leakage factor method, to increase the leakage, Xrl should be increased.
RotType Embed type Method of calculating prl
Spoke For non-embedded and Type 1, the method described in [2], 4.6 is used. For embedded
Type 2, the components of prl calculated in [2], 4.6 are set to zero. For embedded
Types 1 and 2, an additional allowance is made for the leakage permeance of any air
space that is radially inboard of the magnets, if the magnets are narrower than the slot
or aperture in the rotor lamination.
IPM Not; Types 1,4,5 Calculated by PC-BDC
Types 2,6 prl = 0.1
Type 3 prl = 0
LSIPM More complex geometric formulas are used. Adjustments can be made following finite-
element calculations, but note that the influence of prl is diminished by the bridge
leakage, which is in parallel.
Trapeze
The end-component of leakage is included by augmenting the internally calculated value of prl
with an "end-leakage" permeance pEnd, which itself is normalized to Pm0. The end-component
can be adjusted via aPend, p. 129.
If u_LKG > 0, the leakage factor method is used instead of the leakage permeance method, as in
(1) above, even for embedded-magnet motors.
In all cases where the leakage factor method is used, prl is calculated from the equation
where Rg is the airgap reluctance and Pm0 is the magnet internal permeance, both per half-pole (p. 232).
When the leakage permeance method is used, f_LKG is calculated from
Note that if EMFCalc = KFR or HBMethod, or if RotType = FullRing, f_LKG and prl are not used,
because the leakage is incorporated implicitly in the solution of the Laplacian magnetic field solution.
(b) Bridge leakage M
y
Bridge leakage (Fig. 141) is potentially important in embedded-magnet rotors, especially the IPM.
Accordingly when Embed = Type 1, Type 2, etc., PC-BDC adds the effect of bridge leakage into the
lumped-parameter magnetic circuit calculation, in parallel with the air-leakage flux. The way this is
done is to assume that the bridge is saturated with a flux-density determined by bBsat, p. 128. The flux
in each bridge is equal to bBSat Bridge Lrotor. If RotType = SurfRad, SurfPll, BLoaf, InsCP or
InsRel, Rib is used in place of Bridge.
As shown in Fig. 140, M
y
is treated as a flux source, and not as a permeance element. Consequently the
bridge leakage is not included in prl or f_LKG. It is displayed as phi_y (M
y
) and BrdgLkg (%).
12
It may seem strange that Xrl is used with both the leakage factor method and the leakage permeance method, while u_LKG is used only with
the leakage factor method. The reason is "legacy". Xrl is a very old parameter which used to be the only means of adjusting the leakage. When
u_LKG was introduced, the scope of Xrl was not diminished provided that u_LKG = 0. When u_LKG > 0, Xrl is effectively disabled.
Fig. 141 Magnetic leakage on open-circuit.
For the surface-magnet motor, Fig. 141(a), PC-BDC uses the leakage factor f_LKG. For the non-embedded
interior-magnet rotor with no bracing bridges, Fig. 141 (b), PC-BDC uses the leakage permeance, prl. Fig.
141(c) shows an embedded interior-magnet rotor, for which prl is used to represent "air" leakage inside
the magnet slot, while the bridge leakage flux phi_y is adjusted via bBsat; the bridge leakage is usually
much greater than the "air" leakage. Bridge leakage is included in the magnetic circuit for embedded
surface-magnet types, even though these cases use the f_LKG model rather than the prl model. With
RotType = Spoke or IPM, the leakage can be ascribed entirely to bridge leakage by setting Xrl = 0 and
choosing a suitable value for bBSat. Alternatively it can be ascribed entirely to "air" leakage by setting
bBSat to a small value (e.g. 10
!6
; do not use zero because that would cause PC-BDC to use 2@1T), and
adjusting Xrl. The first of these options is recommended over the second. The leakage in CWeb, if
present, is added to phi_y: but bracing bridges are treated as part of the magnet; (see p. 118).
In the multi-layer IPM (Embed = Type6, NLayers > 1), the significance of bridge leakage depends on the
presence of the outer magnets (Figs. 236, 237, and 239). If these are absent, bridge leakage may be reduced
to such an extent that bBsat has to be reduced to a small value. Use the i-psi GoFER to estimate a
suitable value.
Xrl Adjustment factor for magnet leakage. When u_LKG = 0, Xrl directly multiplies the
default value of f_LKG except in Spoke, IPM, LSIPM and Trapeze-type motors, where it
directly multiplies the internally-calculated value of prl. When u_LKG > 0, Xrl has no
effect.
12
. {1}
u_LKG User-defined value of f_LKG. If u_LKG = 0, PC-BDC uses the value given in the table on
p. 126. Any other value u_LKG > 0 will be used to over-ride the internal value, and Xrl
will have no effect. {0}
bBsat User-defined value of saturation flux-density in the Bridge of an embedded Spoke or IPM
rotor, or in the Rib of embedded surface-magnet and inset-magnet types. The usage is
described above. If bBsat = 0, PC-BDC uses 2@1T. {0}
Fig. 142 End-component of leakage flux, pEnd.
P
end
' 2

0
w
m
B
ln
L
m
Ba
L
m
,
The input parameters u_LKG, Xrl and bBsat and the output parameters f_LKG, prl, phi_y and BrdgLkg
are meaningful only in the lumped-parameter magnetic circuit model (i.e., with EMFCalc = BLV,
ToothFlux or B/PlotTF).
In the multi-layer IPM, the leakage in the bridges and centre-posts is incorporated in an equivalent
magnet, and the parameters phi_y and BrdgLkg are not displayed. The relative effect of these leakage
paths can be determined by running two calculations, one with bBsat equal to its normal value (or 0),
and the other with a very small value of bBsat (e.g., 10
6
). [If bBsat = 0, PC-BDC uses 2@1 T].
Important : In cases where the bridge leakage is not clearly associated with a single dimension, it will
usually be necessary to adjust Bridge and bBsat to achieve the correct rotor leakage. The GoFER should
be used for this. See, for example, Fig. 224, in which the magnet dimensions are completely independent
of the rotor surface and Bridge is not a dimension of the drawing.
apEnd Radius defining the extent of the end-leakage flux, the shape of whose flux-path is shown
in Fig. 142. This determines the end-component of the leakage permeance pEnd, which
is included in prl for interior-magnet rotor types. The formula (including both ends of the
machine) is
where w
m
is the magnet width per half-pole, L
m
is the magnet length LM, and a = apEnd
LM. The normalised value P
end
/P
m0
is displayed as pEnd, P
m0
being the magnet internal
permeance per half-pole. {1}
Fig. 143 Use of XTTarc in lumped-parameter magnetic circuit
Fig. 144 Effect of XBtpk on "flux-gathering arc"
Other magnetic parameters
XTTarc adjusts the "augmented tooth arc" AugTArc which determines the effective number N
st
of stator teeth through which the open-circuit magnet flux passes in the magnetic
equivalent circuit in Fig. 143; see also Fig. 147(a) on p. 132. N
st
is used with EMFCalc =
BLV or ToothFlux.
N
st
' , where " ' AugTArc ' $ XTTarc.
J
"
A decrease in XTTarc increases N
st
. This increases the nonlinear permeance of the "stator
teeth" element in the magnetic circuit, and tends to increase the airgap flux-density
(BgOC and Bg1OC). However it may decrease the tooth flux-density Bst as the flux is
shared between a larger number of teeth. The influence of XTTarc or N
st
depends on the
saturation level in the stator teeth and yoke. A suitable value should be obtained by
means of the B
gap
and B
tooth
GoFERs and MatchFe. Also see XBtpk. {1@0}
XTw Adjustment factor for the effective stator tooth width EffWst used in the magnetic
equivalent circuit, Fig. 140. Thus for example, if XTw = 0@8, EffWst will be decreased by
a factor of 0@8 and the tooth flux-density Bst will increase but not by 1/0@8 exactly,
because of the magnetic nonlinearity in the steel parts of the magnetic circuit. If XTw =
0 or 1, no adjustment is made. {0}
XBtpk To find the open-circuit tooth flux-density B
tooth
when EMFCalc = ToothFlux, PC-BDC
integrates the airgap flux-density B
gap
over an angle " as in Figs. 144!146. The integral
is repeated to develop the waveform of B
tooth
as the rotor rotates. The azimuthal limits of
the integration define a "flux-gathering" arc ". If BTSR = false (see p. 125), " is the
augmented tooth-arc AugTarc defined on p. 130; it can be adjusted using XTTarc, but Fig.
143 that this will alter N
st
and disturb the magnetic circuit analysis and B
gap
. In all other
cases of BTSR, or if EMFCalc = BLV, " is derived from the tooth-pitch F and adjusted
using XBtpk without disturbing B
gap
. Clearly " cannot exceed the slot-pitch F.
If the number of slots/pole is greater than about 1@5, as in Fig. 144(a), flux is gathered over
an arc wider than $ indicating that " > $. In such cases adjustments to AugTArc should
not be necessary. An example with 6 slots/pole is shown in Fig. 145. Such cases will
normally use EMFCalc = BLV.
When the number of slots per pole is small (< 1@5), there can be significant leakage
between the tips of adjacent stator teeth (sometimes identified as zig-zag leakage). An
extreme example is shown in Fig. 146, which has 6 slots and 8 poles (0@75 slots/pole), and
narrow stator teeth. The maximum flux through the tooth is gathered from an arc " at the
airgap that is clearly less than the slot-pitch angle F, and it may well be that " < $, as in
Fig. 144(b). In such cases, because of the complexity of the field solution, it may be
necessary to adjust " by means of the B
tooth
GoFER and MatchFE. {1@0}
In Fig. 146, "/F appears to be about 0@5, and this would be a good initial estimate of the
necessary reduction. In this example $ F, but usually $ < F, making it more difficult to
discern a suitable value.
If CalcVer < cv9, and in versions before 8.0, XBtpk also affects N
st
in Fig. 143, which can lead to
conflict with XTTarc when using the B
gap
and B
tooth
GoFERs. By removing XBtpk from Figs. 143
and 147(a), this conflict is resolved. Also see Xks on p. 136.
Fig. 147 shows all the possibilities for adjusting B
gap
and B
tooth
by means of XTTarc and
XBtpk, including earlier versions, but it is now recommended to use CalcVer ' cv9 with
BTSR ' Linear or CSpline (and a sufficient value of NBTSR such as 256). This may be
inconvenient if old files have to be recalibrated, but the change should be worthwhile.
Recommended practice with single-tooth windings is to use EMFCalc = ToothFlux with
the B
tooth
GoFER to make primary amplitude adjustments with XTTarc and secondary
shape adjustments with Xrl, XFringe, XBetaM, and XBtpk. The B
tooth
waveform is more
important than the B
gap
distribution in these cases.
Tutorial B08 gives a step-by-step account of these adjustments and examples of how to
calculate the EMF accurately for different motors.
WstCalc The method for calculating the effective magnetic width of the stator tooth. See page 280.
New This method corrects an error in cases where filSO is non-zero.
Old Reproduces the method used before 2-Nov-07, in which an error in
EffWst would cause a mis-match with the finite-element GoFER.
FEA This method uses the same independently programmed
calculation as used in the finite-element GoFER.
Uncertainty about the effective magnetic width of the stator tooth can arise because of
flare or non-parallel-sided teeth, or because of the fillet radii filSO and filSB. For this
reason it is difficult to guarantee complete compatibility between the peak stator tooth
flux-density Bst and the EMF calculated using EMFCalc = ToothFlux. Matching these
parameters with the B
tooth
GoFER adds additional complications, and in some cases it
will be preferable to check the EMF not by the B
tooth
GoFER but by the i-psi GoFER with
ISP ' 0, because the i-psi GoFER does not use the tooth-width.
Fig. 145 XTTarc and XBtpk usually need no adjustment when the number of slots/pole is large.
This case corresponds to Fig. 144(a).
Fig. 146 Both XTTarc and XBtpk may need to be adjusted when the number of slots/pole is small (< 1@5).
This case corresponds to Fig. 144(b), with XBtpk < 1.
CALCULATE
MAG. CCT.
N
ToothFlux
BLV
EMFCalc
BTSR ?
Integrate and rescale
at the same time
False
Bgap flux distribution
No. of stator teeth
per pole-pitch
Bgap flux distribution
Btooth waveform
Construct_BTwfm_from_BGwfm
Step_ToothFlux_Wfm
Integrate
NoScale
XBtpk_XTTarc.wpg
st
(a) (b)
Bsy_MGC Bst_MGC Bsy Bst
BTscale
Fig. 147 Structure of calculation of B
gap
and B
tooth
13
This change dates from Version 6.5, 1-Oct-03.
XRYoke Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic cross-section area of the rotor yoke. The
actual physical dimension RYoke is not affected by XRYoke. {0}
If XRYoke = 0, no adjustment is made to the rotor yoke area, but the calculation reverts
to a previous version in which the rotor yoke carries only the gap flux M
g
and not the
whole magnet flux M
m
.
13
But with the new method (XRYoke > 0, for example 1.0), it carries
the whole magnet flux. The change is indicated by the switch in Fig. 140. When the rotor
yoke is saturated, this change will make a significant difference to the overall solution of
the magnetic circuit.
XLry Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic length of the rotor yoke in the magnetic
equivalent circuit. The physical dimensions are not affected by XLry. If XLry = 0 or 1,
no adjustment is made. {0}
XSYoke Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic cross-section area of the stator yoke. The
actual physical dimension SYoke is not affected by XSYoke. If XSYoke = 0 or 1, no
adjustment is made. {0}
XLsy Adjustment factor for the effective magnetic length of the stator yoke in the magnetic
equivalent circuit. The physical dimensions are not affected by XLsy. If XLsy = 0 or 1, no
adjustment is made. {0}
ukCL User-value of Carter coefficient. If ukCL = 0, PC-BDC's internal calculation will be used.
Otherwise ukCL will directly modify the effective airgap length. See Lge. {0}
ufz User-defined axial fringing factor, specifying the ratio of the active magnet length to the
stack length, Lstator/Lstk. If ufz = 0, PC-BDC calculates a value and displays it as fz.
{0}
XBgap When EMFCalc = BLV, BPlotTF, or ToothFlux, in the internal magnetic equivalent
circuit the airgap flux-density is calculated at mid-gap, Rad1 + Gap/2. But the flux-
density used to calculate the EMF waveform should theoretically be at the stator bore,
Rad1 + Gap. XBgap attempts to adjust the flux-density for a change in radius from mid-
gap to the stator bore. In spite of its name, XBgap is taken as a direct adjustment to the
EMF waveform and not to any values of flux-density.
1 The scale factor (Rad1 + Gap/2)/(Rad1 + Gap) is applied to the EMF
waveform, but only if EMFCalc = BLV, BPlotTF, or ToothFlux.
Any other
value
CalcVer >= cv7 No scaling factor is applied
CalcVer < cv7 If XBgap = 0, no scaling factor is applied;
otherwise the EMF waveform is scaled by
XBgap. (Not recommended)
XBgap is a truly obsolete legacy parameter whose use is now deprecated. If CalcVer >=
cv12, an error message appears if XBgap <> 1, and the program will not run.
To adjust the open-circuit B
gap
waveform use XBrT, XBtpk, XFringe, XBetaM, Xrl,
XLM etc. To adjust EMF without adjusting flux densities, use X_EMF.
Fig. 148 Flux-plot obtained with PC-FEA when
using ShAxFlux
Fig. 149 Analytical model for "flux spreading" (ShAxFlux)
ShAxFlux activates a special algorithm for calculating the magnetic circuit of exterior-rotor motors,
when there is appreciable spreading of flux in the axial direction in the rotor shell or
housing. Fig. 149 gives an idea of this effect. The spreading relieves the flux-density in
the rotor yoke by increasing the effective thickness of the yoke, not in one step but in a
graded manner that leads to the idea of a tapered section. The taper is calculated in PC-
BDC, and it is used not only in the internal magnetic circuit calculation but also in the
finite-element GoFER. An example is shown in Fig. 148. For more details, see SEM-2.
{false}
Note : the parameters CalcSatn, XSatn, and SatnTol apply only to nonsalient pole motors (surface-magnet
motors), and then only to an approximate method of calculating the change in saturation level under load
conditions. This method is practically obsolete because of the finite-element GoFER, and its use is no
longer recommended.
CalcSatn defines the calculation and use of the saturation factor kSat (q.v.).
Fixed kSat is fixed at the value 1.0 XSatn.
Calculate kSat is calculated using an algorithm that estimates the change in
the level of saturation in the stator, resulting from the stator current.
The way in which kSat is calculated depends on WFeCalc and
Drive.
WfeCalc Method of calculating kSat
OC(orig) With Drive = Sine, kSat is calculated with the stator
current phasor at the angle gamma. When gamma =
0, the armature reaction is purely cross-magnetizing,
i.e., it produces only q-axis flux. When gamma < 0, the
d-axis current Id1 > 0 and this augments the magnet
flux and produces more saturation, causing kSat to
decrease.
With Drive = Square and Th0 = 0, the armature
reaction is cross-magnetizing only midway through a
commutation cycle. It is demagnetizing at the start of
commutation and magnetizing at the end. In this case
kSat is calculated as the average of that at the start,
middle and end of commutation.
Ld_Bwfm As the rotor is rotated in 10E or 1E steps to get the flux-
density waveforms in the teeth and yoke, kSat is
calculated and averaged over all these steps. Note that
this can slow the calculation considerably.
Iterate As for Calculate, but in the iteration of Dynamic design, the EMF is
modified by kSat recursively until the "saturation loop" converges.
This loop lies within the thermal loop, so it can slow the calculation
considerably, especially if WFeCalc = Ld_Bwfm.
Static design runs with a fixed value of kSat = XSatn.
XSatn Adjusts the value of kSat. If CalcSatn = Fixed, XSatn directly modifies kSat, and in this
case an "increase in saturation" requires a reduction in XSatn. But if CalcSatn =
Calculate or Iterate, XSatn artificially extends the length of the stator teeth and therefore
an "increase in saturation requires an increase in XSatn.
SatnTol Tolerance on saturation factor used in the iterative Dynamic design when CalcSatn =
Iterate. When running a torque/speed calculation, it is preferable to use CalcSatn =
Fixed. As the speed increases the current generally decreases, so that the saturation effect
on kT diminishes. By using an unsaturated value of kT the maximum speed will be lower
than if kT were decreased by saturation. This is considered a more conservative
calculation, and it will be faster. If SatnTol = 0, PC-BDC uses 1%. [%]. {0}
XQWeb Adjusts the effective magnetic width of the q-axis web when RotType = IPM, LSIPM or
Trapeze. {1}
B
a
' B
t

0
H k
s
k
s
'
s
t
1
Stf
! 1 Xks
Xks determines the method of correcting for slot-flux in the magnetic circuit calculations
employing the lumped-parameter magnetic circuit. It is is also used to determine the
method of representing the BH data for the steel. {1}
Xks < 0 This invokes the "old" method in which no slot-flux correction is applied, and
the BH curve is represented by piecewise-linear interpolation of the points in
the steel database record for the currently selected steel. If the flux-density
exceeds the highest point in the database BH data, the BH curve is extrapolated
with a slope (i.e., incremental permeability) equal to the slope between the last
two points. Therefore it is important in the steel database, to ensure that the
slope between the last two points is equal to
0
. If it is higher then
0
,
unrealistically high values of B may result.
Xks $ 0
The BH curve is represented by a set of cubic splines fitted through the data
points in the steel database. Separate sets of splines are used for the rotor steel
and the stator steel, and they are computed automatically in any analysis. Xks
multiplies the value of the slot-flux factor ks. Setting Xks > 1 will produce a
greater reduction in Bst and Bsy, while Xks < 1 will diminish the reduction
due to the slot flux correction.
Xks = 0
The slot-flux correction is disabled, but PC-BDC uses spline-fitted BH curves.
Correction for slot-flux When the teeth are highly saturated the magnetizing force H establishes a
flux-density
0
H outside the teeth. For a given total flux/pole, the flux-density in the iron is lower than
would be calculated if the slot flux were neglected. PC-BDC uses the relationship
where B
a
is the apparent flux-density, i.e. the flux-density that would be obtained if all the flux passed
through the iron and none through the slot; B
t
is the actual flux-density in the iron; H is the magnetizing
force (related to B
t
by the DC BH curve); and k
s
is given by
where J
s
is the tooth-pitch measured half-way along the tooth; t is the tooth width, and Stf is the stacking
factor. By including Stf the flux between the laminations is also taken into account, [15]. A
representative value for k
s
is 1, obtained if the tooth width is about half the tooth-pitch. With thin teeth,
k
s
has a higher value; with wide teeth, a lower value.
There is no automatic allowance for "slot flux" at the ends of the stack. A crude allowance can be
estimated by including the factor (1 + 2 t/Lstk) in Xks, on the assumption that the flux at each end of
the stack is confined to an air column of width t in the axial direction.
As the formula shows, k
s
can be adjusted by the factor Xks. Xks should be increased above 1 for semi-
closed and/or round-bottomed slots, and to allow for the small additional end-flux described above.
Values of Xks much higher than 1 may cause convergence problems. The slot-flux correction leads to
a reduction in the flux-density in the iron (Bst and Bsy).
Example of the effect of Xks
Alt+1 example motor with M-19 steel and NeIGT30H magnet.
Xks BgOC Bst Bsy Bry
!1 0@7411 1@9764 1@3624 1@4392
0 0@7473 1@993 1@3739 1@4513
1 0@7612 1@9494 1@3438 1@4783
2 0@7669 1@9044 1@3127 1@4894
The first two rows show the difference obtained when using the spline-fitted BH curves (Xks = 0) and
the piecewise-linear BH curves (Xks = !1).
The third and fourth rows show the effect of the slot-flux correction. Although it reduces Bst, it
increases BgOC, Bsy and Bry because the MMF drop across the teeth is reduced, leaving a greater MMF
drop across the yokes.
For the example motor the effect of Xks on Btpk_OC, Btpk_Ld and Btpk_LdS is shown in the table:
Xks Btpk_OC Btpk_Ld Btpk_LdS
!1 2@0826 2@1861 2@1596
0 2@0826 2@1861 2@1036
1 2@0087 2@1121 2@0535
2 1@9682 2@0719 2@0188
Note : If Xks < 0, XBtpk directly multiplies the value of Bst calculated by PC-BDCs simple internal
lumped-parameter magnetic circuit model. The resulting scaled value of Bst is used with EMFCalc =
ToothFlux, so XBtpk effectively also scales the EMF waveform calculated by this method.
PlotTooth selects the tooth for plotting the tooth flux-density waveform.
PlotYoke selects the stator yoke section for plotting the yoke flux-density waveform.
PlotPole selects the pole for plotting flux-density waveforms.
Xrm Adjustment factor for effective magnet radius, used only with PC-BDCs lumped-
parameter magnetic circuit model (i.e., not with EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR), and only
with surface-magnet rotors. In this model the magnet is treated as a lumped element with
an effective radius r
M
. In previous versions r
M
was at 1/3 of the magnet thickness from
the rotor surface, but in PC-BDC 4.7 it was changed to the radius Rad1 ! (1 ! Xrm) LM.
The default value of 0@5 puts r
M
at the centre of the magnet; finite-element analysis has
shown that for all surface-magnet rotor types except Breadloaf, this gives the best results
for the airgap flux-density.
Setting Xrm = 0 puts r
M
at its inside surface. For interior-rotor machines this lowers the
flux-density, but for exterior-rotor motors it increases it. Setting Xrm = 1 puts the magnet
radius at the rotor surface Rad1. To reproduce pre-4.7 results, Xrm should be set to 2/3.
Note that Xrm can be varied in MatchFE, but its effect will generally be weak. {0@5}
Mechanical
Stf Stacking factor for stator (armature) laminations. The axial length of steel in the stator
is taken to be Lstk Stf in magnetic circuit and core-loss calculations. The rotor body is
assumed to be solid.
LamThk Lamination thickness, used to calculate the number of laminations NLams. {0@5 mm}
Ecc Eccentricity or rotor offset. Ecc is the per-unit offset, i.e. the ratio of the actual rotor offset
to the airgap length. A value of 1 means that the rotor is just touching the stator at one
point. Ecc is used to estimate the unbalanced magnetic pull by means of an approximate
formula which, if it has any validity at all, applies only to surface-magnet machines. Its
effect can be seen in the graphs under Unbalanced magnetic pull, and in the parameters
UmpAvg and UmpMax. {0}
Embedded FEA Parameters
This section is for the set-up parameters used with the embedded PC-FEA finite-element solver when
Drive = Sine and ipsiCalc = PC-FEA, or when Drive = AC Volt and VDFEA = true..
The embedded PC-FEA solver is generally executed at a fixed rotor position, using [Ctrl+2] and DDFE
= FEocDD(Z) or FEdqDD(Q), so it is blind to the effect of permeance harmonics. If this matters, run the
full ipsi GoFER. The embedded solver can be used with Dynamic design and DDFE = DFED or DFEDR,
but it will be horribly slow.
ipsiCalc activates the embedded PC-FEA finite-element solver.
Internal The embedded finite-element solver is not used.
PC-FEA PC-FEA is used to calculate the d- and q-axis flux-linkages of the
stator, from which the voltages in the phasor diagram are derived.
If MatchFES = AdjMEC, the internal magnetic equivalent circuit
is automatically adjusted to match the finite-element result. For
permanent-magnet machines the adjustment uses XBrT, XCd and
XCq.
ipsiCalc = PC-FEA works only with Drive ' Sine, Sw_Ctl ' ISP_HB, and dq0 ' true.
The embedded finite-element solver is normally used with Static design; but in the rare
instances when it is used with Dynamic design, set TempCalc ' Fixed. The effect of the
embedded solver on the torque calculation is discussed on page 237.
Fig. 150 Typical current/flux-linkage loops (i-psi loops), showing the apparent reduction in phase 1 flux-linkage
even when i
1
= 0, caused by cross-saturation due to i
q
flowing in phase 2 and phase 3 : the reduction is
shown between points Z and Q. For more detail on the energy-conversion diagram, see [24],[25].
DDFE selects the method of using the embedded finite-element solver when ipsiCalc = PC-FEA;
see Fig. 151. The values taken by this parameter are acronyms describing the respective
processes, and the order of the letters is important.
FEocDD(Z) This option is designed to produce saturated values for the
synchronous reactances Ld_FES and Lq_FES, and the magnet flux-
linkage/phase PsiMdFES.
Because there are only two finite-element computations, FEocDD(Z)
and FEdqDD(Q) are the fastest of the DDFE options.
The two finite-element computations are performed before the start
of a Static design.
In the first computation, no current is flowing: that is, i
d
' 0 and i
q
' 0. The open-circuit d-axis flux-linkage PsiMdFES is computed.
Considering the i-R loops in Fig. 150, at zero current the loop
degenerates to a vertical straight line on the R-axis. Therefore the
"open-circuit" calculation is close to point Z in Fig. 150, and
corresponds to the position of point Z when the current is zero.
In the second finite-element solution, i
d
= ISP sin (gamma) and i
q
' ISP cos (gamma), and the finite-element solution produces the
flux-linkages R
d
and R
q
for the d and q axes. The solution is thus
being taken at a general point P in Fig. 150. Then
Ld_FES ' (R
d
PsiMdFES)/i
d
Lq_FES ' R
q
/i
q
If the i-R loop is truly elliptical (as it would be in a machine with
sine-distributed windings and constant saturation), then the
position of P is theoretically not important, but in practice the
values of ISP and gamma are important because they decide the
size and orientation of the ellipse, and the general level of
saturation in the d and q axes.
The values Ld_FES, Lq_FES, and PsiMdFES are used in the
calculation of the steady-state operating point (i.e., the phasor
diagram), and they are displayed in the design sheet. If a Dynamic
design calculation is executed, it uses these same values without
any further finite-element analysis.
The name "FEocDD(Z)" indicates that the finite-element
computation precedes any Dynamic design calculation.
Note that if i
d
' 0, the equation for Ld_FES cannot be evaluated;
likewise for i
q
and Lq_FES. For this reason Ld_FES is evaluated
only when i
d
> Id_min; otherwise, Ld_FES is equated to the
unsaturated value Ldu (q.v.). This will generally have no practical
consequences, because Ld is largely ineffective when i
d
is small.
Similar comments apply to Lq_FES, with i
q
and Iq_min.
DDFE continued...
FEdqDD(Q) This option is similar to FEocDD(Z), except that the "open-circuit"
condition is defined by setting i
d
= 0 and i
q
= ISP, which is
represented by point Q in Fig. 150. The "open-circuit" d-axis flux-
linkage PsiMdFES thus includes the effect of cross-saturation,
which tends to reduce the flux-linkage of phase 1 when i
1
' 0. At this
point in the cycle, i
2
' ISP/2 and i
3
' ISP/2, so i
d
' 0 and i
q
' ISP;
the q-axis flux produced by i
q
saturates the d-axis sufficiently to
reduce the effective magnet flux-linkage in phase 1.
This method is recommended for use with the IPM.
The second finite-element calculation and all subsequent
calculations are the same as for FEocDD(Z).
DFED This option is designed to run finite-element computations at
frequent intervals during one electrical cycle, as indicated by the
points a, b, c, d in Fig. 150. At each step, the finite-element solution
is used to update the synchronous inductances L
d
and L
q
, and if
FEUppsi ' true, the "open-circuit" magnet flux-linkage Q
md
is also
updated at each integration step. This option should be used with
Dynamic design when the current is not sinusoidal, or when the
windings are far from being sine-distributed.
An initial estimate of the saturated synchronous inductances L
q
and
L
d
is made before the Dynamic design calculation, using the
method described for FEdqDD(Q).
The number of finite-element solutions per cycle is determined by
ipsiStep (q.v.).
Theoretically, for a pure sinewave machine, only one such finite-
element evaluation should be necessary, but imperfections due to
slotting, winding harmonics, etc., may make it desirable to use a
larger number of finite-element solutions spaced closer together.
When the machine is voltage driven, as for example in 6-step
operation at high speed, the current waveform is not sinusoidal and
a larger number of finite-element computations may be required.
The name "D FE D" means that the FE computations are embedded
within the Dynamic design calculation.
DFEDR This is similar to DFED, but the suffix R means that an additional
Dynamic design calculation is added after the one that uses the
embedded finite-element solver. This final Dynamic design uses
the average values of L
d
and L
q
computed around the i-psi loop, so
that for pure sinewave operation the i-psi loop will be exactly
elliptical and it will be possible to check the calculation
independently. Moreover, DFEDR eliminates any "glitches" or
discontinuities that may arise in the current and/or flux-linkage
waveforms because of sudden changes in the values of L
q
, L
d
or Q
md
following a finite-element solution.
Analysis
Set id = 0
Set iq = 0
Set id = 0
Set iq = ISP
PC-FEA
PsiD, PsiQ
PsiMd_FES = PsiD
DDFE = FEocDD ?
Y N
Static
design
Dynamic
design
Set id = -ISP sin
Set iq = +ISP cos
PC-FEA
PsiD, PsiQ
Ld_FES := (PsiD - PsiMd_FES)/id
Lq_FES := PsiQ/iq
Open-circuit
On load
Ld := Ld_FES + Lendt
Lq := Lq_FE + Lendt
Calculate steady-state
phasor diagram using
fixed, saturated
static values Ld,Lq
Saturated
static
values
DDFE
FEocDD,
FEdqDD
DFED,
DFEDR
Simulate 1 cycle with
fixed, saturated
static values Ld,Lq
Ld := Avg(Ld_FE) + Lendt
Lq := Avg(Lq_FE) + Lendt
Saturated
dynamic values
(overwriting preset
Static values)
Phasor calculation
Time-stepping
simulation
Obtaining
saturated
values of Ld,
Lq and PsiMd
by PC-FEA
Simulate 1 cycle,
updating Ld, Lq and
PsiMd by PC-FEA every
N timesteps (selected
with ipsiStep)
Basic equations :
PsiD = PsiMd + Ld * Id
PsiQ = Lq * Iq
Underlined quantities
are saturable.
21-Nov-05
True open-
circuit
To account for
cross-saturation
|id| > Id_min?
|iq| > Iq_min?
Ld := Ldu
Lq := Lqu
Retain unsaturated
values if id, iq
are too small
4-Apr-08
YES
NO
Fig. 151 Flowchart for embedded finite-element solver
14
If these are divided by the frequency T, we get the corresponding synchronous inductances Ld, Lq, and the fundamental flux-linkage Psi1Md.
15
"_FES" means "finite-element, static". Xd_FES and Xq_FES include the end-turn component computed analytically by PC-BDC.
Fig. 152 Phasor diagram (motoring)
Automatic matching of finite-element results
The steady-state performance calculated by Static design uses the phasor diagram, in which there are
three saturable components : the synchronous reactances Xd and Xq, and the fundamental phase EMF
Eq1: see Fig. 152.
14

If ipsiCalc = Internal (or VDFEA = false), PC-BDC uses the internally-calculated analytical values Xdu,
Xqu and Eq1u. Call these the "u-values". Thus Xd ' Xdu, Xq ' Xqu, and Eq1 ' Eq1u. The u-values can
be modified by various adjustment factors. In connection with the embedded solver, we will consider and
use only the adjustment factors XCd, XCq, and XBrT.
If ipsiCalc ' PCFEA and MatchFES = AdjMEC, PC-BDC automatically adjusts the analytical u-values
to match the values obtained from the embedded finite-element solver: thus Xd ' Xd_FES, Xq ' Xq_FES,
and Eq1 ' Eq1_FES. Call these the "FES-values".
15
MatchFES enables automatic matching of the u-values to the FES-values.
UseXFES The finite-element values are used directly: thus Xd is set equal to
Xd_FES, Xq to Xq_FES, and Eq1 to Eq1_FES.
AdjMEC XBrT, XCd and XCq are adjusted automatically. See p. 144. The
datafile should be saved, otherwise the adjusted values will be lost.

Although the MatchFES adjustment improves the calculation of important quantities like the terminal
voltage and the torque, it has little or no effect on the accuracy of the flux, flux-densities, iron losses, and
other electromagnetic quantities in the design sheet, because these are consistent with the analytical
u-values. To get more accurate values for these quantities, the GoFER should be used instead,
particularly under load conditions when there may be severe saturation.
The following theory shows how the adjustment factors are derived and applied.
16
Adjustments to the components of Xsigma are made separately. Here Xsigma is treated as constant.
17
The under-relaxation factor is XRx. If XRx = 0, a default value of 0@4 will be used.
Xdu ' Xsigma Xmdu. (14)
Xmdu ' XCd Xmd0 (15)
Xdu ' Xsigma XCd Xmd0. (16)
Xdu0 ' Xsigma Xmd0. (17)
Xd_FES ' Xsigma XCd Xmd0
' Xsigma XCd (Xdu0 Xsigma).
(18)
XCd '
Xd_FES Xsigma
Xdu0 Xsigma
.
(19)
The synchronous reactance Xd comprises a "leakage" component Xsigma and a "magnetizing"
component Xmd, which represents the fundamental space-harmonic component of armature-reaction
flux in the d-axis. First consider the analytical value of Xd computed internally by PC-BDC. Thus
The adjustment factor XCd affects Xmdu only.
16
Thus
where Xmd0 is the value of Xmdu without any adjustment; this is the textbook value obtained from
the classical formulas in SEM and GB. Combining eqns. (14) and (15), the resulting analytical value is
When XCd ' 1 we have the unadjusted analytical value
The embedded finite-element solver produces a new value Xd_FES. In order to adjust the analytical
value, we must find a value of XCd that makes Xdu = Xd_FES. Combining eqns. (16) and (17), we get
so that
The treatment of Xq is similar, with XCq, Xq_FES and Xqu0 replacing XCd, Xd_FES and Xdu0 in eqn.
(19). If Diffsat ' Auto_dq, the differential leakage is automatically adjusted by XCd in the d-axis and by
XCq in the q-axis : see p. 108.
To make Eq1u = Eq1_FES, PC-BDC adjusts XBrT. The computation uses an under-relaxation method,
because the dependence of Eq1 on XBrT (or XIf) is nonlinear.
17
For this reason, manual adjustment
using XBrT or XIf ' Eq1_FES/Eq1u will not give the correct result.
Non-uniqueness of the phasor diagram : Effect of cross-pole saturation
There is an infinite number of pairs of values of Eq1 and Xd that produce the same value of the torque,
as well as the terminal voltage Vph1, the fundamental flux-linkage per phase, the current Iph1, and all
their components. Two particular cases are illustrated by the dotted lines in Fig. 152.
However, there is only one set of parameters that also gives the correct open-circuit EMF. This is the one
labelled FEocDD(Z) in Fig. 152. It defines Eq1 to be the true open-circuit EMF at the same level of
excitation as that which exists at the load-point.
The one labelled FEdqDD(Q) defines Eq1 to be the EMF generated by the net excitation in the d-axis; that
is, the difference between the field or magnet MMF and the d-axis component of armature MMF. This
characterizes Eq1 as the open-circuit EMF that would be obtained if the cross-pole saturation (due to I
q
)
was constant. There appears to be some advantage in this method with the IPM [25].
PC-BDC provides both alternatives, DDFE = FEocDD(Z) or FEdqDD(Q).
ipsiStep The number of main integration steps between finite-element computations, during
Dynamic design when DDFE ' DFED or DFEDR. One main integration step is 0@5E, so
for example if ipsiStep ' 10, the FE computation is executed every 5E elec. Since the
Dynamic design computation runs for 180E elec., there will be 180/5 ' 36 FE
computations in a complete cycle, the second half-cycle being obtained from the first
without further computation. Actually, each finite-element computation comprises two
separate cases, one for the "open-circuit" calculation of the magnet flux-linkage, and the
other one for the saturated synchronous reactances, as described for DDFE earlier.
SolDom Determines the finite-element solution domain.
Default PC-BDC will select the solution domain, taking into account the
numbers of slots and poles.
FEPoles The solution domain is selected by FEPoles. This option should be
used when the winding is not symmetrical. For example, it is
possible to split the machine into two parts with identical
configurations of slots and poles, but with different winding layouts.
PC-BDC will not recognize this condition if SolDom = Default, and
the solution will be incorrect except in open-circuit calculations.
FEPoles The number of poles, or the combination of poles and half-poles, that define the finite-
element solution domain when SolDom = NPoles.
IncShaft Include shaft in GDF file export. If Incshaft is false, the shaft will be omitted from the
finite-element solution domain. [] {false}
Stator0 Selects whether a slot centre-line or a tooth centre-line lies on the x-axis. This may have
a small effect on the accuracy. {Slot c/l}
MagMode Means of specifying the remanent flux-density Br to be used in the finite-element process.
Br(database) Uses the value in the magnet database for 20EC
BrT Uses the value at the operating temperature T_r, as displayed in the
design sheet. (Static design uses fixed temperatures, with T_r =
T_mag).
BrT/XBrT This disables the XBrT adjustment and passes the unadjusted value
BrT to the finite-element program.
BrTEff Uses the effective value of BrT which takes into account the Shim.

BrTEff/XBrT Like the BrT/XBrT setting, this undoes or neutralizes the effect of
XBrT, but retains the Shim modification. This causes the finite-
element program to use the equivalent magnet which incorporates
the effect of the shim without modelling the shim as a separate
region. (Note that the shim can be modelled as a separate region for
certain rotor types with PhysShim = true; in these cases the
recommended setting is BrT/XBrT).
The relative recoil permeability of the magnet is also adjusted along with BrT. The
default (and recommended) setting is BrTEff/XBrT because the finite-element program
should be using the Shim adjustment, but with no additional adjustment in the value of
the remanence.
18
The embedded solver is designed to to give fast, accurate values of the fundamental EMF, the average values of Ld and Lq over one cycle, and
the average torque. It would take too long to compute enough rotor positions to generate a smooth EMF waveform, and since the embedded solver
calculations are always on load, the EMF is strictly unobservable anyway, so this would be technically a waste of time.
AGLayers No. of airgap layers. It is generally advisable to keep to the default value. {4}
UseFaces Selects whether to use a *.faces file to inherit the BND distribution. (See the GoFER
manual). {true}
FEBeep An audible "beep" sounds after each embedded finite-element solution. Two kinds of beep
are used: a longer, garbled one for Static design calculations (DDFE = FEocDD(Z) or
FEdqDD(Q)), and a short one for Dynamic design calculations (DDFE = DFED or
DFEDR). The beep is switched on if FEBeep = true; otherwise it is off. Note that the beep
is not used with EMFCalc = FETFW, but only with embedded finite-element calculations
that are activated with ipsiCalc. {true}
FEEMFwfm Determines whether the EMF waveform is updated by the results of the embedded finite-
element solver. (See also p. 237).
True The EMF waveform is replaced with its fundamental component,
whose amplitude is derived from the finite-element data. Eq1
and eLLpk are also recalculated from the finite-element data. All
higher harmonics are discarded, because there is never enough
finite-element data from the embedded solver to produce a
satisfactory EMF waveform.
18
This means that the harmonic
content in the torque waveform will also be lost.
False The EMF waveform remains unaffected by the embedded FE
calculations, so it retains all its harmonics and structural detail.
Consequently the electromagnetic torque waveform also retains
its harmonic content.
Thus if you want a detailed view of the EMF waveform and/or the torque waveform with
all harmonics present, use FEEMFwfm = false; but if you want to sacrifice that detail to
get absolute consistency between the waveforms and the average torque derived from the
FE solution, use FEEMFwfm ' true. You cant get both: it would take far too long.
Id_min The minimum d-axis current at which Ld_FES will be calculated. The equation for
Ld_FES on p. 140 fails if i
d
' 0. Even if i
d
is nonzero, when it is small the difference R
d

PsiMdFES is also small, and the calculation becomes ill-conditioned and unreliable.
Id_min defines a band within which the calculation is not attempted. [A] {1@0}
Iq_min Like Id_min, Iq_min defines a band i
q
within which the calculation of Lq_FES is not
attempted. [A] {1@0}
FEUppsi determines whether or not the magnet flux-linkage is updated by finite-element
computation during Dynamic design. If FEuppsi = false, this finite-element
computation is omitted and the number of finite-element computations is halved,
improving the speed of calculation. It also reduces the risk of "glitches" or discontinuities
in the current and/or flux-linkage waveforms, which may be caused by sudden changes
in the magnet flux-linkage following the finite-element calculation. Although these
changes may be very small, they may significantly affect the value of L
d
if i
d
is small and
if there is little armature-reaction flux in the direct axis. Concerning the effect of
FEUppsi on the results, it can be determined by comparison with true and false cases, and
by judicious inspection of the i-R loop.
FEShow If FEShow = true, the PC-FEA appears briefly in the display.
PhysShim For certain rotor types (RotType = IPM, Embed = Type1, Type2 or Type5), the Shim can
be represented in the finite-element GoFERs as a separate region if PhysShim = true.
In this case the magnet is represented by the actual magnet parameters BrT and MuRec,
and not by the equivalent magnet BrTEff and MuRecEff. This permits a comparison to
be made between finite-element calculations with the actual magnet and the equivalent
magnet. The name "physical shim" indicates that the shim or glue-line is physically
present, and not simply represented by an equivalent magnet. In the GoFER options, use
Br = BrT/XBrT when PhysShim = true. [boolean] {false}
FEAir determines whether an air region is disposed outside the machine in the finite-element
solution. The purpose of this is to allow for flux-leakage outside the motor when the stator
is heavily saturated. If FEAir > 1, the air region enveloping the machine is given an outer
radius Rad3 FEAir. (For exterior-rotor machines, RadSH is used instead of Rad3).
{1.0}
MaxAngle Defines a maximum vertex angle in any triangle of the finite-element mesh. This
parameter is used to guide the meshing algorithm to produce a "good" mesh, with
elements as close as possible to equilateral triangles. However, some geometries cannot
be easily meshed with this constraint, and it may then be necessary to change MaxAngle,
usually by increasing it to 120 or even 130E. Difficulties in meshing can usually be
diagnosed via the GoFER, and the GoFER manual has more detail. [E] {120}
SolTol The solver tolerance used in the finite-element solution. For very fast calculation this can
be set as large as 0@0001, but for complete convergence across the solution domain it is
better to use 0@000001 or 0@0000001. [] {10
7
}
MaxIter The maximum number of iterations permitted in the nonlinear finite-element solver. {99}
IncVirt Adds virtual lines and arcs to improve meshing. [] {true}
Tooth sock for force estimation
Figs. 153 and 154 show the details of a sock fitted around a single tooth with a clearance and an
adjustable flare angle. The sock defines a contour for the calculation of Force on tooth in the i-psi
GoFER, which is written to one of the output text files of PC-FEA.
SockArc
SockAng
Sock
SockOffs
TSockInt.wpg
Fig. 153 Tooth-sock dimensions interior rotor, showing offset angle SockOffs
SockRad
SockArc
SockAng
Sock
Fig. 154 Tooth-sock dimensions exterior rotor
Ted/3 Control
The Control page is concerned with the drive and control, and with the parameters of external circuits.
Also on this page are several program-control parameters ("settings") that may be needed to set up or
improve the operation of some of PC-BDC's calculations, especially those involving Dynamic design or
other dynamic simulations such as the short-circuit calculation.
For Static design calculations, it will be found that many of the parameters on this page are not needed.
Also note that Vs is not needed for Static design calculations in which the current is stipulated.
Control
RPM The constant speed at which the performance is calculated in Static design and
Dynamic design. No acceleration or speed-ripple effects are modelled. The minimum
value is 1 rpm. PC-BDC cannot model zero speed because it integrates the differential
circuit equations with respect to position, not time. [rpm] {1000}
Vs When Drive = Square or Sine, Vs is the DC supply to the drive. When Drive = AC Volt,
Vs is the RMS AC line-line voltage. [V] {24}
Drive selects the type of drive:
Square The ideal line current is a rectangular wave of peak value ISP. The
default conduction period in each phase is 120E for 3-phase, 90E for
2-phase, and 180E for 1-phase motors. The phase of the reference
current waveform relative to the open-circuit EMF is Th0. [1,2]
Sine The ideal line current is a sinewave of peak value ISP if ISPSpec =
Peak, or RMS value if ISPSpec = RMS. The phase of the reference
current waveform relative to the open-circuit EMF is gamma. Static
design treats the drive as a sinewave-current AC source, using the
phasor diagram. For motoring operation, gamma should be in the
range (!90E, +90E); for generating, (!180E,!90E) or (+90E,+180E).
AC Volt The machine is operated as a classical synchronous motor or generator
connected to a fixed-voltage AC source. The solution uses the phasor
diagram. Motoring or generating is selected with Sw_Ctl. The load is
specified via LoadSpec and related parameters.
Rectifier See Figs. 271 and 272 on p. 333. Also see p. 21 and Tutorials B15 and B16.
Rectifiers can be modelled with dq0 = true or false, and with
DCSource = Fixed DC or DC Filter. DC filter circuits may have long
settling times, so it is advisable to use Cycles (with a typical value of
50), and to make sure there is adequate resistance in the circuit. All
resistive damping helps the circuit calculation to converge; this
includes R_s, Rdc, Rac, and the phase resistance of the machine, Rph.
With Drive = Square or Sine, Sw_Ctl selects the method of current regulation.
DCSource Selects the circuit configuration of the DC source.
Fixed DC The DC source is a fixed voltage, Vs. For motor drives this is the
simplest configuration. For generator/rectifier systems it may be
necessary to include some resistance R_s to get consistent results.
DC Filter DC is supplied by a filter circuit, Figs. 268-270. This option is
available only when Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB or SixStep.
The filter circuit voltage and current waveforms are displayed
among the graphs, and the mean and RMS voltages and currents
explained on p. 252 are displayed in the Design sheet.
ISPd d-axis component of set-point current; (see ISPSpec). [A (peak)] {0}
ISPq q-axis component of set-point current; (see ISPSpec). [A (peak)] {15}
ISP If Drive = Sine, ISP is the peak value of the sinusoidal reference current waveform; see
also ISPSpec and HBType. If Drive = Square, ISP is the peak value of the quasi-
squarewave reference current waveform. The current regulator control method is
selected using Sw_Ctl. [A] {15}
If there is insufficient voltage available from the DC supply (Vs), a warning is displayed
and the calculation may not be completed.
With V-type switch controls V120_Q1, V60_Q6 V90_Q1 and V180_Q1, ISP acts as an
uncontrolled protective current limit: the conducting transistor will be switched off if the
line current exceeds ISP. If there is no current-regulator or current-limit, ISP should be
set to a value slightly higher than the expected peak line current.
ISP is not used when Drive = AC Volt.
DuCy Voltage-PWM duty cycle. (Sw_Ctl = V120_Q1, V60_Q6, V90_Q1 and V180_Q1). This is the
ratio of on-time to switching period (i.e. the duty-cycle) of the chopping transistor. (See
also FixfChop, fChop, kSwON, kSwOFF, and Fig. 169 on p. 215). {0@1 1}
HBA The adjustment parameter for hysteresis-band current regulation. The actual hysteresis-
band in amperes is ISP/HBA. For example, if HBA = 8 the hysteresis band is 1/8 or 12@5%
of ISP. If i
CR
is the current being regulated, and h ' 1/HBA, the operation of the
hysteresis-band controller with respect to the controlling transistor is as follows:
If i
CR
> ISP, switch off
If i
CR
< (1 h) ISP, switch on
This control action is executed at the sampling rate f0, which is determined by FixfChop
together with fChop or uCFR. A large value of HBA reduces the current ripple, provided
that f0 is high enough. If f0 is too low, the current 'leaks' outside the hysteresis band, and
if this leakage is excessive an error message may be displayed. {8}
HBtype The hysteresis-band used in Dynamic design when Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB.
Variable The hysteresis band varies sinusoidally, remaining as a fixed
proportion of the set-point current at each angle, i.e., h ISP sin 2.
Constant The hysteresis band is constant and is equal to h ISP. As above, h =
1/HBA and ISP is the peak value of the reference sinewave.
The hysteresis band is superimposed on the line current waveforms in the graphs.
ChopType Supplementary switch-control parameter used with 3-phase motors and Drive = Square.
Soft Normally only one transistor is chopping at any time. When it switches
off, the current generally freewheels in a zero-volt loop.
Hard The upper and lower transistors are switched synchronously in pairs
over a 60E period. When they switch off, the current freewheels
through the supply.
UPG A low-speed regeneration mode that uses a step-up chopper strategy
(see SEM-2). When using this mode, set Th0 ' 210E, Connex = Wye,
Sw_Ctl = C120_Q1; and Dwell ' 120E.
Sw_Ctl specifies the switch-control strategy for the drive. The options go with Drive, Connex,
and dq0. See p. 9 and Tutorial B09. Related parameters are in [brackets].
C120_Q1, C60_Q1,
C120_Q6, C60_Q6
Squarewave modes available with 3-phase wye or delta using
direct phase variables (suitable for nonsalient-pole motors); or
with wye-connected motors using dq0 equations (suitable for
salient-pole motors if sinewound). C-type modes use hysteresis-
band control [ISP, HBA, Th0]. V-type modes use voltage PWM.
[DuCy, Th0]
V120_Q1, V60_Q6
C90_Q1, C180_Q1 Squarewave modes available with 1-phase or 2-phase motors,
providing 90E conduction or 180E conduction. [ISP (C-modes);
DuCy (V-modes)]
V90_Q1, V180_Q1
ISP_HB Hysteresis-band current regulator. [ISP, HBA].
SixStep 6-step (180E conduction). [alpha6]
dq VV-CR Voltage vector control with Drive = Sine and dq0 = true. [ISP]
RampComp Ramp-comparison current regulator. [ISP, HBA, gamma]
VPWM_ST Sine-triangle voltage-PWM. [MIX, alpha6, MIX3]
SynchReg Synchronous regulator. [ISP, gamma, VGCoefft, G_d, G_q,
PGain, IGain, G_dq, G_qd, MIX3]
SVModX Space-vector modulator. [ISP, gamma, VGCoefft, G_d, G_q,
PGain, IGain, SVMode, u_MSVM, alpha6]
DTC Direct torque control. [TSP, hTSP, PsiSP, hPsiSP, DTCMode]
Motor Modes to be used with Drive = AC Volt, for determining the sign
convention used in the phasor diagram; [delta]
Generator
For the definition of the carrier frequency (sampling rate) of the controllers, see
FixfChop on p. 154. Also see Tutorial B09.
Tip : When Drive = Sine, the simplest current regulator is Sw_Ctl ' dq_VV_CR with
FixfChop = No or FixfChop = ISChop12, with a reasonably high value of ISLA such as
60. No further setup is necessary no gains, no hysteresis band, and no concerns about
carrier frequency management. (See Tutorial B09).
dq0 selects the use of dq0 equations in Dynamic design (p. 5) and elsewhere for salient-pole
machines, usually in 3-phase wye or delta connections or the 2-phase connection.
With Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB or SixStep, PC-BDC forces dq0 = true for salient-
pole machines and assumes that the machine is sinewound. With nonsalient-pole
machines, dq0 is optional.
With Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = dq_VV_CR, PC-BDC forces dq0 = true regardless of
saliency. This mode is valid only for wye or delta.
When Drive = Square, dq0 is optional with nonsalient-pole machines. For salient-pole
machines PC-BDC forces dq0 = true and assumes that the machine is sinewound and wye-
connected. [The dq0 equations are used when three lines are conducting, (e.g. just after
commutation). When there is conduction in only two lines PC-BDC reverts to direct phase variables,
but if dq0 = true it assumes that the self and mutual phase inductances have a sinusoidally varying
component as described in [1]. (See Fig. 8).]
When Drive = Rectifier, dq0 is recommended for 3-phase systems.
Th0 [Drive = Square only]. Advance angle for turn-on, i.e. the start of conduction in Phase 1.
The origin is where a rotor S-pole axis is aligned with the axis of Phase 1: see page 50. A
positive value is equivalent to an advance in the turn-on angle, but appears in the display
as a retardation of the EMF waveforms. Phase advance may be needed at high speed, to
overcome the phase inductance and generated EMF. Even when the turn-on angle is
modified, the commutation period remains 60 unless modified using Dwell. The range
of advance is limited to 90. [elec] {0}.
gamma [Drive = Sine only]. The phase advance of the phase current Iph1 relative to the q-axis
(Eq1). Like Th0, it represents a phase-advance of the current-regulator reference
waveform relative to the rotor position; the difference is that gamma can be related to the
phasor diagram. (There is no phasor diagram for squarewave operation). If gamma > 0,
Iph1 leads Eq1. In generating, gamma > 90. [elec] {0}
delta The phase angle between the phase voltage Vph1 and the EMF Eq1. When Drive = AC
Volt and LoadSpec = V-delta, PC-BDC treats the machine as a classical synchronous
machine connected to an infinite bus, and delta is the independent control parameter.
If Sw_Ctl = Motor, a positive value of delta means that Vph1 leads Eq1 and the
electromagnetic (motor) torque is positive. If Sw_Ctl = Generator, a positive value of
delta means that Eq1 leads Vph1. See also p. 239. [elecE] {0}
When Drive = AC Volt and Connex = SplitPh, symmetrical components (SymmCpts) are
normally used to calculate the Static design: delta is interpreted as the positive-sequence
load-angle, not the actual load-angle in the main or auxiliary windings. {0}
alpha6 The phase angle of switching when Sw_Ctl = SixStep, [elecE]. Starting at the rotor
position 2 = 0, when alpha6 = 0 the transistors are switched to the Q561 state in Fig. 7.
Subsequently they switch through the sequence Q612, Q123, Q234,... etc. with a
commutation every 60E. If alpha6 > 0 the switching sequence is advanced relative to the
rotor position; if alpha6 < 0 it is retarded. Note that gamma is still available (to be used
in Static design); but in Dynamic design alpha6 must be varied iteratively to attain a
given phase angle for the current: the current is not regulated in SixStep mode.
The initial state (Q561 when 2 = 0) is chosen such that if the load were purely resistive, the
current waveform with alpha6 = 0 would be in phase with the applied voltage and its
fundamental component would be proportional to sin 2. Therefore the value of alpha6
required to bring the fundamental current in phase with the fundamental of the applied
voltage is a measure of the fundamental power-factor angle.
alpha6 also defines the phase of the applied voltage when Sw_Ctl ' VPWM_ST; or when
Sw_Ctl ' SVModX and SVMode ' Circle, HexTrack, or SixStep. {0}
ISPSpec Method of specifying the set-point current (Drive = Sine only).
Peak ISP is the peak line current.
rms ISP is the RMS line current.
dq Cartesian components ISPd and ISPq are used instead of polar
components ISP and gamma. ISPd and ISPq are in peak amperes
and equivalent to the assignments
ISPd = ISP (peak) sin (gamma)
ISPq = +ISP (peak) cos (gamma)
19
Note that when Sw_Ctl = VPWM_ST or V60_Q6 V120_Q1 etc., we have a voltage controller rather than a current regulator. In previous
versions of PC-BDC the term "chopping frequency" has been used; but this can lead to confusion with the actual switching frequency of the
transistors. It does however persist in the name of the input parameter "fChop", which is used variously for "sampling", "carrier" and "switching
or chopping" according to the type of drive. Similarly it appears in the name of the output parameter ISChop (q.v.). Because of the importance
of fChop, and because of its long-term role in PC-BDC, there is a reluctance to change its name, even if we could think of a better one.
20
Difficulties can arise in the selection of a suitable carrier frequency because of the fact that PC-BDC integrates its differential equations with
respect to position, whereas current-regulators are generally operating more naturally in terms of frequency. The different options of FixfChop
provide flexibility in resolving these difficulties. But users who are intent on satisfactory management of both the inverter parameters and the
system simulation must think about these settings very carefully.
FixfChop selects the method by which the carrier frequency of the current regulator is
determined.
19,20
It applies in Dynamic design when Drive = Sine or Square. See Fig. 155
on p. 156.
The key concept is the frequency f0 at which the control action of the current-regulator
or pulse-width modulator is executed. Whether or not the transistors actually switch at
this frequency depends on the type of controller (Sw_Ctl). Moreover, the average
switching frequency of a particular transistor may be lower, if that transistor is active for
only part of a cycle (as is normally the case). The basic properties are summarized in the
following table:
Drive Sw_Ctl Role of f0
Square
V120_Q1
V60_Q6
V90_Q1
V180_Q1
f0 is the actual switching frequency of each phaseleg
while that phaseleg is active. This is also known as the
chopping frequency. The current can be adjusted by
changing DuCy.
C120_Q1
C120_Q6
C60_Q1
C60_Q6
C90_Q1
C180_Q1
f0 is the sampling rate at which the current is compared
with the upper and lower limits of the hysteresis band.
The actual switching frequency will be lower than f0.
Sine
ISP_HB
f0 is the sampling rate at which the current is compared
with the upper and lower limits of the hysteresis band.
The actual switching frequency will be lower than f0.
dq_VV_CR
f0 is the sampling rate at which the control action of the
dq_VV_CR modulator is executed. The actual switching
frequency will be lower than f0.
RampComp
VPWM_ST
SynchReg
f0 is the sampling rate or "carrier frequency" of the sine-
triangle pulse-width modulator. The transistors switch at
this frequency if the current regulator is not "saturated".
SVModX
f0 is the sampling rate or "carrier frequency" of the space-
vector modulator. The transistors switch at this
frequency if the current regulator is not "saturated".
FixfChop options
No f0 is essentially uncontrolled. PC-BDC executes the control action at
every integration step, that is, 720 ISLA times per electrical
revolution, and this defines f0 to be equal to 720 ISLA Freq1/10
3
in kHz, where Freq1 is the fundamental frequency in Hz.
The "carrier frequency ratio" CFR is thus equal to 720 ISLA, and the
number of integration steps per "carrier cycle" is ISChop ' 1.
This mode is not recommended for voltage-PWM controllers (Drive = Square,
Sw_Ctl = V60_Q6 etc.), because one switching cycle needs several integration
steps to resolve the on/off intervals accurately.
Yes f0 is set equal to fChop. The carrier frequency ratio CFR is thus equal
to fChop 10
3
/Freq1, and the number of integration steps per carrier
cycle is ISChop ' 720 ISLA/CFR = 720 ISLA Freq1/(10
3
f0).
If f0 is too low, the ISP_HB and dq_VV_CR controllers may have too
much ripple current, even leaking outside the hysteresis band in the
case of ISP_HB. On the other hand a high value may require a large
value of ISLA to ensure a sufficient number of integration steps per
carrier cycle.
A high value of f0 directly reduces ISChop and this can produce erratic
behaviour in the sine-triangle modulator used with VPWM_ST, RampComp,
and SynchReg; and also in the space-vector modulator used with SVModX.
This problem becomes worse at low speed when Freq1 is also low. Intuitively
one would think of increasing the carrier frequency at low speed to stabilize
the regulator, but the opposite is often required. The only way out of this
conflict is to increase ISLA, but this slows the calculation and ultimately it
can destabilize the integration.
UCFR This means "user-defined carrier frequency ratio". Instead of defining
f0 directly, the frequency ratio is defined by uCFR such that f0 '
uCFR/Freq1 10
3
. In this case ISChop ' 720 ISLA/CFR remains
fixed as the speed varies, while f0 itself varies linearly with the speed.
This can be useful with the regulators RampComp, SynchReg, and SVModX,
and also with VPWM_ST, all of which require a fairly large number of
integration steps per carrier cycle (typically 60 or more).
ISChop12 PC-BDC sets the frequency ratio CFR equal to 60 ISLA, so that there
are always exactly 12 integration steps per carrier cycle (ISChop = 12).
This is a convenient and "safe" setting for ISP_HB and dq_VV_CR
controllers, also obtainable by setting FixfChop = Yes, with fChop =
0 and a fairly high value of ISLA.
21
fChop = 0 is equivalent to setting FixfChop = ISChop12. fChop = 0 is actually a legacy setting and is retained only for backwards-
compatibility; it is recommended to use FixfChop = ISChop12 instead.
FixfChop?
Control action is
executed at every
integration step
User fixes carrier
frequency ratio uCFR.
CFR = uCFR
ISChop =
720 ISLA
CFR
CFR =
fChop 1000
Freq1
f0 = fChop
ISChop12
User fixes fChop;
fO is fixed.
CFR and ISChop both
ISChop = 12
CFR = 720 ISLA
f0 = CFR Freq1/1000
fChopOpt.wpg
ISChop = Integration steps per sampling period.
f0 = Sampling or carrier frequency, [kHz].
CFR = Carrier frequency ratio (f0 1000/Freq1).
Freq1 = Fundamental frequency, RPM/60 POLES/2, [Hz]
CFR = 60 ISLA
ISChop = 1
No
UCFR
Yes
ISChop =
720 ISLA
CFR
PC-BDC fixes CFR,
keeping 12 integration
steps per sample period.
fO varies with speed.
f0 = CFR Freq1/1000
f0 = CFR Freq1/1000
Fig. 155 FixfChop options for determining carrier frequency (sampling rate)
fChop When FixfChop = Yes, fChop directly determines the sampling rate or "carrier
frequency" f0. If fChop = 0, PC-BDC uses a sampling frequency that gives 12 ISLA
integration steps per carrier cycle.
21
{0}
fChop and f0 should not be confused with the actual switching frequency of the
transistors, SwFreq. This depends on the action of the current regulator or voltage
controller.
A value of several kHz is normally required to achieve a smooth current waveform. fChop
can be increased up to the value at which the control action of the modulator takes place
at every integration timestep (ISChop ' 1). (See ISLA, below).
uCFR User-specified value of the carrier-frequency ratio. When FixfChop = UCFR, the carrier
frequency ratio can be specified instead of the carrier frequency itself. In this case the
carrier frequency f0 will vary linearly with the speed, and the number of carrier cycles
per cycle of the fundamental frequency will be fixed at uCFR. {600}
30E 90E 30E 90E
Q5
Q6
Q1
Q5
Q6
Q1
30E 90E 30E 90E
!30E
Q5
Q6
Q1
Q5
Q6
Q1
C60_Q1
Dwell > 60
C60_Q6
Dwell > 60
!30E
!30E
!30E
OFF
BASE INTERVAL 60E
ON CHOPPING
Conduction angle
Total default conduction angle =120E
Conduction angle
ON CHOPPING
C60_Q1
Dwell = 60E
or 0 (default)
Dwell = 60 +
C60_Q6
Dwell = 60E
or 0 (default)
Dwell
60E
Total default conduction angle =120E
Dwell
60E
60E
60E
Reference
transistor
Reference
transistor
Reference
transistor
Reference
transistor
Dwell = 60 +
120 + 120 +
Fig. 156 Dwell and Sw_Ctl with 3-phase wye or delta connection
Dwell The "chopping angle" of one transistor: i.e., the angle through which the rotor advances,
in any period of 180E elec, while one transistor is chopping. (Not to be confused with the
phase advance angle Th0). Dwell is used with Drive = Square.
If Dwell = 0, the chopping angle is given a default value by PC-BDC according to Sw_Ctl
and Connex. It can be adjusted above or below the default value. [Eelec] {0}
The upper diagrams in Fig. 156 show the normal operation with Connex = Wye or Delta
and Dwell = 0. The left-hand diagrams are for Sw_Ctl = C60_Q1. Q1 is the reference
transistor and it chops during the first 60E of its 120E conduction angle. The right-hand
diagrams are for C60_Q6 or V60_Q6, in which Q6 is the reference transistor and it chops
during the second 60E of its conduction angle.
If Dwell > 60E, the chopping angle is extended by " = Dwell 60, and
total conduction angle = 60E + Dwell = 120E + ".
For a "Q6" mode the chopping simply continues beyond 60E, as in the lower-right diagram
in Fig. 156. But for a "Q1" mode the transistor resumes chopping after the end of its ON
interval, as in the lower-left diagram. In both cases the additional chopping angle " is
added at the end of the normal conduction interval, not at the beginning.
The default value Dwell = 0 or 60E thus gives a 120E total conduction angle, with " = 0. The
maximum value of Dwell is 120E, which gives a 180E conduction angle, with " = 60E.
Note that the phase-advance angle Th0 should generally be used to adjust the phase of the
current waveform to best effect. To compensate for the shift in the fundamental
component of the current waveform, Th0 should be approximately "/2.
Fig. 157 Sw_Ctl = C60_Q1 with Dwell = 90E and Drive = Square. Note the excursions in the line current above
ISP, which is set to 40A.
Fig. 158 Sw_Ctl = C60_Q6 with Dwell = 90E. Note the suppression of the (red) line current i
A
during the first
30E of the base interval (i.e., from 30E to 60E). This is due to the current-limiting action of Q6 acting on
i
B
, while Q5 maintains the current i
C
nearly equal to ISP. With Dwell = 90E the extended conduction
of Q5 ends at 60E and i
A
is able to rise to ISP (still regulated via Q6 in the return line).
When Connex = Wye or Delta, because of the 3-wire connection and the constraint i
A
i
B
i
C
' 0, Dwell
influences all three current waveforms. Its effect depends on the Sw_Ctl mode. Some explanation of the
different Sw_Ctl modes may be helpful.
# C60_Q1 (Fig. 157). The main current i
A
is regulated by Q1 throughout the base interval.
If Dwell = 0, Q5 remains off throughout the base interval, having just commutated i
C
. (i
C
generally freewheels through D2 during the first part of the base interval). Q6 remains ON
and carries i
A
i
C
, but it makes no attempt to regulate this "return line" current.
When Dwell > 60E, the commutation of Q5 is delayed by (Dwell 60)E, and Q5 resumes
chopping i
C
. The extended conduction of Q5 into the base interval is shown in heavy line
in Fig. 156. Until Q5 commutates, there are two chopping transistors: Q1 regulating i
A
,
and Q5 regulating i
C
. However, there is no regulation of i
B
, since Q6 remains ON during
the entire base interval. It is therefore possible for |i
B
| to exceed the set-point current
ISP. An example is given in Fig. 157.
# C60_Q6 (Fig. 158). The return-line current i
B
is regulated by Q6 throughout the base
interval. If Dwell = 0, Q5 remains off throughout the base interval, having just
commutated i
C
. (i
C
generally freewheels through D2 during the first part of the base
interval). Q1 remains ON and carries i
A
, but it leaves the regulation entirely to Q6.
When Dwell > 60E, the conduction of Q5 is extended by (Dwell 60)E, and Q5 continues
chopping i
C
. The extended conduction of Q5 into the base interval is shown in heavy line
in Fig. 156. Until Q5 commutates, there are two chopping transistors: Q6 regulating i
B
,
and Q5 regulating i
C
. Since i
B
'(i
A
i
C
), the sum of i
A
and i
C
is limited to ISP. Therefore
if Q5 maintains i
C
close to ISP, i
A
will be suppressed during the extension of the
conduction of Q5. An example is given in Fig. 158.
Fig. 159 Sw_Ctl = V120_Q1 with Dwell = 90E
Fig. 160 Sw_Ctl = V120_Q1 with Dwell = 120E
If Sw_Ctl = C120_Q1, C120_Q6, or V120_Q1, we have a "120E" control mode in which the primary chopping
transistor regulates the current for 120E, the whole of its normal conduction angle. This transistor can
be either Q1 or Q6 in Fig. 268. 120E control is valid only if Dwell = 0. In this case the control angle is the
same as the conduction angle. The current regulation is performed only by the upper transistors
(Q1,Q3,Q5) in C120_Q1; or only by the lower transistors in C120_Q6 or V120_Q6. If Dwell is non-zero, the
"120E" control modes are replaced by equivalent "60E" control modes, in which the primary chopping
transistor chops or regulates the current for only 60E, and all transistors take equal turns in the process.
The corresponding equivalent "60E" mode is given as follows when Dwell is non-zero:
C120_Q1 becomes C60_Q1
C120_Q6 becomes C60_Q6
V120_Q1 becomes V60_Q1
The V60_Q1 mode is not implemented as a user-selectable mode. It is equivalent to C60_Q1 with voltage-
PWM controlled by fChop and DuCy, instead of current regulation controlled by ISP and HBA. In effect,
it can be selected by setting Sw_Ctl = V120_Q1 with Dwell ' 60120E. With this background, we can now
examine the effect of Dwell in the V120_Q1 mode.
# V120_Q1 with Dwell 0 ("V60_Q1") (Figs. 159 and 160). This is similar to C60_Q1, but the
main current i
A
is regulated by PWM of Q1 throughout the base interval, controlled by
fChop and DuCy with ISP still active as back-up overcurrent protection. If Dwell > 60,
the conduction of Q5 is extended to Dwell, and Q5 resumes chopping i
C
. The extended
conduction of Q5 into the base interval is shown in heavy line in Fig. 156 for the C60_Q1
mode, which is similar. Until Q5 commutates, there are two chopping transistors: Q1
controlling i
A
, and Q5 regulating i
C
. However, there is no regulation of i
B
, since Q6
remains ON during the entire base interval. Therefore |i
B
| can exceed the set-point
current ISP. An example is given in Fig. 159 with Dwell ' 90E and ISP = 40 A.
Fig. 160 shows the maximum possible Dwell of 120E. This is sufficient to produce
continuous conduction in all three lines. It is similar to 6-step operation except that the
applied DC voltage is reduced from Vs to Vs DuCy by the PWM action, which is
controlled by fChop and DuCy.

The VPWM_ST (Voltage PWM, sine-triangle) modulator
MIX Modulation index used with Sw_Ctl ' VPWM_ST. This requires a theoretical
understanding of the sine-triangle modulator and its gain characteristics, which is
provided in Tutorial B09. In simple terms, when MIX < 1 the output voltage of the
inverter (in particular, the fundamental line-line voltage applied to the motor) is
proportional to MIX, but at higher levels it saturates. High values of MIX result in pulse-
dropping, and at very high values (say, > 30) the output voltage waveform becomes a six-
step waveform. See also MIX3. {0@5}
Note that VPWM_ST is not a current regulator, because it does not use current feedback;
neither does it have a "model reference" signal in its feedforward path. It is essentially
an adjustable voltage. It can be useful for studying the modulation index needed to
provide a certain voltage at the terminals of the motor. The phase of this voltage is
controlled by alpha6, which is referenced to the rotor position and therefore to the EMF.
The phase angle between the current and the EMF is not linearly related to alpha6; nor
is the current linearly related to MIX, and so the combination of MIX and alpha6 does
not form a convenient basis for torque control. Nevertheless, this mode is historically
important, and it is also useful as a diagnostic tool and for teaching and learning. It is
also pedagogically important because the sine-triangle modulator is used in the SynchReg
controller.
The SynchReg and SVModX regulators
The SynchReg controller is a true "vector" or "field-oriented" type of controller far better
suited to the control of torque. It is a sine-triangle modulator with sophisticated gain-
management that renders the system amenable to torque control. Its effectiveness is
increased by the fact that it works in dq axes, the natural set of coordinates for controlling
synchronous machines. One of the advantages of working in a synchronous reference
frame is the potential of eliminating the steady-state error in the current, an advantage
that cannot be realised in a controller working in a stationary reference frame.
This paves the way for the space-vector controller SVModX, which is closer to the state
of the art than any of the earlier controllers. A significant advantage of the SVModX
controller is the orderly progression from "linear" control to six-step as the modulation
index (i.e., output voltage) increases. This is important at high speed, because it
overcomes the uncontrolled and even chaotic pulse-dropping that characterizes the
simpler regulators when they become "saturated".
SVmode Mode selector used when Sw_Ctl ' SVModX. See Fig. 161 and Tutorial B09. Only brief
explanations are included here. {Auto}
Auto Automatic change-over from SVM to MSVM when the reference
voltage space-vector |u*| exceeds a user-specified value u_MSVM.
SVM The basic "linear" operating mode, where the space vector of the
modulation index remains within the available voltage hexagon.
MSVM Modified SVM mode with a reduced set of states to reduce switching
losses, albeit with increased distortion factor.
OVM Overmodulation range, providing orderly PWM when |u*| is
outside the available voltage hexagon.
continued/...
SVM
MSVM
Re
Im
u
1
u
3
u
2
u
4
u
5
u
6
u
*
OUTER
HEXAGON
OVM
Fig. 161 Space-vector diagram of Prof. J. Holtz
(See Tutorial B09)
161 161
../SVModX modes continued
BB1, BB2 "Bang-bang" modes resulting from the degeneration of the PWM
in the overmodulated range, ultimately degenerating into Six-
Step.
Circle "Circle tracking" controls the PWM so that the applied voltage
space-vector remains constant in magnitude at its maximum
possible constant value, such that the fundamental RMS voltage at
the inverter output terminals is V
LL1 rms
' Vs//2 ' 0@7071 Vs.
HexTrack "Hexagon tracking" controls the PWM so that the tip of the applied
voltage space-vector follows the hexagon of available voltage, such
that the terminal voltage is V
LL1 rms
' 0@7418 Vs.
SixStep "SixStep" is the classical six-step mode which produces a terminal
voltage with V
LL1 rms
' /6/B Vs ' 0@780 Vs. This is the maximum
possible value of V
LL1 rms
that can be obtained from the inverter.
VGCoefft Voltage gain coefficient used to control the feedforward gain when Sw_Ctl ' SynchReg
or SVModX. The magnitude and phase of the voltage applied to the motor is determined
by the modulation index m, which is formed from a "desired" or "reference" voltage space
vector V
dm
jV
qm
. Each component of this space vector is formed from the sum of a "model
reference" signal and a "current-error" signal:
V
dm
' VGCoefft [X
q
I
qm
R
ph
I
dm
] G_d )I
d
+ G_dq )I
q
V
qm
' VGCoefft [E
q1
X
d
I
dm
R
ph
I
qm
] G_q )I
q +
G_qd )I
d
If Sw_Ctl ' SVModX and
SVmode = SVM or
MSVM, the trajectory of
the voltage space-vector is
determined by the current
regul ator, with the
demanded current set by
ISP and its phase angle by
If Sw_Ctl ' SVModX and
SVmode ' Circle, PC-BDC
will drive the voltage space-
vector around the dotted
circle. If SVmode '
HexTrack, it drives the
voltage space-vector around
the outer hexagon. In both
cases delta is used to
control the phase of the
space-vector relative to the
where the reference current (desired current) is I
dm
jI
qm
, and )I
dm
j)I
qm
is the space
vector of the current-error signal, that is, the difference between the reference current and
the actual feedback current. The current-error signal includes a proportional-gain term
(PGain) and an integral-gain term (IGain):
)I
d
' (I
dm
i
d
) PGain Acc()I
d
) IGain
)I
q
' (I
qm
i
q
) PGain Acc()I
q
) IGain
where i
d
ji
q
is the feedback current and "Acc" represents the integral of the error signal.
The above equations show that the relative amounts of the "model reference" and
"current-error" components can be adjusted by selecting the values of VGCoefft, G_d,
G_q, G_dq and G_qd, while further control is available via PGain and IGain.
The "model reference" term is generally not adequate by itself to ensure a well-controlled
current waveform, and at least a small amount of current-feedback is usually necessary.
On the other hand, the regulator will generally work well enough without the "model
reference" component. See Tutorial B09. {1}
PGain Proportional gain used in RampComp, SynchReg and SVModX current regulators; see
above equations. Although the voltage equation and the current-error equation are
written in ordinary units, they are normalized before being applied to the modulator, so
PGain and IGain can be considered dimensionless and already normalized; therefore it
is not necessary to apply any scaling factors to them. {1}
IGain Integral gain used in RampComp, SynchReg and SVModX current regulators; see above
equations and PGain. The integral gain operates on a simple running accumulation of
the current-error signal with no anti-windup. Consequently, excessive values should be
avoided (typ. 1). {0}
u_MSVM is the modulation index at which there is an automatic changeover from SVM mode to M-
SVM mode when Sw_Ctl ' SVModX and SVmode = Auto. This requires a theoretical
understanding of the space-vector modulator; see Tutorial B09. {0@8}
G_d Coefficient of I
d
used in forming V
dm
; see VGCoefft above. {1}
G_q Coefficient of I
q
used in forming V
qm
see VGCoefft above. {1}
G_dq "Cross-coupling" gain coefficient of I
q
used in forming V
dm
. {0}
G_qd "Cross-coupling" gain coefficient of I
d
used in forming V
qm
. {0}
uVdm User-defined value of V
dm
in the above equations. This provides a means of driving the
SynchReg or SVModX modes with a predetermined modulating index, in the same way
as the VPWM_ST mode. A similar drive is possible when Drive = Rectifier and dq0 = true.
Non-zero values are essentially for diagnostic or didactic purposes. Both uVdm and
uVqm are treated as being normalized to Vs/2 for use with SynchReg; or to Vs B/3/6
for use with Rectifier; (see Tutorial B09). They must both be zero for normal operation.
{0}
uVqm User-defined value of the q-axis component V
qm
; similar to uVdm.
SolvMG activates the application of Rowan and Kerkman's describing function to compensate for
the nonlinearity of the sine/triangle pulse-width modulator, when Sw_Ctl = SynchReg.
See Tutorial B09. {false}
MIX3 Modulation index for third-harmonic injection, used with VPWM_ST and SynchReg. See
Tutorial B09. [p.u., commensurate with MIX] {0}
Direct Torque Control DTC parameters
(See SEM-2 and Tutorial B09). Note that in common with all the other regulators, PC-BDC does not
calculate the required set-point values or the control strategy relating these to the required load
conditions; it merely simulates the operation once these control parameters are specified.
TSP Set-point torque used in Dynamic design. Note that Static design still uses ISP and
gamma, since there is no current-forced equivalent in DTC control mode. TSP must be
set within the actual torque capability, which is not explicitly calculated by PC-BDC, but
must be estimated from a knowledge of the machine (or calculated from its parameters;
see SEM-2).
hTSP Hysteresis-band adjustment parameter for the torque error in DTC torque control. The
switching table uses TSP (1 1/hTSP) if hTSP > 0; otherwise the hysteresis-band is
zero.
PsiSP Set-point flux-linkage used in Dynamic design. Note that Static design still uses ISP
and gamma, since there is no current-forced equivalent in DTC control mode. PsiSP must
be set within the actual flux-linkage capability, which is speed-dependent and not
explicitly calculated by PC-BDC, but must be estimated from a knowledge of the machine
(or calculated from its parameters; see SEM-2). [mVs]
hPsiSP Hysteresis-band adjustment parameter for the flux-linkage error in DTC torque control.
The switching table uses PsiSP (1 1/hPsiSP) if hPsiSP > 0; otherwise the hysteresis-
band is zero.
DTCMode selects the following options for DTC control :
TPhi Classical DTC controlling torque and flux-linkage with 3-level
torque comparator using zero-voltage vectors.
TPhiNoZ Classical DTC controlling torque and flux-linkage with 2-level
torque comparator using no zero-voltage vectors.
PhiDelta DTC variant controlling load-angle * and flux-linkage. The set-
point value of * is delta.
Bifilar Determines whether a bifilar winding connection is used with unipolar drive. (See
Connex and nPhUni, and Fig. 277).
NphUni No. of phases used with Connex = n-Ph Uni (unipolar drive). If Bifilar = true, NphUni
can be 2 or 4; but if Bifilar = false, NphUni must be 1 or 2. See Figs. 276 and 274.
kBif If Bifilar = true with Connex = n-Ph Uni, PC-BDC admits 2 or 4 phases and uses the drive
circuit in Fig. 274. Complementary switching is used, so that if Q1 is on, Q2 is off, and vice-
versa: thus the conduction period is normally 180Eelec. The windings of complementary
phases share the same slots, as in Fig. 266. Accordingly, they are tightly coupled. The
coupling coefficient kBif is provided to adjust the mutual inductance: thus if kBif is
different from the default value of 0, PC-BDC takes the mutual inductance to be Mph =
kBif Lph, where Lph is the phase inductance. Note that kBif must be negative, e.g.
!0.9. Dwell can be used to reduce the conduction angle below 180E, and chopping is
controlled by Sw_Ctl, ISP, fChop, etc.
22
When Connex = Delta and dq0 = true, for the Dynamic design calculation Rac and Lac are incorporated into
the phase impedance by adding 3 Rac to the phase resistance and 3 Lac to the phase inductance; in other words,
they are treated as part of the machine impedance and not part of the supply impedance.
Drive Circuit Parameters
Rac When Drive = AC Volt, Rac is the resistance of the AC source or load, including the lead
resistance as shown in Figs. 278-280.
22
Otherwise it is just the lead resistance as shown in
Figs. 268-270. Also see ZLspec on p. 167. [ohm] {0}
Lac When Drive = AC Volt, Lac is the inductance of the AC source or load, including the lead
inductance as shown in Figs. 278-280. Otherwise it is just the lead inductance as shown
in Figs. 268-270. Also see ZLspec on p. 167. [mH] {0}
Vq Forward voltage drop in one transistor. [V] {0}
Rq On-state resistance of one transistor. [ohm] {0}
Vd Forward voltage drop of one diode. [V] {0}
R_s DC link resistance, Figs. 268,269,270,271 and 272. [ohm] {0}
t_q Transistor switching time. This is used for calculating switching losses WSwitch. t_q
should be set to the average of the turn-on time and the turn-off time. [s] {0}
Rd With Connex = 3-Ph Uni or n-Ph Uni, the freewheeling line current is dumped into a
damping resistor Rd instead of being returned to the supply. Rd is in ohms. See Fig. 274
and Vz. [ohm] {1.0}
UBkDiode Selects or deselects the blocking diode in the 3-phase unipolar drive circuit, Fig. 275 p. 334.
In certain circumstances a high di/dt in the freewheeling phase can induce a negative
current in the phase whose current is just starting to build up. This effect depends on the
dampling or suppression resistance Rd. {true}
eDet Selects whether the EMF sensing waveform is plotted. (See [1]).
Vz There is no conventional freewheeling diode circuit in the bifilar unipolar drive circuit,
Fig. 274, and the turn-off is controlled by the transistor avalanche voltage Vz. PC-
BDC provides for a separate Zener-diode circuit with a damping resistance Rd. To prevent
spurious conduction during negative half-cycles of the generated EMF, Vz > Vs + e
pk
,
where e
pk
is the peak EMF. In practice, to achieve sufficiently fast turn-off, Vz needs to
be of the order of 2!3 times the supply voltage (producing corresponding voltage stress on
the transistor). Note that the losses in the Zener diode (and damping resistor) may make
it impractical to use PWM or chopping with this circuit. [V]
Cdc Capacitance of DC link capacitor, Fig. 272 [F]. {0}
Rdc DC source resistance, Figs. 268271; or DC load resistance in Fig. 272 [ohm]. {0}
Ldc DC source inductance, Figs. 268271; or DC load inductance in Fig. 272 [mH]. {0}
Load specification for AC Volt operation
LoadSpec The method of setting the operating point when Drive = AC Volt. The table on p. 166
shows which calculations are available for permanent-magnet (PM) machines. The G
columns refer to generators (Sw_Ctl = Generator), and the M columns to motors (Sw_Ctl
= Motor).
CalcVer must be cv11 or higher for LoadSpec to be active.
If VDFEA = true, the embedded finite-element solver is used. If the armature current is
unknown, the calculation is iterative.
If MatchFES = AdjMEC, the internal magnetic circuit solver is adjusted using XCd, XCq,
and XBrT (for permanent-magnet machines) to force the phasor diagram (calculated
using the internal magnetic equivalent circuit) to represent the result correctly.
If VDFEA = false, the calculation uses the phasor diagram with the current values of Eq1,
Xd, and Xq. Because of the saturation of these parameters, calculations with VDFEA =
false should not be expected to be accurate unless Eq1, Xd and Xq are verified by some
other independent means at the particular load-point.
LoadSpec options
PM
G M
V-delta 1 1 The load is specified via the RMS line-line AC voltage Vs at
the machine terminals, together with the load angle delta
(*), which is the phase angle between Vs and Eq1.
The armature current and its phase angle are unknown at
the start of this calculation.
Before LoadSpec was introduced, this was the only means of specifying
the load. It is inconvenient in many practical cases where * is unknown.
OC 1 1 Open-circuit.
SC 1 1 Short-circuit. This is actually solved as a V-delta problem
with delta = 0 and Vs0 instead of Vs. Vs0 is either zero or
a very small value.
R-L 1 The load is specified as a resistance Rac and inductance
Lac in each line of the supply. This is solved by adding Zac
= Rac +jTLac to the internal impedance of the machine,
solving the short-circuit problem for the current I, and
finally recovering the terminal voltage as ZacI. The load
impedance can be specified as a per-unit impedance ZLpu
with a specified power-factor rqPF, if ZLspec = ZL.
Id-Iq 1 1 The current is specified as a phasor value, remembering
that the d-axis is the real axis and the q-axis is the
imaginary axis, so Eq1 lies on the q-axis. The specification
goes with ISPspec, and uses ISP and gamma, or ISPd and
ISPq. The excitation is fixed, but the terminal voltage is
unknown at the start of the calculation, and is not fixed.
Tshaft 1 The shaft torque is specified as rqTshaft, with the voltage
Vs. The armature current is initially unknown.
Pshaft 1 The shaft power is specified as rqPshaft. Otherwise the
calculation is similar to the one for LoadSpec = Tshaft.
The speed is specified as RPM.
rqPF The requested power factor when LoadSpec = R-L and Zlspec = ZL. A positive value
means that the current is lagging the voltage. For a generator, according to convention,
this means that the machine is generating reactive power, and is said to be overexcited.
[] {}
rqTshaft The requested shaft torque when LoadSpec = Tshaft and Sw_Ctl = Motor. [] {}
rqPshaft The requested shaft power when LoadSpec = Tshaft and Sw_Ctl = Motor. [] {}
ZLspec The method of specifying the load impedance when LoadSpec = R-L.
RL The resistance and inductance are specified in each phase using
Rac and Lac (q.v.)
ZL The load impedance is specified in per-unit, with power-factor
rqPF. In this case Rac and Lac remain in circuit as additional
connector impedances; if they are used at all, they will be expected
to have much lower values.
ZLpu The load impedance in per-unit, used when LoadSpec = R-L and ZLspec = ZL. The phase
impedance will be ZLpu Zph_base. [p.u.] {0}
VDFEA Selects the embedded finite-element solver for LoadSpec calculations.
When VDFEA = true and MatchFES = AdjMEC, use DDFE = FEdqDD(Q) for permanent-
magnet machines (p. 143).
When VDFEA = true, LossFe must be Mech. [] {false}
XRxLSIPF Under-relaxation factor used in the nonlinear iterative LoadSpec calculation. [] {0@4}
TolVDFEA Tolerance parameter for certain LoadSpec calculations. If TolVDFEA > 0, it modifies
the internal convergence tolerance , to ,/TolVDFEA. [] {0}
Vs0 When LoadSpec = SC, the terminal voltage is nominally zero but in some cases
convergence can be slow or difficult with zero terminal voltage, and it can help to set a
small but finite value Vs0, such as 1% or 0@1% of the rated terminal voltage. [V] {0}
Settings
ISLA The default value of the integration step-length is 0@5 elecE and the displayed waveforms
are sampled every 0@5 elecE, but PC-BDC uses ISLA internal integration steps for every
0@5E. Generally speaking, a higher value (smaller step) is needed at low speed, but the
default value of 64 covers a wide range of cases. {64}
Tol Tolerance band adjustment parameter. The Dynamic design calculations must continue
until the DC offset transients have decayed to a negligible level. These transients are an
inherent feature of any circuit and cannot be excluded from the simulation. The
convergence criterion is a tolerance band whose initial value is ISP/Tol, but PC-BDC may
adjust it dynamically. A small value of Tol means a wide tolerance band, which tends to
make the convergence criterion easier to satisfy. A large value of Tol makes the results
more accurate but also makes the convergence more difficult to achieve. Tol can be used
in conjunction with ISLA to assist in the convergence of difficult cases. Alternatively, the
adjustment can be made automatically if Tol_ISLA = Auto. The convergence or "settling"
test can be avoided completely in certain cases if Cycles is non-zero. {8}
Tol_ISLA selects automatic variation of Tol and ISLA:
Auto The tolerance Tol and integration step-length adjustment ISLA are
automatically adjusted when PC-BDC detects a convergence failure in
the Dynamic design calculation.
ErrorMsg Tol and ISLA remain fixed, but PC-BDC displays an error message if
it detects a convergence failure in the Dynamic design calculation.
The automatic variation may be slow, but it can be bypassed by setting Tol_ISLA =
ErrorMsg, provided that a suitable value of ISLA is chosen. Convergence problems are
usually related to the current regulator parameters, or to lack of damping in Rectifier
circuits.
Cycles sets the maximum number of recursions in the calculation of the circuit simulation
equations in Dynamic design. If Cycles = 0 the recursion is terminated automatically
by Tol (q.v.). A non-zero value (e.g., 10) can helps in solving problems of convergence or
settling time. The maximum value of Cycles is set interally. See also NCycles. {0}
Note that PC-BDC integrates the circuit simulation equations recursively in segments of
60E or 90E or 180E (depending on the particular choice of Drive and Sw_Ctl). Therefore
values of Cycles of 1,2,3,..etc. can be used to examine the solution after each individual
recursion. Discontinuities appearing in early recursions normally vanish as the process
continues, but in cases of convergence failure they may persist, or in extreme cases the
waveforms may develop chaotically. (See p. 15 and Fig. 35). The problems causing this
condition are almost always in the current-regulator settings.
When Drive = Rectifier, Cycles must be set to a higher value (typically 2050) to allow the
DC link capacitor voltage time to settle. Settling time can be a problem in Rectifier
calculations, and it sometimes helps to increase the circuit resistance (Rac, Rdc, R_s).
XRx Relaxation factor used to help convergence and overcome occasional cases of limit-cycling
in the simulation. Values between 0@3 and 1@0 are normal. {0@4}
EMFCalc and eCalc see pp. 113114.
CalcVwfm selects the method of calculating the waveform of voltage (or flux-linkage) of phase 1.
None The voltage waveform is not calculated.
Direct The voltage waveform is calculated from the states of the power
transistors together with the supply voltage.
dPsidt The voltage waveform is constructed from Ri + dR/dt, i.e., the sum of
the resistive voltage drop and the rate of change of flux-linkage R.
No R As dPsidt, but omitting the Ri term.
Psi Just the flux-linkage R is plotted.
Poly The voltage is calculated by differentiating a local polynomial fitted
to the flux-linkage waveform.
Note that because PC-BDC only displays 720 samples of its waveforms, the voltage
waveforms appearing on the monitor may be subject to severe aliasing especially in the
case of PWM voltages.
Saliency determines whether the machine is treated as salient-pole or nonsalient-pole.
Auto If RotType = SurfRad, SurfPll, BLoaf, ExtRad, ExtPll, or FullRing, the
machine is treated as nonsalient-pole.
Yes The machine is specified as salient-pole.
No The machine is specified as nonsalient-pole.
Saliency should be Auto except in the case of a surface-magnet rotor that acquires
saliency when Embed = Type1, Type2 etc. and the web is wide enough to make Xq differ
significantly from Xd. PC-BDC expects salient-pole motors to be sinewound.
RTorq determines whether reluctance torque will be calculated. {On}
TorqCalc Method of calculating Tgap and its components (see page 237).
ei_wfms The PM alignment torque is computed from the product of the
EMF and current waveforms; the reluctance torque is calculated
from the square of the current waveform multiplied by (Ld Lq).
The average torque is determined from the torque waveform.
However, the effect of saturation can be included only via its effects
on Ld and Lq and the amplitude of the EMF waveform; any effect it
might have on the shapes of these waveforms is not considered.
Pos_Seq The torque components are calculated using the phasor equations
on page 237. This method is appropriate for sinewave drives with
dq0 = true; the effect of saturation is readily incorporated
through its effects on Eq1, Ld and Lq.

rpmBase Base speed in rev/min, used in the calculation of the speeds NQ and ND (q.v.). These
speeds are part of the theory of the ellipse diagram, which is described in SEM-2.
TSMin Minimum speed in torque/speed calculation, [rpm]. If this is zero, PC-BDC estimates a
value near zero speed. {0}
TSMax Maximum speed in torque/speed calculation, [rpm]. If this is zero, PC-BDC estimates a
value near the no-load speed. {0}
R
d
' Q
1Md
L
d
i
d
; R
q
' L
q
i
q
.
eqRevert = false
eqRevert = true
Fig. 162 Effect of eqRevert in MatchFE calculation (i-psi GoFER)
e
q
'
2
3
[ e
1
sin 2 e
2
sin (2 120E) e
3
sin (2 120E)] .
dqRevert Reinstates an error in calculations with Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = dq_VV_CR. This error
was in versions released between May 2002 and approximately September 2003. dqRevert
is liable to be removed in the near future, so any datafiles that use it should be converted
to using dqRevert = false. {false}
eqRevert Reinstates an earlier calculation of the magnet flux-linkage in the d-axis equivalent coil
of the stator winding. When dq0 = true, the flux-linkage equations for the d- and q-axes
are
If eqRevert = true, the magnet flux-linkage Q
1Md
is computed as e
q
/T
e
, where e
q
is
obtained from the phase EMFs by Park's transformation,
and T
e
is the electrical angular frequency 2Bf. The expression e
q
/T
e
is a de facto
integration that is correct for the fundamental EMF and flux-linkage, but incorrect if the
EMF waveform contains harmonics. The result is that the EMF harmonics are incorrectly
mapped into the flux-linkage waveforms, where they appear as a spurious ripple, as can
be seen in the lower diagrams in Fig. 162.
Strictly speaking, the dq-axis model should not be used in cases where the EMF waveform
contains harmonics, yet it remains the best available method for salient-pole machines
in spite of this problem. Therefore if eqRevert = false, the EMF harmonics are simply
discarded and only the fundamental flux-linkage is used, Q
1Md
= Psi1Md (q.v.) {false}
SCCycles The number of cycles to calculate in the symmetrical 3-phase short-circuit, Analysis |
Short-circuit (analytical). See Fig. 30 p. 46. [] {15}
SClambda The point-on-wave at which the symmetrical short-circuit is applied, (see SEM-2). When
SCLamda = 0, the DC offset term in phase 1 is maximized. When Sclambda = 90E, the DC
offset term is zero in phase 1, but still retains a value in phases 2 and 3. [E] {0}
t_FS The time at which the short-circuit is applied. [ms] {0}
t_FC The time at which the short-circuit simulation suddenly switches to the steady-state
solution; see Fig. 30. This provides a convenient display of the relative magnitudes of the
fault current and the steady-state current. It can also be regarded as the time at which the
short-circuit fault is cleared. [ms] {100}
Prefault defines the operating condition just before the application of a short-circuit fault.
OC_1st Open-circuit
Load_1st On-load
TorqStep The torque step to be applied in Analysis | Line-start (load step). [Nm]
t_TS The time at which the torque step is applied. [ms] {0}
t_TC The time at which the torque step is cleared. [ms] {100}
C-Probe selects the current probe location(s) for waveform plotting. [The current probe location
has nothing to do with the current sensor location, which is part of the control strategy
and is determined by Sw_Ctl.] The five options are:
Phase phase currents
Line line currents
Ph+Line both phase and line currents plotted together
Phase 1 phase 1 current
Line A line A current
Ph1+LnA phase 1 and line A currents
[F7] in graph viewing also edits C-Probe. If C-Probe = Line, the EMF waveforms will be
the line-line waveforms. If C-Probe = Phase, the EMF waveforms will be the phase
waveforms. If C-Probe = Ph+Line, both sets of EMF's are plotted, as are both sets of
currents. The phase sequence of the currents and EMF's is vital. For three-phase motors
it should always be red-yellow-blue. (If the phase sequence is incorrect, check the Offset
parameter used with custom windings). Since C-Probe is distinct from the current sensor
location, it has no effect on any calculations or current-control strategy.
CalcVer Calculation version. This parameter is used to restore old calculation methods when they
are superseded by new ones. See page 358. The highest available version is
recommended.
WriteLoop controls the writing of waveform data to be written to external files. In the table below,
the right-hand column gives the value of EMFCalc required to read the file back into PC-
BDC. The EMF and tooth-flux and yoke-flux waveforms are open-circuit waveforms.
Value Text file Contents of text file EMFCalc
None No files are written.
Cycle CYCLE.WFM The waveforms resulting from the simulation
in Static design or Dynamic design.
TFlux TFW.WFM Tooth flux density vs. rotor position, from S
d-axis to N d-axis.
ExtTFW
TEMF ETW.WFM EMF waveform of a single-turn search coil
wound around one tooth, vs. rotor position
ExtEMF
YFlux YFW.WFM Yoke flux density waveform
YEMF EYW.WFM EMF waveform of a single-turn search coil
wound around the yoke
All All the above
files
All the above waveforms are written to the
respective files.
ExtTFW or
ExtEMF
kESpec determines the method of defining the EMF constant, kE. (k
E
). The units of kE are defined
using Data | I/O Units or Options | Default Units. (See Ref. [0]).
eLLpk kE is the peak line-line EMF divided by the speed.
ErecAv kE is the mean rectified line-line EMF divided by the speed.
kTSpec determines the method of defining the torque constant, kT. (k
T
). The units of kT are
defined using Data | I/O Units or Options | Default Units. (See Ref. [0]).
ILpk kT is the mean electromagnetic torque divided by the peak line
current, i.e., Tgap/ILpk.
ILrms kT is the mean electromagnetic torque divided by the RMS line
current, i.e., Tgap/ILrms.
TIFspec selects the weighting factors for the telephone influence factors, TIF{L-N} and TIF{L-L}.
None TIF/THF not calculated.
IEEE 519 Calculates TIF using IEEE Standard 519 (requires NEMA MG.1
for the actual values of the weighting factors). The machine is
assumed to be operating with a fundamental frequency of 60 Hz.
IEC 60034 Calculates THF using IEC 60034. The machine is assumed to be
operating with a fundamental frequency of 50 Hz.
In both cases the TIF/THF is computed using the harmonic analysis of the open-circuit
EMF waveform normalised to the fundamental, regardless of the actual speed (RPM).
PhIScale The scale factor for current phasors in the phasor diagram. [] {2}
Ted/4 Losses
The Losses page is concerned with all losses except Joule losses in the stator conductors. This includes
iron loss (core loss), mechanical and windage loss, and rotor eddy-current loss.
The rotor eddy-current losses are caused by space-harmonics of the winding distribution combined with
time-harmonics in the current waveform, together with the effects of slot-modulation of the airgap flux.
The theory is explained in SEM-2. For permanent-magnet machines the rotor eddy-current loss is closely
related to the calculation of the subtransient reactance and time-constant used in short-circuit
calculations when there are conductive components on the rotor. It is also related to the calculation of
screening in superconducting machines.
The Losses page also includes several parameters connected with the calculation of the slot-modulation
of the airgap flux.
Tutorial B18 introduces the rotor eddy-current loss calculations for permanent-magnet machines.
Iron Loss
WFeCalc selects the method of calculating iron loss (core loss). PC-BDC uses the modified
Steinmetz equation for the specific core loss (W/kg), including hysteresis and eddy-
current losses. The alternative methods differ according to method of calculating the
peak flux-density and mean squared dB/dt.
OC When EMFCalc = BLV or BplotTF or BLV/UnBal, the iron loss is
computed by formula.
The flux-density waveform is assumed to be sinusoidal and the core loss is
computed from eqn. (12.6) in [0] or eqn. (1.124) in SEM-1 if WFe_Bwfm =
Sine. The on-load iron loss can be estimated by scaling to the on-load airgap
voltage (see WFeScale).
For permanent-magnet machines with WFe_Bwfm = Trapeze the assumed
variation of B
T
& B
Y
with rotor angle is trapezoidal, and WFe is obtained
from the formulas derived in 9.3 of Ref. [2]. This calculation is limited to the
open-circuit iron loss, and there is no estimate of the on-load iron loss.
With all other cases of EMFCalc, the calculated open-circuit waveforms of
B
T
& B
Y
are used to obtain the peak flux-densities and the mean squared
dB/dt, according to 9.4 of Ref. [2]. Again there is no estimate of the on-load
iron loss.
Static design always calculates the iron loss using WFeCalc = OC.
Ld_Bwfm On-load waveforms of B
T
and B
Y
vs. rotor angle are calculated over
180Eelec (or 360Eelec for fractional-slot motors), in steps of 1E elec.
If CalcSatn = Calculate or Iterate, PC-BDC estimates the effect of saturation
on the B
T
and B
Y
waveforms, for surface-magnet machines only.
Waveforms of B
T
and B
Y
can be observed via Results | Simulation Graphs |
Bt and By (rotation). The example in Fig. 163 shows the effect of PWM or
chopping. In principle the differentiation of these waveforms to get the mean
squared dB/dt includes the effect of the PWM on the B waveforms and
therefore on the core loss. However, with a step length of 1Eelec the sampling
is generally too coarse to capture the detail in the PWM ripple.
RFe (Line-start motors only). The core loss is represented by an equivalent
resistor in the equivalent circuit. See RFeType.
ExtBLoad The waveforms of B
T
and B
Y
are imported from a text file specified using
Data|External datafiles [Ctrl+E]. The format of this text file is given in
the PC-BDC file formats manual.
WFe_Bwfm Assumed waveform for core-loss calculation when WFeCalc = OC and EMFCalc = BLV
or BplotTF or BLV/unbal.
Trap Trapezoidal
Sine Sinusoidal
XFe Adjustment factor for core losses. A value higher than 1 is normally needed, because of
the approximate nature of core-loss calculations and uncertainties which often exist in
the data for particular steels, especially when the values of flux-density or frequency are
different from those at which the steel data was measured. {1}
Fig. 163 B
T
and B
Y
waveforms as the rotor rotates through 360E elec, obtained with a surface-magnet
motor, Dynamic design, with WFeCalc = Ld_Bwfm. This example has Drive = Square.
LossFe determines whether the core losses are treated as electrical or mechanical losses.
Mechanical The iron loss is subtracted from the shaft power if the machine is
motoring, or added if generating.
Electrical The iron loss is added to the electrical input power at the
machine terminals if motoring, or subtracted if generating.
WFeScale When Drive = Sine or AC Volt, the peak airgap flux-density Bg1L, the peak tooth flux-
density Bst, and the peak yoke flux-density Bsy are scaled by the ratio of the airgap
voltage V1m to the open-circuit EMF. If WFeScale = Sine or AC Volt or Both, WFe is
updated (recursively if necessary) according to the scaled flux-densities. {AC Volt}
RFeType specifies the location of the core-loss resistor in the equivalent circuit, when Drive = AC
Volt, Connex = SplitPh, and SymmCpts = Original or Natural. (Line-start motors only).
See [20].
None The iron loss is estimated from the peak flux-density and frequency, but not
represented in the equivalent circuit.
Rc_L Iron-loss is estimated from the peak flux-density and frequency, and
represented in the equivalent circuit by a resistance Rc in parallel with the
magnetizing reactance.
Rc_T As Rc_L, but the core-loss resistor has two components, one in parallel with
the magnetizing reactance and one in parallel with the rotor leakage
reactance.
Rc_VI As Rc_L, but with an additional current-dependent core-loss resistance.
IncRRTrg See p. ?.
Wmb ' a_mb b_mb rpm
c_mb
[W]
Windage & Friction, and Bearing Loss
Wf0 The power loss due to windage and friction specified at the speed RPM0. PC-BDC does not
calculate windage loss Wwf from first principles, but scales it from known values
according to a simple power law for the variation of windage torque with speed:
Wwf = Wf0 (RPM/RPM0)
(NWFT+1)
Watts
The default for Wf0 is 0 at RPM0 = RPM, with NWFT = 1.
RPM0 Reference speed at which windage power Wf0 is specified. Minimum value is 1 rpm.
{RPM}.
NWFT Exponent for variation of windage torque with speed. {1}
CWmb determines whether the mechanical/bearing loss Wmb is calculated. {false}
Xmb Adjustment factor for mechanical/bearing loss, which is calculated by the formula
The mechanical/bearing loss is subtracted from the electromagnetic torque if the
machine is motoring, or added if generating.{1}
a_mb Coefficient used in the calculation of Wmb.
b_mb Coefficient used in the calculation of Wmb.
c_mb Exponent used in the calculation of Wmb.
PC-BDCcircuit&
controlsimulation
Static/Dynamicdesign
M
m
(n)
Fluxharmonics
Magnetflux
pulsation
Short-circuit
calculation
Flux-dipsweeping
1RotorCan
2Magnet
WRCanFDS
WMag_FDS
FDS
OPTIONAL
T
d0
' '
T
d
' '
L
d
' '
L
d
(jT)
, , ,
Calc.subtransient
parameters(IPM)
Norotorcan
CalcSlotModLossIPM
HH
CalcIWHxLossIPM
WMag_IWH
Calc.subtransient
parameters(SPM)
[Frequencyscan]
T
d0
' '
T
d
' '
L
d
' '
L
d
(jT)
, , ,
CalcSlotModLossSPM
[equivalentcurrentsheet]
WMag_PHx
WRCanPHx
CalcIWHxLossSPM
WMag_IWH
WRCanIWH
RLFC.wpg
CalcACHx
Currenttime-harmonics
I
ph
(n)
Salient-pole?
CDE
CDE
CDE
Ldjw
Ldjw
Ldjw
YES NO
SPM IPM
WMag_PHx
WMag_SOR
WShftSOR
WRCanSOR
WShftIWH
Individualtimeand
spaceharmonics
Harmonicsof
sine/trianglePWM
(Complexdiffusionequation)
Fig. 164 Rotor loss flowchart, including subtransient parameters
Rotor eddy-current losses
Fig. 164 shows the structure of the rotor loss calculation and related subtransient parameters for
permanent-magnet machines.
The time-harmonics in the current waveform [I
ph
(n)] are calculated by Static design or Dynamic
design, according to the method specified by the value of WMagCalc. These are automatically combined
with the space-harmonics of the winding distribution to calculate the "IWH" losses in the magnet, in the
shaft, and in a rotor can (if fitted). "IWH" means losses due to "current (I) and winding harmonics".
A separate calculation estimates the loss due to flux-pulsation caused by slot-modulation of the airgap
flux. For surface-magnet machines the main component is the "SOR" component calculated with FPLoss
= EqCS and SlotMod = HH. PC-BDC estimates the slot-ripple and determines an equivalent current-sheet,
which excites a field solution similar to the one used for the "IWH" component. A legacy method FPLoss
= FDS is based on "flux-dip sweeping" which produces two components "FDS" and "PHx"; but this method
is poor and is of historical interest only. "SOR" signifies "slot-opening ripple".
For interior-magnet machines all the eddy-current calculations are based on a circuit model (Ldjw) which
uses the subtransient time-constant obtained from an analytical field solution. This model is used for
the "IWH" component and the flux-pulsation ("PHx") component. The flux-pulsation in the magnet must
be specified or calculated using an external file obtained with the i-psi GoFER.
Tutorial B18 gives explicit instructions and examples for both machine types.
WMagnet ' a
wmag
b
wmag
RPM
rpm
wmag
n
wmag
[W] (23)
Rotor eddy-current losses
WMagCalc Determines the method of calculating the magnet loss.
Internal The time-harmonics in the current waveform are those calculated
in the normal course of Static design or Dynamic design. They
are combined with the space-harmonics of the winding distribution
to determine the loss-producing harmonic fields rotating at various
speeds relative to the rotor.
User The magnet losses are calculated by the following formula. All other
rotor losses are set to zero.

The coefficients a_wmag, b_wmag, rpm_wmag, and n_wmag are
generally obtained from measurements.
Hex1Freq As Internal, except that the current waveform has only one time-
harmonic determined according to the value of HexSpec.
HexST As Internal, except that NPWMHx time-harmonics in the current
waveform are calculated for sine/triangle PWM with natural
sampling and a specified carrier frequency (see STCFR) and
modulation index (see STmix). See also m_STCFR and b_STCFR.
The magnet losses are calculated in three components:
WMagIWH from the combination of current time-harmonics and winding space-harmonics;
WMagPHx from pulsations of the magnet flux caused by slotting (permeance harmonics); and
WMagSOR from "slot-opening ripple" in the airgap flux distribution.
Similar components WRCanIWH, WRCanPHx, and WRCanSOR are calculated for the rotor can in
surface-magnet machines. WMagSOR is not computed for interior-magnet machines. The theory is given
in SEM-2.
When WMagCalc = Internal, the loss data table is written for all the ..IWH components. See p. p. 267.
When WMagCalc = Hex1Freq, the loss data table is not written. Instead, (for surface-magnet machines
only) the design sheet displays the field solution in terms of the vector potential, the radial and
tangential components of flux-density, the current density, and the value of the Poynting vector at the
radius R_h. All these parameters are complex, so the real and imaginary components are given.
a_wmag Coefficient used in eqn. (23). {0}
b_wmag Coefficient used in eqn. (23). {0}
n_wmag Exponent used in eqn. (23). {0}
rpm_wmag Base speed coefficient used in eqn. (23). {RPM}
pc_Mag Percentage conductivity of magnet, relative to that of copper. Typical values are 1@2% for
high-energy NdFeB magnets, 2% for Rare-Earth/Cobalt magnets, and practically zero for
ferrite or bonded magnets. {1@2%}
TCCMag Temperature coefficient of resistivity of magnet. [%/EC]
pc_Sh Percentage conductivity of the shaft, relative to that of copper.
CalcEddy selects the method of calculating eddy-current loss due to the combination of space-
harmonics in the winding distribution and time-harmonics in the current waveform. For
surface-magnet machines the regions are as shown in Fig. 166. The IR4, IR4C, IR6, ER2 and
ER3 methods are based on the solution of the complex diffusion equation.

NoEddy No calculation
IR4 The main method for interior-rotor motors. It has 4 regions
including the airgap, the rotor can, the magnet, and the rotor body
and shaft which are treated as a single region.
IR6 An extension of the IR4 method, in which the rotor body is
nonconducting and is distinct from the shaft. The 6-region model is
intended for slotless windings but the implementation is not
complete. In this version, IR6 should be used simply as a check on
IR4. The IR6 method uses normalized radii and has more error-
checking than the other methods, so it might help to try this method
in cases where IR4 fails to compute (for example, as a result of very
large or very small arguments in the Bessel functions).
ER2 This is the main method for exterior-rotor motors. It has only 2
regions: the airgap and the magnet.
ER3 An extension of the ER2 method, in which the rotor shell is
conductive, with conductivity pc_Shaft and permeability
mu_Shaft.
IR4C This is a cartesian equivalent of IR4, included to deal with very
large "ring-shaped" machines in which the diameter is much greater
than the magnet thickness, or the yoke thickness. It should give
similar results to IR4 or IR6 for such machines.
Ldjw This method is used for interior-magnet machines. It is based on
the frequency-response of the synchronous reactance L
d
(jT), and is
fundamentally different from all the previous methods.
FreqScan Controls the calculation of the frequency scan. There are two functions of the frequency
scan. One is to determine the subtransient time-constant T
d0
NN, and the other is to
determine a screening function when there is a rotor can. The subtransient time-constant
is needed for short-circuit calculations. The screening function is of interest as a measure
of degree to which the rotor can (if fitted) protects the magnet from sudden transients.
Whereas both functions are relevant for surface-magnet machines, only the subtransient
function is relevant for interior-magnet machines.
None No frequency-scan. In this case T
d0
NN will not be calculated. As a
result, no magnet losses will be calculated for interior-magnet
machines, unless uTd0NN has a sensible value.
SubTrans The frequency-scan is computed to calculate T
d0
NN.
ScreenFn The frequency-scan is used to calculate the screening function,
which is included in the Simulation graphs.
Both The frequency scan is computed to calculate T
d0
NN and the
screening function.

mu_Shaft Relative permeability of shaft. If mu_Shaft = 0, the permeability is taken from the steel
database for the shaft material at 1 T. A very high value can result in a small skin-depth
in the shaft at high frequency, which may cause difficulties with the calculation of the
Bessel functions in the field solution. It is permissible to use a lower value (e.g., 50) to
avoid this problem, since it will have very little effect on the calculated loss. {100}
FPLoss selects the method of calculating losses in the magnets and rotor can (if fitted) due to slot-
ripple or slot-modulation of the airgap field, often called "permeance harmonics". All
methods are explained in SEM-2. The loss components are those ending in PHx or FDS
(p. 267).
None Losses due to slot-ripple are not calculated.
FDS Two components are calculated separately. The PHx loss is
calculated from the variation of the main flux, while the FDS
component is computed by "flux-dip sweeping" at the rotor surface.
The method assumes resistance-limited eddy-currents. It is not
available for interior-magnet machines.
EqCS The loss is calculated by formal solution of the complex diffusion
equation, excited by an equivalent current-sheet at the stator bore
that represents the airgap flux modulation due to slotting. This
method is not available for interior-magnet machines.
Extl For interior-magnet machines the flux modulation is calculated by
the i-psi GoFER and used with NPHx. The magnet flux waveform
is obtained from the *.phim file.
MagSeg Determines the method of calculating any segmentation of the magnet. These methods are
all approximate post hoc modifications of the losses, without modifying the underlying
eddy-current solution, (see SEM-2). It is probable that calculations with MagSeg = NoSeg
give the highest losses, representing a pessimistic or "worst-case" estimate. NoSeg is
mathematically the simplest case and the only one that can claim to be rigorous.
S = surface-magnet only; I = interior-magnet only
NoSeg In surface-magnet machines (including breadloaf-type), the magnet
is treated as a continuous cylinder. In interior-magnet machines,
the magnets are already in the form of discrete blocks, and they are
treated as such without further segmentation.
Speed_C
S
The magnet is segmented into NMC segments in the
circumferential direction, with no segmentation in the axial
direction. Residual current suppression is applied to the eddy-
current solution.
Speed_Z The magnet is segmented into NMZ segments or rings in the axial
direction, with no segmentation in the circumferential direction.
Speed_CZ The magnet is segmented into NMC segments in the
circumferential direction and NMZ segments or rings in the axial
direction. Both SPEED_C and SPEED_Z methods are applied.
Speed_CRN Similar to Speed_CZ, except that Russell and Norsworthy's method
is used to calculate the effect of axial segmentation.
RsNwthy Similar to Speed_Z, except that Russell and Norsworthy's method
is used to calculate the effect of axial segmentation.
Squares Simple analysis of segmentation into NMC NMZ segments. This
method is too simple to have much hope of an accurate result, but
is included for analytical interest.
NMC/NMZ I Each magnet block is divided into NMC NMZ segments.
NMC The number of magnet segments counted in the circumferential direction. For surface-
magnet machines, NMC is counted over the complete circumference (360E). Note that
NMC controls the calculation of the method of residual current suppression applied to the
solution of the complex diffusion equation for a complete cylinder. It has no a
priori relation to the actual number of physical magnet segments, so it is possible to
estimate the effect of circumferential segmentation on magnet losses even when the
segmentation is not "recognized" in the outline editor or elsewhere in PC-BDC. {1}
For interior-magnet machines, NMC is counted over one magnet block, taking a "block"
as that which appears as a discrete magnet block in the Reference Diagrams in this
manual. The theory of the calculation is described in SEM-2; it is independent and does
not use the method of residual current suppression. {1}
NMZ The number of magnet segments counted in the axial direction. The example in Fig. 167
has NMZ = 7. When CanSeg = AsMag, NMZ is also used instead of RCanSecs for the
rotor can (if fitted). If NMZ = 1, the magnet is not segmented, but extends the whole length
of the rotor; in this case "finite-length" effect is still calculated for surface-magnet
machines if MagSeg = Speed_Z, Speed_CZ, Speed_CRN, RsNwthy, or for interior-magnet
machines if MagSeg = NMC/NMZ. To disable the calculation of finite-length effects, set
MagSeg = NoSeg. {1}
kZ A parameter used in the calculation of axial segmentation and finite-length effect when
MagSeg = Speed_Z or Speed_CZ. It is equal to the product mh, where m = tan ( and ( is
the slope of the "break line" explained in SEM-2. h is the ratio of the axial length of the
magnet segment to the wavelength of the exciting space-harmonic. For example if h = 3
and kZ = 5, m = 5/3 and ( = 59E. Very short magnet segments require ( to be larger,
ultimately approaching 90E. The default value of kZ = 5 is intended to cover most practical
cases in an average sense. kZ has no deterministic validity. It's just one of those
parameters used to adjust an approximate estimate. {5}
NHxS When WMagCalc = Internal, NHxS is the highest-order mechanical space-harmonic (m)
used in the calculation of eddy-current loss due to space-harmonics in the winding
distribution and time-harmonics in the stator current. (See the ..IWH losses in the output
section and the loss data table, p. 267). The higher harmonics are rapidly attenuated
away from the stator surface, and it is advisable to use a value no higher than necessary.
See WMag_IWH and WRCanIWH. {1-20} {max 99}
NHxT When WMagCalc = Internal, the current waveform will be scanned for harmonics up to
order 2 NHxT 1, and those with non-zero losses will appear in the loss data table.
(See the ..IWH losses in the output section and the loss data table, p. 267). High-frequency
harmonics may stress the calculating algorithms, so it is advisable to use a value no
higher than necessary. {1-20} {max 99 for surface-magnet or 33 for interior-magnet
machines}
SkinIPM (Interior-magnet machines only). If SkinIPM = true, the resistive component TL
dX
of the
reflected eddy-current impedance in L
d
(jT) is scaled with the square root of frequency at
frequencies above 1/T
d
NN, to improve the accuracy slightly. {true}
uwsk A multiplier for the base frequency 1/T
d
NN at which skin-effect begins to be applied to
TL
dX
. See SEM-2 and Tutorial B18.
Fig. 165 Flux pulsation in the magnet of an interior-magnet machine
NPHx The number of time-harmonics used in the calculation of losses due to flux pulsation or
permeance harmonics. {1}
For surface-magnet machines, the product NPHx Slots must not exceed 100. (This is a
limitation of the calculation algorithm that solves the complex diffusion equation). It will
generally be sufficient to set NPHx = 1, on the grounds that most of the loss caused by flux
pulsation is due to the fundamental space-harmonic of the slot-ripple. For large machines
with Slots > 100, this loss component cannot be computed.
For interior-magnet machines, if NPHx = 0 the magnet flux-modulation must be specified
by its amplitude PhiMn at the single harmonic frequency specified by nPhiMn. If NPhx
> 0 the first NPHx harmonics of the external .phim file will be used. This file should be
obtained from the i-psi GoFER with RotSteps (in the GoFER options) ideally set to a
fairly large value such as 180, giving finite-element solutions every 2E elec. If the .phim
file cannot be found, the resulting PHx loss components will be zero. The maximum
number of harmonics NPHx is 50.
PhiMn When NPHx = 0 and FPLoss = Extl, PhiMn is the amplitude of a single harmonic of the
magnet flux-modulation used to calculate WMagPHx. See Fig. 165. This is used only with
interior-magnet machines. [mWb] {0}
nPhiMn The harmonic order of the flux modulation whose amplitude is PhiMn. For example if the
flux modulation is at 6 times fundamental frequency, nPhiMn should be 6. A flux
modulation caused by imbalance would have a strong component at twice the
fundamental frequency, relative to the rotor, so nPhiMn = 2. nPhiMn should have a
positive value even when the flux-modulation is caused by a backward-rotating ampere-
conductor distribution. This is used only with interior-magnet machines. {1}
uR_SCS User's value of the radius of the "subtransient current sheet" representing the rotor under
sudden fault conditions; (surface-magnet machines only). If uR_SCS = 0, the radius
R_SCS is calculated automatically just inside the magnet, or in the centre of the rotor can
(if fitted). It is used to calculate the fundamental subtransient coupling coefficient between
the stator winding and the rotor. R_SCS will have a bearing on the calculated value of
subtransient reactance Xd''. (See SEM-2). [in or mm] {0}
ukdD1 If nonzero, ukdD1 adjusts the d-axis coupling coefficient k
dD1
for subtransient
calculations. To disable the rotor circuits, set ukdD1 to a low value. {0}
uTd0'' User-defined value of the open-circuit subtransient time-constant. This can be used to
over-ride the automatic calculation which is normally executed if uTd0'' = 0. {0}
uTd User value of screening (or diffusion) time-constant T
d
. [ms]
mu_RBody The relative permeability of the rotor body, used only when CalcEddy = IR6. (See
CalcEddy). {1}
Fig. 166 Definition of regions (see CalcEddy)
LossData If TRUE, the loss data table will be written. This table is available using Results | Loss
Data, and as a text file LossData.txt.
LossCpt Selects loss components for calculation.
All All components are calculated.
Forward Only those components associated with forward-rotating ampere-
conductor distributions are calculated.
Backward Only those components associated with backward-rotating ampere-
conductor distributions are calculated.
Imbalance Method of specifying imbalance.
Balanced The phases are balanced, and there is no imbalance.
NegSeq A negative-sequence imbalance is present, but no zero-sequence. The
level of imbalance is controlled by PhImbal.
ZeroSeq A zero-sequence imbalance is present, but no negative-sequence. The
level of imbalance is controlled by PhImbal.
AllCpts This is used when the windings or phase currents are normally
unbalanced, as with Connex = SplitPh or 1-Phase. The imbalance is
calculated from normal operation and is not adjustable.
PhImbal This is used as a "diagnostic" or "exploratory" parameter to define the level of imbalance,
either negative-sequence or zero-sequence (but not both together). See SEM-2. The idea
is to have a simple imbalance parameter to investigate the effect of imbalance without
needing to make a symmetrical-components analysis. It is used to investigate the effect
of imbalance on the harmonic IWH losses in the rotor: see WMag_IWH and WRCanIWH
in the output section, p. 267. {0}
FieldCpt selects the field component to be used in the calculation of the screening function.
A_Mag, A_Phase, A_Real, A_Imag Vector potential
Br_Mag, Br_Phase, Br_Real, Br_Imag Radial component of flux-density
Bq_Mag, Bq_Phase, Bq_Real, Bq_Imag Tangential component of flux-density

fhMin Minimum frequency used in frequency scan. [Hz] {0 = default}
fhMax Maximum frequency used in frequency scan. [Hz] {0 = default}
Fourier selects the transform to be used in calculating field transients by means of the discrete
Fourier transform in Analysis | Short-circuit (analytical). These transforms are not
equally susceptible to the Gibbs' phenomenon, so the one with least ripple should be used.
Sine Sine transform
Cosine Cosine transform
HexSpec The method of specifying the harmonic excitation for ..IWH-type losses, used when
WMagCalc = Hex1Freq.
mu0K A rotating current sheet of peak amplitude K [A/m] and pp_h pole-pairs
is applied at the stator bore. The frequency of rotation relative to the rotor
is f_h [Hz]. mu0K is specified as
0
K.
I_h A harmonic line current of frequency f_h [Hz] is applied at the machine
terminals. The amplitude I_hpk is specified in [A].
V_h A harmonic line voltage of frequency f_h [Hz] is applied at the machine
terminals. The amplitude V_hpu is specified per-unit of Vs.
V_hpu The harmonic line voltage applied when WMagCalc = Hex1Freq and HexSpec = V_h,
specified per-unit of Vs. [p.u. of Vs] {0@1}
I_hpk The harmonic line current applied when WMagCalc = Hex1Freq and HexSpec = I_h,
specified per-unit of ISP. [A] {}
mu0K The value of the peak A/m of a single-harmonic current sheet used when WMagCalc =
Hex1Freq and HexSpec = mu0K, multiplied by
0
. A full explanation requires the
mathematical description in SEM-2, although the value for each j
th
harmonic is displayed
in the loss data table (p. 267) as mu0K, and can be used again in single-frequency
calculations. [T] {0.01}
f_h The frequency of the single harmonic specified according to HexSpec when WMagCalc
= Hex1Freq. This frequency is observed in the rotor frame of reference. [Hz] {}
pp_h The number of pole-pairs of the single space-harmonic specified according to HexSpec
when WMagCalc = Hex1Freq. {}
R_h The radius at which the field solution is displayed in the design sheet when WMagCalc
= Hex1Freq. See AhR, AhX, BrhR, BrhX etc. R_h must lie in the magnet or the airgap
(or in the rotor can, if fitted). The default value is at the centre of the airgap.
When WMagCalc = HexST, the following parameters are needed:
STmix The modulation index of naturally-sampled sine/triangle PWM. The relationship between
the modulation index and the harmonic voltages produced by this modulation strategy
is given in SEM-2, Tutorial B09, and also in Design of Brushless Permanent-Magnet
Machines, [See References]. {1}
STCFR The ratio between the carrier frequency and the fundamental frequency. Ideally STCFR
is an odd multiple of 3 and not less than 9. {27}
NPWMHx The number of PWM harmonics to be computed (max 95). If NPWMHx = 0, only one
harmonic is computed, at a frequency determined from the equation
f
h
= Freq1 (m_STCFR STCFR + b_STCFR) [Hz]
PC-BDC has an internally-programmed table of PWM harmonics m c + b, where m =
m_STCFR, b = b_STCFR, and c = STCFR. It contains the following harmonics in order:
[m
1
; b
11
, b
12
,...: m
2
; b
21
, b
22
, ...;...]. Thus [1; 0, K2, K4, K6, K8: 2; K1, K3, K5, K7, K9, K11, K13: 3;
K2, K4, K6, K8, K10, K12: 4; K1, K3, K5, K7, K9, K11, K13: 5; K2, K4, K6, K8, K10: 6; K1, K3, K5, K7,
K9, K11: 7; K2, K4, K6, K8, K10, K12: 8; K1, K3, K5, K7, K9, K11]
m_STCFR Harmonic multiple of the carrier frequency Freq1 STCFR, (if NPWMHx = 0).
b_STCFR Sideband of the harmonic multiple of the carrier frequency Freq1 STCFR, (if
NPWMHx = 0).
Stator Can, Rotor Can
CanStyle determines the configuration of any retaining can:
None No can
Stator Can is fitted to stator bore
Rotor Can is fitted to rotor surface
Both Separate cans are fitted to the stator and rotor
Generally, the eddy-current losses are greater in a stationary can than in a rotating can,
because the stationary can "sees" the full variation in airgap flux-density. If the can is
rotating, its losses are taken as an additional mechanical loss, like windage loss. If the
can is stationary, its losses are taken as an additional electrical loss. When can losses are
to be calculated, use EMFCalc = ToothFlux, and SlotMod = HH.
RCanSeg determines the segmentation of the rotor can. When the can is segmented, the effect on
the can loss is estimated. However, the underlying eddy-current solution is not affected, and
therefore if an unsegmented can is screening the magnets, the loss of screening due to
segmentation will not be reflected in the calculation of the magnet losses.
NoSeg The rotor can is a continuous cylinder, not segmented. NoSeg is
mathematically the simplest case and the only one that can claim to
be rigorous.
Speed_Z The can is divided along the axial length into RCanSecs isolated
sections or rings. The method of calculating the effect of
segmentation on the losses is SPEED's method described in SEM-2.
RsNwthy The can is divided along the axial length into RCanSecs isolated
sections or rings. Russell and Norsworthy's method is used to
calculate the effect of segmentation on the losses.
AsMag The can is divided axially and circumferentially into NMZ NMC
segments, so that each segment matches a magnet segment. NMZ
is the "count" of sections along the axial length, and replaces
RCanSecs.
SCanSeg determines the segmentation of the stator can: either NoSeg or RsNwthy. Circumferential
segmentation of the stator can is not considered.
DensSCan Density of stator can. [Density units]. {7800 kg/m
3
}
SCanSecs No. of sections or rings in the stator can. By dividing the retaining can into rings, the
eddy-current paths may become more resistance-limited. (See Ref. [0]).
SCanThk Radial thickness of stator can.
pc_SCan Percentage conductivity of stator can, relative to that of copper (10
8
/1@724 S/m at 20EC).
The stator can losses are evaluated at temperature T_s. If TempCalc <> Hot10, T_s =
T_Wdg.
SCanOH1 Overhang of stator can beyond Lstk at one end of the stator.
SCanOH2 Overhang of stator can beyond Lstk at the other end of the stator.
Fig. 167 A rotor can divided in the axial direction into RCanSecs sections. This is called "axial
segmentation" in SEM-2 and elsewhere. This diagram could also represent a magnet
segmented into NMZ rings or segments.
SCanTF Temperature coefficient of resistivity of stator can. [%/EC]
mu_SCan The relative permeability of the stator can. (Not used). {1}
DensRCan Density of rotor can. [Density units]. {7800 kg/m
3
}
RCanSecs No. of sections or rings in the rotor can. The example in Fig. 167 has RCanSecs = 7. When
CanSeg = AsMag, NMZ is used instead of RCanSecs, and in this case the can may also
be divided in the circumferential direction into NMC arc-shaped segments in each
section.
RCanThk Radial thickness of rotor can.
pc_RCan Percentage conductivity of rotor can, relative to that of copper (10
8
/1@724 S/m at 20EC).
The can losses are evaluated at temperature T_r. If TempCalc <> Hot10, T_r = T_Mag.

RCanOH1 Overhang of rotor can beyond Lstk at one end of the rotor.
RCanOH2 Overhang of rotor can beyond Lstk at the other end of the rotor.
RCanTF Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor can. [%/EC].
mu_RCan Relative permeability of rotor can, used only in the calculation of the rotor loss
components WRCanIWH and WRCanPHx. {1}
LM/
r
z LM/
r
XSlotMod
Fig. 168 Airgap flux-density distribution modulated by slotting
Slotting, Cogging
SlotMod controls the calculation of the slot-modulation of the airgap flux distribution B
gap
. A
typical example is shown in Fig. 168.
No The slot-modulation is not calculated.
HH The slot-modulation is calculated by a formula due to Heller and Hamata,
extended by Zhu and Howe (SEM-2) to improve the value of the amplitude of
the dips in the B
gap
distribution at any given radius. This is easy to check,
using the B
gap
GoFER. The dips in B
gap
are used to calculate cogging torque
and rotor can loss by the "flux-dip-sweeping" method (SEM-2). They are
linearly scaled by XSlotMod, so they can easily be adjusted in the MatchFE
window after running the B
gap
GoFER. The HH method can also be used with
salient-pole machines.
Yes Obsolete method replaced by HH method. For backward compatibility,
this method is described below.
XSlotMod Adjustment factor for the amplitude of the dips in the B
gap
distribution. {1}
(When SlotMod = Yes and CalcCog = Cog1, this adjustment is nonlinear. In all other
cases the dips are linearly scaled by XSlotMod).
SlotMod = Yes (obsolete method). The dips in the B
gap
distribution are calculated by one of two rough-and-ready
methods, depending on the value of CalcCog. The older of the two methods (Cog1) uses an extremely simple
modulating function of the form
where LM is the magnet length and z is an effective airgap length parameter that varies linearly across a slot
opening, from a maximum of /(Gap
2
+ SO
2
) at points opposite a slot centre-line to a minimum of Gap at the edges
of the slot.
The other method (obtained with CalcCog = Off or Cog2) uses an assumed half-cosine shape for the dip, which is
more realistic than the Cog1 method. It calculates the amplitude of the dip from a simple formula that depends on
the geometry of the magnet and the airgap.
Both of these simple methods tend to underestimate the modulation, and both of them ignore the natural attenuation
of the dips with distance from the stator surface. Because of this, and because the dips have a poor shape
(particularly with Cog1), cogging-torque and rotor can-loss calculations using the modulated B
gap
distribution are
unreliable. Although the amplitude can be adjusted using XSlotMod, there is no adjustment for the width, and this
makes it difficult to use finite-element calculations to improve the result.
When SlotMod = Yes and FluxDip = Obsolete, the slot-modulation B_dg used to calculate rotor can loss is
determined independently of the B
gap
distribution. It tends to underestimate the modulation and the rotor can loss.
uBd_g When SlotMod = HH, the amplitude of the slot-modulation dips in the B
gap
distribution
can be specified directly as uBd_g (in flux-density units). If uBd_g = 0, the dips are
calculated by the HH method at radius R_Bd; see SEM-2 and B_dg(output). [T] {0}
R_Bd Radius at which the slot-modulation dips in the B
gap
distribution are calculated, when
SlotMod = HH and uBd_g = 0. [mm] {Rad1+Gap/2}.
alpha_s adjusts the width of the slot-modulation dips in the B
gap
distribution when SlotMod =
HH. The original value proposed by Heller and Hamata was 1@6, and this value is obtained
if alpha_s is left at its default value (0). If alpha_s = 1, the entire width of the local
modulation function is equal to the angle of the slot-opening. This will generally be too
narrow. Comparisons should be made with the finite-element result using the B
gap
GoFER
and MatchFE. {0 or 1@6}
FluxDip determines the calculation of Bd_RMSg, which is used in calculating the rotor can loss
component WRCanFDS. (SEM-2).
Obsolete Bd_RMSg is calculated by the old method used before SlotMod = HH was
introduced. As has already been noted, this old calculation is uncorrelated
with the slot-modulation dips in the B
gap
distribution.
Formula Bd_RMSg is calculated from the peak value of the slot-modulation dip,
multiplied by a factor that accounts for the "duty-cycle", the shape of the
dip, and the shape of the unmodulated B
gap
distribution. (SEM-2)
B-wfm Bd_RMSg is calculated as the RMS value of the difference between the
modulated B
gap
distribution and the unmodulated one. Theoretically this
is the most rigorous method.
uBd_m can be used to specify directly the slot-modulation dips in the airgap flux distribution used
in calculating WMagFDS, the component of magnet loss attributed to "flux-dip-sweeping".
If uBd_m = 0, these dips are calculated by the "obsolete" method mentioned earlier. [T]
{0}
CalcCogg Selects the cogging torque calculation. When CalcCogg = Off, there is no cogging torque
calculation. {Off}
The values Cog1 and Cog2 are active only when SlotMod = No or Yes. The recommended
setting of SlotMod is now HH, which uses the slot-modulated B
gap
distribution calculated
using the HH method to calculate cogging torque, whether CalcCogg = Cog1 or Cog2.
The cogging torque waveform is calculated using the flux-MMF method. The rotor is
rotated in small increments and the torque is calculated from changes in co-energy due
to the slot-modulation in the B
gap
distribution. In this calculation the magnet is the sole
excitation source, with no current in the stator.
When SlotMod <> HH, the B
gap
distribution is calculated by one of two alternative (and
obsolete) methods as described earlier, according to the value Cog1 or Cog2 (see SlotMod).
These old methods generally do not give reliable values for the cogging torque.
XCogg Adjustment factor for cogging torque. The cogging torque is linearly scaled by XCogg.
XCogg has no effect on the B
gap
distribution.
R_FP Radius of an arc through which the flux pulsation will be computed when Phim is checked
in the i-psi GoFER. [mm] {0}
Beta_FP Arc through which the flux pulsation will be computed when Phim is checked in the i-psi
GoFER. [E elec or Emech according to PhysAng in the Units] {0}
Ted / Thermal
The Thermal page is concerned with the calculation of temperature rise. The method is selected by
TempCalc. When TempCalc = Hot10, two additional pages appear.
Thermal
This section includes just enough parameters to undertake the simplest thermal calculations without
using the Hot10 model, which requires much more input data (see Ted/4 and 5).
TempCalc selects the method of temperature rise calculation used in Dynamic design (p. 41). Note
that Static design (p. 40) uses fixed temperatures.
Fixed All temperatures are fixed. The temperature rise TempRise is
calculated as T_Wdg ! Ambient, and the magnet temperature
remains at T_Mag.
DegCW
Fig. 296
PC-BDC calculates the temperature rise as TempRise = WTotal
DegCW. DegCW is an input parameter and an appropriate value
must be supplied if a meaningful TempRise is to be computed.
The implied values of the heat transfer coefficients at the frame
surface are calculated as HTCcyl = HTCend = 1/(DegCW * FSArea
/ 10
6
).
The conductor temperature (T_c), the frame temperature (T_f) and the
stator yoke temperature (T_y) are all equal to Ambient + TempRise.
The magnet temperature (T_r) depends on FixTMag.
The thermal resistance from frame to ambient (R_fa) is set equal to
DegCW.
ThRcct
Fig. 297
PC-BDC uses the model in Fig. 297. The heat transfer coefficients
HTCcyl and HTCend are used together with the cylindrical frame
surface area and the end-cap areas to calculate the frame-to-ambient
thermal resistance R_fa. DegCW is now used as an additional
diffusion resistance between node Y (the stator yoke) and the frame
surface. All the losses pass through the series combination of DegCW
and R_fa, so that T_y = Ambient + WTotal (DegCW + R_fa), and
the frame temperature is T_f = Ambient + WTotal R_fa.
The conductors are generally at a higher temperature T_c equal to T_y
+ WCu ThRslot = Ambient + TempRise. The magnet temperature
(T_r) depends on FixTMag.
Hot10
Fig. 298
The Hot10 model has 10 temperature nodes and performs a detailed
thermal transient calculation. See p. 350.
In the recursive Dynamic design calculation, the tolerance on the convergence of the
thermal model is set by ThTol.
FixTMag determines the method of calculating the magnet (rotor) temperature (T_r) when
TempCalc = DegCW or ThRcct.
IterX T_r = T_c + Wdg2Mag
Iter+ T_r = T_c Wdg2Mag
Wdg2Mag Determines the temperature difference T (= T_r ! T_c) between the rotor (magnet) and
the stator conductors, according to the value of FixTMag; (see above table).
Ambient The ambient temperature (EC or EF). {20EC}
T_Mag If TempCalc = Fixed, T_Mag is the rotor (and magnet) temperature. If TempCalc =
DegCW or ThRcct, T_Mag is the initial temperature of the rotor (magnet) in Dynamic
design, or the fixed temperature thereof in Static design. If TempCalc = Hot10, T_Mag
is not used. The output temperature of the rotor is T_r, and the magnet is at this
temperature. {25EC}
T_Wdg If TempCalc = Fixed, T_Wdg is the temperature at which the winding resistance is
calculated. If TempCalc = DegCW or ThRcct, T_Wdg is the initial temperature of the
winding in Dynamic design, or the fixed temperature of the winding in Static design.
If TempCalc = Hot10, T_Wdg is not used. {25EC} In all cases the output temperature of the
winding is T_c. {25EC}
T_Brg If TempCalc = Fixed, T_Brg is the bearing temperature. If TempCalc = DegCW or
ThRcct, T_Brg is the initial temperature of the bearings in Dynamic design, or the fixed
temperature of the bearings in Static design. If TempCalc = Hot10, T_Brg is not used.
In all cases the output temperature of the bearings is T_b. {25EC}
T_Gap If TempCalc = Fixed, T_Gap is the airgap temperature. If TempCalc = DegCW or ThRcct,
T_Gap is the initial temperature of the airgap in Dynamic design, or the fixed
temperature of the airgap in Static design. If TempCalc = Hot10, T_Gap is not used. In
all cases the output temperature of the airgap is T_g. {25EC}
DegCW Degrees C per Watt. Thermal resistance parameter used when TempCalc = DegCW or
ThRcct; see TempCalc above, and p. 254. {0.1}
HTCcyl The heat transfer coefficient over the cylindrical part of the frame surface, i.e., the area
A
cyl
of a smooth cylinder having a radius equal to the outermost radius of the motor
(Rad3+FrThk for interior-rotor motors and RadSH+FrThk for exterior-rotor motors)
and a length equal to FrLgth + 2 CapThk, Fig. 301. When TempCalc = ThRcct (Fig. 297),
HTCcyl is an input parameter and is used together with HTCend to determine R_fa.
When TempCalc = DegCW, it is inferred from R_fa and FSArea and treated as an output
parameter. When TempCalc = Hot10, it can be used to determine the convection
component of R_fa if the appropriate mode is selected for calculating R_fa [W/m
2
/EC or
W/in
2
/EC]. See also p. 254
HTCend is the heat transfer coefficient over the end-caps, i.e., the combined area A
caps
of two
circular disks having a radius equal to the outermost radius of the motor (Rad3+FrThk
for interior-rotor motors and RadShell+FrThk for exterior-rotor motors), Fig. 301. When
TempCalc = ThRcct (Fig. 297), HTCend is an input parameter and is used (together with
HTCcyl) to determine R_fa. When TempCalc = DegCW, it is inferred from R_fa and
FSArea and treated as an output parameter. When TempCalc = Hot10, it can be used to
determine the convection component of R_fa if the appropriate mode is selected for
calculating R_fa [W/m
2
/EC or W/in
2
/EC]. See also p. 254.
ThTol In the recursive Dynamic design calculation, the tolerance on the convergence of the
thermal model is set by ThTol. If ThTol = 0, the tolerance is taken as 1EC. {0}
Specific heats and Additional thermal capacities
cp_Cu Specific heat of conductors, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.383 (Cu)}
cp_SFe Specific heat of stator laminations, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.450 (Steel)}
cp_RFe Specific heat of rotor steel, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.450}
cp_Bars Specific heat of rotor bars and end-ring. [kJ/ kg EC] {0.896 (Al)}
cp_Frame Specific heat of frame material, [kJ/ kg EC] {0.896 (Al)}
cp_Shaft Specific heat of shaft material, [kJ/kg EC] {0.450}
Additional thermal capacities (AddC_) are identified by node letter, except AddC_M (magnet), which
adds to the thermal capacity at node R. Units are kJ/EC. PC-BDC does not calculate C_g, the capacitance
at node G, but sets it to the value C_Frame/10 if AddC_G = 0, or to AddC_G otherwise. Similarly C_Brg
is set to C_Shaft/5 if AddC_B = 0, or to AddC_B otherwise. {0}
Additional dimensions needed for thermal model
FrLgth Frame length; see Fig. 301.
FrThk Radial thickness of frame.
FrDens Frame density, [kg/m
3
] {2700 (Aluminium)}
CapThk Cap thickness.
N_Fins No. of fins. Fins are assumed to run axially along the outer surface of the frame. {0}
LFin Fin length in the radial direction, [mm] {0}
FinThk Fin thickness, [mm] {0}
ShDens Shaft density, [kg/m
3
] {7800, i.e., steel}
LShaft Shaft length.
XFSArea Adjustment factor for both FSArea and FFArea.
NSDuct No. of ventilating ducts. [] {0}
WSDuct Width of one ventilating duct (measured parallel to the axis of rotation). [mm] {0}
For exterior-rotor motors : see Fig. 299, p. 350.
LShell Shell length. [mm]
ShellThk Shell thickness. [mm]
RadCap Cap radius. [mm]
Ted / Hot10(A)
Initial temperatures for Hot10 thermal calculation
Initial temperatures (IT_) are identified by node letter, F, Y, T, C, E, S, G, R, H, B, U and V. The U and V
nodes are separate "ambient" nodes representing infinite heat sinks, like the ambient node A but with
different temperatures. See p. 350.
Thermal node types
Thermal node types (tnt_) are identified by node letter, F, Y, T, C, E, S, G, R, H, B, M. All nodes except A
can be fixed or floating. If fixed, the temperature remains at the initial value; if floating, it is solved along
with all the other temperatures. The choice of node type may affect the solution time and even the
stability of the solution. Generally speaking it is advisable to use the floating type for all the nodes. If
a node is to be "disconnected" from the thermal model, it is not sufficient to set its node type to fixed;
indeed this does not disconnect it at all, but forces heat to flow to or from surrounding nodes to keep it
at the specified temperature. This is an artificial situation because it may require absurd values of heat
flow inconsistent with what else is going on in the motor. Therefore, to "disconnect" a node it is best to
set its node type to floating and set the interconnecting thermal resistances to high values (e.g. 10 or 100
EC/W, not 10
3
or 10
6
otherwise the solution may be slowed down or destabilized by making the
differential equations too "stiff" (i.e., having a mixture of very short and very long thermal time-constants
in the eigenvalues).
Forced heat extraction rates
BlowCool Forced heat extraction from the airgap, node G. [W] {0}
OverCool Forced heat extraction from the frame, node F. [W] {0}
AxleCool Forced heat extraction from the shaft, node H. [W] {0}
WireCool Forced heat extraction from the stator conductors, node C. [W] {0}
EndCool Forced heat extraction from both end-windings combined, node E. [W] {0}
Control parameters for thermal transient calculation
thm_dt The default value of the integration time-step, [s]. This should have a value of perhaps
1/10 the shortest thermal time-constant in the model. It is better to have too small rather
than too large. {1}
hTime The duration of the transient calculation, [min]. If the integration is interrupted before
a steady-state has been reached, the temperatures are frozen at the values they had at
hTime. {100}
XLoss Scale factor for all loss components.
HBalTol This parameter is used to detect the steady state, when all temperatures have settled to
a steady value. The criterion is that the heat balance ratio (HBR) is less than HBalTol.
The HBR is the total heat being absorbed in the thermal capacitances divided by the total
power losses, i.e., i_Absorp/i_Source. When the HBR reaches HBalTol, the
temperatures may still be a few degrees away from their final values. However, the
nature of thermal transients is such that it may take a long time to reach a true steady
state. {0@05}
Additional
HotInit determines whether the temperatures are re-initialized every iteration of dynamic
design. {true}
InsClass Insulation class. This is used by PC-BDC to select a maximum temperature, such that if
any node temperature exceeds that temperature during the Hot10 thermal transient, the
calculation will be aborted.
F155 Class F insulation; T
max
= 155 EC
H180 Class H insulation; T
max
= 180 EC
None No practical limit; T
max
= 1500 EC
ThDuCy Thermal duty-cycle, i.e., the ratio of "on" time to the thermal period ("on" time + "off"
time), where "on" time = ThOnTime. If ThDuCy < 0, the thermal transient starts with
the motor off, but if ThDuCy > 0 it starts with the motor on. [p.u.] {1.0}
ThOnTime "On" time for thermal cycling, used with ThDuCy. The period of one thermal cycle is
ThOnTime/|ThDuCy|. If ThDuCy = 0, the period is set to hTime. [min] {1.0}
Ted / Hot10(B)
Node-to-node thermal resistances
Node-to-node thermal Resistances thR_ are identified by the respective pair of node letters, e.g. thR_CT
for the resistance from the conductors C to the tooth T; see Fig. 298 on p. 350.
Frame-to-ambient thermal resistances..
There are four frame-to-ambient thermal resistances in parallel, representing different methods of heat
transfer and differentiated from one another by an additional subscript letter: U for conduction, R for
radiation, V for convection, and K for a composite formula. Generally ThR_FAU, thR_FAR and
thR_FAV should be used in conjunction with each other, with thR_FAK set to a high value such as 100;
or thR_FAK should be used by itself with the other three set to a high value.
Calculable and non-calculable thermal resistances..
A lower-case initial "t" indicates a thermal resistance that will be calculated by PC-BDC if set to zero in
Ted. The design sheet will display the calculated value with the initial "th" removed. For example if
thR_CT = 0 in Ted, the design sheet will display the calculated value R_ct. The table below specifies
additional parameters required for the internal calculation. A calculable thermal resistance can be
specified directly by a non-zero value in Ted. Non-calculable thermal resistances have an upper-case
initial "T" and must be specified in EC/W. Thermal resistances cannot be disconnected from the
calculation but they can be made ineffective by setting a high value, e.g. 10 or 100. Do not use extreme
values.
Thermal parameters used to calculate thR_FAV, thR_FAR..
h0_N See Convection parameters, below.
h0_F See Convection parameters, below.
V_air See Convection parameters, below.
Emiss See Convection parameters, below.
Parameters used to calculate resistances of Hot10 model..
ct_Liner Thermal conductivity of slot liner. When TempCalc = ThRcct or Hot10, ct_liner is used
to calculate the thermal resistance of the slot liner, ThRslot. When TempCalc = Hot10,
ThRslot is augmented by the diffusion resistance through the array of slot conductors
(ThRcond)and then split into two parallel thermal resistances R_cy and R_ct (q.v.), Fig.
298. [W/mEC or W/in EC] {0@2 W/mEC}
Note that R_ct and R_cy are augmented by the thermal resistance of the thin layer or air
surrounding the slot liner. The thickness of this air layer is AirLiner. Its conductivity
is calculated automatically at the temperature T_t.
ct_Wins Thermal conductivity of wire insulation, [m EC/W] {0@2}
ct_Lam Thermal conductivity of laminations, [m EC/W] {38}
rx_yf Thermal resistance per m
2
of contact area between the stator yoke and the frame, [EC/W
m
2
]. {0@002}
AirFilm Thickness of air layer between yoke and frame. This determines the thermal resistance
R_yfa which is a component of R_yf. [mm] {0}
AirLiner Thickness of air layer surrounding the slot liner. [mm] {0}
Weighting factors for iron and stray-load loss in Hot10 model..
XWFe_Y Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node Y, [p.u.] {0.5}
XWFe_T Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node T, [p.u.] {0.5}
XWFe_S Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node S, [p.u.] {0.5}
XWFe_R Proportion of (WFe + WSLL) assigned to node R, [p.u.] {0.5}
Additional parameters needed for calculable thermal resistances
When the parameter in the left-hand column is set to zero, PC-BDC uses the methods and parameters in
the right-hand column to calculate the corresponding thermal resistance. For example, if thR_RH ' 0,
PC-BDC calculates R_rh from ct_lam and the motor geometry. thR_RH is an input parameter; R_rh is
an output parameter.
Conduction parameters
thR_ Required parameters and method of calculation
thR_CT Liner, ct_Liner, Slots, ct_Wins, slot-fill and motor geometry. The thermal resistance of the
liner is calculated from the liner contact area. It is added to a diffusion resistance that represents
heat transfer through the conductor array within the slot, and depends on the thermal
conductivity of the wire insulation and the slot-fill factor. thR_CT and thR_CY are in parallel
and are proportioned according to the relative contact areas along the sides of the teeth and the
bottom of the slot. Also see AirLiner.
thR_CY
thR_TY ct_Lam, Slots and motor geometry. R_ts is equal to R_ty. Together they represent thermal
diffusion by conduction in the radial direction along the stator teeth.
thR_TS
thR_CE Winding details and thermal conductivity of copper (395 W/m EC). R_ce represents thermal
diffusion by conduction along the stator winding in the axial direction.
thR_YF ct_lam, rx_yf and motor geometry. R_yf has three components in series: R_yfd representing the
thermal diffusion by conduction through the stator yoke; R_yfc representing the thermal
interface resistance between the yoke and the frame, which depends on rx_yf; and R_yfa which
is the thermal resistance of an air film of thickness AirFilm. The thermal conductivity of this
film is calculated automatically at the temperature (T_f + T_y)/2.
thR_SG
Internal calculation uses the properties of air at the temperature T_g
thR_RG
thR_RH ct_lam and motor geometry. R_rh represents thermal diffusion by conduction through the rotor
yoke, and is similar to R_yfd above.
Continued on next page/...
h ' h_0N
)T
D
0@25
W/m
2
/EC
h ' h_0F
V_air
L
0@5
W/m
2
/EC
R_fav '
1
HTCcylA
cyl
HTCendA
caps
,
R_fav '
1
hA
,
Continued...
Convection parameters
thR_FAV The method of determining the thermal resistance R_fav (frame-to-ambient by convection)
depends on the value of CalcFAV.
CalcFAV Method
Fixed R_fav is set equal to thR_FAV
HTC R_fav is computed using the equation
where HTCcyl, HTCend, A
cyl
and A
caps
are defined on p. 192.
Air R_fav is computed using a convective heat-transfer coefficient h at the frame
surface, using the equation
where A is the frame surface area (FSArea; see p. 253).
The method of determining the heat transfer coefficient h depends on the value
of "air velocity" V_air, which selects one of the following two crude empirical
rule-of-thumb formulas :
V_air = 0 (Natural convection)
where T = T_f - Ambient and D is the frame diameter equal to
2 (Rad3 + FrThk).
If T is in EC and D is in mm, the standard value for h_0N is 7@5.
For example, if D = 150mm and T = 60EC, h ' 6@0 W/m
2
/EC.
V_air > 0 (Forced convection)
where V_air is in m/s and L is the frame length in mm (FrLgth).
The standard value of h_0F for use in this equation is 125.
For example, with V_air ' 5 m/s and L ' 250 mm, h ' 17@6
W/m
2
/EC.
Continued on next page/...
R_far '
) T
AeB(T
4
1
! T
4
0
)
EC/W
R_fak '
1
( C
1
C
2
T
n
) A
EC/W
Continued...
Radiation parameters
thR_FAR Emiss and frame dimensions. R_far is computed from
where A is the frame surface area FSArea, e is the emissivity of the frame surface relative to that
of a black body (Emiss), and B is a constant equal to 5@67 10
!8
W/m
2
/K
4
. T
1
is the absolute
temperature of the frame surface T_f + 273@2 K, and T
0
is the absolute ambient temperature
Ambient + 273@2 K. Thus if T = 60EC and e = 0@9, the implied value of the heat transfer
coefficient is T/(R_far A) = 7@0 W/m
2
/EC. The emissivity varies according to the frame surface
colour and texture: less than 0@1 for polished aluminium, or 0@97 for black lacquer.
Kylanders empirical cooling formula
This empirical formula is intended to include all modes of heat transfer normally active with totally enclosed
industrial motors, (particularly convection and radiation).
Even though the Kylander thermal resistance R_fak is in parallel with R_fau, R_fav and R_far (Fig. 298),
Kylanders method should be used by itself, with CalcFAU, CalcFAV, and CalcFAR all set to "None". Conversely,
when the heat transfer is being calculated by a combination of the other methods, CalcFAK should be set to "None".
thR_FAK KC1, KC2, Kn and motor geometry. This is based on an empirical and theoretical study by
Gunnar Kylander of Chalmers Institute of Technology, interpreted, tested and modified by J-H
Gliemann, (PC-IMD manual [29]):
where C
1
= KC1 {6@7}, C
2
= KC2 {0@96} , n = Kn {0@8}, and T is the speed in mechanical rad/s.
According to [29] the default values are appropriate for a 15-kW motor with a shaft-mounted fan
that blows air axially over a finned frame. For a 4-kW motor, the values suggested are 9@6, 0@86
and 0@8 respectively. C
1
can be identified from locked-rotor tests at different voltages, and C
2
and
n from no-load and load tests at different speeds.
For example, with C
1
= 6@7, C
2
= 0@96 and n = 0@8, the value of the heat transfer coefficient at 3000
rpm is given by 1/(R_fak A) = 102 W/m
2
/EC.
Ted / Harmonics
The current waveforms with Drive = Sine can be modulated with odd-order non-triplen harmonics up
to the 37th, specified in per-unit of ISP by the parameters h_05..h_37, per unit of ISP. Only sine
harmonics are used, referenced to the fundamental sinewave of the reference current. The phase angles
of the respective harmonics can be specified with the parameters ph_05..ph_37 in radians; thus, for
example, with a 5
th
harmonic the reference current waveform is given by
ISP [Sin(2) + h_05 * Sin(5*2 + ph_05).
UseHCP Lit. "Use harmonics in current profile" UseHCP is a switch used to determine whether
the harmonics h05, h07,... are included in the reference current waveform for Dynamic
design. These harmonics will always be used in the Static design current profile
irrespective of the value of UseHCP. {false}
Ted / Line-start
A true line-start motor has a rotor cage (also known as an amortisseur or damper cage). Such motors are
specified in PC-BDC as RotType = LSIPM or Trapeze, with RBarType = rbConvex or rbRounded. The
starting calculation is meaningless if the motor does not have a rotor cage, but other Analysis | Line-start
(load step) calculations can be performed for various types of synchronous motor fed from the AC line:
see p. 13. The Line-start page includes specifications for the auxiliary winding of split-phase motors;
control parameters for steady-state and transient calculations; and rotor cage dimensions and
parameters. Transient calculations include starting (if RPMstart = 0), or load-perturbations (if
RPMstart = RPM).
Rotor cage parameters..
R_Bars No. of rotor bars. The number of bars must be even and divisible by the number of pole-
pairs, and in some cases by the number of poles.
RBarType Type or shape of rotor bar.
rbConvex The rotor slot-bottom is an arc centred on the rotor axis; Fig. 253.
For RotType = LSIPM, this is the only available rotor bar shape.
rbRounded The rotor slot-bottom is rounded.
None The rotor slots are omitted.
SD_R Rotor slot depth; Fig. 253. [mm] {}
TW_R Rotor tooth width. [mm] {}
SO_R Rotor slot opening. Do not make SO_R small in order to model a closed rotor slot; instead,
use muBridge = 0.
TgAng_R Rotor tooth tang angle. [E] {}
Bridge Radial depth of rotor slot bridge. [mm] {}
muBridge Permeability of rotor slot bridge. If muBridge = 0, it is treated as a closed slot, and in this
case the finite-element GoFER assigns the bridge the same material as the rotor steel. If
muBridge = 1, the slot is "open" or "semi-closed". Any other value of muBridge is
ignored in PC-BDC, but is used in the finite-element GoFER. {1}
BarExt Extension of bar in the axial direction beyond the rotor stack, at each end. [mm] {0}
cp_Bars Specific heat of rotor bars. [kJ/kgEC] {0@896}
T_Bar Initial temperature of rotor bars. [EC] {25}
RERi Inner radius of end-ring [mm] {}
RERo Outer radius of end-ring [mm] {}
1 and 2 in the following parameters refer to the two ends of the rotor.
PCBar Percentage conductivity of rotor bar, relative to that of copper at 20EC. [%Cu] {100}
TCCBar Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor bar. [%/EC] {0@393}
DensBar Density of rotor bar. [kg/m
3
] {8800}
PCER1 Percentage conductivity of rotor end-ring 1, relative to that of copper at 20EC. {100}
PCER2 Percentage conductivity of rotor end-ring 2, relative to that of copper at 20EC. {100}
TCCER1 Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor end-ring 1. [%/EC] {0@393}
TCCER2 Temperature coefficient of resistivity of rotor end-ring 2. [%/EC] {0@393}
ERDens1 Density of rotor end-ring 1. [kg/m
3
] {8890}
ERDens2 Density of rotor end-ring 2. [kg/m
3
] {8890}
ERthk1 Thickness of rotor end-ring 1. [mm] {}
ERthk2 Thickness of rotor end-ring 2. [mm] {}
XXL1 Adjustment factor for the primary leakage reactance XL1 in the equivalent circuit of the
line-start motor. This has the same meaning as in the induction-motor equivalent circuit.
{1.0}
XXL2 Adjustment factor for the secondary leakage reactance XL2 in the equivalent circuit of
the line-start motor. This has the same meaning as in the induction-motor equivalent
circuit. {1.0}
XRc Adjustment factor for the core-loss resistance Rc in the equivalent circuit of the line-start
motor. {1.0}
EndLeak Method of calculating end-winding leakage reactance.
CGV Veinott's method, which is based on an empirical formula. [21]
SPEED SPEED's method, which is adapted from the inductance formula for
a circular coil. (See Ref. [0]).
FixWRSB Fixes an error in the calculation of the width of the rotor slot-bottom when RotType =
LSIPM. This error affects the linear part of the rotor leakage permeance. When
FixWRSB = true, Eq1 will tend to be lower, while prl and Xd will tend to be higher. All
new designs should use FixWRSB = true. Designs created with previous versions can be
recovered by setting FixWRSB = false. Note that these designs will usually have been
calibrated using the finite-element GoFER, thus compensating for the error. It is
recommended to re-calibrate these previous designs with the finite-element GoFER and
FixWRSB = false. The correction is applied in all versions after 23-Feb-07. {true}
Parameters for split-phase motors
AuxSpec Method of specifying the auxiliary winding in a split-phase motor.
T.Ratio The auxiliary winding distribution is the same as that of the main
winding, but the turns can be adjusted by means of T_Ratio. The
resistance and wire size are scaled according to T_Ratio, keeping
the same weight and cross-section of copper in both windings.
FullSpec The auxiliary winding distribution must be defined using the
winding editor. Its wire size is determined by WireSpecA, with
NSHA parallel strands. Only one wire size is permitted in each
conductor, and the main winding is limited to two wire sizes instead
of three, since WireSpecA is used for the auxiliary winding.
If WdgType = Custom, and BalWdg = true, the auxiliary winding
distribution will be the same as that of the main winding; but if
BalWdg = false, the auxiliary winding can be specified
indpendently of the main winding.
SinglePh There is no auxiliary winding. The machine is a pure single-phase
machine.
T_ratio Auxiliary/main turns ratio when AuxSpec = T.Ratio. {1.0}
SymmCpts selects whether or not symmetrical components are used in the steady-state analysis of
single-phase permanent-magnet machines at synchronous speed, with Drive = AC Volt
and Connex = SplitPh. The analysis is explained in SEM-2.
No Symmetrical components are not used. Instead, the phasor diagram
is calculated for one phase, as though the machine were a balanced
polyphase machine. This method is rigorous for nonsalient-pole
machines with no rotor cage and a sinusoidal EMF; otherwise,
symmetrical components should be used.
Natural Symmetrical components are used. The so-called "Natural"
symmetrical-component transformation makes it easier to interpret
the phasor diagram, as described in SEM-2. A noteworthy feature of
the phasor diagram is that the positive-sequence EMF E1 is oriented
along the q-axis, in common with the phasor diagrams for balanced
polyphase machines found extensively throughout SPEED material.
Thus the positive and negative sequence voltages and currents are
shown in a clear relation to the actual voltages and currents, and the
diagram has many characteristics in common with the balanced
polyphase diagram.
Original Symmetrical components are used. The so-called "Original"
symmetrical-component transformation used in [18] and subsequently
in [20] is used. The supply voltage Vs is the reference phasor, oriented
along the real axis. Unfortunately the interpretation of this diagram
is more difficult, partly because of the /2 and 1//2 factors introduced
to ensure "power invariance", and partly because the positive-
sequence is referenced more towards the auxiliary winding than the
main winding. From about July 2007 this diagram was improved
slightly, relative to earlier versions, but it will probably be found
preferable to use the "Natural" symmetrical components.
AuxPaths No. of parallel paths in the auxiliary winding. [] {1}
AuxExt Axial extension of the auxiliary winding at each end of the stack. See Ext and Fig. 176 on
p. 277. [mm] {}
AuxXET Adjustment factor for end-turn length of aux. winding. See XET. [] {1@0}
XRAux Adjustment factor for auxiliary winding resistance. XRAux does not change the
diameter or the length of the wire. See X_R. [] {1@0}
Cutout Cutout speed. Below this speed, C_start and R_start are connected. Above it, C_run and
R_run are connected. [% of synchronous speed] {70}
C_start Start capacitance. See Fig. 281 and Cutout. [F] {}
R_start Start resistance in series with C_start. [ohm] {}
C_run Run capacitance. [F] {}
R_run Run resistance in series with C_run. [ohm] {}
RFei Coefficient for the current-dependent core-loss resistance, used when WFeCalc = RFe and
RFeType = Rc_VI in the line-start motor. {1E6}
Parameters for asynchronous operation and line-starting..
RPMstart determines the type of transient calculation
RPM Specifies a load-perturbation transient. RPM is by definition the
synchronous speed. When Drive = AC Volt, the supply frequency
is determined by RPM and the number of poles. The load
perturbation is defined by LoadStep.
any other
value
A transient response is calculated, with the initial speed equal to
RPMstart.
St.Time Duration of starting calculation. [s]
JL Load inertia, per-unit of the motor inertia. (In the case of generators, JL can be used to
represent the inertia of the prime-mover). [] {}
ConstRPM If true, the speed is held at exactly synchronous speed. This option is available only if
RPMstart = RPM. The stability of the motor at synchronous speed depends on the cage
parameters and the damping provided by the load. For motors with no cage, or with
insufficient damping, setting ConstRPM = true simplifies the analysis and removes the
need for details of the load torque, load inertia, etc. (Note that calculating with ConstRPM
= true does not ensure stability; it merely narrows the calculation down to the condition
of constant speed.)
AngOn The phase angle of the voltage wave at which the switch contacts close. This has an effect
on the initial transient, but no effect on the final steady-state. [Eelec] {0}
VC0 Initial voltage on capacitor at the start of a transient calculation. Used only with split-
phase motors. [V] {0}
LoadStep A load transient can applied as a step change in the load angle *, equal to LoadStep. The
motor must be rotating at synchronous speed, so RPMstart must be equal to RPM, and
ConstRPM should be true. The initial values of current in all windings are zero, and the
point on the voltage wave at which the switch contacts close is specified as AngOn. The
value of LoadStep is a demanded load-angle * that will be attained in the steady state,
once the transient response has settled. Note that * is defined as the phase angle between
the terminal voltage and the EMF. [Eelec] {0}
After a Static design [Ctrl+2], the value of * is available from the design sheet or the
phasor diagram as delta (for polyphase motors) or delta_m (for the main winding of split-
phase motors). If LoadStep is set equal to this value of *, the transient calculation should
reach a steady-state that corresponds exactly to the phasor diagram.
TL0 Load torque coefficient. For calculations with Analysis | Line start (Load step) the load
torque is calculated as a function of rotor position according to
T
L
= TL0 + TL1 Sin (VLpp 2
r
+ VLph B/180)
where 2
r
is the rotor position in elec rad. For Analysis | Torque/Speed, it is calculated as
T
L
= TL0 + TL1 (n/n
s
)
NLT
where n is the actual speed and n
s
is the synchronous speed. [Nm] {0}
TL1 Load torque coefficient. [Nm] {0}
NLT Load torque exponent. [] {2@0}
VLpp No. of "pole-pairs" used to determine the periodicity or cycles per revolution of the load-
torque component that varies with rotor position. (See equation for T
L
, above). []
{Poles/2}
VLph Phase angle of variable load-torque component. (See T
L
equation above). [Eelec] {0}
Parameters used with Analysis | Torque/Speed
IncHx Selects winding MMF space-harmonics to be used in the calculation of the asynchronous
torque/speed characteristic. Note that winding harmonics are not included in the steady-
state phasor-diagram calculation (Static design, [Ctrl+2]) or in the Analysis | Line start
(Load step) calculation.
Parameters not appearing in the template editor
A few parameters do not appear in the template editor, either because they are rarely needed or because
they are only used for diagnostic purposes. These parameters can be accessed via a custom editor (Data
| Custom editor).
XErrComm adjusts the sign and magnitude of the current-error and the accumulated current error
at the end of each commutation segment. This is used for diagnostic purposes and does
not appear in Ted. {1}
BesslMin Minimum argument allowed in modified Bessel function, used to protect the Bessel
function calculation at low frequency when the skin depth may be very large. If
difficulties are experienced with large skin-depths, it may help to switch CalcEddy from
IR4 to IR6. {0@01}
BesslMax Maximum argument allowed in modified Bessel function, used to protect the Bessel
function calculation at high frequency when the skin depth may be very small. If
difficulties are experienced with small skin-depths, it may help to switch CalcEddy from
IR4 to IR6. {500}
RppCheck Parameter used to protect against extreme large or small arguments of the exponential
function in the solution of the armature-reaction field, especially when the harmonic pole-
number is large. {250}
etaNN Parameter used in the algorithm for the effect of segmentation of the rotor can in the axial
direction. (SEM-2) {0@167}
pcLam Conductivity of laminations as a percentage of the conductivity of copper at 20EC
(1@724E!8 ohm-m). (Not used in calculations). {3@0}
PC-BDC 9.04 3.3 Output parameters * Design sheet Page 209
3.3 Output parameters (design sheet)
Header section
PC-BDC 9.04 (9.04.005.1490529) 29-May-2014 15:35:10
d:\test\Example.bd4
PC-BDC main title
PC-BDC sub-title
This contains four lines of identification data, including the program version number, the time and date,
the data filename, and the user-defined title and sub-title.
Page 210 3.3 Output parameters * Design sheet PC-BDC 9.04
1 Dimensions:------------------------------------------------------------------

RotType IPM Embed Type1 Poles 4
Stator..
StatorOD 100.0000 mm LamShape Circle Slots 12
SYoke 10.0000 mm ASD 14.0000 mm SP 3.0000
Rad3 50.0000 mm Rad2 40.0000 mm S_Slot Square
TWS 5.0000 mm SD 14.0000 mm SO 2.0000 mm
TGD 1.0000 mm SOang 20.0000 m Stf 0.9700
Rotor..
MOH 0.0000 mm Skew 0.0000
RotorOD 50.0000 mm Rad1 25.0000 mm Gap 1.0000 mm
LM 5.5000 mm BetaM 120.0000 e pupa 0.6667
RYoke 10.6399 mm hq 4.2154 mm RadSH 10.0000 mm
MagWid 22.0000 mm DHub 30.5692 mm R_rpf 0.0000 mm
wNeck 2.0000 mm gLead 0.0000 mm gTrail 0.0000 mm
Bridge 1.0000 mm Web 2.0000 mm MslotWid 24.0000 mm
MEdge 5.5000 mm LM_min 5.5000 mm
Slits None
wMag 22.0000 mm AmagSlot 160.8407 mm MOH 0.0000 mm
Lstk 50.0000 mm Lrotor 50.0000 mm Lstator 51.0000 mm
Many parameters in this section were defined in 3.1 or 3.2. See Reference Figures.
StatorOD Outside dimension of circular stator lamination. For interior-rotor motors with
LamShape = Circle, it is the diameter 2Rad3; with LamShape = Rect or Rect.Rnd, it
is the larger of WX and WY; and with LamShape = Circ.Chf it is the largest of WX, WY,
and 2Rad3. For exterior-rotor motors, it is 2(Rad1!Gap). See Fig. 173.
Rad2 The radius to the stator slot bottom, measured along the slot axis from the machine's
centre-line to the bottom of the slot. If S_Slot = VarDpth and there are slots of different
depth, Rad2 is calculated using the average slot depth ASD.
ASD Average slot depth. Except when S_Slot = VarDpth or HW, ASD is equal to SD.
SYoke The radial thickness of the stator yoke defining the width of the flux path as it crosses the
q-axis (on open-circuit). The inner boundary of the yoke is Rad2, so that if LamShape =
Circle, SYoke = Rad3 ! Rad2. But if LamShape = Circ.Chf, the outer boundary of the
stator yoke is taken as the least of WX/2, WY/2, or Rad3. If LamShape = Rect or
Rect.Rnd, it is taken as the lesser of WX/2 and WY/2. See Fig. 173.
SP No. of slots per pole. (See XBtpk, p. 132).
RotorOD Outside diameter of rotor. For interior-rotor motors it is 2Rad1; for exterior-rotor
motors, it is RadShell.
RYoke The thickness of the rotor yoke defining the width of the flux path through the rotor yoke
on open-circuit. In most cases RYoke is measured along the q-axis; but see the reference
figures for the different rotor types.
hq The height or depth of the rotor pole-cap. hq is indicated on the reference diagrams of the
different rotor types. Note that IPMhq is an input parameter for certain types of IPM
rotor.
DHub The diametric dimension of the rotor hub in certain rotor types; see reference figures.
wNeck The width of a q-axis "neck" or constriction in certain rotor types; see reference figures.
wNeck is also used in surface-magnet rotors as a measure of the distance between corners
of adjacent magnets.
gLead Airgap length at leading edge of pole. See Fig. 214, p. 298.
gTrail Airgap length at trailing edge of pole. See Fig. 214, p. 298.
pupa Per-unit pole-arc, i.e. the ratio pole-arc/pole-pitch. In many cases this is equal to
BetaM/180 (when BetaM is in Eelec); but for line-start motors pupa is determined by the
rotor slots as well as the configuration of the rotor flux paths.
PoleArc Pole arc in mechanical degrees. If Nmbp > 1, PoleArc is the total arc that would be
obtained by abutting all the Nmbp blocks together; the arc of each block is therefore
PoleArc/Nmbp; see Fig. 197.
Lme Effective magnetic length of magnet in the direction of magnetization, used in lumped-
parameter magnetic circuit calculations to determine Pm0. See also Amhp.
MEdge The edge dimension of one magnet.
LM_min The minimum length of one magnet in the direction of magnetization.
wMag Width across one magnet. If RotType = SurfRad, SurfPll, BreadLoaf, ExtRad, ExtPll,
InsCP (not Embed Type3), or InsRel, wMag is determined by BetaM. If RotType = IPM
and Embed = Type6, wMag is determined as an equivalent width from the magnetic
circuit calculation. In other cases it is determined by MagWid. Note that MagWid
always refers to the total magnet width in one pole, but wMag refers to one "block".
WmagSlot Width of magnet slot in embedded rotor types, used to calculate prl (q.v.). For those rotor
types where the width of magnet slot is not used in calculating prl, WmagSlot = 0.
AmagSlot Area of one magnet aperture in the rotor lamination when RotType = IPM or Spoke.
Lrotor The axial length of the rotor body and magnets, Lstk + 2 MOH.
Lstator The effective magnetic length of the stator, Lstk fz, used mainly in inductance
calculations or when EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR. See fz.
EffWst Effective width of stator tooth, used to calculate peak tooth flux-density. See p. 231.
ERA1 End-ring cross-section area at one end of the rotor; (meaningful only for line-start motors).
ERA2 End-ring cross-section area at the other end of the rotor; (meaningful only for line-start
motors).
ABar Rotor bar area (line-start motor).
ABarFB Area of rotor bar at the edges of one pole; this rotor bar is also a flux-barrier.
hBq Cross-sectional area in the plane of the d-axis used for estimating BqAvg.
AugTArc Augmented tooth arc. See XTTarc and Fig. 144, p. 130.
ToothArcMR Tooth arc in mechanical radians.
2 Magnet Data:-----------------------------------------------------------------

Magnet NeIGT 30H
Br 1.1200 T Hc 810.0000 kA/m MuRec 1.1000
CBr -0.1000 %/C CHc -0.0600 %/C DMag 7400.0000 kg/m
BrT 1.1144 T HcT 807.5700 kA/m XLM 1.0000
Shim 0.2500 mm Bracing 0.0500 LMnet 5.2500 mm
BrTEff 0.9010 T MuRecEff 1.0403 LMslot 5.5000 mm
Many parameters in this section have been defined in 3.2 or the Magnet Database Manager section of the WinSpeed
manual. See also the Magnetic Circuit Design section, below.
PC-BDC uses BrTEff and MuRecEff to define the recoil line of the magnet material. It does not use the
database value of coercivity in magnetic calculations.
The demagnetization current IBk (p. 231) is calculated for the knee-point flux-density Bk, which is
specified in Ted, not in the magnet database. This permits the user to set an arbitrary demagnetization
threshold that is not a material property.
Br Remanent flux-density at 20EC taken from the magnet database. [T]
Hc Coercivity of magnet at 20EC taken from the magnet database. [kA/m]
MuRec Relative recoil permeability taken from the magnet database. []
BrT Remanent flux-density at temperature T_r, (adjusted by XBrT).
HcT Coercivity of magnet at temperature T_r. (Not used in calculation).
CBr Temperature coefficient of Br, from the magnet database. [%/EC]
CHc Temperature coefficient of Hc, from the magnet database. [%/EC]
DMag Mass density of the magnet, from the magnet database. [kg/m
3
]
BrTEff The effective remanence of an equivalent magnet whose physical length in the direction
of magnetization is LM, when the actual magnet length is LM Shim; see Fig. 134.
BrTEff is calculated from BrT (p. 212) at the magnet operating temperature T_r. If there
is no "clearance gap" or "glue line", then Shim ' 0 and BrTEff ' BrT. BrTEff is also a
function of Bracing when CalcBB = EffMag; Fig. 135. See SEM-2.
XBrTMOH The factor by which BrTEff is augmented to account for magnet overhang; see Fig. 136,
p. 120. See also prlMOH. Note that MOH1 and MOH2 have no effect on MuRecEff.
MuRecEff The effective recoil permeability of the equivalent magnet whose physical length in the
direction of magnetization is LM, when the actual magnet length is LM Shim. If there
is no "clearance gap" or "glue line", then Shim ' 0 and MuRecEff ' MuRec. MuRecEff
is also a function of Bracing when CalcBB = EffMag; Fig. 135. See SEM-2.
LMnet The actual physical length of the magnet in the direction of magnetization, generally
equal to LM Shim. LMnet determines the magnet weight. See Fig. 134.
LM+Shim Defined in Fig. 134. For surface-magnet motors, this is equal to LM. It defines the total
dimension of the magnet plus the Shim.
LMslot Defined in Fig 134. For interior-magnet motors, this is the length of the magnet slot,
measured in the direction of magnetization.
3 Control Data:----------------------------------------------------------------

RPM 1000.0000 rpm Vs 24.0000 V Drive Sine
Freq1 33.3333 Hz wm 104.7198 rad/s Sw_Ctl dq_VV_CR

Current control..
ISP 15.0000 A gamma 0.0000

Drive circuit parameters..
DCSource Fixed DC Vs 24.0000 V Vd 0.6000 V
Vq 0.0000 V Rq 0.0000 ohm t_q 0.0000 us
R_s 0.0000 ohm Rac 0.0000 Rac Lac 0.0000 mH

Available voltage from the inverter..
Vs1 18.7127 Vrms Vs120 16.2057 Vrms Vs1Lin 14.6969 Vrms
Vct1 16.9706 Vrms Vht1 17.8693 Vrms Vphpk 12.0000 V pk

Methods and program control..
EMFCalc ToothFlux eCalc Auto dq0 true
dqRevert false eqRevert false TorqCalc ei_wfms
CalcVer cv9

Ellipse diagram parameters..
gTmax 11.4993 e NTmax 1937.5368 rpm NQ 1856.0933 rpm
rpmBase 1000.0000 rpm Idsc 45.4295 A ND 2655.3546 rpm
Many parameters in this section have been defined in 3.2. The parameters in section 3 depend on Drive
and Sw_Ctl, and they are also different for Static design and Dynamic design.
Freq1 Fundamental frequency of phase current, RPM/60 Poles/2 [Hz].
wm Fundamental radian frequency, 2B Freq1. [rad/s]
Available voltage from the inverter.. see p. p. 241.
Ellipse diagram parameters..
gTmax The phase angle (gamma or () which maximizes the torque in a sinewave drive,
according to the "lossless" theory in SEM-1. gTmax maximizes the sum of magnet
alignment and reluctance torques. [Eelec]
NTmax The maximum speed at which the optimum phase angle gTmax can be obtained with the
set-point current ISP, according to the "lossless" theory described in [1] for sinewave
drives. At higher speeds than NTmax, the voltage-limit ellipse collapses and there is
insufficient voltage to drive ISP at the optimum phase angle gTmax. [rpm]
NQ The maximum speed at which the current ISP can be oriented in the q-axis, according to
the ellipse-diagram theory in [1]. [rpm]
ND The maximum speed at which the current ISP can be supplied, according to the "lossless"
theory described in [1] for sinewave drives. At this speed the current is oriented in the
negative d-axis and is entirely demagnetizing, with no electromagnetic torque produced.
While it is not a practical operating speed, it represents an upper bound to the speed
capability of the drive. [rpm]
Idsc The short-circuit current, calculated as Eq1/Xd in RMS A/phase.
23
Versions before version 8 did not have this latching function, so the transistors could find themselves switching on again as soon as the next
integration step, producing a very high switching frequency.
Control parameters available following Dynamic design
SwFreq The switching frequency in one line: i.e., the number of turn-OFF transitions during one
commutation interval divided by the duration of that interval. The commutation interval
is typically 60E, 90E, 120E etc. when Drive = Square, but typically 180E when Drive = Sine.
(See Fig. 268). The turn-OFF at the end of the commutation interval is not counted.
NccQ1 The number of on/off switching cycles in transistor Q1 in one integration interval (for
Drive ' Sine, this is 180E).
MaxSwFrq Maximum theoretical switching frequency in one line. (See B09).
f0 The frequency or rate at which the control action of the current-regulator or voltage-pulse-
width modulator is executed. This is also known as the carrier frequency with
sine/triangle modulators, but with hysteresis-type controllers it is really the sampling
rate. With voltage-PWM controllers it is the actual switching frequency of the active
transistor(s). See p. 154 ff. [kHz]
ISChop The number of integration steps per cycle of the carrier frequency f0,
ISChop = [720 ISLA] [Poles/2 RPM/60] /[f0 10
3
].
For example, in a 4-pole motor rotating at 2400 rpm with ISLA = 64 and f0 = 9 kHz, ISChop
= 720 64 2 2400/60 /(9 10
3
) = 410.
tIntStep Integration step-length in s. PC-BDC uses a fixed integration step-length of 0@5/ISLA
Eelec and integrates the differential circuit equations with respect to position, not time.
Therefore tIntStep depends on both ISLA and RPM.
kSwON The number of integration steps in the OFF interval of the voltage-pulse-width modulator
used with Sw_Ctl = V60_Q6, V120_Q1,.. and Drive = Square. It counts the number of
integration steps from the previous "reset" until the next turn-ON; Fig. 169.
Note that kSwON ' (1 DuCy) ISChop (to the nearest integer)
and kSwON kSwOFF ' ISChop.
Important : A voltage PWM controller cannot operate correctly unless ISChop is large
enough to permit sufficient resolution of kSwON and kSwOFF, remembering that both
are integers. If DuCy = 1, kSwON = 0, and the transistors never switch off (unless the
current exceeds ISP).
kSwOFF The number of integration steps in the ON interval of the voltage-pulse-width modulator
used with Sw_Ctl = V60_Q6, V120_Q1,.. and Drive = Square. It counts the number of
integration steps from the previous "reset" until the next turn-OFF; Fig. 169. If the current
exceeds ISP during the normal operation of the voltage PWM, the active transistor is
switched off and latched off until the next "reset". This is indicated at point "X" in Fig.
169.
23

Fig. 169 Voltage PWM; definition of kSwON and kSwOFF
NCycles No. of recursions of main circuit simulation in Dynamic design. If Cycles is non-zero,
NCycles will be equal to Cycles; otherwise it counts the number of simulation segments
(which may be in units of 60E, 120E, or 180E, depending on the type of Drive and Sw_Ctl).
CRsat Detects the onset of saturation in the current-regulator when Drive ' Sine and Sw_Ctl
' RampComp or SynchReg.
HBA_Act Actual value of hysteresis-band adjustment used in calculation.
HB% The percentage hysteresis band, equal to 100/HBA. HBA is the input parameter in Ted/1.
ISP_Act The final value of set-point current used in Dynamic design when Tol_ISLA = Auto. If
Tol_ISLA = ErrorMsg, ISP_Act = ISP.
Tol_Act The final value of convergence tolerance used in Dynamic design when Tol_ISLA =
Auto. If Tol_ISLA = ErrorMsg, Tol_Act = Tol.
ISLA_Act The final value of the integration step-length adjustment parameter used in Dynamic
design when Tol_ISLA = Auto. If Tol_ISLA = ErrorMsg, ISLA_Act = ISLA.
fRect Resonance frequency 1/(2B /(Ldc Cdc)) in the DC filter circuit when DCSource = DC
Filter.
4 Winding Data:----------------------------------------------------------------

Connex Wye NPhases 3
WdgType ConcEqual Throw 2
TC 12 CPP 1.0000
Tph 48.0000 PPATHS 1 SPP 1.0000
Layers 2.0000 CSidesPh 8 Z 288.0000
MLT 192.5981 mm LgthOEnd 79.4749 mm Ext 0.0000 mm
EndFill 0.5000 LaxPack 80.6180 mm Liner 0.4000 mm
WireSpec BareDia Wire 2.0000
NSH 1 WireDia 2.0000 mm InsThick 0.0000 mm
SFg 0.4816 SFn 0.7005 MaxSFn 0.7005
Aslot 156.5672 mm ASlotLL 137.0451 mm ACond 3.1416 mm
GPAslot 158.5672 mm TopStick false
TwjWid 2.0000 mm TwjLeg 3.5000 mm TwjThk 0.0000 mm
PhsWid 2.0000 mm PhsLeg 3.5000 mm PhsThk 0.0000 mm
ATwj 0.0000 mm APhs 0.0000 mm
XET 1.0000 ETCalc BDC 6.5 Rext 0.0000 ohm
Nse 52.9276 X_R 1.0000 Ax1 60.0000 m
T_Wdg 25.0000 C Rph0 0.0517 ohm R_LL 0.1035 ohm
T_c 25.0000 C Rph 0.0517 ohm/ph TFRho 1.0196
Rph20 0.0507 ohm RLL20 0.1015 ohm

Inductances...
SalientP true DiffSat Auto_dq XL 1.0000
LSlot 0.0984 mH LDiff 0.0279 mH Lendt 0.0188 mH
MSlot -0.0492 mH MDiff -0.0139 mH XLendt 1.0000
PCSlot 1.3598 XLdiff 1.0000 XDiff 0.0088 ohm
Lgg 0.9259 mH Mgg -0.4629 mH Lext 0.0000 mH
Lsigma 0.1451 mH Msigma -0.0632 mH Xsigma 0.0436 ohm/ph

Synchronous Inductances and related parameters...
Xd 0.0918 ohm/ph Xq 0.1769 ohm/ph Eq1 4.1689 V
Ld 0.4381 mH Lq 0.8446 mH Psi1Md 28.1497 mVs
XCd 1.0000 XCq 1.0000 XBrT 1.0000
XDiff_d 0.0088 ohm XDiff_q 0.0088 ohm
Gd 0.1780 Gq 0.4926
Lmd 0.2299 mH Lmq 0.6363 mH Lm0 1.2918 mH
Lg_0 0.2887 mH Lg_2 -0.1355 mH
LL_d 0.8763 mH LL_q 1.6891 mH LL0 1.2827 mH
Laa_d 0.2984 mH Laa_q 0.5693 mH

Winding Factors and other parameters :-----------------------------------------
kw1 0.8660 Xm0 0.2705 ohm/ph CalcLg LgMeth1
ks1 1.0000 kp1 0.8660 kd1 1.0000
ksg 0.9119 fz 1.0200 PSSlot S-Closed
Saliency Auto CalcLdLq Auto muPlug 1.0000
i1_Ang -12.9904 A i2_Ang 12.9904 A i3_Ang -1.837E-15 A
Many parameters in this section have been defined in 3.2
Tph Turns in series per phase, calculated from the coil list. For most integral-slot windings,
Tph = CPP POLES TC / PPATHS
SPP No. of slots per pole per phase. For standard integral-slot windings it must be an integer,
e.g., with 24 slots, 4 poles and 3 phases, SPP = 2, but with 12 slots, 8 poles and 3 phases SPP
= 0.5.
Layers No. of layers (coilsides per slot) required in winding.
CSidesPh No. of coil-sides per phase winding, i.e., twice the no. of coils per phase.
Z Total no. of conductors. A conductor is defined as half a turn; (see 3.2, page 96). A
conductor has NSH strands of wire defined by WireSpec, plus NSH2 strands of wire
defined by WireSpec2, plus NSHA strands defined by WireSpecA: that is, up to three
different wire sizes in the same conductor. In many cases WireSpec2 and WireSpecA
will be "none" and only a single wire size is used.
MLT Mean length of one turn; see Fig. 176.
MLT = 2 Lstk + 4 Ext + 2 XET L
end-turn
where L
end-turn
is the end-turn length calculated by PC-BDC.
LgthOEnd Axial length between the extremities of the end-turns. See Fig. 176. (See also XET,EndFill,
LaxPack).
LaxPack Axial length between the extremities of the end-turns, after compressing the endwinding
volume by the factor EndFill; Fig. 176.
WireDia Bare wire diameter (i.e., of one strand); see 3.2.
WDiaA Bare wire diameter (one strand) of auxiliary wire in single-phase line-start motor.
SFg "Gross" slot-fill factor. The fraction of Aslot that is taken up by copper, averaged over all
slots. In the winding editor, the slot-fill factors for individual slots are displayed.
SFn "Net" slot-fill factor, calculated with "heavy-build" insulation and the net slot area
available for winding. Suppose d is the diameter of one strand of wire, measured across
the insulation, and suppose there are n strands per slot. Then SFn = n d
2
/AslotLL. If
the number and/or diameter of strands differs from slot to slot, SFn is the average over
all slots. The winding editor displays slot-fill factors for individual slots, Fig. 17. See also
MaxSFn.
Aslot Slot area, equal to the gross punched area minus the slot opening area SO TGD. See Fig.
260.
ASlotLL Cross-sectional area obtained by subtracting the cross-sectional area of the liner and the
top wedge from Aslot. If TopStick = true, ATstick is also subtracted. See Fig. 260.
ACond Cross-section area of one conductor (copper only, excluding insulation). A conductor
normally comprises NSH parallel strands, and carries the phase current divided by
PPATHS. Composite conductors can be made up with NSH strands of WireSpec, NSH2
strands of WireSpec2, and NSHA strands of WireSpecA, (Fig. 264).
GPAslot Gross punched area of stator slot. See Fig. 260.
ATstick Area of topstick. See Fig. 260.
ATwj Cross-section area of top wedge. See Fig. 261.
APhs Cross-section area of phase separator. See Fig. 261.
MaxSFn Maximum slot-fill factor in any slot, calculated by the d
2
method used with SFn. (Includes
the phase separators; see Fig. 260).
Nse Equivalent no. of sine-distributed turns in series per phase, 4/ kw1 Tph. (Ref. [0]).
Ax1 Angular position of the axis of Phase 1, measured CCW from the positive x-axis. PC-BDC
calculates this angle from the winding data. The origin of the current and EMF waveforms
is when a South magnet pole is aligned with Ax1.
Rph0 Phase resistance calculated at temperature T_Wdg [ohm/phase]. This value is fixed and
does not vary as a result of any thermal calculations. It is displayed as a reference value
independent of the operating condition of the machine, and is not equal to the operating
phase resistance unless T_c happens to be equal to T_Wdg.
Rph Phase resistance calculated at temperature T_c [ohm/phase]. This is the operating
resistance consistent with the performance data resulting from Dynamic design. After
a Static design, Rph = Rph0.
R_LL Line-line resistance at temperature T_c [ohm]. For wye connection, R_LL = 2 Rph0.
For delta connection, R_LL = 2/3 Rph0.
TFRho Ratio of copper resistivity between T_c and 20C. PC-BDC uses a default value of 25C for
T_c, so TFRho will be approximately 1.02 until the winding temperature changes.
Rph20 Phase resistance at 20EC. [ohm]
RLL20 Line-line resistance at 20EC [ohm]
Inductances
Only the main inductances and reactances are described here. They include several components which are different
for salient-pole and nonsalient-pole machines. See SEM-1,2 and [1].
Lph Phase self-inductance: Lph = Lg + Lslot + Lendt. [mH]
Mph Mutual inductance between phases: Mph = Mg fz + Mslot. [mH]
Lg Airgap component of Lph, associated with flux that crosses the airgap. For salient-pole
machines Lg is the average between the d-axis and q-axis values. See also CalcLdLq.
Lslot Slot-leakage component of Lph. Note that Lslot and Mslot both take account of the
numbers of conductors in each slot, taken from the coil list. They both depend on the slot
permeance coefficient PCSlot.
Lendt End-turn component of Lph. Lendt is calculated coil-by-coil, taking into account the span
of each individual coil, and it always includes the sum of all the self-inductance
components of the individual end-turns. However, the extent of mutual coupling between
end-turns of the same winding depends on the value of ETCalc. See also XLendt.
Mg Airgap component of Mph. For salient-pole machines Mg is the average between the d-
axis and q-axis values. See also CalcLdLq.
Mslot Slot-leakage component of Mph. See also Lslot.
LDiff Differential leakage component of phase self-inductance calculated as (Lg ! Lg_0)
XLdiff.
MDiff Differential leakage component of mutual inductance between phases, calculated as (Mg
! (!Lg_0/2)) XLdiff.
XDiff Differential leakage reactance T (LDiff MDiff). [ohm] (p. 108)
XDiff_d d-axis differential leakage reactance, XDiff XCd/XLdiff. [ohm]
XDiff_q q-axis differential leakage reactance, XDiff XCd/XLdiff. [ohm]
Lsigma Leakage component of the self-inductance of one phase, i.e., Lslot + Lendt + Ldiff.
Msigma Leakage component of the mutual inductance between two phases, equal to Mslot +
Mdiff.
Lgg Airgap self-inductance of one phase, calculated as if the rotor was replaced by a laminated
steel cylinder of infinite permeability and radius Rad1. This inductance can be compared
with (2/3)Xm0/T to gauge how nearly sinewound the motor is. (With 1-phase or 2-phase
motors, the 2/3 is omitted).
Mgg Mutual airgap inductance between phases, calculated on the same basis as Lgg.
PCSlot Slot permeance coefficient used for Lslot and Mslot. See PSSlot.
Xsigma Leakage reactance per phase, equal to T (Lsigma ! Msigma).
L_LL Line-line inductance. L_LL is intended for use with nonsalient-pole machines. For wye
connection, L_LL = 2 (Lph ! Mph). For delta connection, L_LL = 2/3 (Lph ! Mph).
Otherwise L_LL = Lph.
Xd ' T H 3/2 (Lph ! Mph ) Lendt
E
q1
'
T
2
Q
1Md
with T ' 2B f
Q
1Md
' k
w1
T
ph
M
1Md
,
Synchronous Inductances and related parameters
Xd d-axis synchronous reactance, equal to T Ld, where T ' 2B Freq. Xd can also be
expressed as Gd Xm0 + Xsigma. [1]
Xq q-axis synchronous reactance, equal to T Lq, or Gq Xm0 + Xsigma. [1]
For airgap windings (Config = AirGapWdg), Xd and Xq are assumed equal and are
calculated (for 3-phase machines) as follows:
Eq1 The RMS fundamental EMF per phase due to the magnet on open-circuit,
where f is the fundamental frequency Freq1. Q
1Md
or Psi1Md is defined below. Note that
Eq1 lies on the q-axis of the phasor diagram.
Eq1tfw The RMS fundamental EMF per phase due to the magnet on open-circuit, calculated from
the tooth-flux waveform and the coil table. When EMFCalc ' ToothFlux, ExtTFW or
ExtEMF, Eq1 is set equal to Eq1tfw.
Psi1Md The fundamental component of magnet flux-linkage per phase, Q
1Md
. When EMFCalc =
BLV, HBMethod, or KFR this flux-linkage is calculated from M
1Md
, the fundamental airgap
flux/pole due to the magnet:
where kw1 is the fundamental winding factor and Tph is the number of turns in series
per phase. If CalcVer > cv8, then when EMFCalc ' ToothFlux, ExtTFW or ExtEMF, Q
1Md
is calculated from the tooth-flux waveform and the coil table. The two methods, one based
on the airgap flux and the other on the tooth-flux, can give significantly different results,
especially in motors with a small slot/pole ratio (typically < 1@5). [mVs peak]
Ld d-axis synchronous inductance, [1].
Lq q-axis synchronous inductance, [1].
Gd Coefficient for calculating Ld, [1]. Gd is the ratio g
d
''/g
d
', where g
d
' is the mechanical
airgap multiplied by Carters coefficient, and g
d
'' is the effective airgap in the d-axis
including the effects of the magnet and the saliency. Gd is adjusted by XCd.
Gq Coefficient for calculating Lq, [1]. Gq is the ratio g
q
''/g
q
', where g
q
' is the mechanical
airgap multiplied by Carters coefficient, and g
q
'' is the effective airgap in the q-axis
including the effects of the magnet and the saliency. Gq is adjusted by XCq.
Lmd Magnetizing component of Ld, associated with the fundamental space-harmonic of the
polyphase MMF distribution; see SEM-2.
Lmq Magnetizing component of Lq, associated with the fundamental space-harmonic of the
polyphase MMF distribution; see SEM-2.
Lm0 Magnetizing component of the synchronous reactance of a ficititious synchronous
machine obtained if the rotor is a smooth steel cylinder of infinite permeability. The
diameter of this cylinder is such as to give an airgap equal to Lge. See SEM-2.
L_g0 Mean value of airgap component of the phase self-inductance as the rotor rotates through
one cycle. L_g0 is calculated on the assumption of sine-distributed windings. See SEM-2
and [9].
L_g2 Coefficient of second-harmonic variation of the airgap component of the phase self-
inductance as the rotor rotates through one cycle. See SEM-2 and [9].
LL_d Line-line inductance, calculated from the fundamental conductor distribution, with d-axis
aligned with the resultant axis of phases a,b. LL_d is intended for use with salient-pole
machines. For wye connection LL_d = 2 (Lsigma ! Msigma) + 3 (Lg_0 ! Lg_2), [1].
LL_q Line-line inductance, calculated from the fundamental conductor distribution, with q-axis
aligned with the resultant axis of phases a,b. LL_q is intended for use with salient-pole
machines. For wye connection LL_q = 2 (Lsigma ! Msigma) + 3 (Lg_0 + Lg_2), [1].
LL0 Mean value of line-line inductance, i.e. (LL_d + LL_q)/2.
Laa_d Phase self-inductance, calculated from the fundamental conductor distribution with the
d-axis aligned with the axis of phase a, [1].
Laa_q Phase self-inductance, calculated from the fundamental conductor distribution with the
q-axis aligned with the axis of phase a, [1].
dq Inductance matrix
When Plex > 1, the dq inductance matrix is displayed towards the end of the Winding Data section. See
SEM-2.
Embedded finite-element parameters
Subscript "u" denotes parameters computed by PC-BDC. The EMF Eq1u includes the effect of saturation
on open-circuit (via the internal magnetic equivalent-circuit solver); but the reactances Xdu and Xqu are
calculated unsaturated, that is, assuming infinitely permeable steel.
For permanent-magnet machines, Xdu and Xqu include the modification of the magnetizing inductances
(Lmd and Lmq) by the adjustment factors XCq, XCd.
Subscript "_FES" denotes parameters computed with the embedded FE solver in Static design. For
permanent-magnet machines with Drive = Sine, this is selected with ipsiCalc = PCFEA, and the _FES
parameters appear in the Inductances section of the Winding data in the design sheet.
Subscript "_FE" denotes parameters computed with the embedded FE solver in Dynamic design; they
are averaged over all the FE computations around the i-R loop (Fig. 150). See Ref. [25].
Xdu PC-BDC value of d-axis synchronous reactance X
d
.
Xqu PC-BDC value of q-axis synchronous reactance X
d
.
Ldu PC-BDC value of d-axis synchronous inductance L
d
.
Lqu PC-BDC value of q-axis synchronous inductance L
q
.
Eq1u PC-BDC value of open-circuit RMS EMF per phase, E
q1
.
Psi1Mdu PC-BDC value of the fundamental magnet or field flux-linkage per phase, Q
1Md
.
Xd_FES X
d
obtained using embedded FE solver in Static design.
Xq_FES X
q
Ld_FES L
d
Lq_FES L
q
Eq1_FES E
q1
PsiMdFE Q
1Md
obtained using embedded FE solver in Dynamic design.
Xd_FE X
d
Xq_FE X
q
Ld_FE L
d
Lq_FE L
q
Eq1_FE E
q1
PsiMdFE Q
1Md
Zph_base '
1
3
VL_base
IL_base
'
VL_base
2
kVA_base 1000
ohm/phase.
(35)
Zph_base '
1
3
380
676
'
380
2
445 1000
' 0@3245 ohm/phase.
(37)
kVA_base '
3 VL_base IL_base
1000
(34)
IL_base '
445 1000
3 380
' 676 A
(36)
Per-unit quantities
The base impedance for the per-unit system is defined in the classical formulas:
so
These forms are given for star (wye) connection. For example, if VL_base = 380 V RMS line-line, and
kVA_base = 445 kVA,
and
IL_base Base line current, eqn. (36). [A]
E_pu Per-unit value of open-circuit EMF, Eq1/(VL_base//3), if wye-connected. [p.u.]
Xl_pu Per-unit value of leakage reactance per phase, Xsigma/Zph_base. [p.u.]
Zph_base Base value of phase impedance, eqn. (37). [ohm]
R_pu Per-unit value of phase resistance, Rph/Zph_base. [p.u.]
Xd_pu Per-unit value of d-axis synchronous reactance, Xd/Zph_base. [p.u.]
Xq_pu Per-unit value of q-axis synchronous reactance, Xq/Zph_base. [p.u.]
Winding Factors and other parameters
Xm0 Airgap component of synchronous reactance [ohm/phase]. This is the value of the
synchronous reactance calculated as if the rotor was replaced by a laminated steel
cylinder of infinite permeability and radius Rad1. Xm0 is usually greater than Xd
because of the reluctance of the magnet in the d-axis flux-path.
kw1 In classical theory the fundamental winding factor kw1 is often derived as the product
kd1 kp1 ks1, but PC-BDC uses a more general method which is basically a weighted
sum of the pitch factors for every coil in the winding, the weighting being according to the
number of turns in each coil. The skew factor ks1 is incorporated in this algorithm when
Skew is nonzero. (See [21]). For interest, the other winding factors kp1 and kd1 are
calculated by the classical formulas [1] in those cases where they are meaningful, and in
those cases they can be used as an independent check on the value of kw1.
ks1 Fundamental skew factor, [1].
kp1 Fundamental pitch factor, [1]. For integral-slot lap windings kp1 is the same for every
coil, but for concentric windings there is a different pitch factor for each coil-pitch, and
the resultant is a weighted sum according to the numbers of turns in each coil, [21]. The
distribution factor kd1 does not apply to concentric windings and is made equal to 1.
kd1 Fundamental distribution factor, [1]. This is calculated only for integral-slot lap windings.
If the number of coils per pole CPP is not an integer, or for windings other than integral-
slot lap windings, kd1 is not defined and is given the value 1.
ksg The ratio (2/3)Xm0/(TL
gg
), used to assess how nearly sinewound the motor is. A value
of 1 corresponds to a perfect sine-distributed winding. It can be approached with a
sufficiently large number of slots/pole/phase.
fz Axial fringing factor used to define an effective stator length Lstator in the axial
direction, in an attempt to account for the "bulging" of the flux at the ends of the stack.
Unfortunately Lstator and Lstk are not used entirely consistently throughout PC-BDC,
but any inconsistency can be removed by setting ufz = 1, which forces fz = 1. Generally
speaking, Lstator is used for inductance calculations and Lstk for all other calculations
in the magnetic circuit. An exception is that when EMFCalc = HBMethod or KFR, the
fluxes PhiG, PhiM1 and PhiSY are calculated using Lstator, on the grounds that axial
fringing is likely to be greater in machines with surface magnets or airgap windings. See
also HBGeom on page 125.
i1_Ang The current in phase 1 when the rotor is at RotorAng.
k1ad Coefficient used in the theory of L
d
, [1,25].
kAlphad Coefficient used in the theory of L
d
, [1,25].
k1 Coefficient used in the theory of L
d
, [1,25].
k1aq Coefficient used in the theory of L
q
, [1,25].
Multiphase
Multiphase..
Plex 3 PolyOffs 2 alphax 20.0000 e
uM12d 0.0000 p.u. uM23d 0.0000 p.u. uM31d 0.0000 p.u.
uM12q 0.0000 p.u. uM23q 0.0000 p.u. uM31q 0.0000 p.u.
ms12d -0.0932 mH
ms12q -0.0932 mH
mg_a1a2 24.3627 mH mg_a1b2 -3.5945 mH mg_a1c2 -17.9724 mH
ms_a1a2 0.0000 mH ms_a1b2 0.0000 mH ms_a1c2 0.0000 mH
dq Inductance matrix [mH]..
d1 d2 d3 q1 q2 q3
d1 18.182 15.350 15.350
d2 15.350 18.182 15.350
d3 15.350 15.350 18.182
q1 62.053 59.221 59.221
q2 59.221 62.053 59.221
q3 59.221 59.221 62.053

alphax Multiplex displacement angle between sets of windings, expressed in Eelec. within the
range 0360E This is the electrical equivalent of PolyOffs, and is equal to PolyOffs /Slots
360 PolePairs. It should normally be equal to 30kE for a duplex winding (Connex =
6-phase) or 20kE for a triplex winding (Connex = 9-phase), where k is a positive integer.
If Connex ' 4-phase we have a duplex 2-phase winding and alphax should be equal to
45kE. [Eelec]
ms12d Additional mutual inductance between the d
1
and d
2
coils, attributable to slot-mutual and
differential-mutual inductance. If uM12d ' 0, PC-BDC calculates ms12d automatically;
otherwise it is set equal to uM12d Lmd. See SEM-2. [mH]
ms12q Additional mutual inductance between the q
1
and q
2
coils, attributable to slot-mutual and
differential-mutual inductance. If uM12q ' 0, PC-BDC calculates ms12q automatically;
otherwise it is set equal to uM12q Lmq. See SEM-2. [mH]
ms23d As ms12d, but between the d
2
and d
3
coils. If uM12d ' uM23d ' 0, PC-BDC will calculate
this equal to ms12d, as is necessary for balanced operation. [mH]
ms23q As ms23d, but between the q
2
and q
3
coils. If uM12q ' uM23q ' 0, PC-BDC will calculate
this equal to ms23d, as is necessary for balanced operation. [mH]
ms31d As ms23d, but between the d
3
and d
1
coils.
ms31q As ms23q, but between the q
3
and q
1
coils.
mg_a1a2 The airgap mutual inductance between phases a
1
and a
2
, that is, between the first phase
of the first set of a multiplex winding, and the first phase of the second set. Normally
phases a
1
and a
2
are displaced by the angle alphax. mg_a1a2 corresponds to M
a1a2
8 in
SEM-2. Together with mg_a1b2 and mg_a1c2, mg_a1a2 is used in the calculation of the
differential leakage component of ms12d, ms12q, etc. The size of mg_a1a2 etc. may
appear in some cases to be disproportionately large, but it must be remembered that these
are total airgap inductances including the fundamental magnetizing component, which
is not extracted until ms12d, ms12q etc. are calculated in dq axes from a combination of
the airgap inductances. It may be helpful to compare mg_a1a2 etc. with Mg, and even
with Mg cos(alphax)/cos(120E), or with -2 Mg cos(alphax). [mH]
mg_a1b2 The airgap mutual inductance between phases a
1
and b
2
of the first set of a multiplex winding, and the second phase of the second set. Normally
phases a
1
and b
2
are displaced by the angle alphax 120E. mg_a1b2 corresponds to M
a1b2
in SEM-2. As with mg_a1a2 and 2 Mg cos(alphax), it may be helpful to compare
mg_a1b2 with -2 Mg cos(alphax 120E). [mH]
mg_a1c2 The airgap mutual inductance between phases a
1
and c
2
of the first set of a multiplex winding, and the third phase of the second set. Normally
phases a
1
and c
2
are displaced by the angle alphax 120E. mg_a1c2 corresponds to M
a1c2
< in SEM-2. As with mg_a1a2 and 2 Mg cos(alphax), it may be helpful to compare
mg_a1c2 with -2 Mg cos(alphax 120E). [mH]
ms_a1a2 The slot mutual inductance between phases a
1
and a
2
. ms_a1a2 corresponds to 8 in SEM-
2. Together with ms_a1b2 and ms_a1c2, ms_a1a2 is used in the calculation of the slot-
leakage component of ms12d, ms12q, etc. [mH]
ms_a1b2 The slot mutual inductance between phases a
1
and b
2
. ms_a1b2 corresponds to in SEM-
2.
ms_a1c2 The slot mutual inductance between phases a
1
and c
2
. ms_a1c2 corresponds to < in SEM-2.
d-axis inductance matrix
The dimension of this matrix is equal to the plex or multiplicity : 2 for a duplex winding, or 3 for a triplex
winding. The diagonal elements are the full d-axis synchronous inductances of the winding sets, while
the off-diagonal elements are the mutuals between d
1
, d
2
etc. The main component of the mutual
inductance is Lmd, but there is an additional component due to slot-leakage and differential leakage
equal to m12d, m23d, etc., as discussed above. For balanced operation of a triplex or higher-plex winding,
all the mutual (off-diagonal) elements must be equal.
The saturation factors for all the d-axis inductances in this matrix are equal, apart from the slot-leakage
component which is normally small. Therefore the i-psi GoFER can be used to adjust for saturation in
the same way as for the normal simplex winding.
q-axis inductance matrix
This is similar to the d-axis inductance matrix, except that the synchronous inductances on the diagonal
are q-axis values, and the off-diagonal elements are dominated by Lmq. There is no cross-coupling
between the d-axis and q-axis, so the off-diagonal partitions are empty.
Line-start
Rmain Main winding resistance (when Connex = SplitPh).
Raux Resistance of auxiliary winding (when Connex = SplitPh).
RcR Real part of auxiliary impedance, R_run + (Raux ETR
2
Rmain). The term in ETR
2
compensates for the fact that Raux may not be exactly equal to ETR
2
Rmain.
Tph_Aux Turns in series in auxiliary winding.
MLT_Aux Mean length of turn in auxiliary winding.
AuxACond Cross-section area of one conductor in auxiliary winding.
kw1Main Fundamental winding factor of main winding.
kw1Aux Fundamental winding factor of auxiliary winding.
ETR Effective turns ratio auxiliary/main.
beta Effective turns ratio main/auxiliary, 1/ETR.
The following parameters are used for asynchronous and negative-sequence calculations. All of them
are referred to the stator winding; or in a single-phase motor, to the main stator winding.
Xmd d-axis magnetizing reactance.
Xmq q-axis magnetizing reactance.
X2d d-axis rotor leakage reactance.
X2q q-axis rotor leakage reactance. In the current version, X2d = X2q.
R2d d-axis rotor resistance.
R2q q-axis rotor resistance.
Rbar Component of R2d or R2q due to rotor bars.
REndRing Component of R2d or R2q due to rotor end-rings.
X1 Stator leakage reactance.
X1slot Slot-leakage component of X1.
X1end End-winding component of X1.
X2 Rotor leakage reactance. In the current version X2 = X2d = X2q.
X2slot Slot-leakage component of X2.
X2end End-ring component of X2.
Xbelt Belt leakage reactance, distributed equally between X1 and X2.
Xskew Skew-leakage reactance, distributed equally between X1 and X2.
Xzz Zig-zag reactance, distributed equally between X1 and X2.
5 Magnetic Circuit Design:-----------------------------------------------------

T_Mag 25.0000 C T_r 25.0000 C XBrT 1.0000
BrT 1.1144 T BgOC 0.4897 T Hca 689.2254 kA/m
BgAvOC 0.3262 T PhiG 0.6533 mWb BgA/BgOC 0.6661
Bg1OC 0.5350 T PhiM1 0.6821 mWb Bg1/BgOC 1.0925
BmOC 0.8028 T Bm/BrT 0.7204 XBtpk 1.0000
HmOC -109.0730 kA/m Hm/HcT -0.1351 PC 8.5099
BHmag 87.5686 kJ/m BHmagMGO 11.0042 MGO BHmax 28.2247 MGO
Bst 1.3379 T Bsy 0.6687 T Bry 0.6140 T
XTw 0.0000 XSYoke 0.0000 XRYoke 0.0000
kT 0.0844 Nm/A kE 0.0893 Vs/Rad krpmNL 2.5915 krpm
kSat 1.0000 XSatn 1.0000 CalcSatn Fixed
Xks 0.0000 ks 0.0000 XTTarc 1.0000
EffWst 5.0000 mm EffLst 11.1388 mm ukCL 0.0000
XBgap 1.0000 X_EMF 1.0000 k_rpf 1.0000
eTmax 0.0649 V BTSR Linear Bslot 5.3490E-04 T
eLLpk 9.3503 V ERecAv 9.3412 V ERecRMS 9.3412 V
Eq1 4.1689 V Eq1tfw 4.1689 V Bt1 1.3963 T
IBk 157.9475 A Bk 0.0000 T Hk -689.2254 kA/m
ILR 231.9795 A BmLR -0.4200 T HmLR -1010.5337 kA/m
IC180 322.3573 A BmC180 -0.9328 T HmC180 -1402.7851 kA/m
Xrm 0.5000 Carter 1.0438 Lge 1.0438 mm
Amhp 550.0000 mm Aghp 667.5884 mm Rghp 1.2442E+06 At/Wb
Pm0 0.1307 Wb/At Xrl 1.0000 prl 0.1866
apEnd 1.0000 Pend 0.0957 Lme 5.5000 mm
u_LKG 0.0000 f_Lkg 0.9705 if_Lkg 1.0303
bBsat 0.0000 T phi_y 0.1050 mWb BrdgLkg 23.7791 %
Fringing ON XFringe 1.0000 XBetaM 1.0000
SlotMod No
The magnetic circuit calculation is based on a nonlinear magnetic equivalent circuit that uses the
nonlinear BH characteristic of the steel. The parameters reported in this section are mostly open-circuit
parameters. Parameters that depend on armature current are inherently approximate and do not take
saturation into account, except in the case of CalcSatn = Calculate or Iterate, which is still very
approximate. On-load calculation of the flux-densities and related parameters should always be checked
with the GoFER.
For permanent-magnet machines PC-BDC assumes that the demagnetization curve of the magnet is
straight throughout the second quadrant. PC-BDC calculates an "apparent coercivity" Hca by drawing
a straight line through the second quadrant with gradient MuRecEff passing through BrTEff.
All magnets have a "knee" in the second or third quadrant of the BH curve, so it is essential to check that
the magnetizing force in the magnet does not exceed the knee-point value (otherwise the magnet can be
partially demagnetized). The knee-point value can be set with Bk. PC-BDC displays three values of
magnetizing force in the magnet, corresponding to three different conditions: HmOC, HmLR and
HmC180 (see below).
Magnetic calculations in PC-BDC treat the magnet as a lumped parameter or an equivalent distribution
of current-filaments, so that local demagnetization effects or variations in the operating point throughout
the magnet are not addressed. The finite-element GoFER should be used for this.
BgOC Peak value of airgap flux-density due to the magnet on open-circuit.
Hca Apparent coercivity of magnet at the rotor temperature T_r, calculated as BrTEff/(
0

MuRecEff).
BgAvOC Open-circuit airgap flux-density due to the magnet, averaged over one pole-pitch
(180Eelec).
PhiG Open-circuit airgap flux/pole due to magnet. When Config = AirgapWdg, PhiG and BgOC
are computed at the mean radius of the winding.
PhiSY Open-circuit flux in the stator yoke, (Config = AirgapWdg only). When CalcVer >= cv7,
PhiSY is computed from the solution of Laplace's equation (with EMFCalc = HBMethod
or KFR); otherwise it is taken as PhiG/2, which is generally a little higher.
BgA / BgOC Ratio BgAvOC/BgOC.
Bg1OC Peak value of fundamental space-harmonic component of open-circuit airgap flux-density
due to the magnet.
PhiM1 Fundamental open-circuit airgap flux/pole due to the magnet.
Bg1 / BgOC Ratio Bg1OC/BgOC.
BmOC Flux-density in magnet with stator open-circuited.
Bm / BrT Ratio BmOC/BrT.
HmOC Magnetizing force in magnet, with stator winding open-circuited. (Usually negative).
Hm / HcT Ratio HmOC/HcT. Usually negative, emphasizing the demagnetizing influence of the
armature reaction.
PC Permeance coefficient of magnetic circuit "seen" by the magnet.
BHmag Product of BmOC and HmOC (magnet energy product). [kJ/m
3
]
BHmagMGO BHmag expressed in mega-gauss-oersteds. [MGO]
BHmax Maximum available energy product calculated as BrT
2
/(MuRec
0
)/4, and expressed
in MGO. [MGO]
Bst Stator tooth flux-density due to the magnet. If CalcVer > cv8, Bst is obtained as the peak
value of the tooth flux-density waveform. Otherwise, if EMFCalc = BLV, BLV/Unbal, or
ToothFlux, Bst is calculated by the magnetic equivalent-circuit, in which the teeth under
half a magnet pole are lumped together as a single nonlinear reluctance in series with the
magnet (Amhp) and the airgap (Aghp), with other elements for the yokes and leakage
permeances; but if EMFCalc = HBMethod, KFR, or ExtBgap, Bst is obtained by funneling
the airgap flux integrated over one slot-pitch into the effective tooth width EffWst (q.v.).
See also XBtpk in Ted/2. If WFeCalc = OC, Bst is the peak tooth flux-density used in the
peak-value formulation of the hysteresis and eddy-current losses in the stator teeth. Bst is
generally the open-circuit value, except when Drive = AC Volt or in line-start motors.
Bt1 Peak value of the fundamental component of the B
tooth
waveform obtained on open-circuit
as the rotor rotates. If the B
tooth
waveform is sinusoidal, Bt1 will be equal to Bst.
kSat '
M
OC
! )M
A
M
OC
Bsy Stator yoke flux-density due to the magnet on open-circuit. If CalcVer > cv8, Bsy is
obtained as the peak value of the yoke flux-density waveform. Otherwise, it is calculated
under the same conditions as for Bst. If WFeCalc = OC, Bsy is the peak yoke flux-density
used in the peak-value formulation of the hysteresis and eddy-current losses in the stator
yoke. If Config = AirgapWdg, Bsy is computed as PhiSY divided by the stator yoke cross-
section area.
Bry Rotor yoke flux-density due to the magnet on open-circuit, calculated from the magnetic
equivalent circuit as described under Bst.
Bst_MGC The peak flux-density in a stator tooth on open-circuit, obtained in a static calculation by
the internal magnetic equivalent-circuit solver using an assumed distribution function,
as indicated in Fig. 143 on p. 130.
Bsy_MGC The peak flux-density in the stator yoke on open-circuit, obtained in a static calculation
by the internal magnetic equivalent-circuit solver, as indicated in Fig. 143 on p. 130.
kT Torque constant, i.e., the airgap torque Tgap divided by the peak line current ILpk if
kTSpec = ILpk; or by the RMS line current ILrms if kTSpec = ILrms. To calculate kT, PC-
BDC runs a Static design in which the setpoint current ISP is forced in the lines, with
square or sinusoidal waveshape depending on Drive, and no phase advance; the resulting
electromagnetic torque is averaged over 360E. kT can be displayed in different units; use
Data | I/O Units or Options | Default Units.
Note : Previous versions displayed separate values for the formula value kT_form and the "actual"
value kT_act (also called kPhi). The formula values can be accessed using the calculator, [F4].
PC-BDCs kT is more rigorous than the formula value because it takes the actual winding and flux
distribution into account, including any skew. The classical formulas assume that both the winding
and flux distributions are ideal, which may not be the case. Similar comments apply to kE: the
formula value kE_form is still accessible using [F4]. See Ref. [0], Ch. 8 & Ref. [2], Ch. 7.
kE EMF constant, usually defined as eLLpk/T
m
, where T
m
is the angular velocity in
mechanical rad/s. If kESpec = ErecAv, the mean rectified line-line EMF is used instead.
It is not generally the case that kT is equal to kE: the relationship depends on the
definitions and the waveforms of both EMF and current. For three-phase motors with
sinewave EMF and sinewave drive, with kESpec = eLLpk and kTSpec = ILpk the
definition leads to the relation kT = (%3/2) kE, while for motors with squarewave EMF and
squarewave current, kT = kE (in S.I. units). See Ref. [0], Ch. 8 & Ref. [2], Ch. 7.
krpmNL Approximate no-load speed in krpm, calculated as Vs/kE. The classical formula used with
DC commutator motors does not strictly apply to brushless motors because the effective
voltage at the motor terminals is not Vs but some chopped waveform which, on an
oscilloscope, would look quite untidy. A more realistic estimate of the no-load speed can
be obtained by successively running Dynamic design, increasing the speed in small
steps until the shaft torque falls to zero. See Ref. [0], Ch. 8 & Ref. [2] Ch. 7.
kSat Saturation factor calculated in Dynamic design. (See CalcSatn). kSat directly
multiplies the EMF waveform. If CalcSatn = Calculate or Iterate, kSat is calculated as
where M
OC
is the open-circuit flux/pole and M
is the difference in the armature-reaction

flux/pole calculated with and without the influence of stator current on the saturation
level in the stator iron. If there is no saturation, M
A
= 0 and kSat = 1. The algorithm
used to modulate the saturation level is conceived for motors with the magnets in the
airgap and will give unpredictable results for salient-pole machines; and even for surface-
Fig. 170 Variation of kSat with current
magnet machines it only attempts a rough order-of-magnitude estimate. For rigorous
analysis of the effect of saturation on the torque per ampere, the GoFER should be used.
Fig. 38 on p. 52 shows the general effect of load current on the airgap flux-density. Fig. 170
shows typical variation in torque and kSat with current.
ks Effective ratio of slot-width to tooth-width used in estimating slot flux. See page 136.
EffWst Effective stator tooth width used in magnetic calculations, in particular, in calculating
peak flux-density in the teeth.
EffLst Effective stator tooth length used in magnetic calculations, in particular, in calculating
the MMF drop in the teeth.
k_rpf Factor by which airgap permeance is reduced by pole-shaping.
eLLpk Peak value of line-line EMF. PC-BDC may display a warning message if eLLpk exceeds
Vs, because uncontrolled rectification may occur in the freewheel diodes. This is normal
in generator systems, but potentially hazardous if it occurs in a motor drive with no
means of limiting the accumulation of charge on the DC filter capacitor.
Bslot The peak flux-density in the stator slot on open-circuit, flowing parallel to the teeth and
attributable to the MMF along the teeth when they are heavily saturated.
ErecAv Mean value of rectified line-line open-circuit EMF.
ErecRMS RMS value of rectified line-line open-circuit EMF.
eTMax Peak EMF/turn in a search coil wound around one tooth.
IBk The current required to depress the magnet flux-density to the knee-point value Bk. IBk
may be in the lines or in the DC supply, depending on Drive. If a wye-connected motor is
reconnected in delta, IBk increases by a factor 3/2. (cf. ILR & HmLR; see [2], 4.5).
Hk The magnetizing force in the magnet at the flux-density Bk.
ILR Approximate locked-rotor current, limited only by the motor resistance and any forward
voltage-drops in the transistors, but not by any current-limiting action of the controller
or supply impedance. It is measured in the lines or in the DC supply. If a wye-connected
motor is reconnected in delta, ILR will increase by a factor of 3.
BmLR Approximate flux-density in the magnet at locked-rotor, calculated without considering
leakage or saturation in the stator teeth. Detailed analysis requires F.E. analysis.
HmLR Approximate magnetizing force in the magnet at locked-rotor. (See ILR and [2], 4.5).
IC180 Peak current for 180E commutation error, estimated using a linear magnetic circuit
model. Like ILR and IBk, IC180 is measured in the lines or in the DC supply.
BmC180 Magnet flux-density with 180E commutation error, estimated using a linear magnetic
circuit. Rigorous analysis of commutation-error conditions requires finite-elements.
HmC180 Magnetizing force in the magnet with commutation error of 180E.
Carter Ratio Lge / Gap, based on Carter's coefficient; (see Ref. [0]).
Lge Effective magnetic airgap length, Carter Gap.
Amhp Average cross-section area of magnet per half-pole, used in the lumped-parameter
magnetic equivalent circuit, [1]. See Fig. 216.
Aghp Average cross-section area of airgap per half-pole, [1].
Rghp Airgap reluctance per half-pole.
Pm0 Magnet permeance per half-pole, equal to
0
MuRec Amhp/LM.
prl Rotor leakage permeance normalized to Pm0: see Refs. [1] and [0]. prl is adjusted with
Xrl; but see page 126.
prlMOH Rotor leakage permeance normalized to Pm0, including an adjustment for magnet
overhang MOH1 or MOH2 (or both); see Fig. 136 p. 120.
f_Lkg Leakage factor; i.e., the ratio of airgap flux to magnet flux per pole on open-circuit. f_Lkg
only accounts only for "air leakage" from pole to pole, and does not include bridge leakage.
See p. 126 and Xrl.
if_Lkg 1/f_Lkg, i.e. the reciprocal of f_Lkg.
pEnd The end-component of leakage permeance, normalized to Pm0. See p. 129. It can be
adjusted via apEnd, (q.v.) For surface-magnet motors, pEnd is not calculated.
phi_y Bridge leakage flux per half-pole, i.e. the flux in one bridge or rib crossing the q-axis on
open-circuit in embedded rotor types. [mWb]
BrdgLkg Bridge leakage flux, expressed as a percentage of the magnet flux. See p. 128. [%]
Btpk_OC Peak tooth flux-density on open-circuit, calculated by scanning all the teeth. If WFeCalc
= OC, this scan is performed with the rotor at the fixed angle RotorAng. If WFeCalc =
Ld_Bwfm, the scan is performed repeatedly as the rotor rotates through 180Eelec (or
360Eelec for fractional-slot motors). (See also Bst).
Btpk_Ld Peak tooth flux-density under load, calculated by adding the armature-reaction flux to the
open-circuit field, without modifying the saturation level.
Btpk_LdS Peak tooth flux-density under load including the effect of stator MMF, calculated with an
estimate of the change in saturation level as described as for kSat.
Bypk_OC As Btpk_OC, but for the stator yoke.
Bypk_Ld As Btpk_Ld, but for the stator yoke.
Bypk_LdS As Btpk_LdS, but for the stator yoke.
B_d Amplitude of slot-modulation dips in the B
gap
distribution, either calculated or specified
as Bd. See SlotMod, p. 188.
Bd_RMS RMS value of B_d. See SEM-2.
Static Design output when Drive = Square
6 Square-wave static design:---------------------------------------------------

OpMode Motoring Vs 24 V RPM 1000 rpm
Tshaft 2.5451 Nm Pshaft 266.5181 W Eff 90.7589 %
WCu 23.2779 W WFe 3.7685 W WWF 0 W
WCan 0 W WMagnet 0.0905 W MechLoss 3.8591 W
WTotal 27.137 W TempRise 5 DegC Jrms 3.8985 A/mm^2
IWpk 15 A IWav 10 A IWrms 12.2474 A
ILpk 15 A ILav 10 A ILrms 12.2474 A
IQchpk 15 A IQchav 4.4907 A IQchrm 8.2073 A
IQcmpk 15 A IQcmav 4.4907 A IQcmrm 8.2073 A
IDchpk 15 A IDchav 0.5093 A IDchrm 2.764 A
IDcmpk 15 A IDcmav 0.5093 A IDcmrm 2.764 A
IDC_W 11.9441 A WConv 0 W DuCycle 0.7963
IDC_P 12.2356 A WFeCalc OC Pelec 293.6551 W
Tgap 2.5819 Nm Tei 2.5819 Nm Trel 6.8566E-06 Nm
Tloop 2.5818 Nm
Static design is the performance calculation with ideal line current waveforms; (see page 40). The
machine can be motoring, generating, or absorbing. No attempt is made to simulate the actual dynamic
current waveforms: that is the function of Dynamic design.
Static design cannot model regeneration if Drive = Square, but if Drive is Sine or AC Volt Static design
calculates the phasor diagram without restriction as to whether the machine is motoring or generating.
Earlier versions of PC-BDC always displayed a Static design section before the Dynamic design section,
but this has been discontinued. Static design results display after [Ctrl+2]; Dynamic design results
after [Ctrl+D].
Power loss components are denoted by the initial letter W (meaning "waste"). For example, WCu means
copper loss (wasted power).
OpMode Operating mode.
Motoring is when the shaft torque is positive and sufficient to overcome the
windage and friction torque.
Generating means that mechanical power is being fed to the machine via the
shaft, and electrical power is being returned to the supply. The
torque, mechanical power, and DC supply current are displayed with
negative values unless Drive = AC Volt and Sw_Ctl = Generator.
Absorbing means that mechanical power is being fed to the machine via the
shaft, but the generated airgap power is not sufficient to overcome
the electrical and magnetic losses. Therefore, electrical power is also
being fed to (and through) the converter from the DC supply. In this
condition the efficiency is zero.
Tshaft Shaft torque. See page 237.
Pshaft Shaft power.
Pelec Electrical power supplied to the machine (or delivered by the machine, if it is a generator).
Eff Machine efficiency (not including losses in the drive.
WCu Copper losses.
WFe Iron losses, calculated by the method selected with WFeCalc.
WWF Windage + friction losses.
WCan The sum of eddy-current losses in the stator can and the rotor can.
WSCan Eddy-current losses in the stator can, if fitted. See WSCanFDS.
WRCan Eddy-current losses in the rotor can, if fitted.
WMagnet Eddy-current losses in the magnet. See WMagCalc on page 178.
MechLoss The total mechanical loss. If LossFE ' Elec, this includes the bearing loss Wmb (p. 176)
and the windage and friction loss Wwf (p. 176). If LossFE = Mech, it also includes WFe,
WMagnet, Wshaft and WCan.
WShaft Eddy-current losses in the shaft. See page 263.
WTotal Total motor losses, i.e. WCu + WFe + WWF + WCan + WMagnet + WShaft; also known
as "watts loss".
TempRise The temperature rise of the conductors above ambient temperature, i.e., T_c ! T_a.
Jrms Current-density in the copper in the phase windings.
Currents
Transistor and diode currents are identified by the following key. For example, IQchpk is the peak
current in a chopping transistor.
IW Phase current
IL Line current
IQ Transistor current
ID Diode current
IDC DC supply current
ch chopping transistor or
diode
cm commutating transistor or
diode
pk peak
av average (mean)
rms or rm RMS
IDC_W Mean DC supply current calculated from the current waveforms with an expression of the
form IQcmav ! IDcmav, taking into account the number of phases and circuit
connection.
IDC_P Mean DC supply current calculated from the power balance, and includes a component
for losses in the motor and the drive that are not specifically modelled by elements in the
equivalent circuit (these include iron loss and converter loss). For IDC_P = IDC_W it is
not sufficient to force these losses to zero: the current and EMF waveforms must also be
close to their ideal forms, with kT = kE.
WConv Losses in the drive (converter). In Static design, WConv includes conduction loss (see
Vq, Rq, Vd, Rd and Rs), but excludes switching loss because, in effect, it assumes ideal,
lossless chopping action at infinite chopping frequency. See also p. 250.
DuCycle Estimated duty-cycle required to sustain the current at the set-point value ISP. During
Static design, PC-BDC forces ideal line current waveforms, without regard for the fact
that the supply has a finite voltage. In order to check whether these current waveforms
are likely to be attainable, PC-BDC estimates the required duty-cycle of chopping in the
controller transistors. If the duty-cycle is greater than 1, a warning message may be
displayed.
24
If the embedded FE solver is used with FEEMFwfm ' false, Tei will not be updated with the FE result. However, the harmonic
content of the EMF and torque waveforms will be retained as explained on p. 146.
T
rel
'
mp
2
( L
d
! L
q
) i
d
i
q
,
T
rel
'
1
2
i
1
2
dL
1
d2
i
2
2
dL
2
d2
i
3
2
dL
3
d2
i
1
i
2
dM
12
d2
i
2
i
3
dM
23
d2
i
3
i
1
dM
31
d2
Torques
Tshaft The shaft torque. This is computed from
Tshaft ' Tgap MechLoss/T
m
where T
m
is the speed in mechanical rad/sec, and MechLoss is the mechanical loss.
Tgap The mean electromagnetic torque. If TorqCalc = ei_wfms, this is equal to Tei + Trel. If
TorqCalc = Pos_Seq, it is equal to Tgap_PS.
If the embedded FE solver is used with Drive = Sine, it is recommended to run with
TorqCalc = Pos_Seq so that Tei and therefore Tgap will be automatically updated by the
finite-element data.
24

Tei The mean PM alignment torque. If TorqCalc = ei_wfms, this is calculated from the e i
waveform products in all the phases, divided by the angular velocity. If TorqCalc '
Pos_Seq, it is equal to TEI_PS. Note that Tei does not include the reluctance torque.
Trel The mean reluctance torque. If TorqCalc = ei_wfms and dq0 = false, this is calculated
from the waveforms of i
d
and i
q
, using the equation
for 3-phase motors, or the equivalent equation for 2-phase motors. L
1
is the self-inductance
of phase 1, M
12
the mutual inductance between phases 1 and 2, and so on. 2 is the rotor
position.
If TorqCalc = ei_wfms and dq0 = true, Trel is obtained from the equation
where m is the number of phases and p is the number of pole-pairs. The instantaneous
currents i
d
, i
q
are calculated using Parks transformation at each integration-step. This
equation is valid for any current waveform but relies on the synchronous inductances L
d
and L
q
, which means that the motor is assumed to be sinewound, (p. 5).
If TorqCalc ' Pos_Seq, Trel is equal to Trel_PS (q.v.). All methods for calculating Trel
will produce the same result provided that the inductances vary sinusoidally with rotor
position and are consistent with L
d
and L
q
, as explained in SEM-2. Trel is not calculated
unless RTorq = On.
Tloop The mean electromagnetic torque calculated from the loop area W of the locus of the point
(i, R), where i is the instantaneous current and R is the instantaneous flux-linkage in
phase 1; (pp. 54 and 67). Tloop can be compared with the torque calculated from the area
of the (i,R) loop computed by finite-elements in the i-psi GoFER (page 67).
In general Tloop should equal Tgap, provided that the inductances are consistent as
described in SEM-2 and Ref. [25]. See also p. 14.
T
EI_PS
'
mp
T
E
q1
I
q1
T
rel_PS
' mp I
d1
I
q1
( L
d
L
q
) '
mp
T
I
d1
I
q1
( X
d
X
q
)
Tgap_PS The mean electromagnetic torque computed from positive-sequence components, equal
to TEI_PS Trel_PS.
TEI_PS The mean torque computed from Eq1 and Iq1 using the equation
where E
q1
' Eq1 and I
q1
' Iq1, m is the number of phases, p is the number of pole-pairs,
and T ' 2B Freq.
Trel_PS The mean reluctance torque obtained from positive-sequence components using the
equation
where I
d1
' Id1, I
q1
' Iq1 are RMS currents, while L
d
' Ld, L
q
' Lq, X
d
' Xd and X
q
' Xq.
Static design output when Drive = Sine
6 Sine-wave static design [phasor diagram]:------------------------------------

OpMode Motoring Vs 24 V RPM 1000 rpm
WCu 17.4584 W WFe 1.9265 W WWF 0 W
WCan 0 W WMagnet 0 W MechLoss 1.9265 W
WTotal 19.385 W TempRise 5 DegC Jrms 3.3762 A/mm^2
IWpk 15 A IWav 9.5492 A IWrms 10.6066 A
ILpk 15 A ILav 9.5492 A ILrms 10.6066 A
IDC_P 7.7704 A WFeCalc OC Pelec 186.4899 W
Eq1 5.3083 V Vph1 6.1504 V VLL1 10.6528 V
Iq1 10.6066 A Id1 0 A gamma 0 deg
Vq1 5.857 V Vd1 -1.8771 V delta 17.7698 deg
Bg1Load 0.6999 T phi 17.7698 eDeg PF 0.9523
Bqad 0.6412 T Phida1 0 mWb Phiqa1 0.2296 mWb
BqAvg 0 T hBq 0 mm^2
BmLoad 0.9648 T Bma 0 T Fda1 0 At/gap
Tgap_PS 1.613 Nm TEI_PS 1.613 Nm Trel_PS 0 Nm
Tgap 1.6141 Nm Tei 1.613 Nm Trel 0.0012 Nm
Tloop 1.6141 Nm
Available voltage...
Vs120 16.2057 Vrms Vs1 18.7127 Vrms Vs1Lin 14.6969 Vrms
When Drive = Sine, Static design is the calculation of the phasor diagram with input parameters ISP and gamma,
corresponding to operation with a current-regulated sinewave inverter. When Drive = AC Volt, Static design is
the calculation of the phasor diagram with input parameters Vs and delta, corresponding to operation from a
sinewave AC voltage source. In both cases the design sheet contains parameters from the phasor diagram.
Parameters already described are not repeated: see above.
Eq1 The RMS fundamental EMF per phase due to the magnet on open-circuit. This EMF lies
on the phasor q-axis. [V/phase]
Vph1 The RMS fundamental terminal voltage per phase. [V/phase]
VLL1 The RMS fundamental line-line voltage at the motor terminals. [V]
Iph1 The RMS fundamental component of phase current. [A]
Is The RMS line current. [A]
Iq1 The RMS q-axis fundamental component of phase current.
Id1 The RMS d-axis fundamental component of phase current. A negative value indicates a
demagnetizing MMF, i.e., one that opposes the MMF of the magnet, and corresponds to
gamma > 0.
gamma The angle between the phase current and the q-axis. When gamma > 0 Id1 > 0, but when
gamma < 0, Id1 < 0 (demagnetizing or "flux-weakening"). [deg.] See also p. 153
Vq1 The RMS q-axis fundamental component of the phase voltage Vph1. [V/phase]
Vd1 The RMS d-axis fundamental component of Vph1. [V/phase]
delta The phase angle between Vph1 and the q-axis. delta is positive when Vph1 leads Eq1.
See also p. 153 [deg.]
F
da1
'
m
2
2 2
B
k
w1
T
ph
p
I
d1
Bg1Load Peak value of fundamental space-harmonic component of airgap flux-density under load,
calculated by scaling the open-circuit value Bg1OC by the ratio *V1m*/*Eq1*, where V1m
= Vd1 + jVq1 is the "airgap" component of the phase voltage. V1m is not displayed but it
can be calculated from Vq1 = Eq1 + (Xd ! Xsigma) Id1 and Vd1 = !(Xq ! Xsigma)
Iq1. No new magnetic circuit analysis is used in calculating Bg1Load.
phi The power-factor angle between Vph1 and the phase current; phi is positive when Vph1
leads the phase current and the power factor is lagging. [deg.].
PF The fundamental power factor (displacement factor), i.e. Cos(phi).
Bqad Cross-magnetizing flux-density in the rotor caused by armature reaction current in the
q-axis (Iq1). PC-BDC calculates this flux-density at the narrowest section of the rotor yoke
through which q-axis armature reaction flux passes. The width of this section is hq and
it is shown in the reference diagrams for the rotor. There is no check for saturation of the
rotor yoke or pole-pieces due to q-axis armature reaction flux. If Bqad is high enough to
indicate saturation, it is advisable to do finite-element analysis.
BqAvg Average cross-magnetizing flux-density caused by Iq1 and evaluated with respect to a
section of width hBq.
Phida1 Fundamental d-axis armature-reaction flux/pole, obtained by scaling PhiM1 by the ratio
(Xd Xsigma) Id1/Eq1.
Phiqa1 Fundamental q-axis armature-reaction flux/pole, obtained by scaling PhiM1 by the ratio
(Xq Xsigma) Iq1/Eq1.
BmLoad The resultant flux-density in the magnet calculated as BmOC Bma.
Bma The armature-reaction flux-density in the magnet caused by Fda1. For surface-magnet
rotors this is calculated from Fda1 /[
0
(LM/
rec
Gap)]; for InsCP rotors twice this value;
and for interior-magnet types PC-BDC uses equations [6.68], [6.84] and [6.85] of Ref. [2]. A
negative value indicates demagnetizing armature reaction, i.e. opposing the open-circuit
flux of the magnet. Note that this calculation is rough-order-of-magnitude and does not
account for variations across the cross-section of the magnet.
Fda1 Peak value of fundamental d-axis armature reaction MMF, given by
where m = No. of phases and p = No. of pole-pairs. This equation is well known from the
theory of classical synchronous machines.
Vd0 If Drive = AC Volt and Sw_Ctl = Generator, PC-BDC displays the DC voltage Vd0 that
would be obtained by rectifying the output. If Connex = Wye, (assuming continuous
conduction and negligible reactance volt-drop), Vd0 = 3/ %2 %3 Eq1. If Connex =
Delta, Vd0 = 3/ %2 Eq1. Otherwise, for single- and two-phase machines the rectifier is
assumed to be capacitively loaded and Vd0 = %2 Eq1. The DC voltage Vd0 can be used
only as a rough-order-of-magnitude estimate, because it makes no allowance for reactive
voltage drop within the machine or for commutation effects.
6
B
Vs ' 0@780Vs V
RMS
1
2
4
B
Vs ' 0@900Vs V
RMS
3
2 2
Vs ' 0@612Vs V
RMS
1
2
Vs ' 0@707Vs V
RMS
3
2B
Vs ' 0@675Vs V
RMS
1
2
Vs ' 0@707 Vs V
RMS
3 6
B
2
Vs ' 0@7446Vs V
RMS
Available voltage
Vs1 Maximum fundamental line-line voltage available with true six-step operation (3
transistors conducting; 180E conduction in each):
For 1-phase and 2-phase drives with a complete H-bridge for each phase, the
corresponding value is the one for full square-wave operation:
[Ref. 3: pp. 133 and 116 in 1st Edn.; p. 229 in 2nd. Edn.].
Vs1Lin The maximum fundamental line-line voltage that can be obtained in the linear range of
sine-triangle PWM, with a modulation index of unity:
For 1-phase and 2-phase drives with a complete H-bridge for each phase, the
corresponding value is
[Ref. 3: pp. 133 and 115 in 1st Edn.; p. 228 in 2nd. Edn.].
Vs120 Another value that may also be of interest is the maximum fundamental voltage available
with "120E six-stepping", that is, with 120E conduction in each transistor, [Ref. 4, p. 178]:
This value is not displayed for 1-phase or 2-phase drives.
Vct1 The maximum fundamental line-line voltage that can be obtained with a circular voltage
space-vector locus (i.e. a voltage space-vector of constant magnitude):
This is the "circle tracking" algorithm described in Tutorial B09.
Vht1 The maximum fundamental line-line voltage that can be obtained with a hexagonal
voltage space-vector locus. This is very close to the voltage available with third-harmonic
injection:
This is the "hexagon tracking" algorithm described in Tutorial B09.
Static design output when Drive = AC Volt (3-phase and 2-phase)
6 Constant AC Volts static performance [phasor diagram]:-----------------------

OpMode Motoring Vs 220.0000 V RPM 1500.0000 rpm
Is 2.1524 A Pelec 725.4332 W PF 0.8841
Pgap 592.1842 W phIs 27.8553 deg
WCu 133.2491 W WFe 6.0768 W WWF 0.0000 W
WCan 0.0000 W WMagnet 0.0000 W MechLoss 6.0768 W
WTotal 139.3259 W TempRise 5.0000 DegC Jrms 10.9620 A/mm^2


Phasor diagram..
Eq1 87.5358 V Vph1 127.0171 V VLL1 220.0000 V
Iph1 2.1524 A phi 27.8553 eDeg
Iq1 2.1042 A Id1 -0.4528 A gammaACV 12.1447 deg
Vq1 97.3007 V Vd1 -81.6450 V delta 40.0000 deg

Torques..
Tgap_PS 3.7681 Nm TEI_PS 3.5178 Nm Trel_PS 0.2502 Nm
Tgap 3.7700 Nm Tei 3.5197 Nm Trel 0.2502 Nm
Tloop 3.5197 Nm TmaxV 10.3081 Nm dTmaxV 112.5454 deg

Flux-densities..
Bg1Load 0.7494 T
Bqad 1.2895 T Phida1 -0.1084 mWb Phiqa1 0.8511 mWb
BmLoad 0.9993 T Bma -0.0279 T Fda1 -114.5964 At/gap

Parameters that have been described earlier are not repeated here, unless there are differences in
meaning or interpretation.
Vs The RMS AC line voltage, Fig. 281.
RPM The synchronous speed in rev/min. This determines the supply frequency fs = RPM/ 60
Poles/2.
Is Supply current; (line current). [A]
phIs Phase angle of supply current Is. [deg]
Pelec Electrical power input, Vs Is SPF.
Pgap Airgap power.
SPF Power factor at AC line terminals.
gammaACV When Drive = AC Volt, the design sheet for Static design is much the same as when
Drive ' Sine, but the operating point is defined by the voltage Vs (RMS line-line) and the
load angle delta, instead of ISP and gamma. Therefore ISP does not appear in the design
sheet. The phase angle ( between the current and the EMF is still of interest, and as it is
now an output variable it is renamed gammaACV.
TmaxV Pull-put torque calculated with constant supply voltage, in the motoring condition.
dTmaxV Value of delta at which pull-out torque TmaxV occurs.
Multiphase / multiplex windings
Multiplex..
d q RMS Phase PF T[Nm]
Ix1 -3.215 2.004 3.789 148.061 -0.951 4.070
Ix2 -3.215 2.004 3.789 148.061 -0.951 4.070
Ix3 -3.215 2.004 3.789 148.061 -0.951 4.070
Vx1 -76.821 91.551 119.512 130.000
Vx2 -76.821 91.551 119.512 130.000
Vx3 -76.821 91.551 119.512 130.000
Id1eq -8.6775 A Iq1eq 5.8365 A
Iph1_eq 10.4577 A gamma_eq 56.0754 E
When Plex > 1, the design sheet displays the individual phase currents Ix1, Ix2, .. and voltages Vx1,
Vx2,.. of the separate winding sets, together with their phase angles, power-factors, and electromagnetic
torque contributions. The phase angles are relative to the d-axis; in other words, they are the normal
phase angles in the phasor diagram.
Id1eq The d-axis component of a fictitious current in phase 1 that is equivalent to all the Plex
d-axis currents acting together. [A]
Iq1eq The q-axis component of a fictitious current in phase 1 that is equivalent to all the Plex
q-axis currents acting together. [A]
Iph1_eq The fictitious current in phase 1 that is equivalent to all the Plex phase currents acting
together. [A]
gamma_eq The phase angle of Iph1_eq relative to the q-axis. [E]
Tgap1_PS The positive-sequence electromagnetic torque of winding set 1.
Static design output when Drive = AC Volt and Connex = SplitPh (SymmCpts = No)
6 Constant AC Volts static performance [phasor diagram]:-----------------------

Is 1.0250 A Pelec 323.3811 W PF 0.7159
Pgap 286.7503 W phIs 44.2808 deg
WCu 36.6309 W WFe 6.2422 W WWF 0.0000 W


Phasor diagram..
Eq1 183.9021 V Vph1 220.0000 V VLL1 220.0000 V
Iph1 1.0250 A phi 44.2808 eDeg
Iq1 0.7773 A Id1 0.6681 A gammaACV -40.6808 deg
Vq1 219.5659 V Vd1 -13.8139 V delta 3.6000 deg

Symmetrical components derived from ordinary phasor diagram...
E1 183.9021 V phCE1 90.0000 deg
E2 0.0000 V phCE2 0.0000 deg
V1 201.8522 Vrms phCV1 91.9609 deg delta_PS 1.9609 deg
V2 19.1228 Vrms phCV2 -68.8268 deg
I1 1.0250 Arms phCI1 49.3192 deg
I2 1.0250 Arms phCI2 -130.6808 deg

Torques..
Tgap_PS 1.8223 Nm TEI_PS 1.8200 Nm Trel_PS 0.0022 Nm
Tgap 1.8255 Nm Tei 1.8249 Nm Trel 5.6073E-04 Nm
Tloop 1.8192 Nm TmaxV 15.5656 Nm dTmaxV 89.2904 deg

Flux-densities..
Bg1Load 1.0062 T
Bqad 0.0000 T Phida1 0.0615 mWb Phiqa1 0.0697 mWb
BmLoad 0.9855 T Bma 0.0428 T Fda1 204.1614 At/gap

Split-phase capacitor motor at balance...

ATR_Bal 0.9752 XC_Bal 292.3762 ohm C_Bal 10.8870 uF
IauxBal 1.0510 A VauxBal 214.5452 V VCBal 307.2941 V
IsBal 1.4681 A phIsBal -1.4384 deg SPFBal 0.9997
For 1-phase motors with Drive = AC Volt, Ted displays Connex = "SplitPh" instead of "1-Phase".
Symmetrical components derived from ordinary phasor diagram...
If SymmCpts = No, the phasor diagram is calculated for the actual voltages and currents of a single-phase
circuit as explained in SEM-2. If there is an auxiliary winding, it is ignored. The positive and negative-
sequence components are subsequently calculated from this solution. This simple method is valid for
nonsalient-pole motors without a rotor cage and without an auxiliary winding.
The symmetrical components are defined and described on p. 248.
delta_PS The positive-sequence load-angle. If SymmCpts is switched to Natural or Original, delta
should be set equal to delta_PS in order to obtain the same result.
Capacitor required for balanced operation
If SymmCpts = No, PC-BDC calculates the capacitance C_Bal that would be required to achieve balanced
operation if the motor were connected as a split-phase motor with a capacitor in series with the
"auxiliary" winding, as shown in the Run connection in Fig. 281. Although we would normally expect
these conditions only in line-start motors, PC-BDC will do this calculation for ordinary brushless motors
without starting cages. The theory of the balanced condition is given in SEM-3 (the chapter on induction
motors).
The balanced condition is calculated such that the power-factor in the main winding is equal to the
power-factor from the simple single-phase calculation.
Together with C_Bal, PC-BDC calculates the following parameters for balanced operation as a split-phase
capacitor motor. Needless to say, they assume that the motor is sinewound. It is also assumed that the
auxiliary and main windings have the same quantity of copper, even though they may have different
numbers of turns. Thus the EMF's in the main and auxiliary windings are related by the turns ratio, and
the resistances and inductances by the square of the turns ratio. The turns ratio (ATR_Bal) is calculated
for balanced operation. The axes of the main and auxiliary phase windings are assumed to be electrically
orthogonal.
The graphs of the instantaneous current and EMF waveforms are scaled by the turns ratio between the
auxiliary and main windings. The phase sequence is reversed to reflect the fact that the EMF and current
in the auxiliary phase (2, yellow) lead the corresponding EMF and current in the main phase (1, red).
(Normally in a balanced 2-phase motor with Connex = 2-Phase, phase 1 leads phase 2).
ATR_Bal Turns ratio (aux/main) required to achieve perfect balance.
XC_Bal Reactance of auxiliary capacitor required to achieve perfect balance. [ohm].
C_Bal Capacitance of auxiliary capacitor. [F]
IauxBal Current in auxiliary winding and capacitor [A].
VCBal Voltage across auxiliary capacitor.
VA_CBal Volt-amperes of auxiliary capacitor. [VA]
IsBal RMS supply current at the balanced condition. [A]
phIsBal Supply power factor angle at the balanced condition. [E]
SPFBal Supply power factor at the balanced condition.
Static design output; Drive = AC Volt; Connex = SplitPh (SymmCpts = Natural or Original)
6 Synchronous steady-state performance [Symmetrical components]:---------------

Is 0.9707 A Pelec 213.5245 W PF 0.9999
Pgap 190.4224 W WCuR 2.6596 W phIs 0.7844 deg
WCu 23.1022 W WFe 3.8089 W WWF 0.0000 W
WCuMain 7.1317 W WCuAux 15.9705 W
WCu1 21.1246 W WCu2 1.9776 W

Currents and voltages...
Is 0.9707 A phIs 0.7844 deg phIam 63.7723 deg
Imain 0.5524 Arms phImain 83.3685 deg Jrms 2.8709 A/mm^2
Iaux 0.5905 Arms phIaux 147.1408 deg JrmsAux 4.2962 A/mm^2
Vmain 220.0000 V phVmain 115.6570 deg delta_m 25.6570 deg
Vaux 321.4494 Vrms phVaux -158.5667 deg delta_a 21.4333 deg
VZc 375.9157 Vrms phVZc 57.1408 deg
Eq1 154.1050 V phEq1 90.0000 deg zeta 90.0000 eDeg
Eq1Aux 215.7470 V phEq1Aux 180.0000 deg phEq1ma 90.0000 deg

Positive-sequence phasor diagram...
E1 215.7470 V phE1 90.0000 deg ISPBal 0.7734 A
Iq1 0.4440 A Id1 0.1830 A gammaACV -22.3978 deg
Vq1 288.4255 V Vd1 -125.4110 V delta 23.5000 deg

Symmetrical components (natural)...
V1 314.5111 Vrms phCV1 113.5000 deg
V2 13.4042 Vrms phCV2 -126.3657 deg phV21 -239.8657 deg
I1 0.4802 Arms phCI1 67.6022 deg
I2 0.1469 Arms phCI2 -159.2604 deg phI21 -226.8626 deg
Z1 654.9463 ohm phZ1 45.8978 deg XcR 636.6198 ohm
Z2 91.2291 ohm phZ2 32.8947 deg

Torques etc....
Tpma 0.6098 Nm Trel_PS -7.904E-03 Nm Tns -4.233E-03 Nm
Tgap 0.5977 Nm Twf 0.0000 Nm TWFe 0.0121 Nm
Tmbsc 0.0000 Nm Trel -7.904E-03 Nm Tload 0.0000 Nm

If SymmCpts = Natural or Original, the steady-state Static design calculation uses symmetrical
components and displays the positive- and negative-sequence components. This calculation is valid for
line-start motors. The load is defined by the load-angle delta, which is interpreted as the load-angle for
the positive-sequence components. See also delta_m and delta_a.
WCu Stator copper loss at the operating temperature T_c, including the main and auxiliary
windings.
WCuMain Copper loss in the main winding.
WCuAux Copper loss in the auxiliary winding.
WCuR Rotor copper loss at the operating temperature T_r, due to induced negative-sequence
current in the rotor cage. If there is no cage, WCuR will be zero.
WCu1 Total positive-sequence copper loss in the stator.
WCu2 Total negative-sequence copper loss in the stator.
Currents and voltages...
If SymmCpts = Original, the reference phasor for phase angles is Vs, except where stated. If SymmCpts
= Natural, the reference phasor is the d-axis, and the EMF Eq1 lies on the q-axis.
Is The supply current. [A RMS]
Imain RMS current in main winding.
Iaux RMS current in auxiliary winding.
phIs Phase of Is relative to Vs; i.e., the supply power-factor angle.
phImain Phase of Imain.
phIaux Phase of Iaux.
phIam Phase of Iaux relative to Imain, i.e. phIaux ! phImain.
Jrms RMS current density in main winding.
JrmsAux RMS current in auxiliary winding.
Vmain Terminal voltage of main winding, i.e. Vs
Vaux Terminal voltage of auxiliary winding, i.e. Vs VZc.
VZc Voltage across auxiliary impedance Iaux(R_run ! j/(2Bfs C_run).
phVmain Phase of Vmain. If SymmCpts = Original, this will be zero, because Vmain is then the
reference phasor.
phVaux Phase of Vaux.
phVZc Phase of VZc.
delta_m Load-angle in the main winding, i.e. phVmain phEq1. In Analysis | Dynamic
simulation, to obtain transient current waveforms exactly corresponding to the phasor
diagram, LoadStep should be set equal to delta_m, with RPMstart ' RPM and
ConstRPM ' true.
delta_a Load-angle in the auxiliary winding, i.e. phVaux phEq1Aux.
Eq1 RMS EMF in main winding.
phEq1 Phase of Eq1.
zeta Displacement angle between the axes of the main and auxiliary phases; positive if the
auxiliary leads the main.
Eq1Aux RMS EMF in the auxiliary winding.
phEq1Aux Phase of Eq1Aux.
phEq1ma Phase of Eq1Aux relative to Eq1, i.e., phEq1Aux ! phEq1.
25
Some names have "C",
Positive-sequence phasor diagram...
E1 Positive-sequence EMF. One might expect this to be equal to Eq1, but the relationship
between E1 and Eq1 depends on the particular symmetrical components transformation
used in the calculation. When SymmCpts = Original, E1 is equal to /2Eq1/$, where $
is the turns-ratio (main/aux). When SymmCpts ' Natural, E1 is equal to Eq1/$. The
turns-ratio $ appears because the symmetrical components are referred to the turns of the
auxiliary winding, not the main. These relationships have to be borne in mind when
interpreting the phasor diagram; see SEM-2.
phE1 Phase of E1. If SymmCpts = Natural, E1 will be on the q-axis and phE1 ' 90E. If
SymmCpts ' Original, phE1 ' phCV1 delta.
E2 Negative-sequence EMF, generally zero.
phE2 Phase of E2.
Note that although Iq1, Id1, gamma, Vq1, Vd1, and delta are described on p. 239, here they refer to the
positive-sequence components rendered in dq-axes.
ISPbal Recommended set-point current (ISP) used to drive an equivalent balanced 2-phase motor
at a load-point corresponding to the positive-sequence component of the unbalanced
single-phase capacitor motor.
gammaACV Phase angle between I1 and E1. This is an output parameter. gammaACV can be used
together with ISPbal in calculating an equivalent balanced 2-phase motor driven by an
ideal 2-phase voltage source or current-controlled inverter.
In Ted, Template | Make balanced 2ph sets ISP ' ISPBal, and gamma ' gammaACV, so that the finite-
element i-psi GoFER can be used to assess the saturation level.
Symmetrical components...
If SymmCpts = Original, the reference phasor for phase angles is Vs, except where stated. If SymmCpts
= Natural, the reference phasor is the d-axis, and the EMF Eq1 lies on the q-axis. Because of the
symmetrical-component transformation, the values of voltages and currents may be scaled relative to the
actual values: for example E1 = /2Eq1/$, where $ (beta) is the effective turns ratio between the main and
auxiliary windings. See [2, 20].
V1 RMS positive-sequence voltage.
phCV1 Phase of V1.
25
V2 RMS negative-sequence voltage.
phCV2 Phase of V2.
phV21 Phase of V2 relative to V1, i.e. phCV2 phCV1.
I1 RMS positive-sequence current.
phCI1 Phase of I1.
I2 RMS negative-sequence current.
phCI2 Phase of I2.
phI21 Phase of I2 relative to I1, i.e., phCI2 phCI1.
Z1 Positive-sequence impedance V1/I1.
phZ1 Phase angle of Z1.
Z2 Negative-sequence impedance, V2/I2.
phZ2 Phase angle of Z2.
XcS Reactance of the start capacitor. [ohm]
XcR Reactance of the run capacitor. [ohm]
Torques...
Tpma Permanent-magnet alignment torque. (Positive-sequence).
Trel_PS Positive-sequence reluctance torque. See page 237ff.
Tns Negative-sequence torque.
Note that "alignment" and "reluctance" torques are synchronous torques, i.e., they have a nonzero
average value only at synchronous speed. The negative-sequence torque is an asynchronous torque and
has a value even at zero speed. It would be zero only if the rotor were rotating backwards at exactly
synchronous speed in the reverse direction. The negative-sequence torque is calculated only for line-start
motors which have a rotor cage.
Tgap Airgap torque, i.e. electromagnetic torque. See page 237ff.
Twf Windage and friction torque corresponding to WWF.
TWFe Iron loss torque corresponding to WFe, when LossFe = Mech.
Tmbsc0 Short-circuit magnet braking torque at synchronous speed. This is the average drag
torque that would be generated by rotating the rotor at synchronous speed with the
windings short-circuited. It is a function of speed, and is a component of the asynchronous
torque during run-up. It persists with a constant value at synchronous speed, and since
it is a braking torque, it depletes the running torque. In PC-BDC the synchronous
operation is calculated from dq equations which include this torque implicitly, so Tmbsc0
is not calculated as a separate component of the running torque. It is computed during the
asynchronous Analysis| Torque/Speed calculation, and is available using the Calculator
[F4]. Similarly PC-BDC computes the maximum magnet braking torque TmbscMax and
the slip s_mbMax at which it occurs. See p. 44.
Tload Load torque computed from TL0, TL1 and NLT.
Dynamic design output
7 Dynamic design (time-stepping simulation):-----------------------------------

WCu 6.8911 W WFe 3.5637 W WWF 0.0000 W
WCan 0.0000 W WMagnet 0.0860 W WShaft 0.0000 W
IQchpk 15.9524 A IQchav 3.9943 A IQchrm 6.8634 A
IQcmpk 15.9524 A IQcmav 3.9943 A IQcmrm 6.8634 A
IDchpk 15.9227 A IDchav 0.7218 A IDchrm 2.7709 A
IDcmpk 15.9227 A IDcmav 0.7218 A IDcmrm 2.7709 A
IDC_W 9.8175 A WConv 2.5984 W EffDCSh 94.3980 %
IDC_P 9.7728 A WSwitch 0.0000 W Pelec 231.9483 W
Tgap 2.1491 Nm Tei 2.1491 Nm Trel -2.497E-06 Nm
WRac 0.0000 W W_Rs 0.0000 W Werr 0.0000 W
Almost all the parameters displayed in the Dynamic design section have already been described under their Static
design equivalents in the previous section.
EffDCSh Efficiency measured from the DC source to the shaft.
WConv Losses in the drive (converter), including conduction losses in all the transistors and
diodes, and switching losses in the transistors. Switching losses in the diodes are not
computed.
WSwitch Switching losses in the drive, including all transistors but not including the diodes. At
each switching of each transistor, the energy dissipation is calculated by the formula for
inductive switching,
W ' Vs i
chop
t
q
/2 [J]
where i
chop
is the current that is being switched on or off by the transistor. For switching
on, t
q
is the turn-on time t
q[on]
, and for switching off, t
q
is the turn-off time t
q[off]
. PC-
BDC does not distinguish between t
q[on]
and t
q[off]
, but uses t_q as their average. The
energy loss for each chopping cycle (on and off) is 2W, so if N is the number of chops in
each transistor per cycle of the fundamental frequency Freq, the average power
dissipation in that transistor due to switching is 2WN Freq. The total switching loss
WSwitch is the sum of these losses in all the transistors.
WRac Loss in one "additional connector" resistance Rac. [W]
W_Rd (Only when Connex = nPhUni or 3-Ph Uni). Loss in one suppression resistor Rd. [W]
WZener (Only when Connex = nPhUni). Loss in one Zener diode. [W]
W_Rs Average power dissipation in DC link resistance R_s.
V_Rs Mean voltage across the DC link resistance R_s.
Werr Loss checksum, i.e., Pelec Pshaft Wtotal. This should be zero or negligibly small.
It checks for any errors in the "accounting" of the losses; a zero value should not be
interpreted to mean that the losses are 100% accurate. []
Parameters derived from Dynamic design waveforms
Depending on the value of CalcVwfm, the following parameters may be displayed to represent the phasor
values of the fundamental harmonic components of voltage, flux-linkage, and current waveforms
obtained after a Dynamic design calculation. [Note that if CalcVwfm = Psi, the symbol V1 represents
not voltage but flux-linkage].
V1rms RMS value of the fundamental phase voltage (see CalcVwfm).
I1rms RMS value of the fundamental phase current.
kVA kVA at the machine terminals, V1rms I1rms No. of phases.
Pelec1 Fundamental power at the machine terminals, calculated as
V1rms I1rms No. of phases PF.
PF The fundamental power factor, cos(phi1).
TPF Total power factor, i.e. the ratio of the total electrical power at the machine terminals to
the apparent power, i.e., Pelec/(V1rms I1rms No. of phases). TPF is not valid unless
LossFe = Mech.
phV1 Phase angle of the fundamental voltage relative to the d-axis.
phI1 Phase angle of the fundamental current relative to the d-axis.
phi_1 Phase difference phV1 phI1.
phEq1 Phase angle of the open-circuit EMF phasor.
V1d d-axis component of the fundamental phase voltage.
V1q q-axis component of the fundamental phase voltage.
I1d d-axis component of the fundamental phase current.
I1q q-axis component of the fundamental phase current.
Psi1rms RMS value of fundamental phase flux-linkage. This is related to V1rms by V1rms =
Psi1rms/1@0E3 wm PolePairs. [mV-s]
phPsi1 Phase angle of fundamental phase flux-linkage Psi1rms.
When Drive = Rectifier, several parameters for the DC circuit are displayed; see Figs. 271 and 272. Most
of these parameters are also displayed when Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISB_HB or SixStep; see Figs. 268-
270.
DC circuit..
VTpk The peak value of the rectifier output voltage on open-circuit.
VtAv The mean value of the rectifier output voltage on open-circuit.
VtRMS The RMS value of the rectifier output voltage on open-circuit.
IrecPk Peak current at rectifier terminals.
IrecAv Mean current at rectifier terminals.
IrecRMS RMS current at rectifier terminals.
ILdcRIP Peak-peak ripple current in DC inductance Ldc.
ILdcAv Mean current in DC inductance Ldc.
ILdcRMS RMS current in DC inductance Ldc.
ICdcAv Mean current in DC capacitance Cdc. This should normally be zero when the solution to
the circuit equations has converged, and IrecAv should be equal to ILdcAv. If these
conditions are not met, the circuit has not converged or reached a steady state. Try
increasing the value of TOL to tighten the convergence tolerance; in some cases quite
high values are necessary.
ICdcRMS RMS current in DC capacitance Cdc.
VCdcRIP Peak-peak ripple voltage across DC capacitance Cdc.
VCdcAv Mean voltage across DC capacitance Cdc.
VCdcRMS RMS voltage across DC capacitance Cdc.
V_dcRIP Peak-peak ripple voltage across DC load resistance Rdc.
V_Rdc Mean voltage across DC load resistance Rdc, equal to ILdcAv Rdc.
W_Rs Average power dissipation in DC link resistance R_s.
V_Rs Mean voltage across the DC link resistance R_s.
P_dc Average power in the series combination of Vs and Rdc. When Drive = Rectifier, the
efficiency measured from the shaft to the DC load is determined as EffDCsh from P_dc
and Pshaft.
P_Rdc Average power in DC load resistance Rdc.
P_Vs Average power in the source Vs.
8 Steady-State Thermal model
The format of this section depends on the choice of thermal model (TempCalc); see pages 8 and 191 and
Figs. 296-298.
TempCalc = Fixed
8 Steady-State Thermal Model:--------------------------------------------------
TempCalc Fixed Ambient 20.000 DegC
DegCW 0.000 degC/W HTCcyl 10.000 W/m2/C HTCEnd 0.000 W/m2/C
TempRise 5.000 DegC T_c 25.000 DegC T_r 25.000 DegC
T_f 25.000 DegC T_y 25.000 DegC HeatFlux 0.000 kW/m^2
SlotPeri 46.805 mm Liner 0.400 mm ct_Liner 0.200 W/mC
SSArea 2340.269 mm^2 C_motor 1.640 kJ/C ThRSlot 0.071 C/W
FSArea 48380.527 mm^2
With TempCalc = Fixed, the temperatures are fixed at the values specified in Ted. This is also the case
in Analysis|Static design.
TempRise The conductor temperature rise above ambient, T_c ! T_a.
T_c The conductor temperature. This will be equal to T_Wdg only if TempCalc = Fixed or
after running a Static design.
T_r The rotor temperature; also the magnet temperature. This will be equal to T_Mag only
if TempCalc = Fixed or after running a Static design.
T_f The frame surface temperature.
T_y The stator yoke temperature.
HeatFlux The total loss divided by the total frame surface area including both end-caps, i.e.
WTotal/FSArea.
SlotPeri The perimeter of the slot used for calculating the thermal resistance of the slot liner,
ThRSlot. (See Fig. 260). In Fig. 195, this is from point 8 to point 30, unless TopStick =
true, in which case it is from point 9 to point 29.
SSArea The slot liner contact area, SlotPeri Lstk, for one slot.
FSArea The frame surface area including both end-caps:
FSArea = 2 (Rad3 + FrThk) (FrLgth + 2 CapThk) + 2 (Rad3 + FrThk)
2
.
RadSh is used instead of Rad3 for exterior-rotor motors.
ThRslot The thermal resistance of all the slot-liners in parallel, calculated from ct_Liner, Liner
and SSArea.
C_motor The thermal capacity of the entire motor including the stator, rotor, magnet, frame and
shaft, calculated from the appropriate weights and specific heats. This is used in the
calculation of the thermal time-constant, ThermTC.
TempCalc = DegCW or ThRcct
TempCalc DegCW FixTMag IterX Ambient 20.000 DegC
FSArea 48380.527 mm^2 ThermTC 92.950 min R_fa 3.400 C/W
DegCW If TempCalc = DegCW, DegCW defines the entire and only thermal resistance of the
motor, from which the temperature rise (of the conductors) is calculated as WTotal
DegCW above ambient, Fig. 296. If TempCalc = ThRcct, DegCW is an intermediate
thermal resistance representing heat diffusion through the stator yoke, in series with
ThRSlot and R_fa, Fig. 297.
HTCcyl Surface heat transfer coefficient for the cylindrical part of the frame surface area. If
TempCalc = DegCW, the heat transfer coefficients HTCcyl over the cylindrical frame
surface and HTCend over the end-caps are not treated as input parameters but are
deduced as though DegCW was the surface thermal resistance from frame-to-ambient:
thus HTCcyl = 1/(DegCW * FSArea) and HTCend = HTCcyl. See also p. 192.
If TempCalc = ThRcct, the surface thermal resistance R_fa from frame-to-ambient is
calculated as 1/(HTCcyl A
cyl
+ HTCend A
caps
), in which HTCcyl and HTCend are
input parameters, A
cyl
is the cylindrical (unfinned) frame surface area, and A
caps
is the
area of the end-caps.
HTCend Surface heat transfer coefficient for the end-caps. HTCend is treated in the same way
as HTCcyl. See p. 192
ThermTC The thermal time-constant of the motor, C_motor R_fa. [minutes].
R_fa The equivalent thermal resistance from the frame surface to the ambient air. If
TempCalc = DegCW, then R_fa is directly assigned the value DegCW; otherwise it is
calculated from HTCcyl and HTCend and the respective surface areas.
TempCalc = ThRcct
TempCalc ThRcct FixTMag IterX Ambient 20.000 DegC
No additional parameters.
TempCalc = Hot10
The Hot10 thermal model generates much more data than the others. It is described section-by-section.
8 Hot10 Thermal Model:---------------------------------------------------------
TempCalc Hot10 Hot10ss true Ambient 20.000 DegC
The first section is similar to section 8 for the simpler thermal models.
Hot10ss (true or false) states whether the temperatures are considered to have reached a steady
state. The criterion is the ratio of the total rate of heat absorption i_Absorb to the total
watts loss WTotal at the end of the thermal simulation, i.e. at time t = hTime. If this
ratio is less than HBalTol, the temperature distribution is considered to have settled to
its steady-state value.
T1 Final temperatures
T_c 48.548 DegC T_e 48.784 DegC T_t 44.557 DegC
T_s 44.526 DegC T_a 20.000 DegC T_h 43.455 DegC
T_y 43.752 DegC T_g 44.008 DegC T_b 43.384 DegC
T_r 43.498 DegC T_f 43.314 DegC
TmaxWdg 48.784 DegC TMinWdg 48.075 DegC
Individual node temperatures are identified by the node letter, e.g. _c for node C (conductors at the centre
of the machine). See p. 194.
The theory assumes a uniform rate of heat generation along the conductors, giving rise to the following
relationships between T_c, TmaxWdg and TminWdg, [1]:
T_c The average conductor temperature, at which the winding resistance is computed.
TmaxWdg Maximum winding temperature. If T_e < T_c, TmaxWdg = (3 T_c ! T_e)/2, but if T_e
> T_c, TmaxWdg = T_e.
TminWdg Minimum winding temperature. It T_e < T_c, TminWdg = T_e, but if T_e > T_c,
TminWdg = 3 T_c ! 2 T_e.
To_1 Air outlet temperature at drive end. See Fig. ? on p. ?. [EC or EF] {}
To_2 Air outlet temperature at opposite-drive end.
TEF_1 Intermediate air temperature between nodes E1 and F1. See Fig. ? on p. ?.
TEF_2 Intermediate air temperature between nodes E2 and F2.
TRE_1 Intermediate air temperature between nodes R1 and E1.
TRE_2 Intermediate air temperature between nodes R2 and E2.
T2 Heat sources
WCu 21.999 W WCu_slot 11.422 W WCu_end 10.577 W
WRotor 0.281 W WCuR 0.000 W WFeR 0.000 W
WFe 1.460 W WFe_T 0.707 W WFe_Y 0.754 W
WWF 0.000 W WSLL 0.000 W WTotal 23.740 W
WCu Stator copper loss.
WCu_slot Copper loss within the stator slots.
WCu_end Copper loss in the end-turns.
WRotor Total rotor loss.
WCuR Rotor copper loss
WFeR Rotor iron loss.
WFe Total iron loss.
WFe_T Iron loss in stator teeth.
WFe_Y Iron loss in stator yoke.
WWF Windage & friction loss.
WSLL Stray load loss.
WTotal Total machine losses.
T3 Forced heat extraction rates
BlowCool 0.000 W OverCool 0.000 W WireCool 0.000 W
AxleCool 0.000 W EndCool 0.000 W Cooling 0.000 W
Cooling The sum of all forced heat extraction rates.
T4a Total heat flows
i_Source 23.740 W i_Disspn 23.407 W i_Absorb 0.334 W
i_Absorb The sum of all "residual" heat flows, i.e. the total heat absorption in all the thermal
capacitances. In the steady-state, by definition, i_Absorb = 0. See HBalTol and Hot10ss.
i_Source The sum of all losses that cause power to be dissipated in the machine. This is the same
as WTotal.
i_Disspn The sum of all heat flows away from the machine, equal to i_Source ! i_Absorb. In the
steady-state, i_Disspn = i_Source.
T4b Heat flows from node to node Hot10 model
i_ct 13.529 W i_cy 8.398 W i_FA 23.383 W
i_ce -10.537 W i_ef 5.471E-03 W i_re -0.005 W
i_yf 22.745 W i_ty 13.709 W i_ts 0.534 W
i_sg 0.518 W i_rg -0.510 W i_gf 6.944E-04 W
i_rh 0.749 W i_hb 0.710 W i_bf 0.707 W
Heat flows from node to node are identified by the node letters: for example, i_ce = !10.537 W means that
10.537 W is flowing from node E to node C, while i_ct = 13.529 W means that 13.529 W is flowing from node
C to node T. (See p. 194).
T4c Frame-to-ambient modes
CalcFAU Fixed CalcFAV None CalcFAR None
CalcFAK None
These input parameters define the method of heat transfer to the surroundings.
T4d Ambient heat flows
i_FAU 23.314 W i_FAV 0.023 W i_FAR 0.023 W
i_FAK 0.023 W i_ha 0.023 W i_FA 23.383 W
This section collects together all heat flows to the ambient-temperature node A.
T4e Heat balance at nodes
i_cc 0.032 W i_tt 0.016 W i_yy 0.092 W
i_ee 0.029 W i_gg 7.753E-03 W
i_rr 0.047 W i_hh 0.016 W i_ff 0.074 W
i_bb 3.191E-03 W i_ss 0.017 W i_aa 23.383 W
This section gives the heat absorption rate in the thermal capacitance at every node except the A node.
The double subscript denotes a heat flow that "disappears" into the capacitance at that node. The sum of
these terms is i_Absorb.
T5a Thermal Resistances (specified values)
thR_CT 0.000 C/W thR_CY 0.000 C/W thR_TY 0.000 C/W
thR_TS 0.000 C/W thR_CE 0.000 C/W thR_YF 0.000 C/W
ThR_EF 1000.000 C/W ThR_RE 1000.000 C/W thR_SG 0.000 C/W
thR_RG 0.000 C/W ThR_GF 1000.000 C/W ThR_BF 0.100 C/W
thR_RH 0.000 C/W ThR_HB 0.100 C/W thR_FAK 1.000 C/W
ThR_FAU 1.000 C/W thR_FAV 1.000 C/W thR_FAR 1.000 C/W
All these are input parameters.
T5b Thermal Resistances (calculated values)
R_fa 0.997 C/W R_fak 1000.000 C/W R_fau 1.000 C/W
R_fav 1000.000 C/W R_far 1000.000 C/W
R_yf 0.019 C/W R_ts 0.059 C/W R_ty 0.059 C/W
R_ct 0.295 C/W R_cy 0.571 C/W R_ce 0.022 C/W
R_rh 0.058 C/W R_rg 1.000 C/W R_sg 1.000 C/W
R_EF 1000.000 C/W R_RE 1000.000 C/W R_GF 1000.000 C/W
R_BF 0.100 C/W R_HB 0.100 C/W R_HA 1000.000 C/W
The calculated thermal resistances are denoted by R_ with a double subscript indicating the nodes "from"
and "to" which the thermal resistance is connected. Capital letters in the subscript indicate that the value
is always supplied by the user; for example R_HA is only ever obtained from ThR_HA.
T6 Thermal Capacities
C_Cu 0.297 kJ/C C_c 0.154 kJ/C C_e 0.143 kJ/C
C_SFe 0.625 kJ/C C_t 0.163 kJ/C C_y 0.462 kJ/C
C_r 0.227 kJ/C C_RFe 0.148 kJ/C C_mag 0.078 kJ/C
C_Frame 0.375 kJ/C C_Shaft 0.079 kJ/C C_Brg 0.016 kJ/C
C_g 0.038 kJ/C C_motor 1.678 kJ/C
A thermal capacitance C_ with a single subscript is the total value at the node whose identifying letter
is the subscript.
C_Cu The total thermal capacitance of the stator copper, C_c + C_e.
C_SFe The total thermal capacitance of the stator iron, C_t + C_y.
C_RFe The thermal capacitance of the rotor iron.
C_Mag The thermal capacitance of the magnets.
C_Frame The thermal capacitance of the frame.
C_Shaft The thermal capacitance of the shaft.
C_Brg The total thermal capacitance of the bearings. If AddC_B = 0, this is set to C_Shaft/5;
otherwise it is set equal to AddC_B.
C_g The thermal capacitance of the airgap. If AddC_g = 0, this is set to C_Frame/10;
otherwise it is set equal to AddC_g.
C_motor The total thermal capacitance of the machine.
T7 Additional Thermal Capacities
AddC_Cu 0.000 kJ/C AddC_Y 0.000 kJ/C AddC_R 0.000 kJ/C
AddC_F 0.000 kJ/C AddC_H 0.000 kJ/C AddC_G 0.000 kJ/C
AddC_M 0.000 kJ/C AddC_B 0.000 kJ/C AddC_T 0.000 kJ/C
These are all input parameters.
T8 Specific Heats...
cp_Cu 0.383 kJ/kgC cp_SFe 0.450 kJ/kgC cp_RFe 0.450 kJ/kgC
cp_Mag 0.450 kJ/kgC cp_Frame 0.896 kJ/kgC cp_Shaft 0.450 kJ/kgC
T9 Initial temperatures for Hot10 thermal calculation
Ambient 20.000 DegC IT_C 25.000 DegC IT_S 25.000 DegC
IT_R 25.000 DegC IT_H 25.000 DegC IT_F 25.000 DegC
IT_E 25.000 DegC IT_Y 25.000 DegC IT_G 25.000 DegC
T10 Other Thermal Parameters
h0 2.140 hExp 0.250 V_air 0.000 ft/min
Emiss 0.900 rx_yf 0.000 C/W m^2 T_Brg 25.000 DegC
ct_Liner 0.200 W/mC ct_Lam 38.000 W/mC ct_Wins 0.200 W/mC
T_Gap 25.000 DegC k_gap 0.028 nu_gap 1.734E-05 DegC
Ta 929.693 Nu 2.000 alpha 27.627
FSArea 48380.527 mm^2 FFArea 48380.527 mm^2 SSArea 2340.269 mm^2
KC1 6.700 KC2 0.960 Kn 0.800
k_gap Thermal conductivity of air in airgap.
nu_gap Kinematic viscosity of air in airgap.
Ta Modified Taylor number.
Nu Parameter used in airgap thermal resistance calculation.
alpha Parameter used in airgap thermal resistance calculation.
FFArea Finned frame area, i.e. FSArea + N_Fins LFin FrLgth 2.
T11 Control parameters for thermal transient calculation
thm_dt 1.000 s hTime 100.000 min XLoss 1.000
HBalTol 0.100 HTCount 6000 htFinal 100.000 min
HTCount The total number of steps in the integration of the thermal diffusion equations.
htFinal The final time in the transient thermal calculation.
T12 Additional dimensions used with thermal calculation
FrLgth 75.000 mm FrThk 5.000 mm FrDens 2700.000 kg/m^3
ShDens 7800.000 kg/m^3 N_Fins 0.000 LFin 0.000 mm
FinThk 0.000 mm CapThk 5.000 mm
T13 Weighting factors for injection of iron and stray loss
XWFe_Y 0.500 XWFe_T 0.500 XWFe_S 0.000
XWFe_R 0.000
T14 Thermal Node Types
tnt_c Floating tnt_t Floating tnt_y Floating
tnt_e Floating tnt_g Floating tnt_s Floating
tnt_r Floating tnt_h Floating tnt_f Floating
tnt_b Floating
9 Miscellaneous:---------------------------------------------------------------

Weights...
wt_Cu 0.7746 kg wt_Fe 1.7584 kg wt_Mag 0.2687 kg
wt_Tot 2.8017 kg wt_Shaft 0.1804 kg wt_Frame 0.4188 kg
wt_FeS 1.4214 kg wt_FeR 0.3371 kg wt_RSS 0.8118 kg
Inertia components...
RotJ 2.2501E-04 kg-m2 RotJSS 2.3792E-04 kg-m2 RotJSh 9.0205E-06 kg-m2
RotJFe 8.0938E-05 kg-m2 RotJMag 1.3505E-04 kg-m2 LShaft 75 mm
sigma 1.907 psi
Wf0 0 W RPM0 1000 rpm NWFT 1
Fringing ON XFringe 1 NHx 21
WMagCalc Internal pc_Mag 2.5 % TCCMag 0 %/C
CanStyle None
Ecc 0 UMPavg 4.6281E-16 kg UMPmax 7.0560E-15 kg
TRFrms 14.5191 kg TRFavg 13.138 kg TRFmax 17.4923 kg
CForce 1.6713 kg LamThk 0.5 mm
NLams 97 pcLam 3 % RFei 1.0000E+06
wt_Cu Weight of copper in stator winding.
wtCuMain Weight of copper in main winding (split-phase only).
wtCuAux Weight of copper in auxiliary winding (split-phase only).
wt_Fe Weight of iron in stator lamination and rotor body, but excluding shaft and frame.
wt_Mag Total magnet weight.
wt_Shaft Weight of shaft. The shaft length is LShaft.
wt_Frame Weight of frame.
wt_Tot Total weight of the electromagnetic components WtCu + WtFe + WtMag, excluding the
shaft and the frame.
wt_FeS Weight of iron in the stator.
wt_FeR Weight of iron in the rotor.
wt_RSS Weight of rotor calculated as though it were a solid steel cylinder of radius Rad1. wtRSS
includes the shaft weight.
wt_Bars Weight of cage bars. (Line-start only).
wt_ER Weight of end-rings. (Line-start only).
wt_Al Weight of conductor in the rotor cage (line-start only).
wt_CR1 Weight of additional iron in cooling-ring 1 when LamShape = CoolRing. (Included in
wt_FeS).
wt_CR2 Weight of additional iron in cooling-ring 2 when LamShape = CoolRing. (Included in
wt_FeS).
T
gap
' 2Br
2
L
stk
F
RotJ Polar moment of inertia, including the magnets, the rotor body and the shaft. If slits are
present, RotJ is corrected for the slits but only if there is one slit per pole. Larger
numbers of slits have no further effect on RotJ.
RotJSS Polar moment of inertia of the rotor as though it were a solid steel cylinder of radius
Rad1. The shaft is included in RotJSS.
RotJSh Polar moment of inertia of the shaft.
RotJFe Polar moment of inertia of the rotor iron (excluding the shaft). If slits are present,
RotJFe is corrected for no more than one slit per pole.
RotJMag Polar moment of inertia of the magnets.
sigma The shear stress at the rotor surface that would produce the electromagnetic or airgap
torque. See Ref. [0]. It is obtained using the equation
where r = Rad1, L
stk
= Lstk, F = sigma, and T
gap
is the electromagnetic torque. In
consistent units, the torque/rotor volume TRV is equal to 2F. Essons output coefficient
(defined by T
gap
/D
2
L
stk
, where D = 2r) is equal to BF/2.
IntStep Integration step-length, equal to 0.5/ISLA [elec].
ET_rms RMS value of the EMF in a search-coil wound around one tooth.
EY_rms RMS value of the EMF in a search-coil wound around one section of the stator yoke.
UMPavg Average unbalanced magnetic pull obtained when Ecc is non-zero.
UMPmax Maximum unbalanced magnetic pull obtained when Ecc is non-zero.
TRFrms RMS radial force on one tooth as the rotor rotates.
TRFavg Average radial force on one tooth as the rotor rotates.
TRFmax Maximum radial force on one tooth as the rotor rotates.
bStress Approximate tensile (hoop) stress in rotor bridges in embedded rotor types.
Tcogg_pk Peak value of cogging torque waveform when CalcCogg is selected.
CForce Centrifugal force on one magnet.
NLams No. of laminations, Lstk Stf / LamThk.
Harmonic factors...
THD{L-N} Total harmonic distortion in the phase EMF waveform. See SEM-1. [%]
THD{L-L} Total harmonic distortion in the line-line emf waveform. See SEM-1. [%]
TIF{L-N} Telephone influence factor computed for the phase EMF waveform, using weighting
factors from IEEE 519/NEMA MG.1 or IEC 60034 according to TIFspec (q.v.) [%]
TIF{L-N} Telephone influence factor computed for the line-line EMF waveform, using weighting
factors from IEEE 519/NEMA MG.1 or IEC 60034 according to TIFspec (q.v.) [%]
10 Loss analysis:--------------------------------------------------------------
Rotor Loss
Harmonic losses in the rotor:----------------[check LossData table for details]
WMagCalc Internal fSP 1000.0000 Hz CalcEddy IR4
WMagnet 3.1491 W WShaft 3.3019E-18 W WRotor 3.1491 W
WMagIWH 1.0533 W WMagPHx 0.4424 W WMagFDS 1.6534 W
WCan 4.8225E-16 W WRCan 4.8225E-16 W WSCanFDS 0.0000 W
WRCanIWH 5.2389E-16 W WRCanPHx -4.163E-17 W WRCanFDS 0.0000 W
PHxLoss true NPHx 4 PhigMod -0.7148 %
PhigMod0 1.4096 mWb PhigMod1 0.2680 % PhigMod2 0.1403 %
BgMod0 0.7037 T BgMod1 0.0019 T BgMod2 9.8732E-04 T
MagSeg NoSeg NMC 4.0000 NMZ 1.0000
pc_Mag 1.5000 % SigMag 8.7007E+05 S/m TCCMag 0.0000 %/C
NHxS 37 NHxT 37 PhImbal 0.0000 p.u.
muShaft 100.0000 mu_Shaft 100.0000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following table explains the name-endings of some of the loss components.
Losses due to space- and time-harmonics (Surface-magnet and Interior-magnet)
IWH Losses due to the combination of time-harmonics
in the current ("I") waveform with space-
harmonics in the winding distribution (winding
harmonics "WH").
Method selected by CalcEddy.
Flux-pulsation losses : Surface-magnet machines
SOR Losses due to slot-modulation (permeance
harmonics) calculated by "Lawrenson's method"
(SEM-2). "SOR" stands for "slot-opening ripple".
This is the preferred method for surface-magnet
machines, but it is not appropriate for interior-
magnet machines.
FPLoss = EqCS.
"SOR" losses are presented as a
single value that includes all eddy-
current losses caused by slotting.
PHx Permeance harmonic losses calculated from the
time waveform of the main flux through the
magnet, modulated at the slot-passing frequency.
FPLoss = FDS.
Added together, the PHx and FDS
component s are not i onal l y
equivalent to the SOR losses.
FDS Surface-losses calculated by the "flux-dip-sweeping"
method, for surface-magnet machines only.
Flux-pulsation losses : Interior-magnet machines
PHx Losses dues to flux-pulsation in the magnet caused
by space-harmonics of the winding with
fundamental current, plus slot-ripple.
FPLoss = Extl
(Uses external .phim data or
PhiMn and nPhiMn)
WMagnet The total eddy-current loss in the magnets. The components of WMagnet depend on the
value of WMagCalc and FPLoss as follows:
WMagCalc FPLoss WMagnet
Internal EqCS WMag_IWH [+ WMag_SOR]
FDS WMag_IWH + WMag_PHx [+ WMag_FDS]
Extl WMag_PHx (interior-magnet only)
User Eqn. (23) on p. 178
Notice the two alternative methods of calculating the slot ripple component (or
permeance harmonic component). [For interior-rotor machines, WMag_FDS and
WMag_SOR are not calculated]. [W]
WMag_IWH Magnet loss due to the combination of space-harmonics of the winding and time-
harmonics in the current waveform, using one of the methods of CalcEddy, IR4, IR6,
IR4C, ER2, ER3 or Ldjw. (SEM-2). [W]
WMag_SOR Magnet loss due to the effect of slotting (also called "permeance harmonics"), calculated
by "Lawrenson's method" combined with one of the methods selected by CalcEddy.
(SEM-2). [W]
WMag_PHx Magnet loss due to main flux pulsation caused by slotting and/or winding space-
harmonics with fundamental current. The waveform of the flux pulsation is displayed
in Results|Simulation Graphs|Phim. See also PhigMod, PhigMod0 etc. below. [W]
WMag_FDS Magnet loss attributable to "flux-dip sweeping". The flux-dips are the ones shown in Fig.
168 on p. 188. This is the original method based on Russell and Norsworthys analysis of
losses in screened-rotor induction motors; see Refs. [1, 26, 27, SEM]. The method assumes
resistance-limited eddy-currents and it is limited to the immediate surface effect of the
slot-openings. It neglects all other effects including the effect of permeance harmonics,
current ripple, etc. The conductivity of the magnet is specified by pc_Mag. The method
of calculation is the same as for WRCan. Note that no allowance is made for attenuation
of the slot-modulation with radius; however, the amplitude of the slot-modulation in the
magnet can be specified directly as uBd_m. (A value for uBd_m might be obtained from
the MatchFE|Bgap GoFER). [W]
WShaft The eddy-current loss in the shaft.
WMagCalc FPLoss WShaft
Internal EqCS [WShftIWH + WShftSOR]
FDS [WShftIWH]
User 0
[WShaft is not calculated for interior-magnet machines]. [W]
WshftIWH Eddy-current loss in the shaft due to the combination of space-harmonics of the winding
and time-harmonics in the current waveform, using one of the methods of CalcEddy.
(SEM-2). [W]
WshftSOR Magnet loss due to the effect of slotting (also called "permeance harmonics"), calculated
(SEM-2). [W]
WRCanIWH The loss in the rotor can (if fitted), computed for the combination of space-harmonics of
the winding and time-harmonics in the current waveform, using one of the methods of
CalcEddy, IR4, IR6, IR4C, ER2 or ER3. (SEM-2). WRCanIWH is analogous to
WMag_IWH for the magnet, and arises from the same field solution. [W]
WRCanSOR Rotor can loss due to the effect of slotting (also called "permeance harmonics"), calculated
WRCanSOR is analogous to WMag_SOR for the magnet, and arises from the same field
solution. [W]
WRCanPHx The loss in the rotor can (if fitted) due to main flux pulsation caused by slotting. The
waveform of the flux pulsation is displayed in Results|Simulation Graphs|Phim. See also
PhigMod, PhigMod0 etc. below. WRCanPHx is analogous to WMag_PHx for the
magnet, and arises from the same field solution. [W]
WRCanFDS The loss in the rotor can (if fitted) attributable to "flux-dip sweeping". The method is
based on Russell and Norsworthys analysis for screened-rotor induction motors; Refs.
[1, 26, 27, SEM]. The method assumes resistance-limited eddy-currents and it is limited
to the immediate surface effect of the slot-openings. It neglects all other effects including
the effect of permeance harmonics, current ripple, etc. The conductivity of the can is
specified by pc_RCan. The method of calculation is the same as for WMagFDS, but the
amplitude of the slot-modulation is calculated at the radius R_Bd unless over-written by
uBd_g. (A value for uBd_g might be obtained from the MatchFE|Bgap GoFER). The
RMS value of the flux-dip can be calculated by different methods according to the value
of FluxDip (q.v.) [W]
WRCan The total loss in the rotor can, if fitted:
WMagCalc FPLoss WRCan
Internal EqCS [WRCanIWH + WRCanSOR]
PHx+FDS [WRCanIWH + WRCanPHx +
WRCanFDS]
Extl WRCanPHX (interior magnet only)
User 0
The components are all analogous to the corresponding components in the magnet, and
arise from the same field solutions. [W]
WSCan The total loss in the stator can, if fitted. See SEM-2. It is assumed that the eddy-currents
are resistance-limited; no check is made as to whether this assumption is valid. [W]
WSCanFDS The stator can loss computed by "flux-sweeping". This is the only component of WSCan
and is therefore equal to WSCan. The flux in this calculation is the total airgap flux, (not
the dips). See SEM-2. [W]
WCan The total can loss, WRCan + WScan. [W]
WRotor Total rotor loss, WMagnet, WRCan (if a rotor can is fitted), plus any loss calculated in
the shaft and rotor iron. [W]
fSP The slot-passing frequency, equal to RPM/60 Slots. [Hz]
PhiGMod The peak-peak variation in the flux through the magnet caused by slotting as the rotor
rotates. The waveform of the flux pulsation is displayed in Results|Simulation Graphs|Phim.
The flux pulsation is associated with the "permeance harmonics" and gives rise to the
loss components WMagPHx and WRCanPHx, together with a component of shaft loss.
PhiGMod and its harmonic components are computed only for open-circuit. It is
expressed as a percentage of the average value PhigMod0. [%]
PhiGMod0 The average value of the modulated magnet flux waveform displayed in Results|Simulation
Graphs|Phim. [mWb]
PhiGMod1 The fundamental harmonic component of the modulated magnet flux waveform
displayed in Results|Simulation Graphs|Phim, calculated at the slot-passing frequency fSP
and expressed as a percentage of PhigMod0. The loss components WMagPHx and
WRCanPHx are calculated from the harmonics of this flux waveform, using NPHx
harmonics. Usually only one or two harmonics are significant. [%]
PhiGMod2 The second harmonic component of the modulated magnet flux waveform displayed in
Results|Simulation Graphs|Phim, calculated at the slot-passing frequency fSP and expressed
as a percentage of PhigMod0.[%]
BgMod0 The airgap flux-density that would produce a flux of PhigMod0 in the magnet (per pole),
assuming no leakage. [T]
BgMod1 The airgap flux-density that would produce a fundamental flux of PhigMod1 in the
magnet (per pole), assuming no leakage. [T]
BgMod2 The airgap flux-density that would produce a second-harmonic flux of PhigMod2 in the
magnet (per pole), assuming no leakage. [T]
SigMag The conductivity of the magnet in ordinary units at the operating temperature. [S/m]
Fig. 171 Loss data table
Loss data table
The loss data table, Fig. 171, is available via Results|Loss data after a calculation with CalcEddy = IR4,
IR6, IR4C, ER2 or ER3. It contains a list of space- and time-harmonics capable of producing
asynchronous rotating field components that may give rise to eddy-current losses in the rotor. For each
harmonic the table displays the following data in columns :
k The phase number. 0 means that all three phases are included, with balanced operation.
m The mechanical space-order of the space-harmonic of the winding distribution.
me The electrical space-order of the space-harmonic, generally equal to m divided by the
fundamental number of pole-pairs.
n The order of the time-harmonic in the current waveform, followed by F to indicate a
forward-rotating field (relative to the rotor), or B to indicate a backward-rotating field.
The generation of the particular harmonics is explained in detail in SEM-2.
wh/ws The ratio of the harmonic frequency in the rotor to the radian line-frequency in the
stator windings.
WMagnet The loss in the magnet due to the particular harmonic.
WRCan The loss in the rotor can (if fitted) due to the particular harmonic.
WShaft The loss in the shaft due to the particular harmonic.
Fc_Mag The loss factor due to circumferential segmentation of the magnet.
Fz_Mag The loss factor due to axial segmentation of the magnet.
Fz_RCan The loss factor due to axial segmentation of the rotor can (if fitted).
dM The skin-depth in the magnet at the harmonic frequency [mm]
dS The skin-depth in the rotor can at the harmonic frequency [mm]
dH The skin-depth in the shaft at the harmonic frequency [mm]
Single-frequency data..
f_h 200.0000 Hz pp_h 4 mu0K 0.0021 T
R_h 26.0000 mm W_h 0.0046 W wh/ws 1.2000
AhR 1.8841E-05 Vs/m BrhR -8.096E-05 T BthR -2.129E-03 T
AhX -5.263E-07 Vs/m BrhX -2.899E-03 T BthX -1.246E-11 T
Ah 1.8848E-05 Vs/m JhR 0.0000 A/mm PhR -0.5603 W/m
alfh -1.6000 JhX 0.0000 A/mm PhX -20.0599 W/m
dSkinM 36.3774 mm dSkinRS 1.0000E+38 mm dSkinH 1.0000E+38 mm
kZ 5.0000 hZ 0.0000 gZ 0.0000
Fc_Mag 1.0000 Fz_Mag 1.0000 Fzc_Mag 1.0000
Fz_RCan 1.0000 Fz_SCan 0.0000 PhImbal 0.0000 p.u.
Single-frequency data is obtained when f_h > 0 from the solution of the complex diffusion equation (for
surface-magnet machines) or by a method dependent on the calculation of the frequency-dependent
synchronous reactance (for interior-magnet machines). The theory is described in SEM-2. For interior-
magnet machines the time-harmonic can be specified directly via n_h instead of f_h.
W_h The total harmonic loss power passing through a cylinder of radius R_h and axial length
Lstk. [W]
wh/ws The ratio of the harmonic frequency in the rotor to the radian line-frequency 2B Freq1
in the stator windings. []
The following field components are given as the real and imaginary parts of the complex coefficients of
e
(jTtp2)
in the rotor reference frame (see SEM-2). They are all given at the radius R_h.
AhR Real component of vector potential. (Only the z-component exists). [Wb/m]
AhX Imaginary component of vector potential. [Wb/m]
Ah Magnitude of vector potential. [Wb/m]
alfh Phase of vector potential, relative to that of the exciting current sheet (mu0K), which is
taken as the reference phasor. [E]
BrhR Real component of radial flux-density. [T]
BrhX Imaginary component of radial flux-density. [T]
BthR Real component of circumferential flux-density. [T]
BthX Imaginary component of circumferential flux-density. [T]
JhR Real component of current-density. [A/mm
2
]
JhX Imaginary component of current-density. [A/mm
2
]
PhR Real component of Poynting vector. [W/m
2
]
PhX Imaginary component of Poynting vector. [W/m
2
]
dskinM Skin-depth in the magnet. [mm or in ]
dskinRC Skin-depth in the rotor can, if fitted. [mm or in ]
dskinSC Skin-depth in the stator can, if fitted. [mm or in ]
dskinH Skin-depth in the shaft. [mm or in ]
hZ Ratio of the axial length of the conducting path in the magnet to the wavelength of the
space-harmonic.
gZ The angle ( mentioned in connection with kZ and described in SEM-2.
Fc_Mag The circumferential segmentation factor for the magnet.
Fz_Mag The axial segmentation factor for the magnet.
Fzc_Mag The combined circumferential and axial segmentation factor for the magnet.
Fz_RCan The axial segmentation factor for the rotor can; (RCanSecs sections or rings).
Fz_SCan The axial segmentation factor for the stator can; (SCanSecs sections or rings).
Subtransient parameters (permanent-magnet machines)
Subtransient reactances and time-constants-----
Ld'' 0.2022 mH Xd'' 0.2118 ohm kdD1 0.7478
Td0'' 0.1068 ms Td'' 0.0471 ms Tarm 3.9091 ms
Lq'' 0.2022 mH Xq'' 0.2118 ohm uTd0'' 0.0000 ms
alfwTd -42.8421 R_MCS 25.0000 mm
SCcycles 3.0000 SClambda 0.0000 t_FS 0.0000 ms
--------------------------------------------------
See SEM-2 for the theory of these parameters and their usage in fault calculations.
Ld'' The subtransient inductance in the d-axis. [mH]
Xd'' The d-axis subtransient reactance at fundamental frequency. [ohm]
kdD1 The coupling coefficient between the stator windings and the conductive circuits of the
rotor, which relates Ld'' to Ld and Td'' to Td0''.
Td0'' The open-circuit subtransient time-constant in the d-axis. [ms]
Td'' The short-circuit subtransient time-constant in the d-axis. [ms]
Tarm The armature time-constant. [ms]
Lq'' The subtransient inductance in the q-axis. [mH]
Xq'' The q-axis subtransient reactance at fundamental frequency. [ohm]
alfwTd The phase angle of L
d
(jT) used to calculate Td0''. [E]
After running Analysis | Short-circuit (analytical), the following parameters appear :
MaxISC The maximum peak current in any phase, observed during the short-circuit transient.
[A]
MaxTSC The peak torque observed during the short-circuit transient.
Core loss
Core loss analysis:---------------------------------------------------------

WFeCalc OC LossFE Mech XFe 1
DFekgS 7656.8289 kg/m^3 St.Steel M19 24 gage
DFekgR 7656.8289 kg/m^3 Ro.Steel M19 24 gage
DFekgSh 7656.8289 kg/m^3 Sh.Steel M19 24 gage
wt_Teeth 0.3714 kg wt_Yoke 1.05 kg wt_Troot 0.1114 kg
Specific core losses...
cFe_E50 1.1788 W/kg cFe_H50 1.9756 W/kg cFe_50 3.1544 W/kg
cFe_E_F 0.5239 W/kg cFe_H_F 1.317 W/kg cFe_F 1.841 W/kg
cFe_T_E 2.0745 W/kg cFe_T_H 2.5091 W/kg cFe_T 4.5836 W/kg
cFe_Y_E 0.3772 W/kg cFe_Y_H 1.1044 W/kg cFe_Y 1.4816 W/kg
Core loss analysis...
WFe_T_E 1.0015 W WFe_T_H 1.2113 W WFe_T 2.2128 W
WFe_Y_E 0.3961 W WFe_Y_H 1.1596 W WFe_Y 1.5557 W
The core-loss calculation follows the methods described in Ref. [2], ch. 9, with enhancements discussed
under WFeCalc.
Parameter names in this section follow a convention, the key to which is as follows:
wt_ weight
WFe core loss [W]
cFe specific core loss [W/kg or W/lb]
_T_ teeth
_Y_ yoke
_E_ eddy-current
_H_ hysteresis
_OC open-circuit
_50 at 50 Hz with sinewave flux-density, peak
1@5 T
_60 at 60 Hz with sinewave flux-density, peak
1@5 T
_F at frequency Freq1 Hz with sinewave flux-
density, peak 1@5 T
Note: when calculating the specific core loss in the stator teeth, the weight is augmented by the weight
of the tooth roots, [2]. For example, cFe_T = WFe_T/(wt_Teeth + wt_Troot).
Page 272 3.4 References PC-BDC 9.04
3.4 References
Hendershot J.R. and Miller T.J.E. : Design of Brushless Permanent-Magnet Machines
Motor Design Books LLC, 102 Triano Circle, Venice, Florida 34292, USA, ISBN 978-0-9840687-0-8, 2010. (9" 6" HBK,
822 pp)
This book supercedes Reference 2. It also covers much of the material in Chapter 2 of Reference 1. It is designed as
a general account of the design and theory of brushless PM machines (including generators and drives), and is a
convenient theory companion to PC-BDC. It is sometimes referred to as GB.
http://www.motordesignbooks.com/motor_design_books/Home.html
1. SPEEDs Electric Machines, the theory text that is used with the SPEED training courses. Ref. [1] is a
convenient theoretical digest issued with the program in PDF format; check the Help menu. [SEM]
2. Hendershot J.R. and Miller TJE : Design of brushless permanent-magnet motors, Oxford University
Press, Monographs in Electrical and Electronic Engineering No. 37, 1994. ISBN No. 0-19-859389-9 (or in USA,
1-881855-03-1). Out of print. Errata available from the authors.
3. Mohan N, Undeland T.M. and Robbins W.P.: Power electronics: converters, applications, and design, John
Wiley & Sons, 1989, 1995 [2nd edition]. ISBN 0-471-58408-8.
4. Murphy J.M.D. and Turnbull F.G.: Power electronic control of AC motors, Pergamon Press, 1988. ISBN
0-08--22683-3.
5. Hague B : The principles of electromagnetism applied to electrical machines, Dover Publications Inc.,
N.Y., 1962.
6. Boules N : Prediction of no-load flux-density distribution in permanent magnet machines, IEEE Transactions
on Industry Applications, Vol. IA-21, No. 4, May/June 1985, pp. 633-643.
7. Jahns, T.M.: Torque production in PM synchronous motor drives with rectangular current excitation,
IEEE Transactions, IA-20, pp 803-813, 1984
8. Demerdash, N.A. with Arkadan, A., Nehl, T., Vaidya, J. and others: papers on brushless DC and AC motors
and drives, published in IEEE Transactions, including EC-3, Sept 88, 722-732; EC-2, March 87, 86-92;
PAS-104, Aug 85, 2206-2213; 2214-2222; 2223-2231; PAS-103, July 84, 1829-1836; PAS-102, Jan 83, 104-112;
PAS-101, Dec 82, 4502-4506; PAS-100, Sept 81, 4125-4135; EC-3, Sept 88, 714-721; EC-3, Dec 88, 880-889; 890-898.
9. Fitzgerald AE and Kingsley C : Electric Machinery, McGraw-Hill (second edition)
10. Kostenko and Piotrovsky, Electric Machines, MIR Publishers
11. Rasmussen KF, Miller TJE, Davies JI, McGilp M and Olaru M : Analytical and numerical computation of
airgap magnetic fields in brushless permanent-magnet motors with Surface Permanent-Magnets, IEEE
Transactions on Industry Applications. Vol.36, No.6, November/December 2000, pp.1547-1554.
12. Reliance Motion Control Inc.: DC Motors, SPEED Controls, Servo Systems: The Electro-craft Engineering
Handbook, 6
th
edn.
13. Hughes A. and Miller TJE : Analysis of fields and inductances in air-cored and iron-cored synchronous
machines, Proceedings IEE, Vol. 124, No. 2, February 1977, pp. 121-131.
14. Rasmussen KF, Analytical prediction of magnetic field from surface mounted permanent magnet motor, IEEE
IEMDC Conference, Seattle, pp. 34!36, May 9!12, 1999.
15. Clayton AE and Hancock NN, The performance and design of direct current machines, 3
rd
edn., Pitman,
London, 1959-66, p. 36.
16. Kenjo T and Nagamori S, Permanent magnet and brushless DC motors, Sogo Electronics Publishing
Company, Tokyo, 1984.
PC-BDC 9.04 3.4 References Page 273
17. Miller TJE, Synchronization of line-start permanent-magnet AC motors. Transactions IEEE PAS-103, 1822-
1828, 1984.
18. Miller TJE, Single-phase permanent-magnet motor analysis. Transactions IEEE IA-21, 651-658, 1985.
19. Popescu M, Miller TJE, McGilp MI, Strappazzon G, Trivillin N, Santarossa R, Line Start Permanent Magnet
Motor: Single Phase Starting Performance Analysis, Transactions IEEE IA-39, No. 4, 1021-1030, July 2003.
20. Miller TJE, Popescu M, Cossar C, McGilp M, Strappazzon G, Trivillin N, and Santarossa R, Line-start
permanent-magnet motor: single-phase steady-state performance analysis, Trans. IEEE, Vol. IA-40, No. 2, pp.
516-525, March-April 2004.
21. Veinott CG, Theory and design of small induction motors, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959.
22. Miller TJE and Rabinovici R, Back-EMF waveforms and core losses in brushless DC motors. IEE Proceedings
141B, 144-154, 1994.
23. Miller TJE, Popescu M and McGilp MI [2003] Calculating the interior permanent-magnet motor, IEEE-IEMDC
2003, Madison WI, USA, 1181-1187, June 1-4, 2003.
24. Miller TJE, Popescu M, Cossar C, and McGilp M [2005] Computation of the voltage-driven flux-MMF diagram
for saturated brushless PM motors, IEEE-IAS Annual Meeting, Hong Kong, October 36, 2005, Conference
Proceedings, Vol. 2, 1023-1028.
25. Miller TJE, Popescu M, Cossar C, McGilp MI, Olaru M, Davies AJ, Sturgess JP, Sitzia AM [2006] Embedded
Finite-element Solver for Computation of Permanent-Magnet Brushless Motors, IEEE IAS Annual Meeting,
Conference Record, Vol. 3, Oct. 2006, Tampa, FL, pp:1478 1485. (Best Paper Award, First Prize, awarded by
the Electric Machine Committee of the Industry Applications Society).
26. Miller TJE [1989] Brushless permanent-magnet and reluctance motor drives, Clarendon Press, Oxford, ISBN
0-19-859369-4. This book is out of print, but almost everything in it is available in expanded form in SEM [1].
27. Russell RL and Norsworthy KH [1958] Eddy-currents and wall losses in screened-rotor induction motors, IEE
Proceedings 105A, 163-175.
28. Robinson RC, Rowe I and Donelan LE [1957] The calculation of can losses in canned motors, Trans. AIEE,
June 1957, 312-315.
29. Miller TJE (Ed.), Reactive power control in electric systems, John Wiley & Sons, 1982. ISBN 0-471-86933-3.
30. Miller TJE and Staton DA, Electric Machine Design using SPEED and Motor-CAD, published by Motor
Design Ltd., 2012 [EMDS]
31. Adkins B, The General Theory of Electrical Machines, Chapman & Hall, 1957.
32. Kimbark EW., Power System Stability, Wiley, New York, 1948.
33. Say MG, Performance and Design of A.C. Machines, Pitman, 3rd edn., 1983.
34. Concordia C, Synchronous Machines, John Wiley & Sons, 1951.
35. Ku YH, Electric Energy Conversion, Ronald Press, 1959.
Page 274 3.5 Reference diagrams PC-BDC 9.04
Rad3
[Rad2]
[R1g]
Gap
LM
Rad1
RadSH
BetaM
[Ryoke]
[Syoke]
Stator
Rotor body
Magnet
Shaft
Slot
Fig. 172 Definition of some common motor dimensions
3.5 Reference diagrams
3.5.1 Geometry (general)

PC-BDC 9.04 3.5 Reference diagrams Page 275
WY
WX WX
RadC
WY
Rad3
ChX
ChY
Circle Circ.Chf.
Rect. Rect.Rnd.
Rad3
SYoke
SYoke
SYoke SYoke
Fig. 173 Lamination shape (LamShape) and dimensions WX,WY, ChX,ChY and RadC.
Fig. 174 Dimensional details when LamShape = Annulus.
LamShape = Annulus is a template for non-circular laminations with geometric features such as holes,
flats, and notches. It can be regarded as an additional region of the lamination outside the circle whose
radius is Rad3 (shown dotted). PC-BDCs electromagnetic calculations treat the stator yoke as though
it had a circular outside surface at Rad3.
Up to four sets of holes can be accommodated:
(1) Hole set 1 located by HX1 with radius HR1 : two holes on x-axis
(2) Hole set 2 located by HY2 with radius HR2 : two holes on y-axis
(3) Hole set 3 located by HX3 and HY3 with radius HR3 : four holes
(4) Hole set 4 located by HX4 and HY4 with radius HR4 : four holes
To remove or omit any hole set, use zero for the radius (HR1, HR2, etc.) Note that the holes of set 3 can
break the outside boundary of the lamination (cases B,C,D in the small diagram at top right).
Fig. 175 LamShape = CoolRing
Fig. 176 End-winding configuration showing the definitions of Ext, LgthOEnd,
and LaxPack. LaxPack is shortened by the compaction or forming of the
end-windings, which is controlled by EndFill.

LamShape = CoolRing is a template for an augmented circular stator lamination with one or two rings
or annuli designated as cooling rings, because each annulus has a regular array of circular holes that
might be used for coolant. The parameters are defined on p. 81.
PC-BDC does not allow for the cooling rings in its magnetic calculations (including the calculation of
iron loss). It is necessary to run one or more of the finite-element GoFERs and adjust XSYoke to achieve
the correct stator yoke flux-density. It should be sufficient (and it is certainly simplest) to do this with
one of the open-circuit GoFERs and then leave the value of XSYoke unchanged, unless very detailed
calculations are required. The effect of the cooling holes on the stator iron loss can be estimated using
the i-psi GoFER and the Elements Table.
PC-BDC does not calculate the additional weight of steel in the cooling ring.
Fig. 177 Axial view in the outline editor.
Fig. 177 shows the axial view in the outline editor, with Edit View = Axial sect. Most of the features
in this view are purely for viewing possible variations in the longitudinal geometry, but there are no
magnetic or other calculations presently associated with ROH, ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 or ZH4.
ROH (not shown as a dimension) is the rotor overhang at each end of the rotor, such that the overall
axial length of the rotor stack is LRotor = Lstk + 2 ROH. Fig. 177 is drawn with ROH < 0.
The rotor is offset in the axial direction by the displacement RzOffs.
The magnets are not drawn to scale. The protrusions shown in Fig. 177 merely represent the axial
extension of the magnets beyond the rotor stack, when MOH1 and/or MOH2 is negative. (When MOH1
and/or MOH2 is positive, the magnet length in the axial direction is the same as the axial length of the
rotor, according to Fig. 136 on p. 120.
The stator core is shown with channels or slots cut across the ends of the stator teeth in the tangential
direction, so that the end-windings are let in to reduce the overall length; such a feature might be
contemplated when using a soft-magnetic composite (SMC) core.
Fig. 178 Vent ducts in the stator
Stator ventilating ducts
The number of ducts is NSDuct, and the width of each duct is WSDuct (measured parallel to the axis
of rotation). In the example in Fig. 178, NSDuct = 6.
The magnetic effect of the vent ducts is calculated by augmenting the Carter factor with an additional
factor KGV, and the effective airgap Lge (gN in SEM-2) increases by this factor. The airgap area (Aghp
per half-pole) is not considered to be affected, so the relationship between airgap flux and mean airgap
flux-density is calculated with respect to a fixed value of Aghp unaffected by the vent ducts.
The weight of steel in the stator is reduced when vent ducts are used.
Fig. 179 S_Slot = Round
Fig. 180 S_Slot = Square
3.5.2 Stator slot geometry
Note : in the diagrams of stator teeth, the red dotted line shows the effective tooth width EffWst and the
radius RadBtooth at which the B
tooth
GoFER calculates the tooth flux-density.
Fig. 182 S_Slot = PllRound
Fig. 181 S_Slot = PllSlot. If WSWedge ' 0, the width of the slot-
wedge is made equal to SWid + SSWedge.
Fig. 183 S_Slot = PllSquare
Fig. 184 S_Slot = PllTooth. When SV = 0 the slot-bottom is made flat. The slot wedge is drawn when
TSSWedge = Type1 (trapezoidal shape) or Type2 (rectangular shape). The corners of the slot-
wedge may have a radius, CRSWedge. Aslot is the area below the slot wedge. The slot wedge
is independent of theTopStick and Top Wedge shown in Fig. 260 on p. 325; (those items can be
considered as "loose insulation").
w2s
h1s
filSO
w1s
w3s
w3s
2
h2s
h3s
Fig. 185 S_Slot = HW with SlotBot ' Round.
Fig. 186 S_Slot = HW, with SlotBot = Square. S_Slot = HWFB is no longer available as a distinct slot-type,
but it can be reproduced as shown here.
Fig. 188 S_Slot = HW with SlotBot = Polygon, showing fillet radii filSO and filSB
Fig. 187 S_Slot = HW with SlotBot = Concave.
Fig. 189 S_Slot = Flared
Fig. 190 S_Slot = GH
In Fig. 189 the slot-opening fillet filSO is not a true fillet but defines the curvature of the line joining the
points defined by SWIT and SOang. If filSO = 0, the curvature is zero and these points are joined by a
straight line, shown dotted. "SWIT" means "slot-opening width inside tooth-tang".
Rad3
[OTH]
TWS
xCoil
TgAng
R_TT
w_TH
Gap
RCS
Fig. 191 S_Slot = GolfTee. This is more a tooth definition than a slot
definition. It is intended for motors with very large slot-openings,
but it can be used equally well with small slot-openings.
If w_TH (width of tooth-head) is zero, the slot-opening SO is used instead.
Fig. 192 S_Slot = GolfTee : Variant with Rake > 0. The radius R_TF can be positive or
negative; if R_TF = 0, the tooth-head curvature is at the radius Rad1 + Gap (or
Rad1 Gap in exterior-rotor machines). The slot-opening is calculated between
corner-nodes T, without any allowance for the curved tooth-tip R_TT. The
curved tooth-tip is not automatically tangent to the straight sections LT or IH.
Note that R_TF must not be less than C_TH/2.
Fig. 193 S_Slot ' MISlot. "Magnetically isolated" slot, in which two coil-sides belonging to separate
phases are separated by an unwound central tooth. Single-tooth coils are wound on the main
tooth (TWS, MTarc).
Fig. 194 S_Slot = OneOHang : asymmetrical stator slot with "one overhang"
Fig. 195 Stator slot coordinate numbering used in versions preceding PC-BDC 6. Versions from PC-BDC 6
use a lettering system similar to that of the rotor.
Fig. 196 S_slot = VarDpth. Up to four different slot-depths can be defined with SlotOrder. The example has
three different slot-depths with SlotOrder = "bcd". The slot-depths are defined by SDS_B, SDS_C,and
SDS_C. Slot depth SD for slot type A is missing because there is no "A" in SlotOrder. The slot-bottom
fillet radii can also be specified independently (filSB_B, etc.) Note also the non-circular lamination
defined by LamShape.
180
Nmbp
(1 ! Nmbp)
Nmbp
BetaM
+
Overall magnet arc =
Spacing
180
Nmbp
Nmbp
BetaM
Arc of one block =
180
Fig. 197 One pole-pitch of a surface-magnet motor with Nmbp = 3, showing how the spacing and arcs of the
magnet blocks are defined when Nmbp > 1. In this example BetaM = 120Eelec and Poles = 4,
so each magnet block has an arc of 120/3 = 40Eelec, and the centre-lines of the magnet blocks are
spaced by 180/3 = 60E. All angles in this diagram are in Eelec.
Fig. 198 An example of a 2-pole machine with Nmbp = 7 magnets per pole.
3.5.3 Rotor Geometry
Fig. 199 RotType = SurfRad, Embed = Not
Fig. 200 RotType = SurfRad, Embed = Type1, Type2
Fig. 201 RotType = SurfPll, Embed = Not
Fig. 202 RotType = SurfPll, Embed = Type1
B
C
A
J
D
K
IH
Magnet
Detail :Magnets
abut if MagWid is
large
F
Rmc
BetaM
MagWid
B
BetaM
C
J
D IH
Magnet
F
MagEdge
Detail : if Rmc = 0,
the magnet edges are
chamfered, not
radiused
LM
Rad1
[wMag]
B
C
IJ
D
H F
MagEdge
MagWid
2
MagEdge
Fig. 203 RotType = SurfPll, Embed = Type 2
Fig. 204 RotType = BreadLoaf, Embed = Not
Fig. 205 RotType = BreadLoaf, Embed = Type1
Fig. 206 RotType = BreadLoaf, Embed = Type2 (1 pole only)
B C
G
H
A
J
D
F
BetaM
Magnet
MagEdge
MagWid
Rmc
LM
B C
G
H
D
F
BetaM
Magnet
Detail : if Rmc = 0, the
magnet edges are chamfered,
not radiused
Rad1
MagEdge
B C
G
H
D
F
B C
G D
HF
MagEdge
MagEdge
Detail : Magnets abut if MagWid is
large. Beyond a certain value, MagWid
becomes a phantom dimension as in the
right-hand case, and does not affect
the geometry.
MagWid
2
[wMag]
Fig. 207 RotType = BreadLoaf, Embed = Type3 (1 pole only; see also Fig. 204)
H
D C B A
E
J
LM
RadSH
BetaM
MagEdge
MagWid
[wNeck]
[wMag]
Rad1
F
G
I
K
Rib
Notch
NotchAng
[Ryoke]
Fig. 208 RotType = BreadLoaf, Embed = Type4. Rib is shown as zero on all poles except the reference
pole. Notch is shown as zero on the left half of the diagram.
The notch has the effect of increasing the reluctance of the flux-path for q-axis armature reaction. When
Notch = 0, the q-axis synchronous reactance is maximized (for a given set of values of BetaM and
wNeck), and this will increase the reluctance torque. PC-BDC uses an approximate formula to represent
the magnetic effect of widening the notch. For accurate analysis of the effects of the notch, as with all
fine geometric details, PC-FEA is essential. This is especially true for the cogging torque.
Fig. 209 RotType = Spoke, Embed = Not. Slits can be placed in the pole-pieces to reduce the cross-
pole flux and Xq; for dimensions see Fig. 221.
Fig. 210 RotType = Spoke, Embed = Type1. Slits can be placed in the pole-pieces to reduce the cross-
The hub is assumed non-magnetic and is not included in the calculation of rotor weight or inertia.
RadSh
F
D C
G H I
B A
T
S
R
E
J
Rad1
Magnet
SpokeWid
Bridge
MagWid
Inset
BetaM
[LM]
2
Web
[Ryoke]
[wMag]
RingWid
[hq]
Fig. 211 RotType = Spoke, Embed = Type2. Slits can be placed in the pole-pieces to reduce the cross-
Fig. 212 RotType = Spoke, Embed = Type 3. Slits can be placed in the pole-pieces to reduce
the cross-pole flux and Xq; for dimensions see Fig. 221. If R_rpf = 0, the pole-faces
are concentric with the centreline. If muBridge = 0, the Inset is treated as a
magnetic bridge that saturates at bBsat.
Rad1
LM
A B C
D
E
F
H
Magnet
[Ryoke]
[wMag]
[wNeck]
RadShell
BetaM
RadShaft
Fig. 213 RotType = ExtRad, shown with Embed = Not. When Embed = Type1, the
space between the magnets is filled by rotor steel. The rotor pole-face radius
can be specified by R_rpf : see Fig. 215.
Rotation
gLead
Rad1
LM
SO
TWS
Rad3
BetaM
gTrail
SD
TGD
[wMag]
RadShell
Fig. 214 RotType = ExtRad. An asymmetric tapered airgap is obtained by setting dGap such
that gLead ! gTrail = dGap. (RadShaft not shown).
Fig. 215 RotType = ExtRad; Embed = Not; chamfered magnet with MagWid > 0
Fig. 216 Calculation of effective magnet pole area (2 Amhp) in exterior-rotor motors.
Fig. 215 shows a variation of the ExtRad rotor type with a profiled magnet pole-face (R_Rpf). When
R_rpf = 0, the pole-face radius reverts to Rad1.
When MagWid > 0, it determines the overall width of the magnet directly, and it becomes possible to
specify a chamfer, using the angles ChfAng and MEdgeAng. The magnetic calculations in PC-BDC do
not take the edge details into account, so the finite-element GoFER must be used.
When RotType = ExtRad, the area Amhp is based on wArc, which is determined by BetaM and the
effective radius, rme = Rad1 + (1 - Xrm) LM. When RoType = ExtPll, wMag is used. wMag cannot
be adjusted except by changing the actual dimensions, but wArc can be adjusted with Xrm and it can
also be used with ExtPll if CalcVer is set to cv4 or cv5. The calculation of Amhp is similar in interior-
rotor motors with RotType = SurfRad and SurfPll, except that rme = Rad1 ! (1 ! Xrm) LM.
When RotType = ExtPll, the effective magnet length Lme is the average between the centre-line value
and the edge value. When RotType = ExtRad, Lme = LM.
Fig. 217 RotType = ExtPll; Embed = Not. See also Figs. 218 and 219.
Fig. 218 RotType = ExtPll, Embed = Type1; chamfered magnet with MagWid > 0
Fig. 218 shows a variation of the ExtPll rotor type with Embed = Type1. The magnet pole-face is profiled
with radius R_rpf. If R_rpf = 0, the face is flat.
If MagWid = 0, the leftmost diagram applies. (It is shown again in Fig. 219 with Nmbp > 1).
When MagWid > 0, it determines the overall width of the magnet directly, and it also becomes possible
to specify a chamfer, using the angle ChfAng. Again when MagWid > 0, the rotor shell has a raised or
sunk flat positioned such that the radius of the curved part (arc EF) is Rad1 + LM + Inset. This radius
is shown by the dotted line which continues arc EF. Inset can be positive (as in the rightmost diagram)
or negative (as in the middle diagram). The magnetic calculations in PC-BDC do not take the edge
details into account, so the finite-element GoFER must be used.
[wMag]
Rad1
Spacing
180
Nmbp
RadSH
180
Nmbp
(1 ! Nmbp)
Nmbp
BetaM
+
Overall magnet arc =
BetaM
One magnet block
Rotor yoke
Embed = Type2 Embed = Type1
[wMag]
LM
A B
C
D
E
F H
BetaM
R_rpf
Rad1
M
Embed = Type2
(Detail)
Fig. 219 RotType = ExtPll, with Poles = 2 and Nmbp = 5.
The exterior rotor in Fig. 219 has parallel-magnetized magnets and multiple blocks per pole (Nmbp).
Three variants are possible according to the value of Embed:
Not As in Fig. 217. The inside surface of the rotor yoke is circular. The outer surface of each
magnet has the same curvature, so there is no gap.
Type1 Each magnet sits flush against a flat on the inside of the rotor yoke, so that there is no
airgap between the magnet and the yoke.
Type2 The inside surface of the rotor yoke is circular, and there is a crescent-shaped gap between
each magnet and the rotor yoke.
The inside surface of the magnet can have a pole-face radius R_rpf different from Rad1. If Embed = Not,
R_rpf = 0 reverts the curvature of the inside surface of the magnet to Rad1, as in Fig. 217. Otherwise
R_rpf = 0 makes the inside surface flat.
If R_rpf > 0, the magnet presents a concave face to the stator; but if R_rpf < 0 it presents a convex face.
MagWid/2
qFlat
Inset
Vtrap/2
CWeb/2
RadShell Rib
Rad1
LM
Inset
Vtrap/2
CWeb/2
RadShell Rib
Rad1
LM
Inset
Vtrap/2
CWeb/2
RadShell Rib
Rad1
LM
Lip
Lip
MagWid/2 LM
Inset
Vtrap/2
RadShell Rib
Rad1
Edges = Bridged
VEdges = Bridged
Edges = Squared
VEdges = Squared
Edges = Open
VEdges = Open
Edges = Rounded
VEdges = Rounded
ExtPll_Embed3.wpg
Web/2
Notch
Fig. 220 RotType = ExtPll, Embed = Type3.
R
G=H
K
W
J
A B
D
P D C
O N
Q
L
M
wSlit
tSlit bSlit
RadSh
Rad1
[WmagSlot]
F
D0
P
D C
O N
Q
L
M
bSlit
tSlit
wSlit
LM
YSlitA
Slits = 1
Slits = 2
C
[wNeck]
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
4
3
2
1
Slits
When Slits > 2, the A
slits must lie inside
the B slits
[wMag]
BetaM
[Ryoke]
[hq]
I
MagWid
MagWid
NBB!1
wBB
MSlotWid
Fig. 221 RotType = IPM, Embed = Not.
Pole 1 shows the use of bracing bridges with NBB = 5.
Fig. 222 RotType = IPM, Embed = Not, showing tapered airgap with R_rpf
Fig. 224 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type1: profiled airgap with R_rpf < Rad1. See p. 305.
BetaM
C B D
E
R
I
H
G
J
K
W X
Lip
2
MSlotWid
2
MagWid
2
D0
Detail with Edges = Rounded
2
A
F
C B D
E
R
I
Bridge LM
Rad1
RadSh
Magnet
H
[Ryoke]
[hq]
G
MagWid
[wNeck]
[wMag]
Web
J
K
Cweb
B
C
U
V
2
MagWid
Detail with smaller MagWid
showing magnet corner points J,K
and the centre web Cweb
BetaM
IPM_1.wpg
Fig. 223 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type1. See note on p. 305.

CWeb
2
CWeb
2
CWeb
2
D0
2
D0
2
D0
2
D0
2
d-axis
LM
Lip
Inset
Vtrap
2
G
X
A
K
I
W
H
J
B
C
K
1
J
1
C
C
C
VEdges = Squared VEdges = Rounded
VEdges = Bridged VEdges = Open
IPM_V4.wpg
WebAngle
Fig. 225 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type1, showing variations of magnet shape and orientation.
Note
Fig. 225 applies when Edges = Rounded or Squared and Vtrap is different from 0 or 180E. In all other
cases the geometry of the magnet aperture reverts to that of Fig. 223.
The magnets can be inclined using the angle Vtrap, which can be greater or less than 180E. Provided
that Vtrap 180E, the inner edges of the magnet aperture can have different shapes according to the
value of VEdges : Squared, Rounded, Bridged and Open, as shown in Fig. 225.
Also note that MSlotWid changes its meaning between Fig. 223 and Fig. 225. In Fig. 225 it means twice
the maximum lateral width of one magnet aperture; but in Fig. 223 it means twice the maximum
possible width of one magnet block.
Important : Although BetaM is not used as a physical dimension with these V-magnet configurations,
it is still used to define the effective magnetic pole-arc, and that is why it appears in the outline editor.
Fig. 226 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2. When DimGroup = Default, the magnet slots are rectangular, with
location and size defined by dimensions BetaM, Bridge, and LM.
Fig. 227 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2, DimGroup = Alter 1. With this dimensioning, the rotor surface can
be profiled, and the magnet slots can have different shapes according to the value of Edges. The
location, size and shape of the magnet slots are defined by dimensions D0, MSlotWid, LM, and Edges,
except that if Edges = Bridged they are defined by BetaM, Bridge, and LM. Note that Bridge is
measured inwards from a circle of radius Rad1 (not R_rpf). The rotor surface can be profiled using
R_rpf, R_qpf and QHub. If any of these last three dimensions is zero, PC-BDC will use a default value.
Slits can be used in the pole-faces.
Fig. 229 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2, DimGroup = Alter 1, Polarity = Conseqnt: Edges = Bridged. The
cavity at the edge of the magnet has an angle that can be adjusted using NotchAng.
Fig. 228 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2, DimGroup = Alter 1: consequent-pole rotor obtained with Polarity
= Conseqnt.
Note : all IPM rotors should be calculated with the i-psi GoFER and/or the embedded PC-FEA solver
(ipsiCalc = PC-FEA), especially when the geometry departs from the simplest standard cases. Rotor
weight and inertia calculations may be approximate in such cases.
Fig. 230 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type2, DimGroup = Alter 1: 2-pole rotors showing the dimensioning
associated with different Edges. In the upper row, D0 > 0 and there are two separate magnets. In the
lower row, D0 = 0 and the two magnets are combined into a single magnet whose length is 2 LM in
the direction of magnetization. Only one quadrant is shown in each case.
Fig. 231 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type 2, DimGroup = Alter 1: a slightly enlarged view of complete 2-pole
rotors with a single magnet, obtained by setting D0 = 0. The different configurations at the edges of the
magnet are obtained with Edges. Slits can be used with this geometry.
The 2-pole rotors shown in Figs. 230 and 231 are mainly of theoretical interest, because they are
geometrically simple and yet they show most of the fundamental characteristics of the brushless
permanent-magnet machine.
Web
Magnet
D
C
J
A F B E
G
LM
Bridge
RadSh
D0
Rad1
BetaM
[Ryoke]
[MEdge]
[hq]
[wMag]
[wNeck]
Fig. 232 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type3. The effective magnet width Effwm is twice the average of arcs BC
and AD. The effective magnet length is taken as LM for magnetic circuit calculations, but EffLm is also
available in the calculator or custom output: EffLm is the average of AB and CD.
IPM_3_R_rpf.wpg
1-May-2010
E
I
J
D
B A
G
F
C
H
[wNeck]
[hq]
Rmi
LM
BetaM
2
Bridge
RadSH
D0
[wMag] 1-May-2010
Rad1
R_rpf
Q,R
Rad1
Fig. 233 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type3 : with Rmi > 0 the topology and dimensioning change so that the
magnet length (or thickness) in the direction of magnetization is constant. When R_rpf > 0, the rotor
surface is profiled. Note that the 2-coordinates of points C and I are independent.
E
Rad1
Magnet
G
J
H
K
I
C
B A
S
F
D
IPMHq
MagWid
2
Web
LWeb
BetaM
RadSh
Bridge
[Ryoke]
[hq]
LM
[wMag]
G
J
K
I
C B
S
H
H
G
E
I
K
J
D
V
S
F
B A
T U
2
D0
Gutter
C
Inset
Fig. 234 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type4
Rad1
Magnet
RadSh
LM
C
D
CWeb
B A
E
I
K J
G
H
BetaM
Web
MagWid
Bridge
F
[Ryoke]
[wMag]
[hq]
W
X
V U
IPMHq
wBB
2
MagWid
Fig. 235 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type5. The reference magnet is
shown with a centre web CWeb and a bracing bridge wBB.
Fig. 236 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6 : General specification
Fig. 236 shows the most general geometric specification of the Type6 IPM. (Figs. 237 and 239 show
simpler specifications that make more use of parallels.) The available slot for the outer magnet is IYGH.
I and Y are determined by cartesian dimensions: thus
I = [D0/2,yI]; Y = [D0/2 + Lma,yY].
G and H are determined by Rad1 and Bridge together with the angles beG and beH; thus in polar
dimensions
G =[Rad1!Bridge,180/Poles!beG]; H = [Rad1!Bridge,180/Poles!beH].
The outer magnet VUTS is located by fixing the mid-point of VU at point X, which is the mid-point of IH.
Point X can be shifted by Inset. A positive value for Inset moves point X inwards along IH towards I.
If wmb is too large, PC-BDC clips the edges VS and UT so that V cannot extend beyond I, nor U beyond
H, nor T beyond G, nor S beyond Y.
The direction of magnetization of the outer magnet is set by DoMb. If DoMb = 0, the magnetization is
parallel to the d-axis.
The available slot for the inner magnet is BCYI. B and C are determined by cartesian dimensions: thus
B = [D0/2,Post/2]; C = [D0/2 + Lma,Post/2].
The inner magnet BCJK is located by fixing the edge BC along the bottom of the magnet slot; i.e., the
edge nearest the d-axis and parallel thereto. The edge KJ is normally parallel to BC as shown in Fig. 236,
but if wma is too large, PC-BDC will clip the edge KJ so that K cannot lie above I and J cannot lie above
Y.
The direction of magnetization of the inner magnet is set by DoMa. If DoMa = 0, the magnetization is
parallel to the d-axis.
The parameter names are given a suffix to identify the layer: thus D0_1 is for layer 1 and D0_2 for layer
2, etc.
If FillMag = Filled, both magnets are expanded to fill the entire magnet slot.
If yY is nonzero, Edges must be Bridged.
Fig. 237 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type 6 with rectangular magnets.
Fig. 238 In the IPM Type 6 rotor, the effective pole arc is defined by BetaM, which is arbitrary and should be
adjusted using the finite-element Bgap GoFER. If BetaM = 0, the pole arc is calculated from the G-
coordinate of the innermost layer.
The maximum number of layers is NLayers = 4. For finite-element analysis the layers must be nested
in the order shown. (NLayers =3 in this example).
Fig. 237 shows a simpler specification in which YG is parallel to IH, and offset from IH by the length Lmb
of the outer magnet. (beG is now redundant.) To select this specification with YG parallel to IH, set yY
= 0.
Setting yY = 0 causes PC-BDC to locate point Y as the intersection of CY and YG, where CY is located
by D0/2 + Lma and YG is offset from IH by Lmb.
The outer magnet is now located from point G, with UT and VS both perpendicular to IH and YG. With
Inset = 0, T = G. If wmb is too large and FillMag = NoFill, PC-BDC will clip the edge VS such that V
cannot lie below I and S cannot lie below Y. But if FillMag = Rect, the clipping will keep the magnet
rectangular.
The inner magnet is specified in the same way as in Fig. 236, except that with FillMag = Rect this
magnet remains always rectangular, even if wma is clipped.
Again the direction of magnetization is specified by DoMa and DoMb.
Fig. 239 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6 with rectangular magnets and outer magnet slots parallel to the q-axis.
Fig. 240 Edges with RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6.
Fig. 239 shows the simplest way to specify IPM Type 6.
The outer magnet slots are made parallel to the q-axis by setting yI = 0. This causes PC-BDC to find I
as the intersection of BI and IH, where BI is located by D0/2 and IH is offset from the q-axis by web/2.
The sides IH and YG of the outer magnet slot are made parallel by setting yY = 0, as in Fig. 237.
In all other respects this specification is similar to the one in Fig 237.

Bridge
RA3I
RA3O
RadC3I
(RadC3O)
Post
RadSH
Rad1
IPM_6dg4.wpg
Fig. 241 RotType = IPM; Embed = Type 6; DimGroup = Alter4
E:\MAN\PCBDC\Synchrel_Edges_.wpg
S
Y
P
V
F
E
D
A
1
2
3
4
18+2n
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
Squared Bridged
26+2n
26+2n+1
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
18+2n+1
[1]
S
P
W
Z
Y
X
Q R
U J
L
G
H
T
40+2n!2 [40] [44] [42] [46]
[41] [43] [47] [45]
40+2n!1
1
2
3
4
U T
R Q
Open
S
P
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
Rounded
Z=O
V
Y
P
S
U J=G
T
Q R
L=H
1
2
3
4
35+n
[36]
[37]
[38]
[39]
[48] [49] [50] [51] 47+n
1
2
3
4
R Q
O
V
W=X
Fig. 242 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6, DimGroup = Alter4; detail Edges and VEdges
Fig. 241 shows a pure reluctance machine with no magnets; Magnets = None. It is analysed in exactly the same way
as the PM brushless machine. The only torque is reluctance torque, and there is no open-circuit EMF.
Fig. 243 d-axis channel available with RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6: dChannel = Simple
Fig. 244 d-axis channel available with RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6: dChannel = Notched
Web
NotchAng
LM
B C D
Bridge
A
H
I
P
K
J
G
Q
F
E
q
d
Rad1
RadSh
Magnet
MagWid
R
S
Rib < 0
Rib = 0
Notch
Rib
2
B
E
Straight
Fig. 245 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type 7; DimGroup = Default. If Notch = 0, the notch is omitted.
IPM7dg1F.wpg
Fig. 246 RotType = IPM, Embed = Type 7; DimGroup = Alter 1.
IPM_7dg1.wpg
B1
A1
B2
B1
A1
B2
Detail if
Edges = Rounded
Lmb_2
y_MC
x_MC
Vtrap
2
MC
MC
MSlotWid
2
wmb_1
Inset_1
Detail if
Edges = Open
Detail if
Edges = Bridged
Detail if
Edges = Squared
q1_KH2
q2_KH2
r_KH2
x_KH2 x_KH1
q2_KH1
q1_KH1
Q
Y
S
V
W
D
A
F
Inset
wmA_1
Post_1
2
RScallop
Lma_1
D0
2
REdge MEdgeAng
Lip
wmB_2
Lip
Bridge
Inset_2
Post_2
2
LWeb
fil_FB
NotchAng
2
Notch
Z
B C
U
T V
T
S U
(RScallop = 0 here)
D0
2
Rmc
[WLinkI]
Rmc = 0
here
[WLinkO]
[WNeck/2]
q1_KH1 < q2_KH1
q1_KH2 > q2_KH2
Angles
y_KH1
y_KH2
Fig. 247 RotType = IPM; Embed = Type 7; DimGroup = Alter1 : dimensions
The dimensioning of Fig. 247 gives considerable flexibility in the arrangement of the magnet apertures
and their shapes. IPM7dg1 allows the apertures A1, B1, and B2 to be selected independently. See also
uGd and uGq.
Fig. 248 RotType = InsCP, with Poles = 4
Fig. 249 RotType = InsCP, Embed = Type 1 and Type 2, with magnets enclosed by Rib
Fig. 250 RotType = InsCP, Embed = Type3.
In Fig. 250, With Polarity = Conseqnt, every other pole has magnets, and the poles without magnets are
"consequent", i.e., magnetized by induction. With Polarity = Normal, every pole has magnets and there
are no consequent poles. The number of magnet layers NLayers cannot exceed 4. All magnets and all
magnet slots have the same dimensions. The magnet slots are located along the d-axis by D0_1, D0_2,...
The edges of the magnet slots can be round or square according to the value of MsltRNSQ, but the
moment of inertia and the weight of iron in the rotor are always calculated as if the edges were square.
However, the magnet slot area AmagSlot is calculated exactly, and increases slightly when
MslotRNSQ = false (square edges).
D0 and Inset should be adjusted so that all the magnets lie within the "necked" section of the lamination,
otherwise the magnets will be magnetically short-circuited. The calculations in PC-BDC assume that
they lie in this section, and the boundary-node assignment in the GoFER assumes likewise.
Fig. 251 RotType = InsRel, with Poles = 2
FH
C
B A
G
Rad1
LM
Magnet
Fig. 252 RotType = FullRing.
The airgap inductance Lg for a motor with this rotor type is calculated using the "Hague" method since
it is derived from theory in Ref. [5]. If RCore = Air the hole is assumed to be nonmagnetic even if a shaft
is present. If RCore = Iron, the hole is assumed to be filled with infinitely permeable material.
Fig. 253 Line-start PM rotor, RotType = LSIPM, showing two variants with rectangular and arc-shaped
magnets, respectively (Embed = Type 1 and Type 2)..
Fig. 254 Line-start PM rotor, RotType = LSIPM, showing a third variant with arc-shaped magnets, Embed =
Type 3. The only difference between this and Embed = Type 2 is that the flux-barriers at the edges of
the magnets span three rotor slot-pitches instead of only one.
Fig. 255 Line-start rotor, RotType = Trapeze, shown with Embed = Type1. Detail at right shows the use of
BetaM to define the pole arc when RBarType = rbNone. A d-axis slit is shown in the right-hand pole
only. For details see Figs. 256 and 257.
Fig. 256 RotType = Trapeze; detail showing different Embed types.
Fig. 257 Detail of Trapeze-type rotor, including rotor slot (right).
Fig. 258 RotType = Trapeze, Embed = Type4
WebAngle
QWeb/2
CWeb/2
!Inset
LM fil_FB
REdge
filWeb
FBq
Vtrap/2
RScallop
REdge
LM
!Inset
!Inset !Inset
CWeb/2

CWeb/2 CWeb/2
Vtrap/2
Vtrap/2 Vtrap/2
WebAngle
LM
LM
Lip
Ledge
RScallop
REdge
Box
Ledge
Lip
BoxEdge
Edges = Open Edges = Bridged
Edges = Rounded Edges = Squared
VEdges = Rounded
WebAngle = 0
VEdges = Bridged
VEdges = Open
U V
R
O
W
X
Z
Y
R O
W
X
Z
Y
U
O=V
W
X
Z
Y
R=U
R
O
W
X
Z
Y
P
N
Q
H I
K
L
M
CMO
CMI
Q
K
L
P
CMO
CMI
P
L
Q
K
CMI
CMO
Q
P
L
N
M
G
I
H
K
CMI
CMO
VEdges = Bridged or Squared
Trapeze_4_Edges.wpg
Does not use
MslotWid
MslotWid = UQ
MslotWid = UQ MslotWid = UQ
E
D
or Squared
Fig. 259 RotType = Trapeze, Embed = Type4. Different Edges and VEdges.
(a)
Gross punched area
(b)
Aslot
AslotLL
with TopStick
(c) (d)
AslotLL
no TopStick
(e) (f) (g) (h)
AslotLL
with TopStick
and TopWedge
AslotLL
no TopStick
with TopWedge
SFn array is calculated slot-by-slot, taking
into account the phase separator.
Maximum SFn is also identified.
AslotLL and SFn are not affected by the
phase separators.
Phase
separator
Top
wedge
TopStick
Liner
Top
wedge
Area = ATStick
Fig. 260 Definition of slot area. The Liner is shown in diagrams (c)!(h), and the TopStick in diagrams (c), (e)
and (g).
(a) Gross punched area, GPASlot.
(b) Aslot.
(c) AslotLL when TopStick = true.
(d) AslotLL when TopStick = false.
(e) Wedges with TopStick = true.
(f) Wedges with TopStick = false.
(g) As (e), but with phase separator
(h) As (f), but with phase separator
The phase separator has no effect on the global value of AslotLL, but it does affect the slot-by-slot values of SFg and
SFn in the winding-editor list. MaxSFn is the maximum value in this list, i.e. for the fullest slot.
3.5.4 Windings
Fig. 261 Dimensions of top wedge and phase separator
Fig. 263 Definition of TC, NSH, Layers, NSH and "coilside"
Fig. 262 TopStick. If filSO = 0, the topstick dimensions are defined by the slot vertices; otherwise they must be
entered as the width and height of a rectangle.
The cross-sectional area of the wedge is calculated as TwjThk * (TwjWid + 2 TwjLeg). Similarly the
cross-sectional area of the phase separator is calculated as PhsThk * (PhsWid + 2 PhsLeg).
T
c
T
c
T
ph
=
Coils/pole No. of poles T
c
Parallel paths
=
160 2 4
2
= 640
T
c
T
c
T
c
T
c
T
c
Coils/Pole = 2
Parallel paths a = 2
Coils/phase = 8
T
c
Turns in series/phase
T
c
= 160
I
ph
I
ph
Each turn (and each conductor) carries the current
a
One turn = 2 conductors ("go" and "return")
Total No. of conductors Z = T
ph
2 N
ph
a
Turns/Coil = T
c
One coil
AC motor stator showing one phase winding (of 3)
One phase (of 3)
Internal
star point
Main
terminal
= 640 2 3 2 = 7,680
Phase
belt
WdgType
TC
CPP
Offset
Throw
Phase
Harmonic
160
2.000
4
5
1
0
Fig. 264 Winding definitions
Fig. 265 Slot numbering
Fig. 266 Bifilar winding
Fig. 267 End-winding configurations showing the calculated end-turn lengths according to the
value of ETCalc.
The examples in Fig. 267 show coils with Throw = 1 and 2 together with the end-turn lengths according
to ETCalc. The end-turn length can be adjusted with XET, and the end-turn inductance with XLendt
and XL.
A1 and A2 : ETCalc = BDC 4.0 (coilsides are on slot centrelines, giving longer end-turn length
and higher inductance)
B1 and B2 : ETCalc = BDC 4.7 or BDC 6.0 (coilsides are snug against slot wall, giving shorter
end-turn length and lower inductance)
Note that PC-BDC assumes that the coilsides have a square cross-section in the calculation of end-turn
inductance Lendt (SEM-2 [1]).
Vs VCdc
iDC
Cdc
R_s Rdc
Ldc
0
ICdc
iLdc
iA iB iC
e1
i1 i2 i3
e2 e3
Rph
Lph
Rac
Lac
Q1 Q3 Q5
Q4 Q6 Q2
D1 D3 D5
D4 D6 D2
Frame
Leads
v1
Vt
iRec
A B C
vAB
Fig. 268 Electrical circuit, WYE connection. The filter components Ldc, Cdc, Rdc are active only when
Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB or SixStep. In other cases, the DC source circuit includes
only Vs and R_s
3.5.5 Drive circuits and controls
Vs VCdc
iDC
Cdc
R_s Rdc
Ldc
0
ICdc
iLdc
iA iB iC
e1
i1 i2 i3
e2 e3
Rph
Lph
Rac
Lac
Q1 Q3 Q5
Q4 Q6 Q2
D1 D3 D5
D4 D6 D2
Frame
Leads
v1
Vt
iRec
A B C
vAB
Fig. 269 Electrical circuit, DELTA connection. The filter components Ldc, Cdc, Rdc are active only
when Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl = ISP_HB or SixStep. In other cases, the DC source circuit
includes only Vs and R_s.
Vs VCdc
iDC
Cdc
R_s Rdc
Ldc
0
ICdc
iLdc
iA
e1
i1
Rph
Lph
Rac
Lac
Q1 Q3
Q4 Q2
D1 D3
D4 D2
Frame
Vt
iRec
A B
v1
Leads
Fig. 270 Electrical circuit, 1-, 2- and 3-phase controllers (only one phase is shown). If Connex = 2-Phase, the H-
bridge comprising transistors Q1Q4 is duplicated for phase 2, which is electrically independent of
phase 1. If Connex = 3-Phase, a third H-bridge is added, and the phases remain electrically
independent. The filter components Ldc, Cdc, Rdc are active only when Drive = Sine and Sw_Ctl =
ISP_HB or SixStep. In other cases, the DC source circuit includes only Vs and R_s.
Fig. 272 Three-phase rectifier circuit with Drive = Rectifier and Connex = Wye.
Fig. 271 Rectifier circuit for one phase, or for independent multiple phases
Fig. 273 "Single-ended" or unipolar circuit, used with Connex = n-Ph Uni and Bifilar = false (one phase); or
Connex = 3-Ph Uni. (See Fig. 275)
Fig. 275 Electrical circuit, 3-phase unipolar. Diodes in series with the phase windings prevent spurious
conduction in the Rd loop. They can be included or omitted by means of UBkDiode.
Fig. 274 Single-ended bifilar drive circuit with Zener diode suppression circuit, used with Connex = n-Ph Uni
and Bifilar = true. The number of phases (NphUni) is either 2 or 4.
1
1'
1
1'
2
2'
1
1'
1
1'
2
2' 2 2'
4 4'
3
3'
Bifilar = False
NphUni = 1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Bifilar = True
NphUni = 2
Bifilar = False
NphUni = 2
Bifilar = True
NphUni = 4
Fig. 276 Arrangement of phase coils with different settings of Bifilar and
NphUni
Vs
Rs
Vs
Rs
No mutual
coupling
1 2
Bifilar = False
NphUni = 2
Bifilar = False
NphUni = 1
1 2
Vs
Rs
Bifilar = True
NphUni = 2
1
Tight coupling
kBif ' 0@98
3 1
Tight coupling
kBif ' 0@98
Vs
Rs
Bifilar = True
NphUni = 4
1
Tight coupling
kBif ' 0@98
4 2
Tight coupling
kBif ' 0@98
No mutual
coupling
(a)
(b) (d)
(c)
Fig. 277 Arrangement of drive circuits with different settings of Bifilar and NphUni. For more details
of the drive circuits see Figs. 273 and 274.
Fig. 278 Generator circuit : single phase with AC Load
Fig. 279 Generator circuit : 2-phase with AC load
Fig. 280 Wye-connected PM generator with AC load
Vs
Start Run
Aux
Main
Vs
Vs
Vs
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
Is Is
Is
Is
Fig. 281 Electrical circuit : line-start motor. (a) Connex = 3-Ph Wye; (b) Connex = 3-Ph Delta; (c) Connex = 2-
Phase; (d) Connex = SplitPh.
Fig. 282 6-phase winding ; Connex = 6-phase
Fig. 283 4-phase winding; Connex = 4-phase
Fig. 284 5-phase winding; Connex = 5-phase
Multi-phase windings
Fig. 285 Waveform alignment : 1-phase. The drive circuit is of the form of Fig. 270.
3.5.6 Ideal waveforms
90E
Line Current
& EMF
30E
1
2
1
2
Chopping diode
Chopping transistor
e e
1
e
1
i
0 90 180 270 360
2
e
2
i
line ph
=
i
line
i
ph
=
Q2
D3
Commutating transistor
Commutating diode
&
&
duty-cycle d
duty-cycle 1-d
ISP
ISP
ISP
ISP
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Transistor and diode currentsphase 1
Q1
Q2
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
D4
Q1
Fig. 286 Waveform alignment : 2-phase. Each phase has a separate drive circuit of the form of Fig. 270.
Fig. 287 Waveform alignment : 3-phase unipolar.
Fig. 288 Waveform alignment : 3-phase wye connection. (See Fig. 268).
Fig. 289 Waveform alignment : 3-phase delta connection. (See Fig. 269).
30 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330
i
a
elec
Line current
C 120 Q1
C 60 Q1
V 120 Q1
C 120 Q6
C 60 Q6
V 60 Q6
Q5 Q1 Q3 Q5
Q6 Q2 Q4
Current chopping
Chopping diode
Voltage PWM
On continuously
Q1
D4
Q1
D4
Q1
D4
Q6
D3
Q6
D3
Q6
D3
Fig. 290 Effect of switching strategy on mean and RMS currents (3-phase squarewave controllers)
Fig. 291 Waveform alignment : n-phase unipolar. The drive circuit is of the form of Fig. 274.
> 0
I
d
< 0
q
< 0
I
d
> 0
(b) (a)
d
q
Fig. 292 Phasor diagrams : (a) Nonsalient pole motor with > 0; (b) Nonsalient pole motor with < 0.
d
q
I
d
> 0
< 0 < 0
d
q
I
d
< 0
> 0
(b) (a)
Fig. 293 Phasor diagrams : (a) Salient-pole motor with > 0 (demagnetizing); (b) Salient-pole motor with <
0 (magnetizing).
q
d
q
d
(b) (a)
Fig. 294 Phasor diagram : salient-pole generator. (a) lagging power factor; (b) leading power factor.
q
d
Fig. 295 Phasor diagram : salient-pole generator in the "underexcited" condition, with demagnetizing current
I
d
in the d-axis producing a negative q-axis component of armature-reaction voltage jX
d
I
d
. Note E < V.
Fig. 296 Thermal model with TempCalc = DegCW
Fig. 297 Thermal model with TempCalc = ThRcct
3.5.6 Thermal
Fig. 298 Hot10 thermal model. This model is activated as part of the Dynamic design calculation when
TempCalc = Hot10. See pp. 8, 191. Nodes A, U and V are infinite heat-sinks.
Fig. 299 Axial view of frame etc. ; RotType = ExtRad, ExtPll
Fig. 300 Shape of armature end-winding for heat transfer calculations
Fig. 302 Radial view of frame, showing fins
Fig. 301 Axial view of frame
PC-BDC 9.04 3.6 Recommended settings Page 353
3.6 Recommended settings
These settings are recommended for the safest and least complex usage of PC-BDC. They include
program options and adjustment-factors. Many adjustment parameters are experimental or rarely used;
some are even obsolete, but are retained for compatibility with old datafiles. As for the greyed-out
parameters, it is recommended not to use them at all. It is also essential to read the Tutorials and SEM.
If Drive = Square
Sw_Ctl C60_Q6
ChopType Soft
RTorq On
dq0 false. However, if you are trying to model a salient-pole motor with a
squarewave drive, dq0 must be true. In this case PC-BDC solves the differential
circuit equations in dq axes.
If Drive = Sine
Sw_Ctl ISP_HB and dq_VV_CR are the simplest. See Tutorial B09.
dq0 Must be true for salient-pole machines. Otherwise false. Some Sw_Ctl options
require dq0 = true.
FixfChop ISChop12 is the simplest. Read Tutorial B09.
fChop 0. See FixfChop in the main manual. Read Tutorial B09.
Tol_ISLA Auto
RTorq On
In general
ISLA 64
Tol Generally Tol should be set to a reasonably high value (e.g., 32) to ensure that the
Dynamic design solution has indeed settled and that the DC offset in the switch-on
transient has indeed decayed to a negligible level. However, sometimes the current
ripple may exceed the tolerance band (for example, if if Tol > HBA with hysteresis-
type current regulators). In such cases it may be necessary to reduce Tol to relax
the convergence criterion. (Tol is defined as the reciprocal of the tolerance band).
See Cycles.
Cycles 0. But if you are having difficulty with convergence in Dynamic design, try using
a finite number such as 20 or 50. When Drive ' Rectifier, it is essential to use a
higher number such as 20 or 50, especially if DCSource ' DCFilter.
EMFcalc BLV if Slots/Poles > 3; otherwise ToothFlux. For airgap windings, use HBMethod
or KFR.
eCalc Auto. To extract the fundamental EMF only, use eCalc = PhiM1
CalcVwfm dPsi/dt
TorqCalc When running Static design with the i-psi GoFER, use PosSeq. When using
Dynamic design, use ei_wfms. Differences should be minor.
eqRevert False.
dqRevert False.
XBrT This is the most direct way to adjust the calculated EMF and all the flux-densities.
It adjusts the effective remanent flux-density of the magnet, so it consistently affects
everything that depends on the remanent flux-density of the magnet, such as the
flux-densities in the teeth and yokes.
Page 354 3.6 Recommended settings PC-BDC 9.04
XLM 1
Bk Set this to the knee-point of the BH curve of the magnet at the current operating
temperature.
Bracing 0
Shim 0
Fringing ON
XFringe 1. Use this (sparingly) to adjust the B
tooth
waveform when using the GoFER. Unlike
the other X-factors, this one can have a value significantly larger than 1, although
values far from 1 may mean that something else needs to be adjusted.
XBetaM 1. Use this (sparingly) to adjust the B
tooth
waveform when using the GoFER. Its
effect is weak and it is better to use XFringe.
BgProfil Full
RCore Iron
NHx 21 or 100
NHxL equal to NHx
BTSR False, True or CSpline: the best choice should be determined by using the B
tooth
GoFER. Use with NBTSR = 32 or higher, especially when the slots/pole is small.
Used only with EMFCalc = ToothFlux.
WstCalc New
Xrl 1. Use Xrl with surface-magnet motors to adjust the rotor leakage, providing an
alternative (but indirect) means of adjusting the EMF. In surface-magnet motors,
increasing Xrl decreases the leakage and tends to increase the EMF. In interior-
magnet motors, the effect of Xrl is weak, and bBsat should generally be used
instead. Note that in this case an increase in Xrl increases the leakage and
decreases the EMF). Under load, Xrl will change, but adjustments using the i-psi
GoFER usually are restricted to XBrT, XCd and XCq, so Xrl tends to be used only
on open-circuit when checking the EMF.
u_LKG 0. Mainly used with interior-magnet motors.
bBsat 0. Use with IPM to get the correct rotor leakage. Don't be afraid to use 3 or 4 if
necessary, or lower values such as 0@5.
apEnd 1
CalcSatn Fixed. This is a legacy parameter from pre-finite-element days. Use PC-FEA and
the i-psi GoFER for on-load calculations.
XSatn 1
SatnTol 0
Xks 0
XL 1. Use this only with surface-magnet motors. For salient-pole motors, use XCd and
XCq instead. PC-BDC is generally accurate with unsaturated inductance, so any
adjustment should be small, unless the machine geometry is "unusual".
XCd Adjust using the i-psi GoFER. See Tutorial B14.
XCq Adjust using the i-psi GoFER. See Tutorial B14. Values as low as 0@3 are possible.
The differential leakage should track the synchronous reactance : see DiffSat.
DiffSat Auto_dq.
XLdiff Some motors (e.g. the 12/10) have high differential leakage even when unsaturated,
because of high MMF harmonics. The differential leakage is prone to saturate in
salient-pole IPM machines, and if DiffSat = Auto_dq with MatchFES ' AdjMEC,
the d- and q-axis values will diverge. If DiffSat = XLdiff, keep XLdiff = XCq.
PSSlot PC-IMD is generally the most accurate method, but S-Closed is usually OK. If
open slots are used, use Open.
Saliency Auto
Lext 0
ETCalc BDC 6.5 or 8.0
XET This must be adjusted against test data to get the correct phase resistance and
weight of wire.
XLendt 1
CalcLdLq Auto
SpreadSO true
Xspan 1
CalcLg All methods should give the same result. The different methods were developed
to check against each other.
X_R 1
SlotMod HH
CalcCogg Off. The cogging torque calculation is approximate. Use the finite-element
GoFER if you want a better estimate.
XSlotMod 1. Use the B
gap
GoFER to make adjustments.
alpha_s 0 (automatic) or 1@6. Use the B
gap
GoFER to make adjustments.
XCogg 1
X_EMF 1. Although X_EMF can be used to adjust the EMF, it has the disadvantage that it
does not make corresponding adjustments in flux-densities etc., so any adjustment
by X_EMF may introduce inconsistencies in the flux densities. It is better to
adjust the EMF using XBrT, XBtpk, XTTarc, XTw or Xrl instead.
XBgap 1
XBtpk,
XTTarc
1. Use these for matching the B
tooth
waveform from finite-element calculations
especially when the number of slots/pole is small. (Anything less than 1@5 is
"small"). See p. 130ff, and Tutorial B08.
Xrm 0@5
XRYoke 1
XLry 1
XSYoke 1. Useful for adjusting Bsy in MatchFE, B
gap
.
XLsy 1
ukCL 1
XTw 1. Useful for adjusting Bst in MatchFE, B
tooth
.
ufz 0
LamThk As used in the actual machine
CalcVer The highest available
XRx 0. In cases of convergence problems, try 0@4 or 0@2.
WFeCalc OC is the simplest. Otherwise use Ld_Bwfm, but make sure ISLA is reasonably
high (32 or higher)
XFe 1 if you believe Epstein data. 1@7 is a more conservative value.
LossFE Mech
EndFill 0@5
Plex 1
PolyOffs 0
TempCalc Fixed
ipsiCalc Internal. See Tutorial B19.
WMagCalc Internal
CalcEddy For surface-magnet interior-rotor machines, use IR4 or IR6; for surface-magnet
exterior-rotor machines, use ER2 or ER3; for interior-magnet machines, use
Ldjw. For machines with very large radius, IR4C can be used.
FPLoss For surface-magnet machines, use EqCS; for interior-magnet machines, use Extl.
FreqScan None
pc_Shaft Use zero to begin a calculation, to avoid very small skin-depths in the shaft.
MagSeg NoSeg or Speed_CZ.
f_h 0
Imbalance Balanced
NHxS 39
NHxT 1
PhimBal 0
uTd0NN 0 (for automatic calculation); otherwise 1 or 10 [ms]
LossData True
NPHx For surface-magnet machines, 1. For interior-magnet machines, use 0.
PhiMn 0
nPhiMn 1 or 6
kESpec eLLpk
kTSpec ILpk
26
The displayed value of ISChop in Version 7 would be 12 if fChop = 0. If fChop had a different value, ISChop would change, but it would have
no effect on current-controlled regulators of the hysteresis type.
Special note concerning changes to fChop and FixfChop
The table briefly describes the behaviour of Version 7.x and gives the recommended equivalent settings
in Version 8. Because Version 8 has some new options for specifying the sampling rate, in most cases
the behaviour of Version 7 can be reproduced with more than one set of values in Version 8, according
to user preference. The sampling rate f0 is an explicit variable in the design sheet in Version 8 (but
not in Version 7). Likewise the number of integration steps per carrier cycle, ISChop. Please see also
the entries for fChop, FixfChop, etc. in the main manual, where the relationships between these
parameters are explained.
Drive FixfChop fChop Behaviour in version 7 Behaviour in Version 8
Sine "No" Uncontrolled. f0 is set internally
to 720 ISLA Freq1. This is the
maximum possible value, with
ISChop = 1.
FixfChop = No reproduces the behaviour of Version
7.
Alternatively, FixfChop = UCFR
and uCFR = 720 ISLA ;
or FixfChop = Yes
and fChop = 720 ISLA Freq1/10
3
.
"Yes" > 0 f0 ' fChop, determined directly
by user
As Version 7.
Note that
ISChop=720ISLAFreq1/(fChop10
3
)
0 ISChop is set to 12, which is a
simple and suitable choice for
Sw_Ctl = dq_VV_CR
As Version 7.
ISChop12 New option equivalent to FixfChop = YES with
fChop = 0. This setting is so convenient for simple
operation of PC-BDC that it has been given special
status with FixfChop = ISChop12. In this case fChop
is not used, and f0 is set to 60 ISLA Freq1, with a
carrier frequency ratio of 60 ISLA and ISChop =
12.
UCFR Use
uCFR
New option, in which f0 can be specified via the
carrier frequency ratio.
Square
CHys
f0 is set internally to 720 ISLA
Freq1, equivalent to ISChop = 1.
26

Version 8 has the full range of options available with
FixfChop.
To reproduce the behaviour of Version 7, set
FixfChop = No.
Alternatively, FixfChop = Yes
and fChop = 720 ISLA Freq1/10
3
.
Square
VPWM
> 0 fChop controls the carrier
frequency directly, so f0 = fChop.
The transistors switch at this
frequency.
Version 8 has the full range of options available with
FixfChop. When FixfChop = Yes, the behaviour is
the same as in Version 7.
0 ISChop is set to 12, and f0 = 720
ISLA Freq1/12. The transistors
switch at this frequency.
To reproduce the behaviour of Version 7, set
FixfChop = ISChop12.
CHys = Hysteresis-type controllers (Sw_Ctl = C60_Q6, C120_Q1 etc.)
VPWM = Voltage-PWM controllers (Sw_Ctl = V60_Q6, V120_Q1 etc.)
CalcVer
cv11
(Introduced at version 9.1, July 2011)
An improved iteration has been used for adjusting XBrT to match the internal magnetic solver to the
embedded PC-FEA solver when MatchFES = AdjMEC. The new method is activated if CalcVer > cv10.
It is not only faster than the old one, but can cope with very weak magnets in interior-magnet machines
with rotor bridges (sometimes used to model synchronous reluctance machines).
LoadSpec and VDFEA require CalcVer > cv10.
cv10
A small phase-shift (< 0@5E) introduced in the displayed EMF waveform after Dynamic design with Drive
= Sine has been corrected. [15-Feb-10]
cv9
XBtpk is not used in the lumped-parameter calculation of the effective permeance of the stator teeth in
the open-circuit magnetic-circuit calculation. A full description of the effect of XTTarc and XBtpk is
given in Tutorial B08. See the main entries for these parameters on pp. 130ff.
cv8
The algorithm for Lg and Mg has been revised to allow windings with over-pitched coils (i.e., coils
having a span greater than 180E elec.) In versions before 6.5.5.12, the new algorithm could deliver an
incorrect value of Mg (and therefore of Mph) with certain windings, but this problem has been corrected
in versions 6.5.5.12 and later. 3-Jul-05
cv7
XBgap is no longer used to scale the EMF waveform. See main manual.
PhiSY is computed rigorously from the Laplacian solution; otherwise it is taken as PhiG/2. (Config
= AirgapWdg only).
With RotType = IPM, Embed = Type6, k1aq and hence the magnetizing (airgap) component of Xq is
computed using a somewhat complex accumulation including all the layers; otherwise it is computed
using a more approximate method. Likewise the area used to calculate PhiQa is calculated by a more
detailed method.
cv6
If RotType is SurfPll, BLoaf, ExtRad or ExtPll, Amhp is calculated as Nmbp wMag/2 LRotor.
Otherwise it is calculated as rme PoleArc/2 LRotor for SurfPll, ExtRad and ExtPll; or as
Sin(PoleArc/2) Rad1 LRotor for BLoaf.
If RotType = FullRing, f_LKG = 1; otherwise f_LKG = Xrl.
If RotType = IPM and Embed = Type6, the effective bridge width used for calculating the bridge leakage
flux phi_y is set to zero, and phi_y is not calculated explicitly because the bridge leakage is computed
separately for each layer. Otherwise the effective bridge width is set equal to Bridge, even though this
is not one of the dimensions of the Type6 rotor type. In that case Bridge can be used to adjust the bridge
leakage (for example, to match finite-element calculations); but it can only be accessed via a custom
editor.
If RotType = BLoaf or ExtPll the effective magnet length Lme is taken as the average between the
centre-line value and the edge value; otherwise Lme reverts to its previous value of LM.
cv5 etc.
Not used
Page 360 Index PC-BDC 9.04
4. Index
1-phase connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
1- and 2-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
see single-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 244
1-phase waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
1-phaseThird-harmonic injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-phase waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
2-pole rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
2Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 20
3-phase option in Connex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6-Step
see SixStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
a_mb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
a_wmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
ABar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ABarFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Absorbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
AC supply inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AC supply resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
AC Volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
ACond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Acoustic noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
AddC_
additional thermal capacities . . . . . 193, 258
Adjustment factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Aghp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
AGLayers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Ah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
AhR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
AhX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Air leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Air region
in finite-element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Air-cored rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
AirFilm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
adjustment factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
area of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
eccentric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
effective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
flux distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
tapered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Airgap flux distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Airgap flux-density
profile of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Airgap shear stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 261
Airgap torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Airgap winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
AirgapWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 230
AirLiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
alfh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
alfwTd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Alignment
of waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
alpha_s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
alpha6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 153
alphax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
AmagSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 319
Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Amhp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 232
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
of rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
AngOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Annulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 276
apEnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 129
Aperture selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
APhs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Apparent coercivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229
Area
of airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
of conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
of frame surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
of magnet pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
of slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
of slot contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Argand diagram
see Phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
voltage locus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Armature reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 135, 240
ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Aslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 103, 217, 325
AslotLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 217, 325
Asymmetric stator slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ATArc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ATgAng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ATGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ATR_Bal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ATstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 218
ATW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ATwj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Audible beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Augmented tooth arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 211
AugTArc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 211
Auto
see Tol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatic matching
PC-BDC 9.04 Index Page 361
of finite-element results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Automation
of design calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Autosearch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
AuxACond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
AuxExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 12, 103, 245
method of specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
specification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
AuxPaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
AuxSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 103, 205
AuxXET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Average slot depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
AWGFrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
AWGTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Ax1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Axial length
of Rotor : see Lrotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
see Lstk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Axis
of phase winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
AxleCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
B_d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
B_dg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
b_mb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
b_STCFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
b_wmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Back-EMF detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Back-EMF sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 164
Balanced operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Balanced winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
BalWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
BareDia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
BarExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Bars
area of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
in cage winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
weight of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Base segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
bBsat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Bd_m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Bd_RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Bearing loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Beep
during embedded FE calculations . . . . . 146
beta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Beta_FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
BetaM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 274
Bg1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bg1/BgOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bg1Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Bg1OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BgA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BgA/BgOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bgap
profile of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BgAvOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BgMod0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
BgMod1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
BgMod2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
BgOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BgProfil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BHmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BHmagMGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BHmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
see BHmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bifilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 163, 336
BifTeeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Bifurcated teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Bk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 212, 228, 231
Black/white colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Blocked rotor
see Locked rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Blocking diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
BlowCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
BLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
BLV/Unbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Bm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
BmC180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
BmLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
BmLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
BmOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Bqad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
BqAvg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Br . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Bracing bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 128, 303
BrdgLkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
BreadLoaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
BreakIT
see Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
BrhR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
BrhX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Bridge
bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
stress in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Bridge leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 127, 232
Broken-up current waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
BrT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 212
BrTEff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118, 212
Bry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Bslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Bst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 136, 229
and tooth width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
magnetic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bst_MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 230
bStress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Bsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 230
Bsy_MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121, 230
Bt1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
BthR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
BthX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Btooth GoFER
effective tooth width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Btpk_Ld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Btpk_LdS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 233
Btpk_OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
BTscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BTSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Buried magnet motor
see Embed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Bypk_LdS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
BYscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
C-Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
C-type control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
C_
thermal capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
C_120_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C_120_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C_60_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C_60_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
C_Bal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
C_Brg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
c_mb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
C_motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 258
C_RFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 44
C_SFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
C_start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 44, 206
C_TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
C120_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
C120_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
C60_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
C60_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cables
see Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 91
weight of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
CalcBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
CalcCogg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
CalcFAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CalcLdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CalcLdLq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 111
CalcLg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
CalcLme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
CalcSatn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
CalcVer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
CalcVwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 169, 250
Can
losses in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Can losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 178, 186
CanStyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 186
CanThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 187
Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
in line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
initial voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
required for balanced operation . . . . . . . 245
Capacitor motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 58
CapThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 193
Carrier frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154, 156, 214
Carrier frequency ratio
user-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Carter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Carter coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 232
effect of vent ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
CBr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Cdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Centrifugal force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
CForce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chamfer
at edge of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
LamShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Chamfered magnets
and use of GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ChAngle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 315
CHc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
ChDepth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 315
ChfAng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Chopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 164
hard/soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ChopType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
UPG mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ChX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
ChY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Circ.Chf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Circle
phase control of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Circle tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 330
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Closed
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Closed slots
effect on harmonic winding factors . . . . . 36
Closure
see Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Coercivity, apparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229
Cogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
cogging torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
effect of saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Coil list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
in winding editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coil pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Coil sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Coil span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Coil throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CoilFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Coils
interconnection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Coils per pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Coils/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Coilside
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Coilside model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Colour fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Compaction
of end-turns : see EndFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Composite conductors
area of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
See Wire specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ConcEqual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ConcSine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Conduction interval
see Dwell, Th0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Conduction, thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Conductivity
of can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
of conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
of lamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
of main winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
of rotor bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
of stator conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
of wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
Conductor area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Conductor location vector
in winding editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Conductors
total no. of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connectors
see Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Connex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 97
3-Phase option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SplitPh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Consequent-pole magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 307
see Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Consequent-pole windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ConstRPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 252
in circuit calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
CoolRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Copper loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
positive and negative sequence . . . . . . . 246
Core loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 235
elements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
in design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
see Iron Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Core-loss resistance
cp_
specific heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cross-magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cross-saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cross-section editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CRsat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
CsidesPh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ct_Lam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
ct_Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 198
ct_Wins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Current
set-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Current
in transistors and diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
RMS fundamental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
set-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Current density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Current limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Current probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Current regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Current regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152
saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Current ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Current waveforms
broken-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Current-sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Currents
transistor and diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Custom design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Custom winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Custom wire table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 44, 206
CWeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 305, 310
CWmb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
d-axis channel
in IPM, type 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
D2L calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Damping resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
DC link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
DC offset transients
see Tol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
DC source inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
dChannel
d-axis channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
DCSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
DDFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
DegCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 254
see TempCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 239, 246, 248
Delta connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 331
delta_a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
delta_m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
delta_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Demagnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 228
Demagnetization curve
knee-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
DensBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Density
of rotor can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
of stator can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
DensRCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
DensSCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Describing function
of Rowan and Kerkman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
dGap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
DHub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Diameter
of wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Differential leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 108, 219
DiffSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
DimGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 306
Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
current in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Diode currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Dip-sweeping
calculation of can loss . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189
Direct
see CalcVwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Direct torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Discontinuities
in waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Displacement factor
see power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Display points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Distribution factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 224
DMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
dPsidt
see CalcVwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
dq inductance matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
dq-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
dq_VV_CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
dq0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 152
and flux-linkage waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . 54
dqRevert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 11, 150
1- and 2-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
bifilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
single-ended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
squarewave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
unipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 336
Drive = AC Volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive = square
with salient-pole motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
dskinH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
dskinM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
dskinRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
dskinSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 163
DTCMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
dTmaxV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DuCy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 214
DuCycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Dummy slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Duplex winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Duration
in thermal calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
of starting calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Duty cycle
of current-regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Duty-cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 40
thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DXF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DXF file export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
DY1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DY2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Dynamic design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
with Drive = AC Volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
with Drive = AC Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dynamic simulation graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
E_pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
eCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 138
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 138
Eddy-current loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
in magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
methods of calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Eddy-currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
eDet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 164
Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 305, 313, 314
Eff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
EffDCSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 252
Effective airgap length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Effective magnet length Lme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Effective tooth width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 250
EffLst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Effwm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
EffWst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 229, 231, 280
ei_wfms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 237
Electical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
wye connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Electric Machine Design Using SPEED and Motor-
CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Electrical
see LossFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Electrical circuit
1- and 2-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
delta connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Electromagnetic torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Elements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
eLLpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Embed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 92
line-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Embedded finite-element solver . . . . . . . . . 7, 68, 167
automatic matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Embedded magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
EMDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 273
EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 114, 231
method of calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
RMS fundamental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 239
EMF constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
EMFCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 36, 113, 131
Emiss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 200
End winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
leakage reactance in line-start motor . . 203
End-cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
End-ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
weight of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
End-turn compaction
see EndFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
End-turn inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
End-turn length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EndCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
EndFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EndLeak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Energy conversion loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Energy product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Eq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 220, 239, 247
Eq1_FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Eq1_FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Eq1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Eq1tfw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Eq1u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
eqRevert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Equivalent circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Equivalent wye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 58
ERA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ERA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ERDens1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ERDens2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ErecAv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ErecRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 252
ErrorMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
see Tol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
ERthk1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ERthk2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Essons output coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
ET_rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
ETCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
eTmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Expo (BgProfil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 206
ExtBgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ExtBLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ExtEMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Exterior-rotor motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
and Nmbp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
External data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
External file
of waveform data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
External waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ExtPll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ExtRad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ExtTFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
EY_rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
f_h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
f_LKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128, 232
f0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
F155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fault calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 270
Fc_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
fChop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 154, 156
Fda1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
FEAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
FEBeep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
FEEMFwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
FEPoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
FEShow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
FEUPpsi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
FFArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 259
fhMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
fhMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
FieldCpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
File formats manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 102
File types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fillet
radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
filSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 288
filSB_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
filSB_B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
filSB_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
filSB_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
filSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 285
Finite-element
calculation of core loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
embedded solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
transient solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 259
FinThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fixed
see TempCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
FixfChop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
table of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
FixTMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Flared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Flowchart
for rotor losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Flux
in slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
in stator yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Flux per pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Flux pulsation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 266
harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Flux pulsation loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Flux-density
fundamental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
in magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
in stator teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 232
in stator yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
remanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 212
Flux-dip-sweeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189
Flux-gathering arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Flux-linkage waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Flux-MMF diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
FluxDip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Force
centrifugal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
unbalanced magnetic pull . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Forced convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fourier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fourier analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
of voltage and current waveforms . . . . . . 54
see Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
FPLoss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
FracSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
FrDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
fRect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Freewheeling current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Freewheeling diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Freq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
FreqScan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
for line-start motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 235
Fringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
axial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FrLgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 193
FrThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 193
fs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
FSArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 199, 253
fSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Fudge factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Full (BgProfil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Full-ring magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
FullRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 124
FullSpec
see Auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Function
of PC-BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Functions
Custom design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fundamental distribution factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fundamental pitch factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fundamental skew factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fundamental winding factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
fz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 211, 219, 224
Fz_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fz_RCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fz_SCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fzc_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
G_d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
G_dq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
G_q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 153, 239, 248
gamma_eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
gammaACV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 248
Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 274
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
see Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 220
GDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 62
GDF Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Generating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 21, 23, 150, 234
Generating and rectifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
rectifier circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
gLead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Glue line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 212
GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 5, 28, 62, 109, 131, 228
finite-element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
i-psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
GolfTee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 286
Gorges diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 38
GPAslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Gq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 220
Gross slot-fill
see SFg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
gTmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
gTrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 315
gZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
h_05, h_07,...
harmonic injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
h0_F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 199
h0_N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 199
H155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Halbach array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Halbach magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Half-turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hard chopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
HarmBgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Harmonic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Harmonic leakage
see Differential leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Harmonic spread factor
of slot openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Harmonics
in magnet flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
in torque/speed characteristic . . . . . . . . 207
injection of currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
see Space harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
see Time harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HB% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
HBA_Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
HBalTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
HBGeom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
HBMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
hBq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
HBtype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Hc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Hca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229
HcT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Heat extraction
forced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Heat flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Heat sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Heat transfer coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 254
HeatFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Heavy-build insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
HexSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
HexTrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
phase control of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Hk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 231
Hm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
HmC180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HmLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
HmOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Holes
in stator lamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
HoleSym1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 277
HoleSym2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 277
Hoop stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Hot10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
see TempCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
thermal parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Hot10 thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Hot10ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
HotInit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
hPsiSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
hq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
HR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 277
HR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HR4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
HTCcyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 254
HTCend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 254
HTCend, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
HTCount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
HtFinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
hTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
hTSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
hTstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HWFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
HX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HX4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HY2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HY3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HY4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hysteresis loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Hysteresis-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 152
adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
hZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
i-psi diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
i-psi loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
spurious ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
i_Absorb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
i_Absorp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
i_Disspn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
I_hpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
i_Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195, 256
I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
i1_ang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
I1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
I1q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
I1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
i2_ang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
i3_ang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Iaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
IauxBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
IBk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 212, 231
IC180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
ICdcRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Id_min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Id1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 239, 248
Id1eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IDC_P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
IDC_W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Idsc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
if_Lkg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
IGain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
IL_base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ILdcAv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ILdcRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ILdcRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
ILR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Imain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 183
Impedance
positive and negative-sequence . . . . . . . 249
IncHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IncShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
IncVirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 219
adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
and CalcLdLq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DC source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
of AC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
of end-turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 203
of leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
structure of calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
with frozen permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Inductance matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
effect of slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
of load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Initial temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
InsClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
InsCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
InsRel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
InsThick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
InsThk2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
InsThkA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Insulation
heavy-build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Insulation class
see InsClass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Integration algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Integration-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
in thermal calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Intended use
of PC-BDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Interior-magnet motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
line-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IntStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Iph1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 248
Iph1_eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
and bridge leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
bridge leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
IPM7dg1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IpsiCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ipsiStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Iq_min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Iq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 153, 239, 248
Iq1eq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IrecAv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IrecPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IrecRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Iron loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 235
element-by-element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
elements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
rescaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
torque of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Is . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 247
IsBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ISChop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ISLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 168
ISLA_Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 236
ISP_Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ISP_HB
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ISPbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
ISPd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ISPq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ISPSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
IT_
initial temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Iter+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
IterX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
JhR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
JL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Jrms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 247
JrmsAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
k_gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
k_rpf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
k1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
k1ad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
k1aq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kAlphad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kBif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
kd1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kdD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
kE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
kESpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
KFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 122
KGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Kinematic viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Knee-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 228, 231
kp1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kPhi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
krpmNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 231
ks1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kSat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 230
ksg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kSwOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
kSwON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
kT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
and saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
roll-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
kT CALCULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 75
kT_act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
kT_form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
kTSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
kVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
kw1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
kw1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
kw1Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
kZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
L_g0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
L_g2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
L_LL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Laa_d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Laa_q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Lac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 337
Lamination
conductivity of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
No. of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
noncircular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
thickness of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
LamShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 210, 275-277, 288
Annulus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
LamThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 261
Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Latching OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Lawrenson's method
Slot-modulation loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264, 265
LaxPack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Layer
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 327
Ld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 220
Ld'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Ld_Bwfm
see WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Ld_FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Ld_FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Ldc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 252
LDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 219
Ldu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lead inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Lead resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Leads
impedance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128
air and bridge types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
in magnetic bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
of current-regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
zig-zag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Leakage factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 232
Leakage permeance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Leakage reactance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 227
Lendt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 219
Length
of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
of rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
of shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
of stator stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
of turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
over end windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Length of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Lext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
LFin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Lg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 219
and Xspan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Lge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 232
Lgg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LgthOEnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 217
Line current waveforms
ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 13, 91, 205, 322, 323
electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
equivalent circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
starting calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 198
LineStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Lip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 315
LL_d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
LL_q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
LL0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 117, 274
LM+Shim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
LM_min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Lm0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Lmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Lme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 211, 299
LMnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 212
Lmq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
LMslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Load inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Load torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 207, 249
variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
LoadSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
LoadStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Locked-rotor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
loop emf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Loss data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
LossCpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
LossData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
in magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
in rotor can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
in shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 264
in stator can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
LossFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Lph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 219
Lq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 220
Lq'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Lq_FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lq_FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lqu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Lrotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 127, 211, 278
LShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
LShell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Lsigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LSIPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 322
Lslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Lstator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 211, 278
Lstk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 218
of stator stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Lumped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ly1Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ly2Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ly3Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Ly4Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
M-SVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
m_STCFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Machine characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
MagFlush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
MagMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Magnet
effective radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
losses in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
No. of blocks per poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
overhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
width of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Magnet braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 249
Magnet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Magnet length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Magnet losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 178
Magnet permeance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Magnetic circuit calculation
see EMFCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Magnetic circuit design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Magnetic pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Magnetically isolated slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Magnetization
pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Magnetizing reactance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
unmagnetized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MagSeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
MagTaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
MagType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 122
MagWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 305
Main winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Make balanced 2ph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
MatchFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 66, 121, 131
Elements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
skew cogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MatchFES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Materials
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mathematical model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Matrix
inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
MaxAngle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MaxISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MaxIter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MaxSFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 217, 218
MaxSwFrq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
MaxTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Mean length of turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Mechanical
see LossFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
MechLoss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
MEdge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
MEdgeAng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Mg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 219
and Xspan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
mg_a1a2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
mg_a1b2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
mg_a1c2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Mgg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
MidTooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Minimum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
MISlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 287
MIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
MIX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 217
MLT_Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
MMF harmonics
Mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
MOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MOH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 278
MOH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 278
Monofilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
nonsalient pole . . . . . . . . . 15, 18, 150, 152, 219
salient-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 18, 150, 152, 219
sinewound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 224
spoke-type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Motor Design Ltd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motor-CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 219
ms_a1a2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ms_a1b2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ms_a1c2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ms12d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ms12q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ms23d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ms23q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ms31d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ms31q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Msigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Mslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
MslotRNSQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
MslotWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
MTarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
mu_RBody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
mu_RCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
mu_SCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
mu_Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
mu0K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
muBridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 297
Multi-layer IPM
and bridge leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Multi-phase windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 243
in design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Multiple magnet blocks per pole . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 301
Multiple phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 339
Multiple wire sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Multiplex winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 99, 243
Multiplicity
of multiplex winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
muPlug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MuRec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
MuRecEff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118, 212
Mutual inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
n-phase unipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
N_Fins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
n_wmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Natural
symmetrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Natural convection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
NBTSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
NccQ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
NccQ3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
NccQ5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Negative sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249
copper loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Net slot-fill
see SFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
NHDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 57, 84, 113, 122, 124
NHxL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 84, 124
NHxS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
NHxT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
NLams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 261
NLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 207, 249
Nmbp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 211
and exterior rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
NMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
NMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
No-load kRPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
No-load speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Node
thermal node types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Non-uniform airgap
see Tapered airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Noncircular lamination . . . . . . . . . 210, 275, 276, 288
Nonsalient-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 85
see Saliency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Normal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NoSeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Notch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 304
nPhiMn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
NphUni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 163
NPHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
NPWMHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
NQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
NSDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 279
Nse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
NSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 100, 217
NSH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NSH3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 205
NSHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
NTmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
nu_gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Nuisance gap
see PhysShim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
NumPoly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NWFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
OC
see WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
between multiple 3-phase windings . . . . 104
between winding starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
method of checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
of rotor : see Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
OneOHang
slot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Open
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
OpMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Order
of variable-depth slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Origin of coordinates
for phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
for waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Original
symmetrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
outline editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 29
Output
waveform, to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Outside diameter
see Rad3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
OverCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Overexcited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Overhang
of can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Overmodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Overrunning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
P_dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
P_Rdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
P_Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
PadBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
PadShim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Parallel paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 100
auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Parameters
order of appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Park's transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Paths
winding connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
PC-BDC
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PC-FEA
GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PC-IMD
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Pc_Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186, 187
Pc_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 235
pc_RCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
pc_Sh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
PCBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PCDH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 277
PCDH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 277
PCER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PCER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
pcLam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PCslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
PCWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pelec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 242
Pelec1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
pEnd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 232
Per-unit quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
performance calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
static design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Period A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Permeability
of shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Permeance
of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 232
slot leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
slot-leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Permeance coefficient
of stator slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
slot mutual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Permeance harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
losses due to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 248, 251
PGain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Pgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
ph_05, ph_07,...
harmonic injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Phase advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
alpha6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
see gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Phase separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 218
Phase sequence . . . . . . . . . . 12, 33, 35, 50, 100, 171, 245
Phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 58, 239, 244, 347
of split-phase line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . 58
Phasors
reference axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phCI1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phCI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phCV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phCV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phEq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 251
phEq1Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phEq1ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
phI_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
phi_y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
phI1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
phI21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
phIam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phIaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Phida1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
PhiG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
PhiGMod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PhiGMod0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PhiGMod1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PhiGMod2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PhiM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
phImain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
PhImbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
PhiMn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Phiqa1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
phIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 247
phIsBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
PhIScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
PhiSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
phPsi1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PhR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
PhsLeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
PhsThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
PhsWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
phV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
phV21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
phVaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phVmain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
phVs2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
phVs3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
phVZc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
PhX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
PhysShim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 147
phZ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
phZ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pitch factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Plex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 226
PllRound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PllSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PllSquare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PllTooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PlotPole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Plotting
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
PlotTooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
PlotYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Plug
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
PM capacitor motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
PM generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pm0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 232
Points
display in graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
consequent-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 307
Normal and consequent-pole . . . . . . . . . . 319
Pole arc
of multilayer IPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Pole shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
PoleArc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Poles
number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
PolyOffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Pos_Seq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 237
Positive sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 249
copper loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
PosSeq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
of line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Power invariance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Poynting vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
pp_h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
PPATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Prefault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Print
cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
prl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128, 232
prlMOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Profile
of Bgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Profiled magnets
and use of GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Profiled rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 304
Program controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Program organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Pshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 252
Psi1Md . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Psi1Mdu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Psi1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PsiMdFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
PsiMdFES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
PsiSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Pulse-width modulator
see FixfChop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
pupa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 152
see FixfChop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
qFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
R_Bars
in line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
R_Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
R_fa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
R_far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
R_fav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
R_FP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
R_h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
R_LL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
R_pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
R_qf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
R_qff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
R_rpf
and exterior rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
R_run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
R_s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 330
R_SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
R_start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
R_ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
R_ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
R_yfa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
R2d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
R2q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 337
Rad1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 274
Rad2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 274
Rad3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 274
RadBtooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 280
RadC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Radial force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Radial magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Radiation, thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Radius
of fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
of rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
of stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
RadSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 274
RadShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298, 300, 350
RadSine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Ramp comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Ranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 47
Raux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rc_L
see WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Rc_T
see WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Rc_VI
see WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
RCanOH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RCanOH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RCanSecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RCanSeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
RCanTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RCanThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RCore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
RcR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Reactance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 219
differential leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
synchronous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 275
Rect.Rnd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Rectangle rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rectangular wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 23, 150, 240, 333
inductance and capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Mean current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
need for resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
with inductive load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Reference axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Reference position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Regeneration
step-up chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Relaxation factor XRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Reluctance
of airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Reluctance torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
in line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Remanence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Remanent flux-density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 212
REndring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
adjustment factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 206
core-loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
DC source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
of AC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
of auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
of leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
of main winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
of transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
run (auxiliary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
start (auxiliary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Resistivity
of conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
of rotor bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
of wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
see Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 208
Resonance frequency
of DC filter circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
retaining can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
see Can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Rext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
rfa_C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
rfa_C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
rfa_n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
RFei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
RFeType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Rghp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Rib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 127
Ring magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Ripple
in EMF waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Ripple current
in rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
RLL20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Rmain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rmc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Rmi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 294
Rmo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 121
ROH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Roll-off
of kT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
RotJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
effect of slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RotJFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RotJMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RotJSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
RotJSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
rotor reference position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rotor axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Rotor can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Rotor loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Rotor loss flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Rotor reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rotor resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rotor slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Rotor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 85
RotorAng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 224
RotorOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
RotSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
RotType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Line-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Rph0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Rph20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
RPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 242
rpm_wmag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
RPM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
rpmBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
RPMstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 206
Rq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
rqPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
rqPshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
rqTshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
RRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RsNwthy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
RSWdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
RTorq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Run-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
see Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
rx_yf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
RxOffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
RYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 274
RzOffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
S-Closed
see PSSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
s_mbMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 249
Saliency . . . 5, 14, 15, 17, 36, 85, 86, 88, 92, 97, 108, 113,
152, 169, 219, 220, 230, 347
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Salient-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 169
Salient-pole motor
with Drive = square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sampling rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 154, 156, 214
SatnTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 135, 230
effect on torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
of current-regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 215
SCanOH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SCanOH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SCanSecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SCanSeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SCanTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
SCanThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 28
SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 82
SltDpth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
SDS_B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
SDS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
SDS_D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
Sections
of can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Segmentation
of cans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
of magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Selection
of magnet apertures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Self inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
SEM
Speed's Electric Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
sense voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sensorless control
see Back-EMF sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 218
Settling time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
SFg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 35, 102, 217, 325
SFill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
see SFg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
SFillHBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
see SFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
SFn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 35, 102, 103, 217, 325
Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Shaft length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Shaft losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ShAxFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ShDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Shear stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
in airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Shell
exterior rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ShellThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Shim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 212
finite-element region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Short-circuit calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 46, 270
sigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SigMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Simpson's Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Simulation graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sine
sinewave drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sine-triangle voltage-PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 152, 154
Sinewave drive
see Drive, Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sinewave operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Sinewound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 85
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Single-ended drive circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Single-phase bifilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Single-phase machines
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 205
in design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
see Split-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Single-phase synchronous motor
phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sinusoidal EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SixStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 11, 17, 152, 153
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sizing
see D2L calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 114, 224
and slices from cogging-torque GoFER . . 69
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Skew cogging
MatchFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Skew factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 224
Skew leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
SkinIPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Slit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 323
rotor; and inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Slot
rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Slot area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 217
Slot closure
see topstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Slot depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 210
Slot fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103, 217
maximum in any slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Slot flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 231
Slot leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Slot leakage inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Slot liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
contact area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
perimeter of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
thermal conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Slot numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Slot opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
effect on Lg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Slot opening angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Slot permeance coefficient
for mutual inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Slot ripple
loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Slot wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
see also TopStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Slot-passing frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
SlotBot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 283
Slotless winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SlotMod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
SlotOrder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
SlotPeri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
variable-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Slots per pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Slots/pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
small number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Slots/pole/phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Slotting
effect on Bgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
SltDpth
SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
SMC core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
SO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
SOAng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Soft chopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SolDom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
SolTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
SolvMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Space harmonics . . . . . . . . . 124, 178, 179, 207, 264, 267
and eddy-current loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Space-vector modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Specific core loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Specific heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 253, 258
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 242
range in torque/speed calculation . . . . . 169
SPEED kT CALCULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Speed's Electric Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Speed_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Speed_CRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Speed_CZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Speed_Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
SPFBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Split-phase synchronous motor . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 244
Aux winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
auxiliary winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 245
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Split-phase winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
SplitPh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
see single-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Spoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Spread factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
see distribution factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Spreading
of flux in rotor yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Spreadsheet parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SpreadSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
squarewave drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Squarewave drive
see Drive, Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SSArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
SSWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
St.Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Star connection
see Wye connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Start winding
Starting cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Starting calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
duration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 45
switching between start and run . . . . . . 206
Starting devices
1- and 2-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Static design . . . . . . . . 8, 26, 40, 191, 192, 234, 239, 242
Stator can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Stator0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
StatorOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
non-circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
STCFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Steinmetz equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Step load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Step-up chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
used in regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Stf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
STmix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Strand
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Strands-in-hand
No. of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Subtransient coupling coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Subtransient inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Subtransient reactance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 270
Subtransient time-constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 270
user-defined value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Superconducting rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Supply
resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Suppression circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
SurfPll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SurfRad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
SVM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
SVmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 160
SVModX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 18, 152, 153, 160
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 15, 152
SwFreq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 214
SWGTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
SWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 281
SWIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Switching
between start and run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Switching losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Switching time
of transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
SymmCpts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 12, 205, 244
Symmetrical components . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 12, 205, 248
see Sw_Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SynchReg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 18, 152
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Synchrel rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Synchronous inductance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
and CalcLdLq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Synchronous reactance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 220, 224
Synchronous regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Synchronous reluctance machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
rotor geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
simulation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
value of BetaM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
SYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 274
T.Ratio
T_Brg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
T_c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 253, 255
T_f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
t_FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
t_FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
T_Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
T_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
t_q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
T_r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
T_ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
t_TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
t_TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
T_Wdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
T_y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 270
Tang depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Taper
of rotor yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tapered airgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
and use of GoFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tapered gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 87
Taylor number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
TCCBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
TCCER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
TCCER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
TCCMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
TCCWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tcogg_pk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Td'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Td0'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TEF_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
TEF_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tei_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Telephone Influence Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 262
TEMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
TempCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 192, 253, 254
Temperature
of conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Temperature class
of insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Temperature coefficient
of magnet resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
of resistivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 203
Temperature node type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Temperature rise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Template editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 30
TempRise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 253
Tensile stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
TFrho . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 249
method of calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tgap_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tgap1_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tgap2_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tgap3_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
TGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Th0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 153
THD{L-L} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
THD{L-N} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ThDuCy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Thermal analysis
Motor-CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Thermal calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
output parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Thermal capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
additional : see AddC_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
in design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Thermal conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 259
of slot liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Thermal cycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Thermal duty-cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Thermal graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Thermal node types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194, 259
Thermal resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
calculable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
disconnection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
in design sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
of slot liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
thR_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Thermal time-constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
ThermTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Thickness
of can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
of laminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
thm_dt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ThOnTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
thR_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
thR_CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_CY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_FAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ThR_FAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ThR_FAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
thR_RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_TY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
thR_YF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ThRcct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
see TempCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Throw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 100
ThRslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 253
ThTol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 192
TIF{L-L} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
TIF{L-N} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
TIFspec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Time constant, thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Time harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 182, 264, 265, 267
Time-to-settle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
tIntStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
TL0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 207, 249
TL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 207, 249
TLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 67, 237
TLph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 207
TmaxTwdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
TmaxV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Tmbsc0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 249
TmbscMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 249
TminTwdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
tnt_
thermal node types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
To_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
To_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
used with Rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tol_Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
TOL_ISLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 215
Tolerance
in circuit calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
in thermal calculation . . . . . . . 191, 192, 195
on saturation calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
TolVDFEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tooth arc
Tooth flux density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tooth width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
effective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ToothArcMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ToothFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 131
Top wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TopStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 218, 325
TorqCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 237
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
and embedded FE solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
calculation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
components of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 249
magnet braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
negative-sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
per rotor volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
reluctance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 237
Torque constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Torque harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
torque/rotor volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Torque/speed characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Torque/speed curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 43
of line-start motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Torque/speed graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Total power factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
TPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tph_Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tpma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
tq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Transient loading
see LoadStep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Transients
DC offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Transistor
current in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
on-state resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
switching time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
voltage drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Transistor and diode currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Trapeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
TRE_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
TRE_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Trel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Trel_PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 249
TRFavg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TRFmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TRFrms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Triplex winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
trv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 77, 261
Tshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 237
TSMax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
TSMin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
TSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Turn
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Turn length
see MLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Turn-off time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 250
Turn-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 250
Turns
in series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
in series per phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Turns per coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Turns ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Twf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
TWFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
TwjLeg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TwjThk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TwjWid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
TWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
U and V nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
u_LKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128
u_MSVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
uBd_g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
uBd_m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
UBkDiode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 334
uCFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ufz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
uGd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 317
uGq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 317
ukCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ukdD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
uM12d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
uM12q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
uM23d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
uM23q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
uM31d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
uM31q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
UMPavg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
UMPmax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Unbalanced pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 261
Unbalanced windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 113
in split-phase line-start motor . . . . . . . . . 205
Uncontrolled rectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Underexcited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Unipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
n-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Unipolar 3-phase waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Unipolar connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
blocking diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Uniqueness
of Xd and Eq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Unit converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Unmagnetized magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
UPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
uR_SCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
UseFaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
UseHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
User
see MagType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
wire specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
uTd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
uTd0'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
uVdm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
uVqm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
uwsk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
V-type control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
V_120_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
V_120_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
V_air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 199
V_dcRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
V_hpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
V_Rdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
V_Rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 252
V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
V1d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
V1q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
V1rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 251
V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
V60_Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
V60_Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
VA_CBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
VarDpth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 288
Variable load torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Variable-depth slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Vaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
VC0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
VCBal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
VCdcAv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
VCdcRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
VCdcRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Vct1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vd0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Vd1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 239, 248
VDFEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
VEdges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 314
Veinott, CG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Ventilation ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
VGCoefft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Vht1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
VLL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
VLph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
VLpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Vmain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Voltage
calculated waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
drop in transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
initial, on capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
maximum fundamental from supply . . . 241
supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Voltage limit ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Voltage locus
in phasor diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Voltage PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 18
Voltage waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Vph1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 239
VPWM_ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 18, 152
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
phase control of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Vq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Vq1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 239, 248
Vs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 242
Vs0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Vs1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vs120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vs1Lin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vs2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Vs3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
VtAv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
VTpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Vtrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
VtRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Vz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
VZc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
W_h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
W_Rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
W_Rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 252
W_TH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
wa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Waveform
broken-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
output to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
plotting selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Waveform Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
2-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
3-phase unipolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 41, 150
discontinuities in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
of flux-linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
static design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tooth flux density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
wb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
wBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 310
WCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 265
WConv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 250
WCu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 246, 256
WCu_end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WCu_slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WCu1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
WCu2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
WCuAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
WCuMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
WCuR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 256
Wdg2Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
WdgType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 205
WDiaA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 218
S_Slot = PllSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
S_Slot = PllTooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Weighting factors
for core loss in thermal calculation . . . . 197
Werr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wf0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
WFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 256
WFe_Bwfm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
WFe_T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WFe_Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WFeCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 174, 208, 235, 271
WFeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WFeScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
wh/ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Width
of one magnet block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Windage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 249
Windage loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Winding
auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 245
axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Winding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Winding editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 217
Winding extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Winding factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 227
display in winding editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Winding harmonics
Windings
definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
unbalanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
WinSPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
conductivity of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 102
custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
means of specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
strands of different diameter . . . . . . . . . . 103
Wire diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wire length adjustment
stator (armature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Wire table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Wire2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
WireA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
WireCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
WireCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
WireCR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
WireDens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
WireDia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
WireSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
WireSpec2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
WireSpecA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
wm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
wMag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
WMag_FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WMag_IWH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WMag_PHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WMag_SOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WMagCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
WMagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 235, 264
WmagSlot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Wmb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
wNeck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
WRac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
WRCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 265
WRCanFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WRCanIWH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WRCanPHx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WRCanSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WriteLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 172
WRotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256, 265
WSCan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 265
WSCanFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
WSDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 279
WShaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 264
WshftIWH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WshftSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
WSLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
WstCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
WSWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
WSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
wt_Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_CR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_CR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Cu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Fe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wt_FeR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wt_FeS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_RSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wt_Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wtCuAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
wtCuMain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
WTotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 256
wTstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
WWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 249, 256
WX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 275
WY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 275
Wye connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
of generator load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
WZener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
X-factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
X_EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
X_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 206
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X1end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X1slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X2d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X2end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X2q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
X2slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Xbelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
XBetaM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
XBgap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
XBrT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
XBrTMOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
XBtpk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 358
XC_Bal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
XCd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 220
XCogg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
XCq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 220
XcR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
XcS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Xd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 221
adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Xd'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Xd_FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Xd_FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Xd_pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
XdGap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
XDiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
XDiff_d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
XDiff_q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Xdu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
XET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 206, 217, 329
XFe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
XFringe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
XFSArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Xkm_HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Xks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 136
XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Xl_pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
XLdiff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
XLendt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XLM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
XLoss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
XLry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
XLsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Xm0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 224
Xmb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Xmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Xmq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
XPCslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XPCslotM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XphiBrFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Xq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
adjustment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Xq'' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Xq_FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Xq_FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Xq_pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Xqu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
XQWeb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
XRAux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
XRc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
XRe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Xrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128, 133, 232
Xrm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
XRx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
XRxLSIPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
XRYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
XSatn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Xsigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Xskew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
XSlotMod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 235
Xspan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
XSYoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
XTTarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131, 358
XTw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XWFe_
core loss weighting factors . . . . . . . . . . . 197
XXL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
XXL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Xzz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
YFlux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
YHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
YHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Yoke flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Z
total no. of conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Z1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Z2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Zener diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Zero-sequence current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Zero-sequence emf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 51
zeta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
ZH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
ZH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
ZH3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
ZH4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Zig-zag leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 227
ZLpu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
ZLspec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Zph_base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Bdcmanual

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Bdcmanual

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

1086 384/384 / 2351

PC-BDC User's Manual

is the difference in the armature-reaction

Anda mungkin juga menyukai